EN Safety Handbook 08v2

advertisement
The Safety handbook
Sweden
Kungsbacka +46 (0) 300 67 59 00
Malmö +46 (0) 40 67 15 600
Bankeryd +46 (0) 36 37 04 60
Stockholm +46 (0) 8 544 707 40
Västerås +46 (0) 21 81 44 30
Experience – Systems – Products
Global sales
Australia Sensorplex Pty Ltd +61 (03) 9562 6699
Austria Contra GmbH +43 (0)1 278 25 55
Belgium Jokab Safety AB, Sweden +46 (0) 300 67 59 00
Brazil Jokab Safety Div. of ABG +55 41 3643 1384
Canada NCC Electronics LTD. +1 519 735 1106
China Jokab Safety China +86 21 613 242 77
Czech Republic Contra spol. S R.O. +420 5 43 210 046
Denmark Jokab Safety DK A/S +45 44 34 14 54
France Jokab Safety France SAS +33 810 08 36 20
Germany
Jokab Safety (D) GMBH +49 (0) 7424 95865-0
Jokab Safety (D) GMBH Büro Günzburg +49 (0) 8221 204313 0
Debra GMBH (Cologne) +49 (0) 2234 78898
Ireland Pressure Hydraulics Ltd +353 (0) 59 9143601
Italy Jokab Safety Italia S.R.L +39 039 6880134
Korea Hanlim Auto Co., Ltd. +82 2 2639 8567/8
Netherlands Isolectra B.V. +31 (0) 10 28 55 285
Norway Automasjon og Sikkerhet +47 33 01 52 20
Poland Contra Sp. Z.O.O. +48 33 857 53 44
Portugal Prosistav Lda +351 (0) 234 397 210
Singapore/Malaysia Pics Technologies +65 6744 8018
Slovakia Lucob Spol S.R.O. +421 2 432 921 77
Slovenia Kolektor Synatec D.O.O. +386 5 37 20 677
The Safety handbook
Finland Juha-Elektro OY +358 (0) 10 8328 100
South Africa PK Welding+Robotics LTD +27 31 914 0990
Spain Safework S.L. +34 93 - 308 07 38
Switzerland Mattle Industrieprodukte AG +41 44 938 13 33
Turkey S-Mikron Elektronik Elektrik Sanayi
Taah. Ltd. Şti +90224 443 52 33
United Kingdom Jokab Safety (UK) Ltd +44 (0) 1908 261595
USA/Mexico Jokab Safety North America +1 734 595 6087
For other countries see www.jokabsafety.com
www.jokabsafety.com
Innovations in safety
We develop innovative products
and solutions for machine safety
We make it simple to build safety systems. Developing innovative products and
solutions for machine safety has been our business idea since the company was
founded in Sweden in 1988. Our vision is to become “the best partner for machine
safety”.
Many industries around the world, have discovered how much easier it has become to build protection and safety systems with our components and guidance.
Experience
We have great experience of practical application of safety requirements and standards from both
authorities and production. We represent Sweden in standardisation organisations for machine
safety and we work daily with the practical application of safety requirements in combination with
production requirements.
Systems
We deliver everything from a safety solution to complete safety systems for single machines or
entire production lines. We combine production demands with safety demands for productionfriendly solutions.
Products
We market a complete range of safety products, which makes it easy to build safety systems.
We develop these innovative products continuously. Our extensive program of products, safety
solutions and our long experience in machine safety makes us a safe partner.
Säkerh
mar zitk
ova
et
foton:
dag
Anders
Lindh
och sä
(t v), pro
ke
Dick Ste rhets PLC:n duktionste
kn
rik Str nsson (bako Pluto i fabrik iker på Hä
åh
stens
m)
en
,
komm le (t h) ansva från Allele s nya au
tomati visar centr
er från
ktr
alskåpe
onslö
Jokab rat för system o Team i
sning
Es
Safety
för int t med motor
och op ets arkitektu kilstuna ha
ern ma
sty
r
eratör
terialha rningar
sterm r och projek tillsamman
nte
inalne
s
n från tets genomf med sin ko ring.
Beijer.
llega
örand
Fre
e. Sty
rteknike dn
Pluto
styr
figur:da
g toij
er
opera
törste
n1
Statio
gatew
n 14
ay
Huvu
skåp d-
Pluto
Profib
us
Start/
stopp
nödstop
p
20
Häste
ns
Pluto
inbyg är en säke
gd
rh
så kalla buss som ets-PLC
me
till 32 d all-mast fungerar so d
Alla
andra enheter ka er-system dä m en vänd Pluto-enhe
n an
via säk
a
r
ter
erhets slutas till upp dra en ingångarna kan anvarbusse
om sin heter för att från alla an
n.
a säkerh
fat
etsutg ta beslut
Statio
ångarna
n2
.
l
Statio
frekve
omfor nsmare
PLC
autom
ation
hos
rmina
Plutob
uss
magn
etbryt
are
nödstop
Start/
p Lju
sri
då
stopp
Ljusri
då
Ljusb
om
nödstop
p
nödstop
p
Autom
ation
# 1:2007
www.jokabsafety.com
Introduction
Your partner for machine safety, locally and globally. Our products revolutionise the market. Safety history.
Standards and regulations. This is how you choose safety category. Product overview. Explanations of safety terms.
Pluto Safety PLC
Pluto, Pluto Manager, Gateway, Profibus, DeviceNet, CANopen, Ethernet, Safe Encoder, IDFIX, program examples
Vital and Tina safety systems
Connection examples for Vital, Tina and Tina Duo
Safety relays
1
2
3
RT series, JSB series, Safety timers, Expansion relays, Connection examples
4
Light curtains, Light grids, Light beams
and Scanner
5
Focus, Spot, Look, Bjorn, Focus Wet, Blanking programmer, Connection examples
Stop time measurement and machine diagnosis
Smart, Smart Manager
Sensors/Switches
Eden, JSNY series, Magne, Dalton, Knox
Control devices
3-position device JSHD4, Two-handed control unit Safeball, Foot-operated control device Fox
Emergency stop devices
Inca, Smile, Smile Tina, Lin emergency stop
6
7
8
9
Contacts rails/Bumpers/Safety mats
10
Fencing systems
11
Quick-Guard, Quick-Guard E, SafeCad, Roller doors
Componentlist
12
EC Declaration of Conformity
13
Your partner for machine
safety, locally and globally
Jokab Safety 2008
World-wide we use locally based employees with
global co-operation in machine safety
Production + Safety = Productionfriendly protection solutions
Every day, all over the world, we are working with our customers to find and design production-friendly protection solutions. This usually takes place in conjunction with the people
who are designing production solutions, and those who will
be using the protection. Naturally, one condition is that the
protection shall be practicable. For the protection and the
production to be optimal, both the production equipment and
the protection must also be improved continuously.
Mats Linger and Torgny Olsson founded Jokab Safety AB
in Sweden in 1988, together with Gunnar Widell, who
remained in the company until 2001. In 2002 Jokab
Safety North America was established, by means of a
merger with the North American company NCC electronics, which had been founded in 1987 by Brian
Sukarukoff and Scott Campbell (inset picture).
1:2
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Our products revolutionise
the market
2
Flexibility
3
Programmable
Pluto AS-i
Not programmable
4
Vital
Dynamic "doubled up"
safety signal that tests a
sensor, for example, 200
times per second.
Pluto All-Master
Safety PLC with static and dynamic
safety inputs.
5
Master
Safety relay
Double static inputs that
only test the switches
each time they are used.
6
Slaves
Traditional safety PLC
Master-Slave with static inputs
7
Number of machines/different stops
Our dynamic safety circuits and our comprehensive safety
PLC are probably the most revolutionary ideas that have
happened in the safety field in the control and supervision
of protection, in many respects:
…They save on inputs: a dual safety circuit with one
conductor instead of two. In addition, many protection
devices can be connected to the same input while maintaining the highest level of safety.
…Reliability is better. Our electronic sensors have much
longer lives than mechanical switches
…With the All-Master Safety PLC it is easy to connect and
disconnect machinery from a safety viewpoint. Common
emergency stop circuits and sensors can be created
as soon as the buses are interconnected between our
safety PLCs.
8
We are continuously designing safety systems for difficult
environments and also to create new safety solutions where
practical solutions are missing. New technical improvements
give new possibilities and therefore we continuously develope new products.
9
…They are safer, since the dynamic safety sensors are
checked 200 times per second. Switches on a door can
only be checked each time they are used, for example
once per hour or even once a month.
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
1:3
13
Safety history
Developments of the 70's
Our background in safety started in the seventies when there was a significant
focus on the safety of manually operated presses, the most dangerous machine
in those days. The probability of loosing a finger or hand while working with these
machines was very high. New safety solutions for both safety devices as well as
for the control systems for presses were developed and introduced on both old
and new machines. We were directly involved in this work through the design of
Two-Hand devices, control systems for presses, making safety inspections for the
Health and Safety authorities and writing regulations for safety of these machines.
This work provided an excellent base for our knowledge in machinery safety.
The numbers of accidents involving presses decreased significantly during
these years however there is still room for new ideas to enable safety equipment
become more practical and ergonomic.
We protected people from loosing
fingers or/and hands in dangerous
machines.
Developments of the 80's
During the eighties, industrial robots (Irb’s) started to become commonplace in
manufacturing industry. This meant that workers were outside of the dangerous
areas during production but had at certain times to go inside the machine in order to e.g. adjust a product to the correct position, inspect the production cycle,
troubleshoot and to programme the Irb. New risks were introduced and new
safety methods required. It was for example hard to distinguish whether production machines had stopped safely or simply waiting for the next signal, such as a
sensor giving a start signal while a product was being adjusted into the correct
position. Mistakes in safety system design resulting in serious accidents were
made, such as the omission of safety devices to stop the Irb, unreliable connection of safety devices and unreliable safety inputs on the Irb.
In the mid eighties the standards committee for safety in Industrial Robot Systems EN 775/ISO 775 was started. This was the first international standard for
machine safety. In order to give the correct inputs to the standard, work around
Irb’s was closely studied in order to meet production integrated safety requirements. The introduction of a production oriented safety stop function was made,
using for example, software to stop machines smoothly and then safety relays/
contactors to disconnect the power to the machines actuators after the machine
had stopped. This technique allows easy restart of production after a stop situation by the machine safeguards.
There were a lot of discussions as to whether one could have both safety and
practical requirements in a standard, such as a safe stop function, which allowed
an easy restart of the machine. Three-position enabling devices were also introduced for safety during programming, testing and trouble shooting of Irb’s and
other equipment. In the robot standard the three-position enabling function was
first defined by only allowing for hazardous machinery functions in the mid switch
position. Releasing or pressing the three-position push button in panic leading
to a stop signal.
Three-position enabling devices were
also introduced for safety during programming.
Developments of the 90's
In Europe, during the nineties, the machinery directive was the start of a tremendous increase in co-operation across borders to get European standards for
safety for machinery and safety devices. The experience from different European
countries has led to a wide range of safety standards and this has made work in
safety much easier. With the integration of Europe it is now only necessary for a
safety company such as ourselves to get one approval for our components for all
of Europe instead of one per country.
Developments 2000 Internationally the work on safety has now been intensified within ISO. The
objective is to have the same structure of safety requirements and standards
within ISO as within EN. Jokab Safety is active both internationally and nationally in different standard working groups. The co-operation between countries is
leading to better safety solutions, making it much easier to create safe working
environments around the world.
1:4
www.jokabsafety.com
European standards for safety for
machinery and safety devices.
1
We develop innovative products
2009
2008
Dalton with Eden
2
Knox - safe locking
Inca emergency stop
for concealed mounting
2007
AS-i
Profibus DP
2006
3
DeviceNet
CANopen
Smile emergency stop with
indication
Ethernet
2005
4
HMI
2004
Pluto All-Master safety PLC
2003
Smart for machine diagnostics
5
2002
2001
Vital with dynamic safety circuit
to category 4
6
Non-contact sensor
Eden
2000
Focus light beam protection
1999
7
1998
1997
SafeCad for Quick-Guard
Safeball - ergonomic control device
8
1996
1995
RT series universal relays
Three-position
switch for robots
1994
9
Quick-Guard aluminium
fencing system
1993
1992
10
Smallest safety
relays JSBT5 and
JSBR4
Stop time
measurement
3-position
devices
1991
11
1990
Timer reset and first light beam
12
1989
1988
First safety relay
First steel fencing system
1:5
13
Directives and
Standards
Directives and standards are of great importance for manufacturers of machines and safety components. EU Directives giving
requirements for the minimum level of health and safety are
mandatory for manufacturers to fulfil. In every member country
the Directives are implemented in each countries legislation.
Maskiner som släpps ut på marknaden/tas i drift från och med
den 29 december 2009 skall följa kraven i det nya maskindirektivet 2006/42/EG.
The objectives of the Machinery Directive, 98/37/EC, are to
maintain, increase and equalise the safety level of machines
within the members of the European Community. Based on
this, the free movement of machines/products between the
countries in this market can be achieved. The Machinery
Directive is developed according to “The New Approach”
which is based on the following principles
•T
he directives give the basic health and safety requirements,
which are mandatory.
•D
etailed solutions and technical specifications are found
in harmonised standards.
•S
tandards are voluntary to apply, but products designed
according to the harmonised standards will fulfil the basic
safety requirements in the Machinery Directive.
Examples of standards
The Machinery
Directive
EN ISO 12100-1
EN ISO 12100-2
EN ISO 14121-1
EN ISO 13857
EN 349
EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1
EN 999
Harmonised standards
Harmonised standards give support on how to fulfil the
requirements of the Machinery Directive. The relationship
between the Machinery Directive and the harmonised standards is illustrated by the diagram below.
Within ISO (The International Organization for Standardization) work is also going on in order to harmonise
the safety standards globally in parallel with the European
standardisation work. One consequence of this is that many
existing EN-standards will, when revised, change number.
For example, EN 954-1 will when revised change number to
EN ISO 13849-1. Along with the forthcoming new Machinery
Directive, all harmonised standards will be reviewed and
revised to a greater or lesser extent.
Jokab Safety takes an active part in the working groups
both for the ISO and EN standards.
98/37/EC
A-standard
Giving basic concepts, principles for design, and general aspects that can
be applied to all machinery
B1-standard
B1: Standards on particular safety aspects (e.g. safety distances, surface
temperature, noise)
B2-standard
B2: Standards on safeguards,e.g. two-hand controls, interlocking devices,
pressure sensitive devices, guards
EN ISO 13850
EN1088
EN 60204-1
Dealing with detailed safety requirements for a particular
machine or group of machines
EN ISO 10218-1
EN 692
EN 693
C-standard
1:6
www.jokabsafety.com
The Machinery Directive; for machines and safety components
From the Machinery Directive 98/37/EC
2. For the purposes of this Directive:
(a) ‘machinery’ means:
— an assembly of linked parts or components, at least
one of which moves, with the appropriate actuators,
control and power circuits, etc., joined together for a
specific application, in particular for the processing,
treatment, moving or packaging of a material,
— an assembly of machines which, in order to achieve
the same end, are arranged and controlled so that
they function as an integral whole,
— interchangeable equipment modifying the function of a machine, which is placed on the market for
the purpose of being assembled with a machine or a
series of different machines or with a tractor by the
operator himself in so far as this equipment is not a
spare part or a tool;
The definition of a machine can cover everything from
hand-held portable machines to production lines. There are
exclusions, e.g. machinery for medical use used in direct
contact with patients, means of transport, i.e. vehicles and
their trailers intended solely for transporting passengers and
agricultural and forestry tractors.
1
2
The Machinery Directive is valid also for
3
2. ... ‘safety components’ means a component, provided that it is not interchangeable equipment, which
the manufacturer or his authorised representative
established in the Community places on the market
to fulfil a safety function when in use and the failure
or malfunctioning of which endangers the safety or
health of exposed persons.
4
Safety components are e.g. light curtains, safety relays
and safety PLCs.
5
6
7
8
9
CE-marking and Declaration of conformity
Machines manufactured or put on the market from the
1 January 1995 shall be CE-marked and fulfil the requirements according to the Machinery Directive 98/37/EC. This
is also valid for old machines (manufactured before 1 January
1995) if they are manufactured in a country outside the EEA
and imported to be used in a country in the EEA.
NOTE The point in time when the Machinery Directive was
implemented in each Member Country varies.
Machines have to be accompanied by a Declaration of Conformity (according to 98/37/EC, Annex IIA) that states which
directive and standards the machine fulfils. It also shows if
the product has gone through EC Type Examination.
Safety components have to be accompanied with a Declaration of Conformity (according to 98/37/EC, Annex IIC).
According to the requirements in the Machinery Directive,
safety components should not be CE-marked. But many
safety components fall under the requirements in other
Directives such as the Low Voltage Directive and the EMC
Directive that require CE-marking. This means that a CE-mark
will anyway be found on most safety components.
A new Machinery Directive, 2006/42/EC, will come into
force on 29 December 2009. This Directive is available
at http://ec.europa.eu/enterprise/mechan_equipment/machinery/revdir.htm. Among the new features in the Directive
are full quality assurance as a certification procedure, and
requirements concerning partly completed machinery. Prepare in good time by reading the Directive and seeing how
the changes will affect your company.
www.jokabsafety.com
1:7
10
11
12
13
Requirements for the use of machinery
For a machine to be safe it is not enough that the manufacturer has been fulfilling all valid/necessary requirements.
The user of the machine also has requirements to fulfil. For
the use of machinery there is a Directive, 89/655/EEC
(with amendment 96/63/EC and 2001/45/EC). A new
Machinery Directive, 2006/42/EC, will come into force on
29 December 2009.
About CE-marked machinery the Directive gives the following requirement
From 89/655/EEC (with amendment 96/63/
EC and 2001/45/EC)
1. Without prejudice to Article 3, the employer must
obtain and/or use:
(a) work equipment which, if provided to workers in
the undertaking and/or establishment for the first time
after 31 December 1992, complies with:
(i) the provisions of any relevant Community directive
which is applicable;
(ii) the minimum requirements laid down in Annex I,
to the extent that no other Community directive is
applicable or is so only partially;
This means that when repair/changes are made on the machine it shall still fulfil the requirements of the Machinery Directive. This doesn´t have to mean that a new CE-marking is
required. (Can be required if the changes are extensive)..
“Old” machines
For machines delivered or manufactured in the EEA before
1 January 1995 the following is valid.
(b) work equipment which, if already provided to workers in the undertaking and/or establishment by 31
December 1992, complies with the minimum requirements laid down in Annex I no later than four years
after that date.
(c) without prejudice to point (a) (i), and notwithstanding point (a) (ii) and point (b), specific work equipment
subject to the requirements of point 3 of Annex I,
which, if already provided to workers in the undertaking and/or establishment by 5 December 1998,
complies with the minimum requirements laid down in
Annex I, no later than four years after that date.
"Old" machines
"New" machines
Machine that is put on the
market or put into service
before 1995 in the EEA.
1. Machine that is put on
the market or put into
service after 1/1 1995 in
the EEA.
2. All machines that are
imported to the EEA
irrespective of date of
origin.
CE-marking +
Declaration of
conformity
Council Directive 89/655/EEC
(with amendment 96/63/EC and
2001/45/EC)
concerning the minimum safety and
health requirements for the use of
work equipment by workers at work.
1:8
Possible national legislation on
specific machines
Council Directive 89/655/EEC
(with amendment 96/63/EC
and 2001/45/EC) concerning
the minimum safety and health
requirements for the use of work
equipment by workers at work. N.B!
Not annex 1, instead use applicable
directives.
Low Voltage Directive
2006/95/EC
EMC-directive 2004/108/EC
The Machinery Directive
98/37/EC
www.jokabsafety.com
Possibly
more
directives
Annex 1 contains minimum requirements for health and
safety. There can also be additional national specific requirements for certain machines. NB The point in time when
the Machinery Directive was implemented in each Member
Country varies. Therefore it is necessary to check with the
national authorities in ones own country, to find out what is
considered as “old” and respectively “new” machines.
used. It is the responsibility of the manufacturer to select a
suitable method.
Risk assessment – an important tool both
when constructing a new machine and
when assessing risks on older machines
To fullfil the requirements from Directive 89/655/EEC
(concerning the minimum safety and health requirements for the use of work equipment by workers at
work) risk assessment have to be made.
A well thought-out risk assessment supports manufacturers/users of machines to develop production friendly
safety solutions. One result of this is that the safety components will not be a hindrance. This minimizes the risk of
the safety system being defeated.
Machines in use
Risk assessment must be carried out on all machines that
are in use; CE-marked as well as not CE-marked.
Documentation of risk assessment
The risk assessment shall be documented. In the assessment the actual risks shall be analysed as well as the level
of seriousness.
New machines
The following requirement is given by the Machinery Directive
1
2
3
4
The manufacturer is under an obligation to assess the
hazards in order to identify all of those which apply to
his machine; he must then design and construct it taking account of his assessment.
5
The standard EN ISO 14121-1 gives guidance on the information required to allow risk assessment to be carried out.
The standard does not point out a specific method to be
6
7
8
9
Protection or warning?
How is it possible to choose safety measures that are
production friendly and in every way well balanced? The
Machinery Directive gives an order of priority for the choice
of appropriate methods to remove the risks. Here it is further
developed in a five step method.
Prioritize safety measures according to the five step
method
1. Eliminate or reduce risks by design and construction
2. Move the work tasks outside the risk area
3. Use guards/safety devices
4. Develop safe working routines/information/education
5. Use warnings as pictograms, light, sound etc.
The further from middle of the circle, the greater the responsibility for the safety is put onto the user of the machine. If full
protection is not effectively achieved in one step, one has to
go to the next step and find complementary measures.
What is possible is dependant on the need for accessibility,
the seriousness of the risk, appropiate safety measures etc.
www.jokabsafety.com
10
1
2
3
4
11
5
12
1:9
13
Example on prioritizing according to the 5-step-method
Priority
Example of hazard and safety measure taken
1. Make machine safe by Hazard: design and construction
Safety
measure:
2. Move the work tasks Hazard: outside the risk area Safety
measure:
Cuts and wounds from sharp edges and corners on machinery Round off sharp edges and corners.
Crushing of fingers from machine movements during inspection of the production inside the risk area
Installation of a camera.
3. Use guard/safety Hazard:
devices
Safety
measure:
Crushing injuries because of unintended start during
loading of work pieces in a mechanical press
4. Safe working Hazard: routines/information
Safety
measure:
Crushing injuries because the machine can tip during
installation and normal use.
5. Warnings Install a light curtain to detect operator and provide safe stop of the machinery.
Make instructions on how the machine is to be installed to avoid the risks. This can include requirements on the type of fastening, ground, screw retention etc.
Hazard: Burns because of hot surfaces in reach
Safety
measure: Warning signs
The possibilities will increase to achieve a well thought-through safety system if each risk is handled
according to the described prioritizing.
Combine the five step method with production friendly thinking.
This can give you e.g.
• fast and easy restart of machines after a stop from a safety device
• enough space to safely program a robot
• places outside the risk area to observe the production
• electrically interlocked doors, instead of guards attached with screws, to be able to take the
necessary measures for removing production disturbances
• a safety system that is practical for all types of work tasks, even when removing production
disturbances
Jokab Safety has extensive experience within directives and standards
We have long experience of the practical application of directives and standards from both authorities
and production. We represent Sweden in standardization groups within machine safety and we work daily
with the practical application of safety demands in conjuction with production demands.
1:10
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Examples of regularly used EN/ISO standards
EN ISO 12100-1
EN ISO 12100-2
Safety of machinery – Basic concepts,
general principles for design –
Part 1: Basic terminology, methodology
Part 2: Technical principles
EN ISO 13857
Safety of machinery - Safety distances to This standard establishes values for safety distances to prevent danger zones
prevent hazard zones being reached by
being reached by the upper limbs. The distances apply when adequate safety
upper and lower limbs
can be achieved by distances alone.
EN 349
(ISO 13854)
Safety of machinery – Minimum gaps
to avoid crushing of parts of the human
body
The object of this standard is to enable the user (e.g. standard makers, designers of machinery) to avoid hazards from crushing zones. It specifies minimum
gaps relative to parts of the human body and is applicable when adequate
safety can be achieved by this method.
EN ISO 13850
Safety of machinery – Emergency stop
– Principles for design
This standard specifies design principles for emergency stop equipment for
machinery. No account is taken of the nature of the energy source.
EN 574
Safety of machinery – Two-hand control
devices – Functional aspects – Principles for design
This standard specifies the safety requirements of a two-hand control device
and its logic unit. The standard describes the main characteristics of two-hand
control devices for the achievement of safety and sets out combinations of
functional characteristics for three types.
EN 953
Safety of machinery – Guards – General
requirements for the design and construction of fixed and movable guards
This standard specifies general requirements for the design and construction
of guards provided primarily to protect persons from mechanical hazards.
EN ISO 13849-1
(replaces EN 954-1)
Safety of machinery – Safety related
parts of control systems –
Part 1: General principles for design
This standard provides safety requirements and guidance on the principles
for the design (see 3.11 of EN 292-1:1991) of safety-related parts of control
systems. For these parts it specifies categories and describes the characteristics of their safety functions. This includes programmable systems for all
machinery and for related protective devices. It applies to all safety-related
parts of control systems, regardless of the type of energy used, e.g. electrical,
hydraulic, pneumatic, mechanical. It does not specify which safety functions
and which categories shall be used in a particular case.
EN ISO 13849-2
Safety of machinery. Safety-related parts
of control systems. Validation
Part 1: This standard defines basic terminology and methodology used in
achieving safety of machinery. The provisions stated in this standard are
intended for the designer.
Part 2: This standard defines technical principles to help designers in
achieving safety in the design of machinery.
This standard specifies the procedures and conditions to be followed for the
validation by analysis and testing of:
• the safety functions provided, and
• the category achieved of the safety-related parts of the control system in compliance with EN 954-1 (ISO 13849-1), using the design
rationale provided by the designer.
EN 62061
Safety of machinery. Functional safety of The standard defines the safety requirements and guiding principles for the
safety-related electrical, electronic and
design of safety-related electrical/electronic/programmable parts of a control
programmable electronic control systems system.
EN 999 (will be replaced by
EN ISO 13855)
Safety of machinery. The positioning
of protective equipment in respect of
approach speeds of parts of the human
bod
This standard provides parameters based on values for hand/arm and approach
speeds and the methodology to determine the minimum distances from specific
sensing or actuating devices of protective equipment to a danger zone.
EN 1088
and EN 1088/A1
Safety of machinery. Interlocking devices
associated with guards. Principles for
design and selection
This standard specifies principles for the design and selection - independent of the nature of the energy source - of interlocking devices associated
with guards. It also provides requirements specifically intended for electrical
interlocking devices. The standard covers the parts of guards which actuate
interlocking devices.
EN 60204-1
Safety of machinery. Electrical equipment This part of IEC 60204 applies to the application of electrical and electronic
of machines. General requirements
equipment and systems to machines not portable by hand while working,
including a group of machines working together in a co-ordinated manner
but excluding higher level systems aspects (i.e. communications between
systems).
www.jokabsafety.com
1:11
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
New standards for safety-related
parts of control systems
Since 10 November 2006 the revised standard EN 954-1
has been in force. This is called EN ISO 13849-1. During a
transition period extending until 1 November 2009 both
standards will be valid. It is however worth remembering that
this only applies within the EU – at the international level (ISO
level) the transition period does not apply – ISO 13849-1
has completely replaced EN 954-1.
The IEC has also produced a standard for safety in control
systems, IEC 62061 Safety of machinery – Functional safety
of safety-related electrical, electronic and programmable
electronic control systems, in force since 23 May 2005.
When should each standard be applied?
•EN ISO 13849-1 can be applied to all protective functions
(mechanical, electrical, hydraulic and pneumatic) up to the
highest level, where PL=e.
•EN 62061 can be used up to the highest level, SIL 3.
This applies to protective functions that are electrical,
electronic and programmable. Where all or part of the protective functions are mechanical, hydraulic or pneumatic,
EN ISO 13849-1 should be applied.
There has been a more general standard for functional safety
in existance for several years, EN 61508 (del 1-7) Functional
safety of safety-critical electrical, electronic and programmable electronic control systems.
In what situations should either IEC 62061 or IEC
61508 be used?
Example: Designers of safety PLCs should use EN 61508;
those who integrate a safety PLC into a machine control
system and prepare applications program software can use
EN 62061.
Applying EN ISO 13849-1.
Risk graph for determining required PLr for safety function.
Key
1The starting point for evaluating the contribution of the
protective function to risk reduction.
L A low contribution to risk reduction
H A high contribution to risk reduction
PLrThe required performance level
1:12
Risk parameters
SSeriousness of the injury
S1Light (usually temporary) injury
S2Severe (usually permanent) injury, including fatality
FFrequency and/or exposure time to the source of
risk
F1Seldom or less often and/or a brief exposure time
F2Frequent or continuous and/or a long exposure time
PPossibility to avoid or limit injury
P1Possible under special conditions
P2Hardly possible
www.jokabsafety.com
In the case of a risk assessment of a machine or type of
machine, one determines which protective measures are
necessary in order to ensure that the safety of the machinery
will agree with the Machinery Directive and the standards
that are to be applied. In respect of the safety measures that
involve the control systems of machines, one must decide
"how safe" the safety must be - the higher the risk the more
reliability is demanded of the safety function. In EN 954-1
categories are selected – B, 1, 2, 3 or 4 for these parts.
Here it is not always possible (nor desirable) to be able
to assign a category to the entire safety function. With the
method in EN ISO 13849-1 one selects instead a required
Perfomance Level (PLr) and this applies to the entire safety
function. The choice of required Perfomance Level (PLr)
takes place in a similar way to the selection of a category,
see the risk graph.
How do you achieve the performance level (PLr) that is determined by the risk graph?
There are a number of parameters to take into account when designing a certain protection function. These are as follows:
• MTTFd for each individual component – Mean Time To Failure, dangerous
• DC, Diagnostic Coverage – to what extent dangerous faults are detected
• the structure – which categories are to be used for the parts in their protective functions
• CCF, Common Cause Failure – measures that will be relevant when working with some form of redundancy (for
categories 2,3 and 4)
• how the function acts in a fault condition – also given by the selected category
• systematic fault – measures to avoid these in the design
The Performance Level (PL) is expressed as the Probability of Dangerous Failure Per Hour within certain ranges.
Performance Level, PL
PFHD
a
10-5 ≥ till <10-4
b
3x10-6 ≥ to <10-5
c
10-6 ≥ to <3x10-6
d
10-7 ≥ to <10-6
e
10-8 ≥ to <10-7
The standard gives the designer several choices for
achieving a certain PL. The following illustration shows
how this is possible, depending on which levels the parameters achieve.
1
2
3
4
5
6
The values of MTTFd, DC and the categories of our products will be given to you when you contact us. In some
cases we can state a PL straight away for a protective
function or part of a protective function.
7
8
9
10
11
Förklaring
PL prestandanivå
1 MTTFd för varje kanal = låg (kort tid)
2 MTTFd för varje kanal = medel (medellång tid)
3 MTTFd för varje kanal = hög (lång tid)
www.jokabsafety.com
12
1:13
13
Simplified assessment of performance level
(PL)
A safety function most often consists of the following
parts
•Input – light beam, interlocked gate, etc.
•Logic – monitoring of the input, control and supervision
of components for switching off energy
•Output – switches, valves, etc. for switching off energy
A safety function can be said to consist of N parts.
One way of verifying that the PL has been achieved by using the risk graph, see the illustration on page 1:10, is to
calculate all the parameters (MTTFd, DCavg, etc.). If on the
other hand the performance levels (PL) of the three parts
(input, logic and output)of the safety function are known,
the estimation of achieved PL becomes much simpler.
PLlow
Nlow
→
PL
a
>3
→
None, not permitted
≤3
→
a
>2
→
a
≤2
→
b
>2
→
b
≤2
→
c
>3
→
c
≤3
→
d
>3
→
d
≤3
→
e
b
c
d
e
NOTE The calculated values in the table are based on the centre
point of each interval for the respective PL.
NOTE The calculated values in the table are based on the
centre point of each interval for the respective PL.
The method is as follows:
1. Identify the part of the safety function that has the lowest
PL; this will be PLlow
2. Identify the number of Nlow ≤ N in the safety function that
have PLlow
3. Find the achieved PL in the table.
As an example - a common solution - consider an interlocked
gate (safety interlock), a safety relay and two monitored
contactors with positive output contacts.
Example:
Safety interlock
MTTFd = 100 years
Category 1
→ PL = c
Safety relay
MTTFd = 600 years
DC = 99.9%
Category 4
→ PL = e
Two positive output monitored contactors
MTTFd = 35 years
DC = 99.9%
Category 4
→ PL = e
PLlow is PL = c and Nlow is 1. With the aid of the table one can see that PL for the entire safety function
will be PL = c.
The safety interlock is inherently in category 1 and can never be more than this even if both its contacts
are used to obtain short-circuit supervision of a connaction to the safety relay.
Designers of safety systems can use this simple method. Contact us so that we can give you the performance levels (PL) of our products, and also guide you as to how the performance levels (PL) are to be
calculated for the components that will be connected in order to remove the energy to moving parts.
1:14
www.jokabsafety.com
Applying EN 62061
If one chooses to design a safety function in accordance with EN 62061, the level of reliability is expressed as the
Safety Integrity Level, SIL. There are a total of 4 levels, but in the EN 62061 standard SIL 3 is the highest level. SIL also
(similar to the Performance Level PL), is expressed as the Probability of Dangerous Failure Per Hour.
Safety Integrity Level, SIL
Probability of Dangerous Failure per Hour (PFHD)
3
≥10-8 to <10-7
2
≥10-7 to <10-6
1
≥10-6 to <10-5
1
2
3
There is a method in EN 62061 for assigning the Safety Integrity Level.
Severity (Se)
4
Class (Cl)
3-4
5-7
8-10
11-13
14-15
SIL2
SIL2
SIL2
SIL3
SIL3
(OM)
SIL1
SIL2
SIL3
(OM)
SIL1
SIL2
(OM)
SIL1
3
2
1
4
5
OM = Other Measures
The seriousness of injury that can occur is defined at one of
four levels. Class is the addition of the values of frequency
(Fr, stated as a value between 1 and 5, where 5 represents
the highest frequency), probability that a dangerous event
will occur (Pr, stated as a value between 1 and 5, where
5 represents the highest proability) and the possibility
of avoiding or limiting injury (Av, sated as a value of 1, 3
or 5, where 5 represents the least chance of avoiding or
limiting an injury).
The safety function that is to be designed must at least
fulfil the SIL that has been assigned to it in the analysis.
The safety function consists of a number of sub-elements.
Example: a door is interlocked by a non-contact sensor
which is in turn monitored by a Pluto safety PLC, with outputs that break the power to two supervised contactors.
The sensor is sub-element 1, Pluto is sub-element 2 and
the two supervised contactors are sub-element 3. If in the
analysis it has been established that SIL2 shall be used,
every individual sub-element in the safety function must
fulfil the SIL2 requirements. The safety function must then
in its entirety fulfil the SIL2 requirements.
Definition of protective safety in accordance with
EN 62061
"Function of a machine whose failure can result in an immediate increase of the risk(s)"
If the SIL requirements are not fulfilled in any of the sub-elements or by the safety function in its entirety, there must be
a re-design.
You will get the PFHD values of our products when you
contact us.
Finally
This is just a brief introduction to the EN ISO 13849-1 and
EN 62061 standards. You are welcome to contact us so
that we can prepare suitable training and guide you in how
to apply the standards to our products.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
1:15
13
This is how you
choose the safety
category
”A fault in the control circuit logic, or failure of or damage to the control circuit must
not lead to dangerous situations”. This is the declaration of the EU’s Machinery
Directive.
EN 954-1 is valid in parallel with EN ISO 13849-1 during a transition period, but
terminates on 1 November 2009 to be replaced completely by EN ISO 13849-1.
During the transition period, it is possible to choose which of the two standards to
apply. A further standard that can be applied to safety-related parts is EN 62061.
Information concerning these standards can be found on the previous pages.
The significance of this statement is that a fault such as a jammed
relay, a short circuit in a transistor or a short circuit between two
conductors should and must not result in the safety function failing,
with the consequent risk of personal injuries.
Please note, “a fault” means that the system is only expected
to handle one fault at a time. Two components failing at the same
time is not regarded as likely as long as they cannot be made to
fail by an external influence.
Methods for increased safety
In order to increase the reliability of a safety circuit, the following
methods are usually used:
• Well-tried safety components and safety principles
• Redundancy/Duplication
• Supervision
The European standard EN 954-1
EN 954-1 is a standard specifically relating to safety-related parts
of control systems. The standard has a system of categories, based
on the above mentioned methods, which increases the reliability
of a safety function.
Category B
• Basic requirement
• Correctly rated components
• Circuits handling earth faults
Choice of category
It is above all a question of the technique available. Gate operation
equipment can for example be fitted with a monitored interlocking
switch (category 1) or a dynamic sensor (category 4). However,
interlocking circuits with relays and transistors, etc. normally require
solutions in categories 2 – 4 in order to achieve a higher safety
level than for standard control circuits.
Appendix B to EN954-1 shows an example of how a category
is chosen. The example gives some guidance but has its limitations. The safety category is chosen based on the safety risk of
the machinery. The risk is estimated based on the parameters S,
F and P.
S Severity of injury
S1 Slight (normally reversible) injury
S2 Serious (normally irreversible) injury including death
F Frequency and /or exposure time to the hazard
F1 Seldom to quite often and/or the exposure time is short
F2 Frequent to continuous and/or the exposure time is long
P Possibility of avoiding the hazard
P1 Possible under specific conditions
P2 Scarcely possible
Category
Category 1
• All conditions of B apply
• Well-tried safety components and safety principles
• Components with a greater reliability.
Category 2
• All conditions of B apply
• Individual supervised components
• The safety function may fail
• The loss of the safety function is detected by monitoring
Category 3 and 4
• All conditions of B apply
• The safety function is always retained during a failure
•
The difference between category 3 and 4 is that certain
types of fault are not detected in category 3.
Fig. 1 Method for selecting a safety category for safetyrelated parts of control system. Annex B (informative) of
standard EN 954-1.
•
Possible category which can require additional measures.
•
Recommended category according to this method.
Overdimensioned measure according to this method.
1:16
www.jokabsafety.com
By taking the three parameters S, F and P into account as
shown in the drawing (figure 1), a recommended control system
category can be obtained according to this method. However,
the problem with this table is that it does not give a clear-cut
answer but several alternatives. For example, an automatic
production plant with estimated risk factors of S2 (serious
injuries), F1 (seldom to quite often), P2 (scarcely possible to
avoid an accident) comes under the categories 1 – 4 although
categories 2 and 3 would be the preferred choice as these
are marked with two black filled rings. A higher category can
always be chosen and category 1 may also be chosen if the
system´s intended behaviour is maintained. A justification for
the deviation should also be given.
The fact that categories 1 and 4 are combined in the same
safety circuit is due to the standard not specifying a strict
hierarchical safety order. When comparing categories 2 – 4,
category 4 is normally the safest. However, when comparing
category 1 with categories 2, 3 and 4, this is not always a
matter of course.
A mechanical switch does not give a safe function!
When it comes to mechanically operated interlocked switches,
it has long been accepted a Category 1 switch is adequate for
many installations, which is also supported by several standards.
However some companies have now re-evaluated this and have
instead started to demand two mechanical switches or noncontact switches/sensors, where they previously accepted
single mechanical switches. Many reported incidents form the
background to this. The requirements for switches to provide
safe functioning are that they are mounted correctly and that
their positions do not change during their life-cycle, in other
words, ideal conditions. In many installations the location of
hatches or doors changes over time. This has led to a switch not
giving a stopping signal when an interlocked gate has opened.
The reasons for this are many, but they can be summarized in
mechanical deterioration or physical damage to a door/hatch.
In turn this has led to an interlocked switch being affected by
higher stress than the switch manufacturer’s specifications. To
avoid this type of malfunction it is more appropriate to use noncontact switches/sensors because mechanical deterioration
does not affect the safety function, i.e. the stop signal is given
directly if the position is wrong.
A non-contact switch/sensor does not have a guided function
and is designed to fulfill the requirements in another way. The
requirements are fulfilled either with dynamic sensors where
Door 1
Door 2
Door 3
Dynamic sensors
the safety signal is monitored all the time and a fault directly
leads to a stop signal or with a magnetic switch which has two
independent contact elements which are monitored every time
a gate opens. From the user's perspective the dynamic function
is preferable because several sensors can be connected to
a single safety module and still achieve category 4. Also the
sensor’s safety function is monitored without having to open
a gate. For a magnetic switch the requirements for category 4
are only fulfilled if one switch per monitoring unit is used and
if the gate is opened regularly.
Since the standard EN 954-1 was written, development has
progressed and the costs to fulfill category 4 have dropped
dramatically. Generally mechanical switches are replaced with
non-contact sensors to increase the reliability of production
equipment. The same goes for the safety side. With electronic
non-contact switches, with a transmitter and a receiver, one
avoids the problems of deterioration and excessive stress
which harm the sensor. For that kind of sensor dynamic
monitoring is required to enable a safe function. This means
that its function is constantly being monitored, hundred of
times per second. The reaction time for a safe stop will then
be the same during a malfunction as during the activation of a
stop (e.g. a gate opening). The monitoring frequency will also
be astronomical compared to that of mechanical switches
and magnetic switches, which are only monitored every time
they are used. In the new EN ISO 13849-1, which will replace
954-1, probability calculations are used together with different
category levels to compare different “performance levels”. Even
when using EN ISO 13849-1 it can be so that one achieves
reasonably high theoretical reliability with an electromechanical
switch, although this presumes correct installation, proper
use and otherwise ideal conditions. A non-contact switch
instead provides high levels of both theoretical and practical
reliability.
Our conclusion, use dynamic signals!
Our conclusion is that today it is more cost effective, safer and
more reliable to work with dynamic signals to achieve category
4 for sensors and monitoring units. In that case it is also
possible to fulfill the Machinery Directive, 1.2.7. requirement: “A fault in the control circuit logic, or failure of or damage to
the control circuit, must not lead to dangerous situations”.
Also one does not have to discuss whether the correct safety
category has been chosen!
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
*Dynamic monitoring,
Vital/Pluto
*Static monitoring,
e.g. RT6
Interlocked switch
*
10
Door 1
*
11
Up to 30 doors (Eden sensors) can be connected to the dynamic
monitoring maintaining category 4.
www.jokabsafety.com
12
Maximum 1 door (2 interlocked switches) can
be connected to the static monitoring for category 4 to be maintained for the entire system.
1:17
13
We train you on safety
requirements
- enhance your knowledge!
What requirements are there today?
With the incorporation of Sweden into the EU there are
many new standards and regulations with which to comply.
There have also been changes and revisions of existing
standards and directives.
As a business and designer one is obliged to know about
and to follow all the regulations. But it can be difficult for
each individual company to keep track of all the new regulations and how they should be applied.
Your local Jokab Safety sales office can help you with
training and analysis during a build-up phase or as a
continuous consulting assignment.
Our course trainers have a extensive experience in machine safety
A distinguishing feature of all the engineers at Jokab Safety is that they work daily with practical applications of standards
and regulations. This is true for everything from safety components for individual machines to entire deliveries of safety
systems for larger production lines. Within the company there is also a very good knowledge of machine control and
production. We are also represented in standardisation groups which decide on European and International standards
concerning machine safety. Because Jokab Safety is represented globally, we have the knowledge of safety requirements
in different countries.
Training in machine safety
Are you building machines for sale or for your own use? Are you a user of machines? Are you working with automation
of production plants or do you make technical evaluations of machines prior to purchase?
Regardless of the purpose, there is a need for knowledge concerning what requirements and regulations exist in
respect of machine safety, and how they should be applied.
We offer company-adapted training in the following fields:
1:18
•
•
•
•
Product liability and its consequences
CE-labelling
The Machine Directive and how to apply it
Choice of certification procedure with examination
of the parts which are required in order to be able to CE-label a machine
•
•
•
•
•
Machine safety analysis; method and cases
Choice of safety measures/safety devices
Requirements for manufacturer´s technical documentation
Requirements for manuals
Requirements for ”old machines”
•
Harmonised standards and the applications of these, e.g.
- EN ISO 13849-1/-2
- EN ISO 12100-1/-2
- EN 60204-1
- EN ISO 13850
- EN ISO 13857, EN 999 (EN ISO 13855)
• Specific interpretation cases, e.g. re-construction of machines
• Forthcoming changes in the Machine Directive
Company-adapted training in machine safety
Contact your local sales office with questions and
your current training needs. Together with you,
we will customize the training to your specific
company requirements.
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Training in risk analysis
We regularly have training courses in our offices. One of these covers risk analysis and how to choose production
adapted measures.
2
A course in risk analysis contains the following:
• Risk analysis - from theory to practice
• What durability towards errors shall the safety system
have?
• Standard EN ISO 13849-1/-2
• Safety distances for fencing systems and safety
components - how do you choose?
• Cases, practice and briefing of risk analysis and
choice of actions
Training courses at local sales office
Contact your local sales office with questions and
your current training needs. Together with you, we
will customize the training to your specific company
requirements.
3
4
Product training
5
Our unique Pluto Safety PLC gives new and great possibilites to build-up a cost effective and flexible safety
system. With this also comes the demands of higher knowledge. For you as a customer to be able to quickly get
started using Pluto in the most effective way and to learn about its possibilities, we regularly offer trainings at our
local sales offices. In the training course cost is included a Pluto, software for Pluto and full documentation. We
also offer training on the other Jokab Safety products such as the Vital solution, safety relays and light beams/
curtains.
6
Training - Pluto and other Jokab Safety products
Contact your local sales office with questions and
your current training needs. Together with you, we
will customize the training to your specific company
requirements.
7
8
Consulting
Do you need assistance in CE-marking a machine? Do you want a third party to carry out a risk analysis on a machine
line? Do you have the need of a partner to examine how various regulations´ effect the safety of your machines?
10
We can offer assistance and support in both short and longer
assignments. Here are a few examples of what we can offer you:
• Risk analysis with proposal of measures. We do this together with the customer and it is often done as a pilot-project so that the company afterwards themselves can carry out analysis.
• Guide the customer business through a CE-marking of machine/plant.
• Write/review technical documentation/manuals
• Interpret standards and regulations
• Stopping time measurement - We can measure the stopping time on your machines with our Stopping time and motion analyser tool. Knowledge of the stopping time is a prerequisite to be able to determine the correct safety distance. EN 999 sets the requirements.
• Programming of Pluto Safety-PLC.
www.jokabsafety.com
9
Stopping time measurement is
required in order to be able to determine the correct safety distance.
Consulting - Contact us
Come to us with your needs and we
will plan with you a suitable project
programme. You can also contact us
with short questions which we can solve
directly over the phone or via e-mail.
1:19
11
12
13
Light beams/light
curtains/scanner
Safety circuit according to
Category 4 EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1
–Focus and Spot
A complete range of light beams and light curtains.
Dynamic circuits
–Vital, Pluto and Tina adaptation
Dynamic safety circuits for multiple sensors in accordance
with the highest safety category. Tina converts volt free
contacts to dynamics safety signals, etc.
.
System
• Industrial robots for different sectors
• Level crossings with barriers
Safety relays
–RT-series, JSB-series, safety ­timers
and expansions relays
• Mechanical/Hydraulic presses
• Packaging machinery
The smallest and most flexible safety relays on the
market.
1:20
Sensors/switches
E-stops
–Eden, Magne and JSNY-series
–Smile series and JSNY10
Dynamic non-contact sensors, interlocking devices and
magnetic switches.
Unique e-stop devices that can work with dynamic dual
signals.
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Safety PLC
–Pluto
2
A unique ”All Master” safety PLC for simple design of
safety systems.
Profibus DP
AS-i
DeviceNet
CANopen
Stopping time and
Machine diagnosis tool
3
–Smart
Ethernet
Smart stop analyser. Stop time and machine diagnosis
tool.
HMI
4
5
Control devices
–Safeball, JSHD4
and Fox
Training & consulting
6
Ergonomic three-position devices,
two-hand control devices and foot
operated switches.
• Machine safety & risk analysis
• Standards
7
• Protection systems
• Programming
• Product training
8
9
10
Fencing system/SafeCAD/
Roller door
–Quick-Guard and SafeCad
A stable and flexible fencing system which is easy to
construct
11
Rails/bumpers/mats
Safety contact rails, bumpers and mats.
www.jokabsafety.com
12
1:21
13
explanation of safety terminologY
Supervised Reset
The input must both be closed and opened before the
outputs of the safety relay are activated. Using this
method both the reset device and the interconnecting
cable are supervised.
Contact Strip/Mat
Contact Strips/Mats can be supervised by a true two
input channel safety relay. A stop signal being generated
when both inputs are connected (short­circuited) to
each other.
Test
The input is used to supervise contactors and valves,
and must be closed before the safety relay can be
reset. It can also be used as a simple form of reset only
requiring a contact closure. In this case however, the
risk of short circuit must be prevented and the reset
device supervised separately.
Brake Strip
When a Brake Strip is squeezed the contacts within
the strip are forced open and provides a stop signal via
a suitable safety relay.
Time Reset
This is used to prevent uninten­tional reset when
somebody is in the risk area. Within a guaranteed
maximum time two or more reset push buttons must be
activated. The PB’s must be placed in such physical
positions so that the users can overview the total
danger area. The Time Reset function can be achieved
using a JSHT1 in combination with a safety relay
incorporating a supervised reset.
Delayed Safety Stop
Where it is permissable to allow a machine to stop
before dis­connection of power, it is neces­sary to
achieve a Delayed Safety Stop. The delay period being
the time between the initiation of the stop signal and the
opening of the safety contacts. The time delay must be
designed in such a way that it will not increase in time
in the case of a component failure. This type of delay
is permitted, dependant upon risk asses­sment, for both
emer­gency stops and other safety devices.
Bypass Connection
This is sometimes permissible where it is required to,
e.g., allow material transport into a dangerous area. The
Bypass Connection must be of the same safety level as
the safety device being bypassed.
Time Bypass Connection
This is the provision of a guaran­teed maximum time
for the trans­portation of material or passing with an
enabling device.
Inching
Inching requires safety outputs to be closed for a
maximum period of time allowing the machine to
move only a short distance each time the inching
control is activated. The time must be designed so
that the specified time will not increase in the case of
component failure.
Three Position Enabling/Hold to Run Device
These devices are used during trouble shooting or
testing of machines. If the device push button is pressed
into its bottom position or released completely a safe
duplicated stop signal is given. JOKAB SAFETY´s
Three Position Devices have duplicated switches and
are supervised by a true two input channel safety relay.
1:22
Interlocked Hatch
When a Interlocked Hatch is opened an interlock
device gives a stop signal via a safety relay. If the hatch
cannot be entered by a human body automatic reset
can be allowed.
Interlocked Gate
When a Interlocked Gate is opened an interlock device
gives a stop signal via a safety relay. If the gate can
be passed by a human body a safety relay with a
supervised reset should be used.
Foot Pedal
A safety foot operated switch is used when the operator
has to have both hands free. Safety relays can be
used to supervise Foot Pedals to ensure both correct
operation and to ensure shortcircuits in connecting
cables do not cause unintentional start signals.
Two Hand Control
This requires the use of a safety relay to supervise
that the two start push buttons are pressed within 0.5
sec of each other before a start signal is allowed. The
highest safety level requires two contacts in each PB,
a duplicated stop function being given even if only one
PB is released (see JSBR4). Short­circuits between
connecting wires are detected automatically. In the
lower safety level other safety relays can be used.
Emergency Stop
When an Emergency Stop push button is activated
a stop signal is given via a safety relay. Reset of the
Emergency Stop device should not by itself lead to a
start signal being given.
Machine I/O
All types of machines have a need to interface to
emergency stops, contactors and other types of safety
devices. Approved safety relays make this easy to
perform.
True Two Channel
True Two Channel requires two inputs with different
voltages to be closed before the safety relay can be
activated. A stop signal is given even if only one input
is opened or a short circuit is detected across the
inputs.
www.jokabsafety.com
Pluto Safety PLC
Including dynamic signals, the new safety principle.
Pluto/Gateway/Encoder
AS-i
Profibus DP
DeviceNet
CANopen
Ethernet
20 I/O
12 I/O
(A/D)
46 I/O
HMI
Pluto Manager
www.jokabsafety.com
+ 31 AS-i safety nodes
Contents
Page
1
Why you should use the Pluto safety PLC _______________________________2:2
Pluto with and without a databus ______________________________________2:4
s)/OVERVIEW _________________________________________________________2:6
s0LUTO4ECHNICALDATA ____________________________________________________2:8
s0LUTOACCESSORIES____________________________________________________ 2:10
s0LUTOCERTIlCATION ____________________________________________________ 2:11
2
3
Pluto Manager ____________________________________________________ 2:12
Pluto Gateway _____________________________________________________
s0ROlBUS __________________________________________________________
s$EVICENET _________________________________________________________
s#!.OPEN _________________________________________________________
s%THERNET __________________________________________________________
2:14
2:16
2:18
2:20
2:22
4
5
Safe encoder ______________________________________________________ 2:24
Example – Robot cell with Pluto _____________________________________ 2:28
6
Electrical connections ______________________________________________ 2:29
Pluto settings _____________________________________________________ 2:30
7
PLC code Pluto ____________________________________________________ 2:32
8
9
10
11
12
Descriptions and examples in this book show how the products work and can be used. This does not mean that they can meet the requirements for
all types of machines and processes. The purchaser/user is responsible for ensuring that the product is installed and used in accordance with the
applicable regulations and standards. We reserve the right to make changes in products and product sheets without previous notice. For the latest
updates, refer to www.jokabsafety.com. 2008.
www.jokabsafety.com
2:1
13
Approval:
Why you should
have Pluto safety
PLC's.
EN 954-1, Category 4
EN 61496-1, Type 4
%.3),
– for simplifying the design of and changes to safety systems!
Pluto is an ”All-Master” safety PLC concept, that simplifies
the design of safety systems and achieves the highest safety
LEVELCATEGORYACCORDINGTO%.%.)3/
AND3),ACCORDINGTO)%#%.4HEKEYDIFFERENCE
between Pluto and conventional safety PLC´s is that there
is no "Master-Slave" relationship between the control units
connected to the safety bus. Each Pluto is a 'Master' unit and
can see the other Plutos' inputs and outputs, and can thereby
make decisions about its own safety environment.
This concept enables simple communication, programming
and changes to the safety system. With the use of a 'Gateway'
device, a Pluto can communicate with other bus systems
and thereby form part of a larger network. Gateway units are
available for several different bus systems, such as Profibus,
#AN/PEN$EVICE.ETAND%THERNET7ITHA0LUTO!3IBOTH
safety slaves and standard slaves can be handled.
Pluto offers an economic solution for both single machines
and for major machine systems.
Our solution with All-Master
Pluto – All Master
)/ + )/ + )/
Pluto All-Master
Pluto All-Master
Pluto All-Master
+
4
4
+
Safe bus
Traditional safety PLC
Slaves
2:2
4
!3ISAFETY
nodes
)/
Master
+
www.jokabsafety.com
4
Pluto AS-i
)/
+
)/
6
+
4
1
– to supervise safety devices!
Light beams
Light grids/curtains POSITION
devices
Sensors/
switches
Most safety devices on the market can be connected directly to Pluto units. By using dynamic signals with sensors
from Jokab Safety only one input is needed for category 4,
COMPAREDTOTWOINPUTSFOROTHERMANUFACTURERSg0,#S)T
is also possible to connect up to 10 sensors in series to a
single input on Pluto according to category 4.
Two-hand
controls
Emergency
stops
Strips
2
Mats
For example non-contact Eden sensors, Spot light beams
and Tina emergency stop buttons can all be connected in
series to a single Pluto input. Even mechanical switches can
be connected to the 'dynamic' safety circuit using Jokab
3AFETYgSVARIOUS4INAADAPTERS0LUTOALSOHAS)/CONNECTIONS
that can be used as both inputs and outputs.
3
4
– to save on inputs!
Dynamic signals
1–10 doors with one Eden per door
category 4
Dynamic signals
1-10 sensors
category 4
5
6
T
/
PU
NE
IN
IN
NE
PU
/
T
7
8
Pluto
has inputs for static and
dynamic sensors. Several
sensors can be connected
to one dynamic input in
accordance with category 4.
10
/
NE
ts
pu
C
O
in
NN
o
EC
T
Tw
IO
N
9
IO connections
0LUTOHAS)/CONNECTIONSTHATCANBEUSEDINTHREEWAYS
sINPUT
sOUTPUT
sboth input and output at the same time (e.g. for a reset button with lamp
indication)
Static inputs (mechanical switches)
2 for each door = category 4
11
12
input/output
www.jokabsafety.com
2:3
13
Pluto with databus - an overview
Pluto B20
Profibus DP
DeviceNet
CANopen
Ethernet
20 I/O
3AFEBUSFORCONNECTIONOFUPTO0LUTOUNITS
Patented
HMI
HMI!N(-)OPERATOR
panel can communicate
4 independent
with Pluto in both direcfailsafe safety outputs
tions. Connection can be
made via the bus or direct
to the front of the Pluto.
Pluto is an All-Master-System for dynamic and static safety circuits 4HEINTERFACEIS23
where the inputs and other information are shared on a databus.
Several safety sensors can be connected to one input while still
achieving the highest level of safety. There are also combined inputs and outputs that can be used, for example, for lamp pushbuttons where the input and output functions are used simultaneously.
Pluto has inputs for all safety devices on the market, and the Pluto
Manager software selects how each input shall respond.
Gateway for two-way databus
communication between Pluto and
other control systems.
Pluto bridge
With a Gateway set up
as a Pluto bridge, it is
POSSIBLETO
sincrease the databus
length
suse different databus
speeds for each section
sfilter information from
one section to reduce
the databus loading on
other sections.
Pluto without a databus – A single Pluto can be used as a
fully programmable safety logic controller.
Pluto S20
Connector expansion
Pluto S46
Patented
Patented
Patented
Several expansion relays can be connected to a single Pluto safety output
while retaining the safety level.
0LUTOWITHOUTABUSCONNECTIONISAVAILABLEINTWOSIZESWITHAND)/THE3AND3RESPECTIVELY)NOTHER
words, they are similar to the equivalent versions with bus connections, the B20 and B46-6.
2:4
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Pluto B46
Pluto AS-i
2
46 I/O
Safety Monitor/Master
12 I/O
(A/D)
Safe bus
Patented
+
31 AS-i safety slaves
3
Approvals
Patented
EN 954-1, Category 4
EN ISO 13849-1, PL e
EN 61496-1, Type 4
EN 61508, SIL 3
EN ISO 62061, SIL 3
EN ISO 60204-1
EN 50178
EN ISO 574, Type lllc
EN ISO 50295 (Only Pluto AS-i)
4
5
4 independent
failsafe safety outputs
6 independent
failsafe safety outputs
Absolute encoder.
8 single turn or multi
turn absolute encoders
can be connected directly to the safety bus.
Pluto AS-i is an AS-i module which can be conNECTEDTOA!3IBUS)TCANEITHERBE!3IMASTER
on the bus or work together with an AS-i master
ASMONITOR)TINCLUDES!3INODESANALOGUEAND
digital outputs, as well as safety outputs.
6
7
Free software is available via our website, at
www.jokabsafety.com!
8
9
10
Pluto Manager
11
Programming is performed using ladder or
Boolean algebra – with timers, auxiliary memory, registers, sequential programming and
TÜV-approved function blocks. The program
can be downloaded cost-free from the web
site. Programs can be loaded via one Pluto to
all the other Pluto units on the databus.
www.jokabsafety.com
12
2:5
13
I/O Overview - Pluto
IDFIX
IDFIX
)$
)
#ONNECTIONFORIDENTIlERWHICHHASAUNIQUE)$NUMBERTHATCANBEREADBYTHESYSTEM
3AFETYINPUTS6$#THATAREINDIVIDUALLYSECURE4HISMEANSTHATCOMPLETESAFETYCANBEACHIEVEDWITH
only one input if Jokab Safety dynamic safety components are used.
/THERWISETWOINPUTSAREREQUIREDFOREACHSAFETYFUNCTION
)1
)/THATCANBEUSEDFORSAFETYINPUTSORSIGNALOUTPUTSEGTOINDICATEORCONTROLFUNCTIONSTHATARENOT
SAFETYRELATED&OR)1ASSAFETYINPUTSREFERTO)
11 &AILSAFERELAYOUTPUTSTHATAREINDIVIDUALLYFAILSAFEANDINDIVIDUALLYPROGRAMMABLE
11 &AILSAFETRANSISTOROUTPUTS6$#THATAREINDIVIDUALLYFAILSAFEANDINDIVIDUALLYPROGRAMMABLE)NTENDED
for electro-mechanical components such as contactors and valves.
11 Failsafe relay outputs that are individually failsafe and individually programmable.
2:6
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Input connection
4HESYSTEMOFFERSSOLUTIONSFORBOTHSINGLEANDTWOCHANNELSAFETYDEVICES)NORDERTOMONITORWIRING
short-circuits it is possible to use up to three different dynamic signals and static voltage (+24 V) to
supply the inputs. The inputs are then programmed to only accept one of the signal types.
2
)NATWOCHANNELSYSTEMBOTHCHANNELSWILLBEMEASUREDUSINGTWODIFFERENTSIGNALS4HESYSTEMWILL
thereby be able to detect a short-circuit between the channels.
)NASINGLECHANNELSYSTEMTHEDYNAMICSIGNALISMODIlEDATEACHSENSOR!SHORTCIRCUITBETWEENTHEINPUT
and the output of the sensor will be detected at the Pluto input. Category 4 can thus be achieved by using
only one channel and one input.
3
4
Emergency
stop with
Tina
Eden sensor
Spot light
beam
5
Emergency
stop with
Tina
6
Two-channel system
Single channel dynamic system, category 4
)NPUTCONNECTIONALTERNATIVEINACCORDANCEWITHCATEGORY%.%.)3/
7
Reset button that uses the combined input and output facility
8
Resetting with a lamp
9
input/output
A1 X4
(Current monitoring)
10
24VDC
4YPE"4
11
Both a lamp and a pushbutton can be connected to the same terminal. This function Examples of connector expansion
ISFORRESETTINGSAFETYDEVICESANDTOREDUCETHENUMBEROF)/SUSED
4HE0LUTO!HASACURRENTMONITORINGFUNCTION)1ANDCANMONITORTHATALAMP
is intact. The lamp is only considered to be intact if sufficient current is being drawn from
THEOUTPUT/NEAPPLICATIONISMUTINGLAMPSSAFETYDEVICEBYPASS(OWEVERACCORDING
TO%.THEREISNOLONGERAREQUIREMENTTOMONITORMUTINGLAMPS
www.jokabsafety.com
12
2:7
13
Technical data - general
Pluto databus
Max number of Pluto units on
THEDATABUS
$ATABUSTYPE
$ATABUSSPEEDS
-ANUFACTURER
*/+!"3!&%49!"3WEDEN
#OLOUR
Black and beige
/PERATINGVOLTAGE
24V DC ±15%
)NSTALLATION
MM$).RAIL
$ATABUSCABLELENGTH
%LECTRICALINSULATION
#ATEGORY))INACCORDANCEWITH
)%#
3AFETYCATEGORY
Cat. 4 in accordance with
EN 954-1
3),INACCORDANCEWITH
EN 61508/EN 62061
AS-i databus
-ASTERPROlLE
.UMBEROFSLAVEUNITS
$ATABUSOPERATION
Failsafe inputs I & IQ
4YPE
Current at 24 V
Max. overvoltage
Failsafe transistor outputs Q
/UTPUTVOLTAGE
/UTPUTVOLTAGETOLERANCE
-AXCURRENT
Failsafe relay outputs Q
Max. voltage
Max current
Non-failsafe outputs Q
4YPE
6FOR0.0SENSORS)1
also configurable as non-failsafe
outputs
5.1 mA
6CONTINUOUS
–24 VDC
Supply voltage - 1.5 V at 800 mA
800 mA
250 V AC
1.5 A
Temperature
!MBIENTTEMPERATURE
3TORAGEANDTRANSPORT
Response times
Dyn. A or static input to relay
OUTPUT
Dyn. A or static input to
TRANSISTOROUTPUT
Dyn. B or Dyn. C input to
RELAYOUTPUT
Dyn. B or Dyn. C input to
TRANSISTOROUTPUT
Software setting "NoFilt".
-AXCURRENTOUTPUT
Transistor +24V, PNP "open
collector" also configurable as
failsafe inputs
800 mA
Indication
input/output LED
$ISPLAY
PER)/GREEN
SEGMENTSCHARACTERS
CAN
100, 125, 200, 250, 400, 500,
800, 1000 kb/s
Up to 600 m
150 m at 400 kb/s
M2
Master
Safety monitor
Safety monitor & slave
–10˚C to +50˚C
–25˚C to +55˚C
<20.5 ms + program exec. time
<16.5 ms + program exec. time
MSPROGRAMEXECTIME
<19 ms + program exec. time
5 ms shorter response time on
))1INPUTS
MSPROGRAMEXECTIME
!3IDATABUSTORELAYOUTPUT
!3IDATABUSTOTRANSISTOROUTPUT <29 ms + program exec. time
Additional Response times
Databus between Pluto units
Databus between Pluto units
on error
Enclosure classification
%NCLOSURE
#ONNECTIONTERMINALS
10 ms
10–40 ms
)0)%#
)0)%#
Technical data - type-specific
Pluto A20
20 I/O
Current monitoring
2:8
Pluto B16
16 I/O
Non-failsafe outputs
Pluto B20
20 I/O
!RTICLENUMBERORDERINGDATA
Failsafe inputs
))
))
))
Failsafe inputs or non-failsafe outputs
)1)1
Max total load 2.5 A
)1)1
Max total load 2.5 A
)1)1
Max total load 2.5 A
Analogue inputs
)6
)6
)6
Failsafe relay outputs
11
–
11
Failsafe transistor outputs
11
–
11
Current monitoring
)1)1!
±10%
–
–
Pluto databus
s
s
s
AS-i databus
–
–
–
/WNCURRENTCONSUMPTION
100 mA
100 mA
100 mA
2ECOMMENDEDEXTERNALFUSE
6A
6A
6A
Dimensions (w x h x d)
45 x 84 x 118 mm
45 x 84 x 118 mm
45 x 84 x 118 mm
www.jokabsafety.com
1
2
3
4
The units are assembled with a gap of at least 5 mm.
5
6
7
The terminal blocks are detachable without needing to disconnect the wiring.
8
Pluto S20
20 I/O
Non-Pluto databus
Pluto B46-6
46 I/O
Pluto S46-6
46 I/O
Non-Pluto databus
Pluto AS-i
AS-i databus
))
)))))
)))))
))
)1)1
Max total load 2.5 A
)1)1
Max total load 2 A
)1)1
Max total load 2 A
)1)1
Max total load 2 A
)1)1
Max total load 2 A
)1)1
Max total load 2 A
)6
)6
)6
)1)16
11
1111
1111
11
11
11
11
11
–
–
–
–
–
s
–
–
–
–
s
s
100 mA
150 mA
150 mA
100 mA
6A
10A
10A
6A
45 x 84 x 118 mm
90 x 84 x 118 mm
90 x 84 x 118 mm
45 x 84 x 118 mm
www.jokabsafety.com
9
10
11
12
2:9
13
PLUTO ACCESSORIES
2:10
Name
Article no.
Explanation
Gate-P1
Pluto Gateway
Profibus
Gateway for two-way communication between Pluto databus
and Profibus.
Gate-C1
Pluto Gateway
CANopen
Gateway for two-way communication between Pluto databus
and CANopen.
Gate-D1
Pluto Gateway
DeviceNet
Gateway for two-way communication between Pluto databus
and DeviceNet.
Gate-E1
Pluto Gateway
Ethernet
Gateway for two-way communication between Pluto databus
and Ethernet.
IDFIX-R
)DENTIlERSnTOGIVE0LUTOANADDRESS2EADONLY
IDFIX-RW
)DENTIlERSnTOGIVE0LUTOANADDRESS0ROGRAMMABLE2EADWRITE
IDFIX-DATA
)DENTIlERSnFOR0LUTO!3ISTORAGEOFSAFETYCODES
R-120
Terminating resistor for Pluto databus.
Operator's panel
(-)DISPLAYX,#$'RAPHIC5.)/0%XOR
(-)SOFTWARE$ESIGNER
(-)PROGRAMMINGCABLE
Pluto Manager
Programming tool for Pluto including function blocks.
Can be downloaded from www.jokabsafety.com
Pluto programming cable
For loading PLC programs and monitoring.
Databus cable
CAN-Bus cable yellow 2 x 0.50 mm²
CAN-Bus cable purple 2 x 0.50 mm² halogen-free
Absolute
encoder
!BSOLUTEENCODERMODEL23!SINGLETURN
Absolute
encoder
Absolute encoder model RSA 698 (multi turn)
#ABLEFORABSOLUTEENCODER5NITRONIC,I9#9X
#ONNECTORFORABSOLUTEENCODER23!
Pluto communications cable for operator's panel
www.jokabsafety.com
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
2:11
13
Pluto Manager
Programming a project
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step by step
Step 1
I/O configuration
The inputs and outputs are configured depending on what they are connected to, static or dynamic signals,
inputs and/or outputs, etc.
Step 2
Defining variables
4HEVARIABLESINTHESYSTEMAREINPUTS)OUTPUTS1AUXILIARYMEMORIES-GLOBALAUXILIARYMEMORIESFOR
databus communication (GM) and registers (R). The names of the variables can be changed as required
instead of the default variable names used in the PLC program.
Step 3
Ladder programming
The programming language used in Pluto contains function blocks, certified by TÜV Rheinland, with solutions
for the most common safety functions. The function blocks can be used in conjunction with standard ladder
instructions. The programming language has a full instruction repertoire, similar to standard PLCs on the
market, including timers, arithmetic functions, sequential programming set, etc.
2:12
www.jokabsafety.com
1
List of standards and special function blocks for Pluto Manager
The safety designer has complete freedom to program the safety functions or to use TÜV-approved pre-defined safety
function blocks.
Blocks in the standard library (func05):
1. Two-channel function with input for start
2. Two-channel function with test input
4WOCHANNELFUNCTIONWITHTESTANDRESETINPUTSAND
reset indication.
4. Two-channel function with simultaneous requirement.
5. Single channel function with input for start.
6. Single channel function with start and test inputs.
3INGLECHANNELFUNCTIONWITHRESETANDTESTINPUTS
8. Two-channel function with max. time limitation
(equivalent to JSHT2). Time begins to count down
when both inputs are activated.
9. Two-channel function with max. time limitation
(equivalent to JSHT2). Time begins to count down
when one of the inputs is activated.
10. Single channel pulse function, e.g. for timed reset.
11. Two-channel pulse function, e.g. for timed reset.
12. Two single channel bypass connection functions with
max. time limiting.
3INGLECHANNELBYPASSCONNECTIONFUNCTIONWITHMAX
time limiting.
14. Two-channel bypass connection function with max.
time limiting and simultaneous requirement.
15. Two-channel safety function with max. time
limited bypass connection.
16. Two-hand control.
#OUNTERWHICHCOUNTSUPTOPRESETVALUE
18. Counter which counts down from preset value to 0.
/FFDELAY
-UTINGLAMP?1
-UTINGLAMP?1
-UTINGLAMP7?17ITHPOSSIBILITYTOSETTHE
power level in Watts.
-UTINGLAMP7?17ITHPOSSIBILITYTOSETTHE
power level in Watts.
24. Light curtain with single cycle operation.
25. Light curtain with single cycle operation and reset
selection.
26. Multiplication.
$IVISION
2
Other function blocks
1. Safety absolute encoder.
2. Electronic cam.
%XTERNALCOMMUNICATION
3
Special function blocks:
1. Program library with program block for eccentric
shaft presses.
2. Custom special blocks can be made available.
TC1RTI
Function block example
TC1RTI
Two-channel function with test and reset
inputs, and reset indication.
4
In1
Q
In2
IndReset
5
s)NAND)NARESAFETYINPUTSTOWHICHTHE
safety device outputs are connected.
sTest is a condition that must be true at the
Reset TCfault
moment of switching on, and can be used
for monitoring external components. Test
must be true before the Reset input closes,
Test
i.e. the function block cannot be initiated
by Test.
sReset is a supervised reset input and
must be activated (positive flank) after the other inputs have
activated for the function output to be activated.
s4HE)ND2ESETOUTPUTISACTIVATEDWHENTHEFUNCTIONBLOCKIS
and flashes when the function block is ready for resetting.
sThe TCfault output is activated in the case of a two-channel
FAULTIEIFTHEFUNCTIONBLOCKISACTIVATEDANDONLYONEOF)N
AND)NOPENSANDCLOSES
6
7
8
Description
The function block acts as a conventional two-channel safety
RELAYWITHDUALANDSUPERVISEDINPUTS)N)N
9
Internet support - Pluto
/URWEBSITEHASASECTIONDEDICATEDTO0LUTOCUSTOMers, offering continuously updated product support. The
0LUTOCUSTOMERSITEOFFERS
10
s%MAILSUPPORTDIRECTLYLINKEDTOOUR0LUTOSPECIALISTS
s(ARDWAREMANUALS
s4HE3AFETY-ANUALWITHTHEMOSTIMPORTANTSAFETY
requirements
s0ROGRAMMINGMANUAL
s'ATEWAYMANUAL
s&UNCTIONBLOCKDESCRIPTIONS
s#OMMONQUESTIONSANDANSWERS
s0LUTO-ANAGERINSTALLATIONlLEPROGRAMMINGTOOLS
s0LUTO/3lLESTOUPDATESYSTEMSOFTWARE
s#ONlRMATIONOFCOMPLIANCE
www.jokabsafety.com
11
12
2:13
13
Use:
Pluto
Gateway
Bi-directional status information
from the Pluto safety PLC
Features:
Profibus DP
Two-way communication
Built-in filter function, shared
network
DeviceNet
/NLYMMWIDE
Can be located anywhere in
the databus
CANopen
Common interface with Pluto
Ethernet
Ready-made function blocks
Pluto Gateway is a unit providing two-way communication
between a Pluto safety PLC and other field buses. There
AREFOURDIFFERENTTYPESAVAILABLE
GATE-P1 – Profibus-DP
GATE-D1 – DeviceNet
GATE-C1 – CANopen
GATE-E1n%THER.ET)002/&).%4AND-ODBUS4#0
4HE 0LUTO 'ATEWAY IS A COMPACT UNIT MOUNTED ON A $).
rail, and can be connected anywhere in a Pluto databus.
The unit has a common interface with Pluto, i.e. the same
cabling, and the Pluto Manager PC program can be used
for servicing and where necessary programming. NormalLYHOWEVERALLTHESETTINGSAREMADEVIAA$)0SWITCHES
which means that programming tools are not required to
put the gateway itself into operation.
2:14
For programming Pluto there are ready-made function
blocks which, via a Pluto Gateway, send and receive data
from the supervisory system.
The GATE-D1 and GATE-C1 types, which use a CAN
databus on both sides, can also usefully be used as CAN
bridges where it is required to split a Pluto databus into
several sections. This is particularly useful when long databus cables are needed. There is also a built-in filter function
which makes it possible to block data that is not required
for use on the other side of the bridge, which reduces the
databus loading in the other sections and thereby permits
longer databus cables.
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Gateway block schematic diagram - Pluto Gateway
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
2:15
13
Pluto Gateway
Profibus
Profibus DP
0,54/'ATEWAY0ROlBUSFORTWOWAYCOMMUNICATIONWITH
Pluto safety PLC.
Data from Pluto
6IA 02/&)"53 A SUPERVISORY 0,# SYSTEM CAN HAVE ACCESSTOTHE)/ANDOTHERVARIABLESINA0LUTOSAFETY0,#
'LOBAL)/INA0LUTOSAFETY0,#AREACCESSIBLEVIA02/&)BUS modules in the gateway, one module for each Pluto
unit. Local data in Pluto units can be read by a "local data”
module together with the PLC codes in the supervisory
system.
PLC function blocks
4OSIMPLIFYTHEINTEGRATIONOFA0LUTO'ATEWAY02/&)"53
into the supervisory PLC system, Jokab Safety provides
ready-made function blocks for several popular brands of
PLC. The function blocks make it easier to receive and
send information to the Pluto system. The function blocks
are supplied as open units with full access for the customer to change and add functions. These function blocks can
be obtained via the Jokab Safety web site.
Data to Pluto
6IA 02/&)"53 A SUPERVISORY 0,# SYSTEM CAN TRANSMIT
non-safety-related information to a Pluto safety PLC. A total of 64 Boolean values and 8 different 16-bit registers
can be transmitted. Function blocks for these functions are
available in Pluto Manager.
Pluto databus LED
+BUTTON
PC port
Profibus LED
Profibus connector
2:16
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Technical data - Gateway Profibus
Manufacturer:
*/+!"3!&%49!"3WEDEN
Article number/ordering data:
Databuses:
-Pluto databus CAN (isolated)
02/&)"5323ISOLATED
Pluto databus speeds:
100, 200, 250, 400, 500, 800 and
1000 kbit/s
(automatic speed detection)
PROFIBUS speed:
Up to 12 Mbit/s (automatic speed
detection)
PROFIBUS address:
3ETTINGVIA$)0SWITCHES
PROFIBUS version:
DP slave, DP-V0
Connections:
4OPPOLETERMINALFOR0LUTODATABUS
(included)
&RONTSTANDARDPOLE02/&)"53CONnection.
Bottom, 2-pole terminal for 24 V DC
(included)
GATE-P1
Status indication:
Pluto databus status indication via LED
02/&)"53STATUSINDICATIONVIA,%$
Operating voltage:
24 V DC, -15% till +20%
Current at 24 V:
< 100 mA (recommended fuse ≤6 A)
Dimensions (w x h x d):
22.5 x 101 x 119 mm
Installation:
MM$).RAIL
Operating temperature (ambient):
-10°C to + 55ºC
Temperature, transport and storage:
-25°C to + 55ºC
Humidity:
EN 60 204-1 50% at 40ºC (ambient
90% at 20ºC)
Enclosure classification:
%NCLOSURE)0)%#
4ERMINALS)0)%#
2
3
4
119 mm
5
101 mm
6
7
22,5 mm
8
Gateway block schematic diagram - Pluto Profibus
9
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
2:17
13
Pluto Gateway
DeviceNet
DeviceNet
0,54/ 'ATEWAY $EVICE.ET FOR TWOWAY COMMUNICATION
with Pluto safety PLC.
Data from Pluto
Via DeviceNet a supervisory PLC system can have access
TOTHE)/ANDOTHERVARIABLESINA0LUTOSAFETY0,#'LOBAL
)/S IN A 0LUTO SAFETY 0,# ARE ACCESSIBLE VIA $EVICE.ET
”implicit” messages. Local data in Pluto units can be read
via DeviceNet ”explicit” messages.
Data to Pluto
Via DeviceNet a supervisory PLC system can transmit nonsafety-related information to a Pluto safety PLC. A total of
64 Boolean values and 8 different 16-bit registers can be
transmitted (via DeviceNet ”implicit” or ”explicit” messages). Function blocks for these commands are available in
Pluto Manager.
There is also a built-in filter
filter function which makes it possible to block any data that is not required for use on the
other side of the bridge, which reduces the databus loading in the other sections and thereby permits longer databus cables.
ABB Robotics IRC5
0,54/ 'ATEWAY $EVICE.ET HAS SUPPORT FOR INTEGRATION
INTO AN !"" 2OBOTICS )2#SYSTEM 4HE DOCUMENTATION
that describes this integration can be obtained via the Jokab Safety web site.
Pluto bridge
A GATE-D1 can also be used to advantage as a CAN
bridge when it is required to divide a Pluto databus into
several sections. This is particularly useful when long databus cables are needed.
Pluto databus LED
+BUTTON
PC port
DeviceNet LED
DeviceNet connector
2:18
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Technical data - DeviceNet
Manufacturer
*/+!"3!&%49!"3WEDEN
Article number/ordering data:
Databuses:
-Pluto databus CAN (isolated)
-DeviceNet CAN (isolated)
Pluto databus speeds:
100, 200, 250, 400, 500, 800 and
1000 kbit/s
(automatic speed detection)
DeviceNet speeds:
ANDKBITSSETVIA$)0
switch)
DeviceNet address:
3ETTINGVIA$)0SWITCHES
DeviceNet Version:
/$6!VERSION
Connections:
4OPPOLETERMINALFOR0LUTODATABUS
(included)
Front, 5-pole terminal for DeviceNet
(included)
Bottom, 2-pole terminal for 24 V DC
(included)
GATE-D1
Status indications:
Pluto databus status indication via LED
DeviceNet MNS status indication via
LED
Operating voltage:
24 V DC, -15% till +20%
Current at 24 V:
< 100 mA (recommended fuse ≤6 A)
Dimensions (w x h x d):
22.5 x 101 x 119 mm
Installation:
MM$).RAIL
Operating temperature (ambient):
-10°C to + 55ºC
Temperature,
transport and storage:
-25°C to + 55ºC
Humidity:
EN 60 204-1 50% at 40ºC (ambient
90% at 20ºC)
Enclosure classification:
%NCLOSURE)0)%#
4ERMINALS)0)%#
2
3
4
119 mm
5
101 mm
6
7
22,5 mm
8
Gateway block schematic diagram - Pluto DeviceNet
9
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
2:19
13
Pluto Gateway
CANopen
CANopen
0,54/ 'ATEWAY #!.OPEN FOR TWOWAY COMMUNICATION
with Pluto safety PLC.
Data from Pluto
Via CANopen a supervisory PLC system can have access
TOTHE)/ANDOTHERVARIABLESINA0LUTOSAFETY0,#'LOBAL
)/S IN A 0LUTO SAFETY 0,# ARE ACCESSIBLE VIA #!.OPEN
0$/MESSAGES,OCALDATAIN0LUTOUNITSCANBEREADVIA
#!.OPEN3$/MESSAGESTOGETHERWITHTHE0,#CODESIN
the supervisory system.
Pluto bridge
A GATE-C1 can also be used to advantage as a CAN
bridge when it is required to divide a Pluto databus into
several sections. This is particularly useful when long databus cables are needed.
There is also a built-in filter function which makes it possible to block any data that is not required for use on the
other side of the bridge, which reduces the databus loading in the other sections and thereby permits longer databus cables.
Data to Pluto
Via CANopen a supervisory PLC system can send nonsafety-related information to a Pluto safety PLC. A total of
64 Boolean values and 8 different 16-bit registers can be
TRANSMITTED#!.OPEN0$/OR3$/MESSAGES&UNCTION
blocks for these commands are available in Pluto Manager.
Pluto databus LED
+BUTTON
PC port
CANopen LED
#!.OPENCONNECTOR
2:20
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Technical data - Gateway CANopen
Manufacturer
*/+!"3!&%49!"3WEDEN
Article number/ordering data:
Databuses:
-Pluto databus CAN (isolated)
-CANopen CAN (isolated)
Pluto databus speeds:
100, 200, 250, 400, 500, 800 and
1000 kbit/s
(automatic speed detection)
CANopen speeds:
ANDKBITSSETVIA$)0
switch)
10, 20, 50, 100, 125, 250, 500, 800
and 1000 kbit/s (via software)
GATE-C1
CANopen address:
3ETTINGVIA$)0SWITCHESORSOFTWARE
CANopen version:
”Version 4.02 of the CiA Draft Standard
v
Connections:
4OPPOLETERMINALFOR0LUTODATABUS
(included)
Front, 5-pole terminal for CANopen
(included)
Bottom, 2-pole terminal for 24 V DC
(included)
Status indications:
Pluto databus status indication via LED
CANopen status indication via LED
Operating voltage:
24 V DC, -15% till +20%
Current at 24 V:
< 100 mA (recommended fuse ≤6 A)
Dimensions (w x h x d):
22.5 x 101 x 119 mm
Installation:
MM$).RAIL
Operating temperature (ambient):
-10°C to + 55ºC
Temperature, transport and storage:
-25°C to + 55ºC
Humidity:
EN 60 204-1 50% at 40ºC (ambient
90% at 20ºC)
Enclosure classification:
%NCLOSURE)0)%#
4ERMINALS)0)%#
2
3
4
119 mm
5
101 mm
6
7
22,5 mm
8
Gateway block schematic diagram - Pluto CANopen
9
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
2:21
13
Pluto Gateway
Ethernet
Ethernet
0,54/'ATEWAY%THERNET'!4%%FORTWOWAYCOMMUNIcation with Pluto safety PLC.
Protocol
0,54/ 'ATEWAY %THERNET '!4%% HANDLES THE STATUS
from and to Pluto safety PLCs via Ethernet protocols EthER.ET)002/&).%4INFUTURE-ODBUS4#0ANDASIMPLE
BINARYPROTOCOLTHATUSES4#0)0
&OR)0ADDRESSCONlGURATIONETCTHEREISASIMPLEWEB
server and a terminal server.
Data to Pluto
Via the Ethernet protocol a supervisory PLC system can
transmit non-safety-related information to a Pluto safety
PLC. A total of 64 Boolean values and 8 different 16-bit
registers can be transmitted. Function blocks for these
functions are available in Pluto Manager.
Data from Pluto
Via one of the Ethernet protocols a supervisory PLC system
CANHAVEACCESSTOTHE)/ANDOTHERVARIABLESINA0LUTO
SAFETY0,#'LOBAL)/SINA0LUTOSAFETY0,#AREACCESSIBLEVIATHEUSUAL)/TRANSFERINTHERESPECTIVEPROTOCOL
Local data in Pluto units can be read by special commands
together with the PLC codes in the supervisory system.
Pluto databus LED
+BUTTON
PC port
Ethernet LED
Ethernet connector
2:22
www.jokabsafety.com
Technical data - Ethernet
Terminal server (TCP/IP)
Simple server with the same
commands as via the serial programming port in the unit.
IP address
Static sharing via web server or
via programming port.
Manufacturer
*/+!"3!&%49!"3WEDEN
Article number/
ordering data:
Pluto databus
CAN (isolated)
Gateway configuration
Pluto databus speeds
100, 200, 250, 400, 500, 800
and 1000 kbit/s
(automatic speed detection)
4AKESPLACEVIA%THER.ET)0
02/&).%4-ODBUS4#0OR
VIATHEBINARY4#0)0SERVER
Connections
Ethernet
10/100 Mbit/s
Half and full duplex
Ethernet protocol
Status from and to Pluto safety
PLC
%THER.ET)0
02/&).%4INDEVELOPMENT
- Modbus TCP
"INARYSERVER4#0)0
4OPPOLETERMINALFOR0LUTO
databus (included)
Front, Ethernet connection via
RJ-45 (screened cable cat. 5e
FTP)
Bottom, 2-pole terminal for 24 V
DC (included)
GATE-E1
Status indications
Note that certain combinations
of server protocols cannot be
used simultaneously.
'ATEWAYSTATUSAND)0ADDRESS
configuration
- Web server
4ERMINALSERVER4#0)0
2
Pluto databus status indication
via LED (Pluto databus)
Ethernet module status indication via LED (Mod Status)
Ethernet network status indication via LED (Net Status)
Operating voltage
24 V DC, -15 % till +20 %
Current at 24 V
< 150 mA (recommended fuse
≤6 A)
Dimensions (w x h x d):
XXMM
!CCORDINGTO/$6!h#)0%DITION
vANDh%THER.ET)0!DAPTION
OF#)0%DITIONv
-INIMUM20)OFMS
Installation
MM$).RAIL
Operating temperature
(ambient)
-10°C to + 55ºC
PROFINET
)NDEVELOPMENT
Temperature,
transport and storage
-25°C to + 55ºC
Modbus TCP
According to the Modbus organisation, version 1.0b (approx. 20
messages per second).
Humidity
EN 60 204-1 50 % at 40ºC
(ambient 90 % at 20ºC)
Binary server (TCP/IP)
3IMPLE4#0)0PROTOCOLTOSEND
status from/to the Pluto system.
Enclosure classification
%NCLOSURE)0)%#
4ERMINALS)0)%#
Web server
&ORSIMPLESHARINGOF)0
addresses.
EtherNet/IP
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
Gateway block schematic diagram - Pluto Ethernet
9
PLC
Ethernet, non safety
119 mm
10
GATE-E1
PLUTO
BUS
K
PR
Mod
Status
Net
Status
Modbus TCP
EtherNet/IP
PROFINET
101 mm
Gateway
11
Pluto CAN bus, safety
CH
CL
I1
I0
I3
I2
I6
I4 I5
IQ12 IQ14 IQ16
IQ13 IQ15 IQ17
IQ10
I7
ID
Q2
IQ11
CH
Q3
Q1
Q0
0V
+24V
CL
I1
I0
I3
I2
I6
I4 I5
IQ12 IQ14 IQ16
IQ13 IQ15 IQ17
IQ10
I7
ID
Q2
IQ11
CH
Q3
Q1
Q0
0V
+24V
CL
I1
I0
I3
I2
I6
I4 I5
IQ12 IQ14 IQ16
IQ13 IQ15 IQ17
IQ10
I7
ID
Q2
IQ11
Q3
12
Q1
Q0
0V
+24V
MM
Pluto
Pluto
Pluto
www.jokabsafety.com
2:23
13
Use:
Pluto
Safe Encoder
Safe position and speed determination of machine movements.
Features:
High resolution
Selectable resolution
Connected directly to the Pluto
databus
Ready-made function blocks
Rotational absolute value sensor for safe
positioning
Together with a Pluto safety PLC, this rotational absolute
encoder can be used for safe position determination. This
is particularly useful in the case of such equipment as gantry robots, industrial robots, etc. Also in eccentric shaft
presses, existing cam mechanisms can be replaced by absolute value position sensors for safe positioning. The sensors are available in single and multi-turn versions.
Up to 16 absolute encoders can be connected to a Pluto
CAN databus. A Pluto on the databus reads the sensor
values, which are evaluated. With a special function block
in the PLC code, it is possible to design two-channel solutions with the sensors. The user can obtain safe values for
position and speed from these values. This enables supervision of stationary and overspeed conditions.
The absolute value sensors are standard sensors with
modified software to meet the safety requirements.
Example of an application where 2 sensors provide safe position determination in a gantry robot.
2:24
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Technical data – Safe Encoder RSA 597
Manufacturer
*/+!"3!&%49!"3WEDEN
Article number/ordering data:
Ambient temperature
²#²#
Temperature, transport and storage
²#²#
Ingress protection class
)0INACCORDANCEWITH)%#
At shaft inlet
)0INACCORDANCEWITH)%#
Vibration (55 to 2000 Hz)
MS2INACCORDANCEWITH)%#
60068-2-6
Shock (6ms)
< 2,000 m/s2INACCORDANCEWITH)%#
Material, enclosure
Aluminium
Surface treatment
Painted and chromed or anodised
Weight
!PPROXG
23!
2
3
4
Accuracy and resolution
Resolution
BITSPOSITIONSPERROTATION
Accuracy
± ½ LSB (Least Significant Bit)
Operating voltage
6DC
Polarity-protected
9ES
Short-circuit protected
9ES
Databus speed
5 kbit/s - 1 Mbit/s, preset at 500kbit/s
Address input
Active low
Code type
Binary
Programmable functions
Resolution, 0 position
Direction, Databus speed
Current consumption
50 mA at 24V dc
Max current consumption
100 mA
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
2:25
13
Technical data – Safe Encoder RSA 698
Manufacturer
*/+!"3!&%49!"3WEDEN
Article number/ordering data:
Ambient temperature
²#²#
Temperature, transport and storage
²#²#
Ingress protection class
)0INACCORDANCEWITH)%#
At shaft inlet
)0INACCORDANCEWITH)%#
Vibration (55 to 2000 Hz)
< 100 m/s2INACCORDANCEWITH)%#
60068-2-6
Shock (6ms)
< 2,000 m/s2INACCORDANCEWITH)%#
Material, enclosure
Aluminium
Surface treatment
Anodised
Weight
Approx. 400g
23!
Accuracy and resolution
2:26
Resolution, total
25 bit
BITSPOSITIONSPERROTATION
12 bits, 4096 rotations
Accuracy
± 1 LSB (Least Significant Bit)
Operating voltage
6DC
Polarity-protected
9ES
Short-circuit protected
9ES
Databus speed
10 kbit/s - 1 Mbit/s
Code type
Binary
Programmable functions
Resolution, 0 position
Current consumption
50 mA at 24V dc
Max current consumption
100 mA
www.jokabsafety.com
Safe Encoder
Function block for a single-turn encoder
that generates safe position and speed
values from two absolute encoders.
Function
The block reads and evaluates one absolute
encoders. The position value is sent to
the 'Position' output. The 'Speed' output
is the average value for the speed, at the
RATEOFPULSESMS)FANERROROCCURS
THEg/+gOUTPUTISSETTOZERO)NCERTAIN
applications the values of 'Position' and
'Speed' are used in conjunction with the
g/+gOUTPUT
1
Descriptions of inputs and outputs
!DR%NCODER!%NCODER!NODEADDRESS
!DR%NCODER"%NCODER"NODEADDRESS
-AX$IFF-AXALLOWEDDEVIATIONBETWEENTHEENCODERS
(max 2% of Range)
2ANGE.UMBEROFINCREMENTSPERREVOLUTION
/+3ETWHENENCODERSAREWORKING/+AND
the position values are within the margin set by 'MaxDiff'
0OSITION0OSITIONVALUE
3PEED3PEEDVALUEASINCREMENTSMS
!%NCODER!POSITION-USTNOTBEUSEDIN0,#PROGRAM
"%NCODER"POSITION-USTNOTBEUSEDIN0,#PROGRAM
2
3
NOTE! Position values from single encoders are only available
FORADJUSTMENTPURPOSESANDMUST./4BEUSEDFORSAFETY
NOTE!7HENERROROCCURSg0OSITIONgg3PEEDg
ANDTHE/+OUTPUTWILLBERESET
Safe Encoder
Multiturn
Function block for a multi-turn encoder
that generates safe position and speed
values from two absolute encoders.
Operative system 2.4.4 or higher is
required.
Function
The block reads and evaluates two
absolute encoders. The average value for
the two sensors is calculated and sent to
the 'Position' output. The 'Speed' output
is the average value for the speed, at the
rate of pulses/10 ms. The block monitors
that the encoder position values do not
differ by more than the input value set by
g-AX$IFFg)FANERROROCCURSTHEg/+gOUTPUTISSETTOZERO)NCERTAINAPPLICATIONS
the values of 'Position' and 'Speed' are
USEDINCONJUNCTIONWITHTHEg/+gOUTPUT
Descriptions of inputs and outputs
!DR%NCODER!%NCODER!NODEADDRESS
!DR%NCODER"%NCODER"NODEADDRESS
-AX$IFF-AXALLOWEDDEVIATIONBETWEENTHEENCODERSMAX
OF)NCR0ER2EV
)NCR0ER2EV.UMBEROFINCREMENTSPERREVOLUTION
/+3ETWHENENCODERSAREWORKING/+AND
the position values are within the margin set by 'MaxDiff'
0OSITION0OSITIONVALUE
3PEED3PEEDVALUEASINCREMENTSMS
!%NCODER!POSITION-USTNOTBEUSEDIN0,#PROGRAM
"%NCODER"POSITION-USTNOTBEUSEDIN0,#PROGRAM
NOTE! Position values from single encoders are only available
FORADJUSTMENTPURPOSESANDMUST./4BEUSEDFORSAFETY
NOTE!7HENERROROCCURSg0OSITIONgg3PEEDg
ANDTHE/+OUTPUTWILLBERESET
4
5
6
7
8
9
Encoder Cam
Descriptions of inputs and outputs
Function block for electronic cam gear.
0OS2EG)NPUTFORTHEPOSITIONVALUE
-IN0OS-INIMUMLIMITVALUE
-AX0OS-AXIMUMLIMITVALUE
Function
/UTPUT1ISACTIVATEDIFTHEVALUEOFTHE
input register 'PosReg' is within the limits
for ’MinPos’ and ’MaxPos’.
./4%)TISPOSSIBLETOSPECIFYAVALUE
that defines the sensor's zero position.
Position <0 is not permitted.
%XAMPLE)F-IN0OSAND
-AX0OS1ISACTIVATEDWHEN
the position is greater than 2999 or less
than 201.
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
2:27
13
Example – Robot cell with Pluto
Description:
The example describes a processing machine served by
a robot. The machine safety system consists of one Pluto
to which all protection has been connected. The robot has
been equipped with a Pluto to which the cell protection
has been connected. The Pluto for the machine has been
connected via a databus cable to the robot's Pluto so that
common functions, such as emergency stop, can be used
by the whole cell.
2:28
Function:
Emergency stop takes priority and will stop both the machine and the robot. The machine hatch acts as the zone
divider, when the hatch is closed the machine forms one
zone and the robot another zone. When the machine hatch
is open, both the machine and the robot belong to the
SAMEZONE)FTHEDOORISOPENEDWHENTHEMACHINEHATCH
is open, the machine and the robot will both stop, but if the
machine hatch is closed, only the robot will be stopped.
After the door has been opened, the system must be reset
by means of the reset button on the outside of the door.
Emergency stop is reset when the pressed-in button is
PULLEDOUT./4%4HECELLOPERATINGCYCLEMUSTNOTHOWever start immediately on resetting the emergency stop or
the door.
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Electrical connections
Apparatus
enclosure
Robot
enclosure
Electrical equipment
enclosure for machinery
2
Pluto databus
Emergency stop
Emergency stop
Safety interlock switch
3
Machine
emergency
stop
Door
Machine
protective
stop
4
5
Robot
Autostop
Robot
Emergency stop
Matning
Supply
6
7
8
9
0ROJECTCREATEDBY*OHAN4ORSTENSSON*OKAB3AFETY!"
0ROJECTCHECKEDBY
0ROJECTAPPROVEDBY
10
(ISTORY
!UGUST0ROJECTCREATED
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
2:29
13
Pluto 0 settings
Pluto 0
)%MERGENCYSTOP?CHANNEL?
)%MERGENCYSTOP?CHANNEL?
)$OOR
12OBOT?!UTOSTOPP?/+
12OBOT?%MERGENCYSTOP?/+
1
'-2ESET?IND?MEM
'-%MERGENCYSTOP?/+?MEM
-2ESET?)ND??MEM
2:30
#HANNELFROMTHEEMERGENCYSTOPBUTTON
#HANNELFROMTHEEMERGENCYSTOPBUTTON
3IGNALFROMTHEDOORSENSOR
!UTOMATICSTOPFORTHEROBOT
%MERGENCYSTOPFORTHEROBOT
/UTPUTTHATGENERATESADYNAMICSIGNAL
#OLLECTIVEMEMORYFORINDICATIONINTHERESETBUTTON
!UXILIARYMEMORYFOREMERGENCYSTOP/+
!UXILIARYMEMORYFORINDICATIONINTHERESETBUTTON
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Pluto 1 settings
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Pluto 1
)%STOP?MACHINE?CHANNEL?
)%STOP?MACHINE?CHANNEL?
)-ACHINEHATCH?.#
)-ACHINEHATCH?./
)2ESET
1%STOP?MACHINE?/+
1-ACHINE?PROTSTOP?/+
1
12ESET?)ND
'--ACHINEHATCH?/+?MEM
#HANNELFROMTHEEMERGENCYSTOPBUTTONONTHEMACHINE
#HANNELFROMTHEEMERGENCYSTOPBUTTONONTHEMACHINE
#HANNELFROMTHESAFETYINTERLOCKSWITCH
#HANNELFROMTHESAFETYINTERLOCKSWITCH
2ESETBUTTON2ESET
%MERGENCYMACHINESTOP
0ROTECTIVEMACHINESTOP
/UTPUTTHATGENERATESADYNAMICSIGNAL
)NDICATIONLAMPINTHERESETBUTTON
'LOBALAUXILIARYMEMORYFROMTWOCHANNELSUPERVISIONOFTHESAFETYINTERLOCKSWITCHIN
the machine hatch.
'-%STOP?MACHINE?/+?MEM 'LOBALAUXILIARYMEMORYFROMTWOCHANNELSUPERVISIONOFTHEEMERGENCYSTOPONTHEMACHINE
-2ESET?)ND??MEM
!UXILIARYMEMORYFORINDICATIONINTHERESETBUTTON
www.jokabsafety.com
2:31
10
11
12
13
PLC code Pluto 0
1
Start
2
Two-channel supervision with automatic reset emergency stop at the door.
%STOP?KANAL?
)
%STOP?/+?MEM
'-
TC1S
In1
Q
E-stop_kanal_2
)
In2
Start
GM0.1 = E-stop_OK_mem
I0.0 = E-stop_kanal_1
I0.1 = E-stop_kanal_2
3
Auxiliary memory for emergency stop OK
Channel 1 from the emergency stop button
Channel 2 from the emergency stop button
Emergency stop for the robot
When the emergency stop is activated, the robot will perform an emergency stop.
To reset the safety features, the emergency stop button must be reset.
%STOP?/+?MEM
%STOP?MACHINE?/+?MEM
'-
GM0.1 = E-stop_OK_mem
GM1.1 = E-stop_machine_OK_mem
Q0.3 = Robot_NS_OK
2OBOT?.3?/+
1
Auxiliary memory for emergency stop OK
Global auxiliary memory from two-channel supervision of the emergency stop on the machine.
Emergency stop for the robot
4
Automatic stop for the robot
When the door of the cell opens the robot is set to automatically stop.
To reset the safety features, the door must be closed and then the reset signal given.
$OOR
)
In1
Reset
)
2OBOT?!UTOSTOPP?/+
1
ResetT
Q
Reset_ind_1_mem
-
Reset
IndReset
Test
).2 = Door
I1.15 = Reset
M0.0 = Reset_ind_1_mem
Q0.2 = Robot_Autostopp_OK
5
)NDICATIONLAMPINTHERESETBUTTON
Summary of local memories that shall generate the signal in the reset lamp.
The global memory is then used in the Pluto where the output is.
Reset_ind_1_mem
M0.0
GM0.0 = Reset_ind_mem
M0.0 = Reset_ind_1_mem
2:32
Signal from the door sensor
Reset button Reset
Auxiliary memory for indication in the reset button
Automatic stop for the robot
Collective memory for indication in the reset button
Auxiliary memory 1 for indication in the reset button
www.jokabsafety.com
Reset_ind_1_mem
GM0.0
6
1
)NDICATIONONTHEDISPLAY
!LARMn-ACHINEHATCHOPEN
To generate an alarm, a UE code (UE = User Error) can be shown on the Pluto's display.
This alarm code is selected by a value of between 200 and 299 being written into the Pluto's display register.
SR_ErrorCode = 0 is used as a condition to prioritise an internal alarm from the unit.
-ACHINEHATCH?/+?MEM32?%RROR#ODE
'-
32
2
32?0LUTO$ISPLAY
32
3
GM1.0 = Machine hatch_OK_mem Global auxiliary memory from two-channel supervision of the safety interlock switch in the machine hatch.
SR0.10 = SR_PlutoDisplay
Pluto display figure
SR0.11 = SR_ErrorCode
Error code. For user error 200 + no
7
)NDICATIONONTHEDISPLAY
4
Alarm 02 – Door open.
To generate an alarm, a UE code (UE = User Error) can be shown on the Pluto's display.
This alarm code is selected by a value of between 200 and 299 being written into the Pluto's display register.
SR_ErrorCode = 0 is used as a condition to prioritise an internal alarm from the unit.
Door
)
SR_ErrorCode = 0
32
10.2 = Door
SR0.10 = SR_PlutoDisplay
SR0.11 = SR_Errorcode
SR_PlutoDisplay = 202
32
5
Signal from the door sensor
Pluto display figure
Error code. For user error 200 + no
6
8
)NDICATIONONTHEDISPLAY
Alarm 01 - Emergency stop activated
To generate an alarm, a UE code (UE = User Error) can be shown on the Pluto's display.
This alarm code is selected by a value of between 200 and 299 being written into the Pluto's display register.
SR_ErrorCode = 0 is used as a condition to prioritise an internal alarm from the unit.
%STOP?/+?MEM
32?%RROR#ODE
SR0.11 = 0
GM0.1 = E-stop_OK_mem
SR0.10 = SR_PlutoDisplay
SR0.11 = SR_ErrorCode
7
32?0LUTO$ISPLAY
SR0.10 = 201
Auxiliary memory for emergency stop OK
Pluto display figure
Error code. For user error 200 + no
8
9
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
2:33
13
PLC code Pluto 1
1
Start
2
Two-channel supervision with automatic reset of the emergency stop on the machine.
%STOP?MACHINE?KANAL?
)
%STOP?/+?MEM
'-
TC1S
In1
E-stop_machine_kanal_2
)
In2
Start
GM1.1 = E-stop_machine_OK_mem
I0.0 = E-stop_machine_kanal_1
I0.1 = E-stop_machine_kanal_2
3
Global auxiliary memory from two-channel supervision of the emergency stop on the machine.
Channel 1 from the emergency stop button on the machine
Channel 2 from the emergency stop button on the machine
Two-channel supervision of the machine hatch switch.
The switch has alternating contacts and the variable name shows the contact arrangement for the respect signals when the key is in the sensor.
- Machine hatch_NC gives a signal
-ACHINEHATCH?./GIVESASIGNAL
-ACHINEHATCH?.#
)
-ACHINEHATCH?/+?MEM
'-
TC1S
In1
Q
-ACHINEHATCH?./
)
In2
Start
GM1.0 = Machine hatch_OK_mem Global auxiliary memory from two-channel supervision of the safety interlock switch in the machine hatch.
I1.11 = Machine hatch_NC
Channel 1 from the safety interlock switch
I1.12 = Machine hatch_NO
Channel 2 from the safety interlock switch
4
Emergency machine stop.
When the emergency stop is activated, the machine will perform an emergency stop.
To reset the safety features, the emergency stop button must be reset.
%STOP?/+?MEM
%STOP?MACHINE?/+?MEM
'-
GM0.1 = E-stop_OK_mem
GM1.1 = E-stop_machine_OK_mem
Q1.0 = Maskin_E-stop_OK
-ASKIN?%STOP?/+
1
Auxiliary memory for emergency stop OK
Global auxiliary memory from two-channel supervision of the emergency stop on the machine.
Emergency machine stop.
5
Protective machine stop.
When the protective stop is activated, the machine will stop.
)FTHEDOORINTOTHEROBOTAREAISOPENEDATTHESAMETIMEASTHEMACHINEHATCHISCLOSEDTHEMACHINEWILLCONTINUEWITHITSWORKCYCLE
To reset the safety features, the door or the machine hatch must be closed and then the reset signal given.
-ACHINEHATCH?/+?MEM
'-
In1
Door
)
-ASKIN?SKYDDSTOPP?/+
1
ResetT
Q
Reset_ind_2_mem
-
IndReset
Reset
)
Reset
Test
2:34
www.jokabsafety.com
1
GM1.0 = Machine hatch_OK_mem
I0.2 = Door
I1.15 = Reset
M1.0 = Reset_Ind_2_mem
Q1.1 = Maskin_skyddstop_OK
6
Global auxiliary memory from two-channel supervision of the safety interlock switch in the machine hatch.
Signal from the door sensor
Reset button Reset
Auxiliary memory 2 for indication in the reset button
Protective machine stop.
2
)NDICATIONLAMPINTHERESETBUTTON
Summary of memories that shall generate the signal in the reset lamp.
2ESET?IND?MEM
'-
2ESET?)ND
1
3
2ESET?)ND??MEM
M1.0
GM0.0 = Reset_Ind_mem
M1.0 = Reset_Ind_2_mem
Q1.15 = Reset_Ind
4
Collective memory for indication in the reset button
Auxiliary memory 2 for indication in the reset button
Indication lamp in the reset button.
7
)NDICATIONONTHEDISPLAY
!LARMn-ACHINEHATCHOPEN
To generate an alarm, a UE code (UE = User Error) can be shown on the Pluto's display.
This alarm code is selected by a value of between 200 and 299 being written into the Pluto's display register.
SR_ErrorCode = 0 is used as a condition to prioritise an internal alarm from the unit.
-ACHINEHATCH?/+?MEM
32?%RROR#ODE
'-
32
5
32?0LUTO$ISPLAY
32
6
GM1.0 = Machine hatch_OK_mem Global auxiliary memory from two-channel supervision of the safety interlock switch in the machine hatch.
SR1.10 = SR_PlutoDisplay
Pluto display figure
SR1.11 = SR_ErrorCode
Error code. For user error 200 + no
7
8
)NDICATIONONTHEDISPLAY
Alarm 02 – Door open.
To generate an alarm, a UE code (UE = User Error) can be shown on the Pluto's display.
This alarm code is selected by a value of between 200 and 299 being written into the Pluto's display register.
SR_ErrorCode = 0 is used as a condition to prioritise an internal alarm from the unit.
Door
)
SR_ErrorCode = 0
32
I0.1 = Door
SR1.10 = SR_PlutoDisplay
SR1.11 = SR_ErrorCode
8
SR_PlutoDisplay = 202
32
9
Signal from the door sensor
Pluto display figure
Error code. For user error 200 + no
9
10
)NDICATIONONTHEDISPLAY
Alarm 01 - Emergency stop activated.
To generate an alarm, a UE code (UE = User Error) can be shown on the Pluto's display.
This alarm code is selected by a value of between 200 and 299 being written into the Pluto's display register.
SR_ErrorCode = 0 is used as a condition to prioritise an internal alarm from the unit.
%STOP?/+?MEM
32?%RROR#ODE
SR1.11 = 0
GM0.1 = E-stop_OK_mem
SR1.10 = SR_PlutoDisplay
SR1.11 = SR_ErrorCode
32?0LUTO$ISPLAY
SR1.10 = 201
Auxiliary memory for emergency stop OK
Pluto display figure
Error code. For user error 200 + no
www.jokabsafety.com
11
12
2:35
13
Safety system - Vital
Supervision of dynamic safety signals.
www.jokabsafety.com
Contents
1
Page
Dynamic safety circuit for Vital and Pluto _______________________________3:2
2
Why you should use the Vital safety system _____________________________3:4
s#ONNECTIONOFUNITSANDCABLELENGTHSTO6ITAL _________________________________3:5
s.UMBEROF%DENSTHATCANBEUSEDWITH6ITALAND0LUTO ___________________________3:6
s.UMBEROF4INASTHATCANBEUSEDWITH6ITALAND0LUTO ___________________________3:7
sCONNECTIONSn6ITAL _____________________________________________________3:8
s4ECHNICALDATA6ITAL_____________________________________________________3:9
Why could you use the Tina adapter unit? _____________________________
s4INAISAVAILABLEINSEVERALVARIANTS ________________________________________
s4ECHNICALDATAFOR4INA!!"!!!!!AND! __________________
s4ECHNICALDATAFOR4INA! ______________________________________________
s4ECHNICALDATAFOR4INA!"AND# __________________________________
s4ECHNICALDATAFOR4INA! _____________________________________________
s#ABLING ___________________________________________________________
s/NE6ITALSUPERVISESTHEENTIREROBOTCELL___________________________________
3
3:10
3:11
3:14
3:15
3:16
3:17
3:17
3:19
4
5
6
Tina Duo 1/2
– Remote sensor expansion unit with reset capability for Vital/Pluto _____ 3:20
s4ECHNICALDATAFOR4INA$UOAND _______________________________________ 3:21
7
Connection example - Vital & Tina _____________________________ 3:22 – 3:39
8
9
10
11
12
Descriptions and examples in this book show how the products work and can be used. This does not mean that they can meets the requirements for
all types of machines and processes. The purchaser/user is responsible for ensuring that the product is installed and used in accordance with the
applicable regulations and standards. We reserve the right to make changes in products and product sheets without previous notice. For the latest
updates, refer to www.jokabsafety.com. 2008 v02.
www.jokabsafety.com
3:1
13
Dynamic inputs on Vital/Pl
Dynamic safety circuits, connected to Pluto (with programming) or Vital (without programming).
Vital is a safety module with redundant
safety outputs, which can monitor up to
%DENDOORSENSORSANDSTILLCOMply with the highest safety level. Tina
Duo makes it possible to monitor even
MORESENSORS6ITALOFFERSTHECHOICE
between manual and automatic reset of
THESAFETYCIRCUIT4HE0,#Pluto safety
0,#HASMANYINPUTSFORDYNAMICSAFETY
loop circuits.
Pluto
The active safety sensors for the dynamic safety circuits offer a higher
safety level than passive sensors, since a fault is already detected at its
BEGINNINGORWHENTHEPOWERISSWITCHED/.
Vital
Safety category 4 according to
EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1
0ATENTED
Tina adapter
It can be useful to connect safety
sensors in parallel if, for instance,
a safety light beam/curtain (one of
the sensors) is not supposed to
generate a shutdown, when a robot
is in a safe position, monitored by
%DENTHEOTHERSENSOR
Standard sensors with switching outputs
The Tina adapters are used to adapt switching
sensors to the dynamic safety circuits. This allows the
use of switches with positive opening, contact strips,
emergency stops and light curtains in the dynamic
safety circuits.
3:2
www.jokabsafety.com
1
luto
2
The drawing shows a door, which is monitored by an
ACTIVE%DENDOORSENSORWITHASUPERVISEDMANUAL
reset outside the danger zone.
Tina Duo allows for the addition of one more
DYNAMICCIRCUITWITHUPTOACTIVESENSORS
and traditional sensors, equipped with Tina
OR4INA$UO)TISPOSSIBLETOSELECTARESET
WITH,%$INDICATIONORANAUTOMATICRESETFOR
each Tina Duo on the site.
Reset
3
4
Reset
Reset
5
6
27 sensors and Tina Duo
Tina Duo
Tina Duo
7
Tina Duo
8
LED
9
All active sensors and Tina adaptors
have LEDs, which indicate whether
everything is OK (green), the safety
circuit is interrupted (red), or if the
circuit has been opened by another
series-connected sensor (blinking).
10
11
Tina 8A
Tina 8B Profibus
12
Tina 8A is a connection block for 8 active sensors or sensors equipped with Tina adaptors.
There is also a Tina 8B Profibus version which
TRANSMITSTHEINFORMATIONSIGNALSTOTHE0ROlBUS
www.jokabsafety.com
3:3
13
Approvals:
Why you should
use the Vital safety
system
Features:
Safety solution with different types
of safety components in the same
safety circuit
Eden
.ONCONTACTSENSOR
Spot 35
Safety light beam
INCA 1
%MERGENCYSTOP
Safety circuit in accordance with
category 4 EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1
Vital
Safety module
E-stop
Interlocking device
- To be able to connect several safety components in series (at category 4) and supervise
them with only one safety module!
6ITALISTHEHEARTOFANEWSOLUTIONWHICHMAKESITPOSSIBLE
to install/connect many different types of safety device in
THESAMESAFETYCIRCUITANDSTILLACHIEVESAFETYCATEGORY
INACCORDANCEWITH%.%.)3/4HE6ITAL
module is based upon a dynamic single-channel concept
as opposed to conventional dual-channel safety relays. Up
to 30 dynamic sensors can be connected directly in
the safety circuit and be supervised by only one Vital
module. 4HE6ITALTHEREFOREREPLACESSEVERALSAFETYRELAYS
Safety components with output contacts can be connected
TOTHE6ITALVIALOWCOST4INAADAPTORS
4HE6ITALALSOHASAUTOMATICALLYORMANUALLYSUPERVISEDRESET
selection, dual safety outputs, and an information output for
RESETINDICATIONANDSTATUSINFORMATIONFOR0,#|S
Spot 10
Safety light beam
Strips
Bumpers
Mats
Focus
Safety light grid/
Safety light curtain
- To supervise safety components!
Most safety components on the market can be connected to
THE6ITALMODULE$YNAMICSENSORSENABLESAFETYCATEGORY
to be achieved in a single-channel system. For example Jokab
3AFETY|SDYNAMICNONCONTACT%DENSENSOR3POTLIGHTBEAM
ANDEMERGENCYSTOPSVIA4INAADAPTORSCANBEUSED%VEN
MECHANICALSWITCHESCANBECONNECTEDTO6ITALWITHTHEAID
OF*OKAB3AFETY|S4INAADAPTORS5PTOCOMPONENTSCAN
BECONNECTEDTOA6ITALMODULE
- For easy installation and assembly of a
safety system!
6ITALISASMALLMMINWIDTHELECTRONICSAFETYMODULE
that dynamically supervises a number of safety components.
6ITAL|SDETACHABLECONNECTORBLOCKSSIMPLIFYTHECONNECTION
TROUBLESHOOTING AND EXCHANGE OF MODULES 4HE 6ITAL AND
other safety components can be connected together using
STANDARDCABLESANDWITHCABLESHAVING-CONNECTIONS
- why should you choose Vital?
s3AFETYCATEGORYACCORDINGTO
%.%.)3/DYNAMIC
safety circuit
s7IDTHMM
s#ANACCOMMODATELONGCABLELENGTHS
sDetachable connector blocks
sManually supervised or automatic
reset
s,%$INDICATIONOFPOWERSUPPLY
dynamic signal and outputs
s4WO./SAFETYOUTPUTS
sInformation output with two functions
s#OSTEFFECTIVECABLEROUTINGCONNECTIONS
3:4
www.jokabsafety.com
Connection of units and cable lengths to
Vital
Three connection alternatives
!CCORDINGTO#ATEGORY%.CONNECTIONOFSENSORS
ADAPTORUNITSINTHE6ITALSAFETYCIRCUITmust be made as per
the following connection examples.
Example
5SESEPARATECONNECTIONCABLESFROMEACHSENSORADAPTOR
UNITTOTHE6ITALSAFETYMODULE)NTERCONNECTIONSTOBEMADE
via suitable terminals in the control cabinet.
Example
5SE 4INA!4INA! CONNECTOR BLOCKS TO SIMPLIFY THE
CONNECTIONOFEXTERNALLYMOUNTEDSENSORSADAPTORUNITS/NLY
4INA!4INA!CONNECTORBLOCKSMAYBEUSEDUse of any
other connector blocks will not meet the safety circuit
requirements.
Example
5SE-!AND-"9CONNECTORSTOCONNECTSENSORS
in series/parallel.
Cable lengths and number of sensor/
adaptor units for the three connection
examples.
In order to determine the number of sensor/adaptor units that
CANBECONNECTEDTOA6ITALUNITITMUSTBEREMEMBEREDTHAT
ONE3POT42ISEQUIVALENTTOlVE%DENOR4INAUNITS
5NITSINPARALLELAREEQUALTOONEUNIT4HEFOLLOWINGEXAMPLES
provide guidance AS TO POSSIBLE CONlGURATIONS AND CABLE
lengths using suitable cables.
Example
5PTOMETRESMM2ORMM2 conductors) in total
can be connected to the sensors/units in this example. The
CONNECTIONISEQUIVALENTTO%DENOR4INAUNITS
!MAXIMUMOF%DENOR4INAUNITSCANBECONNECTEDTOTHE
6ITALUNITONAMAXIMUMCABLELENGTHOFMETRESMM2
CONDUCTORSORMETRESMM2 conductors).
Example
5PTOMETRESMM2CONDUCTORSTO4INA!AND
METRECABLESTYPE-#MM2) to each sensor/
UNITCONNECTEDTOTHE4INA!4HISCONNECTIONEXAMPLEIS
EQUIVALENTTO%DENOR4INAUNITS
!MAXIMUMOF4INA!UNITSEQUIVALENTTO%DEN4INA
UNITSXCONNECTEDTO4INA!4INA!CANBE
CONNECTED TO ONE 6ITAL WITH A TOTAL CABLE LENGTH OF METRESMM2)5PTO4INA!UNITSCANBECONNECTED
TOONE6ITALEQUIVALENTTO%DEN4INAUNITSWITHATOTAL
CABLELENGTHOFMETRESMM2TO4INA!
Example
%ITHER X METRE CABLES MM2) from the control
CABINETANDMETRECABLESMM2) to each sensor/unit
or XMETRECABLESMM2) from the control cabinet
AND METRE CABLES MM2)to each sensor/unit. The
CONNECTIONISEQUIVALENTTO%DENOR4INAUNITS
! 4OTAL OF %DEN4INA UNITS CAN BE CONNECTED USING A
MAXIMUMCABLELENGTHOFMETRESMM2ORMETRES
MM2). If the power supply is only fed from one direction
(from one end of the network) the total cable length is reduced
TOAPPROXMETRESMM2ANDMETRESMM2).
1
2
3
4
Connection advice for dynamic sensors to
Pluto and Vital.
Sensors can be connected in many different ways. Here is
some advice that can make connection better and more stable.
The advice is general, but particularly applicable to the use of
4INA!AND4INA!UNITS
s .EVERHAVEMORETHANTHERECOMMENDEDNUMBEROF
sensors in the loop.
s If possible use a switched mains power supply that can
DELIVERASTABLE6$#
s In the sensor system, use as short cables as possible.
s 7HENCONNECTINGA4INA!OR4INA!UNITTHESUPPLY
voltage at the terminal (out at the unit) must not be less
THAN6OLTS
s 5SESCREENEDCABLEPREFERABLYMM2 or thicker, from
the apparatus enclosure and ground it at one end, for
example at the apparatus enclosure, not at both ends.
s Do not route the signal wiring close to heavy current cabling
or close to equipment that gives off a lot of interference,
such as frequency converters for electric motors.
s .EVERCONNECThSPAREvCONDUCTORS
s )F-"AREUSEDFORCONNECTIONOFAPARALLELLOOPWITH
supply to the sensors from two directions, the loop must be
as short as possible. This is because the conductors that
are not being used are also connected, which increases
the capacitive load and reduces the stability of the system.
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
3:5
13
Number of Edens that can be used with Vital and Pluto
4HETABLESBELOWSHOWTHENUMBEROF%DENSTHATCANBECONNECTEDTO6ITALAND0LUTOWITHTHEMAXIMUMVOLTAGE
variation. The values have been established in a laboratory environment. The actual possible number of connected
%DENS MAY THEREFORE DIFFER FROM THOSE GIVEN IN THE TABLE 4HE VALUES SHOULD BE REGARDED AS GUIDELINES *OKAB
3AFETYRECOMMENDSAMAXIMUMOF%DENSPER6ITALANDAMAXIMUMOF%DENSPER0LUTOINPUT4HETABLEWAS
PREPAREDACCORDINGTOMEASUREMENTSWITHCONNECTIONEXAMPLE!)FCONNECTIONEXAMPLE"ANDMM2 cable is
USEDWITHFEEDVOLTAGEFROMTWODIRECTIONSTHEVALUESFORMM2 in the tables are used.
Apparatus enclosure
Terminals
Apparatus enclosure
X number of metres of cable
Terminals
Sensor
X number of metres of cable
9NUMBEROFSENSORS
6ITAL
Sensor
Sensor
9NUMBEROFSENSORS
6ITAL
Sensor
X number of metres of cable
Number of Edens that can be used with Vital
Number
of sensors
%VENMM2
/DDMM2
%VENMM2
/DDMM2
metres
cable
Number of Edens that can be used with Pluto
Number
of sensors
%VENMM2
/DDMM2
%VENMM2
/DDMM2
metres
cable
3:6
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Number of Tinas that can be used with Vital and Pluto
4HE FOLLOWING TABLES SHOW THE NUMBERS OF 4INA! 4INA! 4INA! AND 3MILE4INA THAT CAN BE CONNECTED TO
6ITALAND0LUTOWITHTHEMAXVOLTAGEVARIATION4HEVALUESHAVEBEENESTABLISHEDINALABORATORYENVIRONMENT4HE
actual possible number of connected units may therefore differ from those given in the table. The values should
BEREGARDEDASGUIDELINES*OKAB3AFETYRECOMMENDSAMAXIMUMOFUNITSPER6ITALANDAMAXIMUMOFUNITS
PER0LUTOINPUT4HETABLEWASPREPAREDACCORDINGTOMEASUREMENTSWITHCONNECTIONEXAMPLE!)FCONNECTION
EXAMPLE"ANDMM2CABLEISUSEDTHEVALUESFORMM2 in the tables are used.
Apparatus enclosure
Terminals
Apparatus enclosure
X number of metres of cable
Sensor
Terminals
9NUMBEROFSENSORS
6ITAL
Sensor
X number of metres of cable
3
Sensor
9NUMBEROFSENSORS
6ITAL
Sensor
4
X number of metres of cable
Number
of sensors
Number of Tina-3A, 6A, 7A and Smile Tinas that can be used with Vital
%VENMM2
2
/DDMM2
%VENMM2
5
/DDMM2
6
7
8
metres
cable
Number
of sensors
Number of Tina-3A, 6A, 7A and Smile Tinas that can be used with Pluto
%VENMM2
/DDMM2
%VENMM2
9
/DDMM2
10
11
12
metres
cable
www.jokabsafety.com
3:7
13
Reset connections – Vital 1
Manually supervised reset
Automatic reset
Testing external contactor status
B1
The manually supervised reset contact
CONNECTED TO INPUT 8 MUST BE CLOSED
and opened in order to activate the relay
outputs.
!UTOMATICRESETISSELECTEDWHEN"8
AND8ARECONNECTED4HERELAYOUTPUTS
are then activated at the same time as the
inputs.
#ONTACTORS RELAYS AND VALVES CAN BE
SUPERVISED BY CONNECTING @TEST CONTACTS
BETWEEN " AND 8 "OTH MANUALLY
supervised and automatic reset can be
used.
Information outputs
Connection of S1
Output connection – Vital 1
Relay outputs
"
"
4HE6ITALHASTWO./SAFETYOUTPUTS
In order to protect the output contacts
it is recommended that loads (inductive)
ARESUPPRESSEDBYlTTINGCORRECTLYCHOSEN
6$2SDIODESETC$IODESARETHEBESTARC
suppressors, but will increase the switch-off
time of the load.
9
6ITAL
4HE6ITALHASASINGLECHANGEOVERCONTACT
information relay output.
4HERELAYOUTPUT9ISCONNECTEDINTERNALLY
TO6AND6INTHEFOLLOWINGWAY
s 9ISINTERNALLYCLOSEDTO6" WHENTHE6ITALISNOTRESET
s 9ISINTERNALLYCLOSEDTO6 "WHENTHE6ITALISRESET
Connection examples of safety devices to Vital 1
3:8
www.jokabsafety.com
%VEN NUMBERS OF SENSORS %DEN 3POT
4INA REQUIRES A CONNECTION BETWEEN "
AND3
3 IS NOT TO BE CONNECTED FOR ODD
numbers of sensors.
3EECONNECTIONEXAMPLESBELOWlG!
Technical data – Vital 1
Manufacturer
LED indication
*/+!"3!&%49!"3WEDEN
Article number/Ordering data: 6ITAL
Safety category (according to
EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1)
Colour
"LACKANDBEIGE
Weight
220 g
Connection blocks (detachable)
Max screw torque
-AXCONNECTIONAREA
Solid conductors
#ONDUCTORWITHSOCKETCONTACT
!IRANDCREEPDISTANCE
Fuse
!NEXTERNALFUSESHOULDBElTTED
!4
INTHESUPPLYTO!
Power consumption
$#SUPPLYNOMINALVOLTAGE
(without load)
$#SUPPLYNOMINALVOLTAGE
(with max load)
Dynamic safety circuit
4
2
Reset input X1
Supply for reset input
2ESETCURRENT
Minimum contact closure time
for reset
T
1
Mounting
$).RAIL
/PERATINGTEMPERATURERANGE
Power supply
6$#
6ITAL!!
&ROM6ITALTOSENSORSUNITS"" 6$#
Max line resistance
ATNOMINALVOLTAGETO8
&IXEDLIGHTSUPPLYVOLTAGE/+
&LASHINGLIGHTUNDERVOLTAGEOR
overload.
43IGNALOUT/+23IGNALIN/+
R
2 Indicates that the output relays
have been activated
On
Protection class
%NCLOSURE
#ONNECTIONBLOCKS
/HM
7
7
/UTPUTSIGNAL
Input signal
6$#
M! max. (inrush current M!
during contact closure)
MM$).RAIL
²#TO²#
XMM2XMM2!7'
XMM2XMM2
K6$).6$%
)0)%#
)0)%#
4
This equipment is intended for (CSA/UL Requirement):
sINDOORUSE
sALTITUDEMAXM
sMAXIMUMRELATIVEHUMIDITYATMAX²#ANDDECREASING
LINEARLYTOAT²#
sPOLLUTIONDEGREE
sINSTALLATIONCATEGORYOVERVOLTAGECATEGORY)),OCALLEVEL
appliances,portable equipment, etc. with smaller transient
overvoltage than installation category (overvoltage category) III.
This equipment is not to be used in any other way than stated in
technical description.
Relay information output
(changeover contact)
9 n6
6
-AXLOADON9
6
7
8
M
PAIRS
M
Connector blocks are detachable
(without cables having to be disconnected)
9
MS
MS
MS
MS
10
Relay outputs
2
./
Max switching capacity, resistive
load
Minimum load
#ONTACTMATERIAL
Mechanical life
%XTERNALFUSE%.
5
80 ms
The above limits vary depending on cable size and application.
3EETHECONNECTIONEXAMPLEONPAGESANDINTHE
SECTION#ONNECTIONOFUNITSANDLENGTHSOFCABLINGTO6ITALAND
THENUMBEROF4INA%DENUNITSTO6ITALOR0LUTO
Response time
!T0OWERON
When activating (input-output)
When deactivating (input-output)
!T0OWERLOSS
2
3
.M
Connection of S1
%VENNUMBERSOFSENSORS%DEN3POT424INAREQUIREA
CONNECTIONBETWEEN"AND33ISNOTCONNECTEDFORODD
NUMBERSOFSENSORS/DDNUMBERNOCONNECTIONBETWEEN"AND
3
Number of sensors
-AXNUMBEROF%DEN4INATO
6ITAL
Total max. cable length to
%DEN4INA
-AXNUMBEROF3POT42TO6ITAL
Total max. cable length to Spot
42
1
11
!6!#6!7
M!6
!G#D/
operations
!OR!SLOW
12
)NDICATES6ITALISNOTRESET
)NDICATES6ITALISRESET
M!)NTERNALAUTOMATICFUSE
www.jokabsafety.com
3:9
13
Why could you
use Tina adapter
units?
Approvals:
Application:
!DAPTIONOFMANYDIFFERENTTYPES
OFSAFETYDEVICESTOTHE6ITAL0LUTO
safety circuit
-AX4INAUNITSINSERIES
1
Individual indication for every
connected safety mat, strip
or bumper.
4INA!
4INA"
4INA!
4INA!
4INA!
2
4INA"#
4INA!
Vital/Pluto safety circuit,
category 4, using Tina adapter units
0LUTO
3
6ITAL
4INA!
4INA!
4INA!
4INA"
4INA!
4INA!
4
"YPASSINGLAMPSUPERVISION
Simple connection arrangements
4INA!
- To adapt safety components to a dynamic
single-channel circuit according to safety
category 4!
Tina units allow safety components with mechanical contacts,
SUCHAS%STOPSSWITCHESANDLIGHTBEAMSCURTAINSWITHDUAL
OUTPUTSTOBECONNECTEDINTO6ITALOR0LUTODYNAMICSAFETY
CIRCUITS4HISENABLESSAFETYCATEGORYTOBEACHIEVEDIN
ACCORDANCEWITH%.%.)3/FORTHECONNECTED SAFETY COMPONENTS TOGETHER WITH THE 6ITAL0LUTO
control unit. .OTE*OKAB3AFETYS%DENAND3POTCOMPONENTS
CANBEDIRECTLYCONNECTEDTOTHE0LUTO6ITALDYNAMICCIRCUIT
without using a Tina adapter unit.
- For bypassing of safety components in a
dynamic circuit!
4HE4INA!BYPASSUNITISUSEDFORBYPASSINGOFSAFETYCOMponents in a dynamic circuit and provides the possibility for
supervision of bypass lamp indication. During bypassing of
3:10
safety devices e.g. a light grid or an interlocked gate switch/
sensor, it must only be possible to allow the bypass function if
a lamp indication is given. The lamp indication must therefore
be supervised. With this system it is possible to bypass one
or more safety components at the same time.
- As a connection block for simplified connection to a dynamic circuit!
4HE4INA!!CONNECTIONBLOCKSAREAVAILABLEWITHOR
-CONNECTIONS4HEYAREUSEDTOENABLESEVERALSAFETY
COMPONENTSHAVING-CONNECTIONTERMINATEDCABLESTO
be connected together. The blocks are connected with a
suitable multi-core cable, that contains status information
from each safety component, to the control cabinet. This
ENABLES SIMPLIlED WIRING 4HE CONNECTION BLOCK CONTAINS
electronic circuits which modify the coded dynamic signal
in the safety circuit. .OTE Several connection blocks can be
CONNECTEDTOONE6ITAL0LUTO5SING4INA!!CONNECTION
BLOCKS ELIMINATES CONNECTION FAULTS AND CAN SIGNIlCANTLY
reduce system cable costs.
www.jokabsafety.com
Tina
1
is available in several versions
4INAISAVAILABLEINSEVERALVERSIONSDEPENDINGONTHETYPEOFSAFETYCOMPONENTTHATISCONNECTEDTOTHE6ITALOR0LUTO
CIRCUIT!LSOAVAILABLEISABYPASSINGUNITTHREECONNECTORBLOCKSWITHOR-CONNECTORSANDABLINDPLUGFOR
UNUSEDCONNECTIONS!SANACCESSORYTHEREISA9CONNECTORFORSERIESORPARALLELCONNECTIONANDEVENFORCONNECTION
of light beams with separate transmitter and receiver.
!LL4INAUNITSAREDESIGNEDTODECODETHEDYNAMICSIGNALINTHESAFETYCIRCUITOF6ITAL0LUTO
1
4INA"
4INA!
3
4
3
4INA!
2
4INA!
4INA!
4INA!
4INA"
5
4INA!
4INA!
4INA"#
4INA!
4INA!
Tina 2A/B, Tina 3A and Tina 7A are used to connect safety
components with mechanical contacts, such as emergency
stops, switches and light curtains/light beams with relay
OUTPUTS./4%)NORDERTOMAINTAINSAFETYCATEGORYAND
TOREDUCETHERISKOFELECTRICALINTERFERENCE4INA!!AND
!UNITSMUSTBEINSTALLEDWITHINTHESAMEPHYSICALENCAPsulation as the safety component that is to be monitored,
and this is to be connected to the Tina unit with as short a
cable as possible.
Tina 10A/B/C units are used for connection of Focus light
BEAMSCURTAINSTO6ITALOR0LUTO4INA"HASANEXTRA-
connector that enables reset, a reset lamp and switching of
THE&OCUSSUPPLYVOLTAGE4HE4INA#HASANADDITIONAL
-CONNECTORTHATPERMITSA&OCUSTRANSMITTERTORECEIVE
power.
Tina 4A, Tina 8A, Tina 11A and Tina 12A are used as terMINALBLOCKSANDSIMPLIFYCONNECTIONTOA6ITALSAFETYCIRCUIT
%ACHSAFETYCOMPONENTISCONNECTEDTOTHETERMINALBLOCK
VIAAN-CONNECTION!TERMINALBLOCKISCONNECTEDTOTHE
apparatus enclosure by means of a cable that also contains
status information from each safety component that is conNECTEDTO4INA!4INA!ANDSUMMEDINFORMATIONFROM4INA
!4INA!4HEREISALSOA4INA"0ROlBUSWHEREBYTHE
INFORMATIONSIGNALSGOTOA0ROlBUSCONNECTOR4INA!MUST
BEUSEDASABLANKINGPLUGINUNUSED-CONNECTIONS
2
4
4INA!
6
7
8
9
4INA!
Tina 6A is used to connect door sensitive edges and
safety mats, and provides an indication for each unit (Tina
!MAYALSOBEUSED)FA4INA!ISCONNECTEDCLOSE
to the edge or mat, the risk of electrical interference is
reduced.
Tina 5A is used as a bypass for safety components in a
6ITALSAFETYCIRCUITANDFORMONITORINGLAMPINDICATIONSINTHE
case of a bypass.
10
11
- why should I choose Tina?
s 3AFETYCIRCUITCATEGORY%.%.)3/
s )NDIVIDUALSTATUSINDICATIONOFEVERYCONNECTEDUNITIN
the safety circuit
12
s 3UPERVISIONOFLAMPINDICATINGBYPASSINGOFSAFETY
device
s 1UICKRELEASE-CONNECTOR
www.jokabsafety.com
3:11
13
Connection examples of sensors to Tina 8A
Tina 4A
Safety-PLC,
Pluto
Safety module,
Vital
Tina 4A and Tina 8A
Tina 4A and Tina 8A are connection blocks equipped
with electronic circuits which modify the coded dynamic
signal in the Vital/Pluto safety circuit.
The cable between Vital and Tina 4A/ 8A
has conductors for:
s POWERSUPPLY6$#
s coded dynamic signal output/input
s Information signals from each sensor
connected to the block.
3:12
Each M12 connector on Tina 4A /8A contains:
s POWERSUPPLY6$#
s short circuit supervised input and output which require
CONNECTIONSOF%DEN4INAOR3POT42
s output information from sensor
Notice3EVERAL4INA!AND4INA!UNITSCANBECONNECTEDTO6ITAL0LUTO3UITABLECABLESWITHMM2 feed
CONDUCTORANDMM2INFORMATIONCONDUCTORARE#FOR
THE4INA!AND#FOR4INA!
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Description of the image on the previous page
Connection 1
/NE%DENISCONNECTEDDIRECTLYTOTHE4INA!4HE%DEN
STATUSISSHOWNBYAN,%$ONTHE!DAMSENSOR!STATUS
INFORMATIONSIGNALISALSOCONNECTEDTO4INA!
Connection 5
/NE3MILE IS CONNECTED TO THE 4INA ! 4HE INFORMATION
SHOWN BY AN ,%$ ON THE 3MILE IS ALSO CONNECTED TO THE
TERMINALBLOCKONTHE4INA!
Connection 2
/NE&OCUSSAFETYLIGHTGRIDISCONNECTEDTOTHE4INA!
VIAA4INA!4HEOUTPUTFROMTHE4INA!ISVIAA-
CONNECTOR 4HE CONNECTION BETWEEN 4INA ! AND 4INA
! IS ACHIEVED USING A CABLE WITH - CONNECTORS ON
each end.
4HE4INA!HASTWO,%$SWHICHSHOWTHESTATUSOF
the light grid. The same status information signal is conNECTEDTOTHE4INA!4INA!ANDTHE&OCUSTRANSMITTER
ARECONNECTEDVIAAN-"TO4INA!
Connection 6
!SAFETYINTERLOCKSWITCHISCONNECTEDVIAA4INA!MOUNTED
DIRECTLYONTHESWITCH4HEOUTPUTFROMTHE4INA!ISVIAA
-CONNECTOR4HECONNECTIONBETWEENTHE4INA!AND
THE4INA!ISTHEREFORESIMPLYMADEWITHACABLEWITH-
CONNECTORS ON EACH END /N THE 4INA ! THERE IS A ,%$
which shows the status of the switch. The same information
SIGNALISCONNECTEDTOTHE4INA!
Connection 3
!3POTLIGHTBEAMISCONNECTEDDIRECTLYTO4INA!!
9CONNECTOR-"FOR-PLUGSISCONNECTEDTOTHE
transmitter and the receiver. The status information shown
ONTHE3POT,%$ISALSOCONNECTEDTO4INA!
Connection 4
!SAFETYMATSAMEFORSAFETYSTRIPANDSAFETYBUMPERIS
CONNECTEDVIAA4INA!TOTHE4INA!4WO,%$SIN4INA
!SHOWSTHESTATUSOFTHEMAT4HESAMESTATUSINFORMATIONSIGNALISCONNECTEDTO4INA!
Connection 7
!3POTTRANSMITTERANDRECEIVERARECONNECTEDDIRECTLY
TOTOTHE4INA!VIAA-"9CONNECTOR4HESTATUS
INFORMATIONSHOWNBYTHE,%$ONTHE3POTISALSOCONNECTED
TOTHE4INA!
Connection 8
4INA ! IS A PLUG WHICH HAS TO BE CONNECTED TO 4INA !
inputs when no sensor is required, in order to complete the
safety connection circuit.
Note: !LLINPUTCONNECTORSONTHE4INA!MUSTBECONNECTED
TOSENSORSORHAVE4INA!PLUGSlTTED
2
3
4
5
6
7
HH3301D Connection example – Vital 1 and Tina 8A with different safety device types
8
9
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
3:13
13
Technical data – Tina
Manufacturer
*/+!"3!&%49!"3WEDEN
Article number/Ordering data:
4INA!
4INA!
4INA"
4INA!
4INA!PS
4INA!
4INA!
4INA!
4INA!
4INA!
4INA"0ROl"US
4INA!
4INA"
4INA#
4INA!
4INA!
Technical data – Tina 1A, 2A, 2B, 3A, 4A, 6A, 7A, 8A and 11A
Safety category with Vital or Pluto
(according to EN 954-1/EN ISO
13849-1)
LED on Tina 1A, 2A, 2B, 3A, 6A,
7A and 11A
'REEN
&LASHING
2ED
M!
M!
M!
M!
Tina 3A, 6A och 7A
#URRENTTHROUGHSAFETYDEVICE
contacts
Short circuit current between
contacts
M!
M!
Tina 4A and Tina 8A
Max torque for terminal block:
.M
Temperature range
stock
operating
²#TO²#
²#TO²#
Material
based on polyamid
Max connected units/cable
length
SEEDATAFOR6ITAL
Protection class
)04INA!)0
Connections for 1A, 2A, 2B, 3A,
4A, 6A, 7A, 8A and 11A
BROWN
svart
Färg
Current consumption
4INA!!"AND!
4INA!!AND!
4INA!
4INA!
white (2)
BLUE
BLACK
GREY
PROTECTION/+SAFETYCIRCUITINTACT
PROTECTION/+SAFETYCIRCUITWAS
interrupted earlier
protection open, safety circuit
interrupted (continuous red lamp
NOTUSEDIN4INA!!OR!
DIODESON4INA!mASHWHEN
the connected unit opens)
6$#
6$#4INA!!!
dynamic input signal
6$#
dynamic output signal
indication output
6$#WHEN,%$IS'REENOR&LASHING
TOLERANCE6$#M!MAX
6$#WHEN,%$IS2EDTOLERANCE6$#
#ONNECTIONBLOCK4INA!STATUSFORCONNECTEDUNIT
ACCORDINGTOCONNECTION
#ONNECTIONBLOCK4INA!SEEABOVE4).!!
Note. Shielded cable is recommended between cabinet and Tina
!!3HIELDTOBECONNECTEDTOGROUNDINCABINETONLY
Connection of Tina 1A, 2A, 3A, 4A, 6A, 7A and 8A
-
male
,%$
Tina 1A
Tina 7A*
See connection example ((".
Tina 2A/B
*
*
brown
white
blue
black
grey
M20
,YSDIOD
*
4INA!
*
See connection example(!!
Tina 4A
brown
white
blue
black
grey
,%$
4INA"
Σ info
See connection example(!!
Tina 3A
-
male
M20
brown
blue
See connection example(($
Tina 8A
]4INA!PS
only
green
*
orange
*
,%$X
Σ info
See connection example(!!
See connection example (($.
-
male
-
female
Tina 6A
Tina 11A
,%$X
3EETHECONNECTIONEXAMPLES("!!
See connection example((!
* )NORDERTOACHIEVECATEGORYACCORDINGTO%.%.)3/
THECONNECTIONTOTHESAFETYDEVICEMUSTBEMADEINSIDE
ANENCLOSUREIESAFETYSWITCH%STOP
3:14
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Tina 5A
Bypassing of Eden and Tina units.
)FONEORMORE%DENOR4INAUNITSAREBYPASSEDBYA
4INA!ADIODESUCHASA.MUSTBEINSERTEDWITHFORWARDCURRENTOUTFROMPINOFTHELAST
BYPASSEDUNIT)FONEORMORE%DENOR4INAUNITSARE
BYPASSEDBYONEORMORE%DENOR4INAUNITSDIRECT
TOEACHOTHERADIODESUCHASA.MUSTBE
inserted by the last unit in both loops with forward
CURRENTOUTFROMPIN2EFERTOEXAMPLE($!
)NTHECASEOFBYPASSINGOFA4INA!"OR#OROF
more than one unit towards each other, it is recomMENDEDTHATA4INA!OR--ISUSED3EETHE
EXAMPLES(%#$%&OR'
Function
The Tina 5A is designed for bypassing of safety devices connected to the Vital/Pluto safety circuit and
for supervision of lamp indication.
During bypassing of safety devices e.g. a light grid or an
interlocked gate, it must only be possible to allow the bypass
function if a lamp indication is on. The lamp indication must
therefore be supervised. Whether indication is required dePENDSONTHESPECIlCSITUATIONANDRESULTOFRISKANALYSIS
7HENTHE4INA!RECEIVESACODEDDYNAMICSIGNALTO3
ANDTHEBYPASSINDICATIONLAMPISONCONNECTEDACROSS,
,ABYPASSINGOUTPUTSIGNALISPROVIDEDON3AND3!
broken or short circuit in the indication lamp leads to an interRUPTIONOFTHEBYPASSOUTPUTSIGNALON3AND3THEREFORE
stopping the bypassing.
4HEDYNAMICSIGNALTO3ON4INA!MUSTBETHEINPUT
SIGNALFROMTHElRSTOFTHESAFETYDEVICESINTENDEDTOBYPASS
The signal can be connected via output contacts from a
safety relay, a safety timer or be initiated via a unit providing
THEDYNAMICCODEDSIGNALASFOREXAMPLEAN%DENSENSOROR
a Spot light beam.
4HE DYNAMIC CODED OUTPUT SIGNAL FROM 3 OR 3 IS TO BE
connected to the output signal from the last safety device
which is to be bypassed.
S2 is used if:
s ANodd number of dynamic safety units is to be bypassed
using an odd number of dynamic safety units. See drawING(%#
s ANeven number of dynamic safety units is to be bypassed
using an even number of dynamic safety units. See drawING(%&
S3 is used if:
s ANodd number of dynamic safety units is to be bypassed
using an even number of dynamic safety units. See drawING(%$
s ANeven number of dynamic safety units is to be bypassed
using an odd number of dynamic safety units. See drawING(%%
The total number of dynamic safety units is calculated by
ADDINGTHENUMBEROF%DEN3POTAND4INAUNITSCONNECTED
INTHE6ITALCIRCUIT3EETHECONNECTIONEXAMPLES(%#
$%&OR'
2
3
4
Technical data Tina 5A
Manufacturer
5
*/+!"3!&%49!"3WEDEN
Article number/Ordering data: 4INA!
Safety category together with
Vital/Pluto, EN 954-1/
EN ISO 13849-1
Colour
"LACKANDBEIGE
Weight
G
Bypass connection
4INA!CANBYPASS
MAX%DEN4INAUNITSOR
3POT42
Connections
!!3UPPLY
3)NPUTDYNAMICSIGNAL
3/UTPUTDYNAMICSIGNAL
MODIlED
3/UTPUTDYNAMICSIGNAL
MODIlEDTWICE
,,"YPASSINDICATIONLAMP
(or resistor when lamp is not
required 820 ohm/2W.
4HE4INA!ISSUPPLIEDWITHTHE
resistor connected across termiNALS,,4HISRESISTORMUSTBE
taken away and replaced with a
suitable rated lamp when bypass indication is required).
9)NFORMATIONOUTPUTBYPASSON
LED indication
3IGNAL
/N
-UTE
Current consumption A1-A2
.OBYPASS
$URINGBYPASSUSING7
indication lamp
7
6$#
M!
M!MAX
8
M!MAX
MIN7MAX7
9
M!MAX
$YNAMICINPUT3OK
Supply voltage ok
$YNAMICOUTPUTON33
AND6$#TO,,OK
10
M!
11
M!
Mounting
MM$).RAIL
Operating temperature range
²#TO²#
Protection class
%NCLOSURE
#ONNECTIONBLOCKS
)0
)0
www.jokabsafety.com
6
12
3:15
13
Tina 10A, 10B and 10C
Technical data for Tina 10A, 10B and 10C
4INA!"#ARETHREECONNECTIONUNITSWITH-
connections, that make it easy to connect a light
CURTAINORLIGHTBEAM&OCUSWITH/33$OUTPUTSTO
THEDYNAMICSAFETYCIRCUITSOF6ITALAND0LUTO4HISALSO
ENABLESCOMPLETEEXTERNALINTERCONNECTIONSWITH-
cabling, which reduces the cabling to and connecTIONSINTHEAPPARATUSENCLOSURE4INA!"#HAS
,%$SFORFUNCTIONINDICATIONWITHGREENREDORmASHing green/red indications.
Manufacturer
*/+!"3!&%49!"3WEDEN
Article number/
ordering data:
4INA!
4INA"
4INA#
Colour
black
Safety category with Vital 1 or
Pluto in accordance with
EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1
Operating voltage
4INA!"#
6$#
LED on Tina 10A/B/C
'REEN
&LASHING
2ED
&OCUS/+SAFETYCIRCUITCLOSED
&OCUS/+SAFETYCIRCUITOPEN
Focus open, safety circuit open
Current consumption
Tina 10AHASTWO-CONNECTIONSTHATARECONNECTEDTO6ITAL0LUTOANDALIGHTCURTAINLIGHT
beam Focus receiver. See the connection examples
((&(2,
4INA!"#
M!
Ambient temperature
3TORAGE
/PERATION
ƒ#TO²#
ƒ#TO²#
Material
polyamide-based
Enclosure classification
)0
Tina 10BHASTHREE-CONNECTIONSTHATARECONNECTEDTO6ITAL0LUTOANDALIGHTCURTAINLIGHT
BEAM&OCUSRECEIVERAND!NEXTERNALRESETBUTTON
ANDMUTINGLAMPSUCHASUNIT&-)#
3EETHECONNECTIONEXAMPLES(2,
Number of units connected
to Vital
-AXNUMBEROF4INA!
-AXNUMBEROF4INA"#
Tina 10CHASTHREE-CONNECTIONSTHATARECONNECTEDTO6ITAL0LUTOANDALIGHTCURTAINLIGHT
BEAM&OCUSRECEIVERANDALIGHTCURTAINLIGHTBEAM
Focus Transmitter. See the connection examples
(($(2,
Number of units connected to
one Pluto input
-AXNUMBEROF4INA!"#
Connections
4INA!
4INA"
4INA#
Tina 10A, 10B and 10C connections
Tina 10A
Tina 10B
2
1
1
3
3:16
Tina 10C
2
2
1
3
3
www.jokabsafety.com
OFF
OFFWHEN&OCUSISSUPPLIEDVIA
6ITALANDARESETLAMPISUSED
OFFWHEN&OCUSISSUPPLIED
with power separately or no
reset lamp is used
2 off
TO6ITALOR0LUTO
TO&OCUSRECEIVER
TO6ITALOR0LUTO
TO&OCUSRECEIVER
TO2ESETUNIT
TO6ITALOR0LUTO
TO&OCUSRECEIVER
TO&OCUSTRANSMITTER
1
Tina 12A
➌
Technical data for Tina 12A
➋
Manufacturer
*/+!"3!&%49!"3WEDEN
Article number/
ordering data:
4INA!
Colour
black
Safety category with Vital 1 or
Pluto in accordance with
EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1
4INA!ISAJUNCTIONBLOCKWITHAN-CONNECTOR
It enables quick and easy connection of two Dalton
process locks OR-AGNE!WITHINTEGRATED%DEN
SENSORSVIAACABLETOA0LUTOSAFETY0,#ORA6ITAL
SAFETYCIRCUIT4HE4INA!HAS,%$INDICATIONAND
an information output to report the status of the
safety sensors.
Operating voltage
6$#
4HE4INA!HASTHREEPOLE-CONNECTORSTHAT
are connected to
10LUTO6ITALINFORMATIONFORTHESENSORANDLOCKAND
a lock signal
2$ALTONWITH%DENNO
3$ALTONWITH%DENNO
➊
➋
➌
LED on Tina 12A
'REEN
&LASHING
Safety circuit closed and sensor
/+
Safety circuit or sensor open
2ED
.OTUSED
Current consumption
M!
Material
polyamide-based
Enclosure classification
)0
Number of units connected
to Vital
-AXNUMBEROF4INA!
OFF
Number of units connected to
one Pluto input
-AXNUMBEROF4INA!
Connections 1
WHITE
brown (2)
GREEN
YELLOW
GRAY
➊
PINK
BLUE
red (8)
2
3
4
5
OFF
Function
$YNAMICINPUTSIGNALTO%DEN
0OWERSUPPLYVOLTAGE6$#
FOR$ALTONAND%DEN
,OCKINGSIGNALTO$ALTON
.OTUSED
)NFORMATIONOUTPUT%DEN
%DEN/+
Dynamic output signal from
%DEN
6$#
)NFORMATIONOUTPUT$ALTON
Dalton 2 = locked
Cabling
6
7
8
9
Advantages:
!REAMM2
!LWAYSSCREENEDCABLE
The screen is always connected
to negative in male connectors.
-ANYOF*OKAB3AFETYgSPRODUCTSARECONNECTEDUSINGSTANDARD-
connectors. This facilitates installation, saving a lot of time, and also
dramatically reduces the risk of incorrect connection.
7EHAVETHEREFOREDEVELOPEDCABLESWITHCONDUCTORSXMM
SCREENINGORCONDUCTORSXMMSCREENINGWHICHOFFERTHE
advantages that we believe a good cable should have. These are available in any length and in various standard lengths, with moulded straight
or angled male or female connectors. 0ARTICULARLYSUITABLECABLESFORTHE
4INA!AND4INA!UNITSARE#AND#4HEYHAVETHICKERMM2
CONDUCTORSFORTHEFEEDLINEANDMM2FORTHEOTHERCONDUCTORS
screening. 2EFERTOTHECOMPONENTLISTFORTHEVARIANTSTHATAREAVAILABLE
www.jokabsafety.com
The guide pin in the small
connector is indicated by a
recessed arrow that is easy to
recognise.
10
11
#ONVENIENTCABLEIN06#
The cable is also available in
any length
3:17
12
13
’Y’ branch with M12 connection and M12-connection device with screw connectors
M12-3A
M12-3B
Female
Female
M12-3D
Female
M12-3E
Female
2
Female
M12-3M
Female
Female
Female
2
2
2
Male
Female
Male
See the connection
EXAMPLES(!#$
nCHAP
((!$nCHAP
2
Male
See the connection
EXAMPLES(!#$
(($&
(($nCHAP
Female
See the connection
examples
("!nCHAP
(2/,nCHAP
Male
Male
See the connection exAMPLES("!!
!AND!nCHAP
See the connection
examples
(($nCHAP
((%nCHAP
See product list for applications
M12-C01
Female
M12-C02
M12-C03
M12-C04
Male
Female
Male
Female
Male
Example of safety component connections based on ’Y’ branch
2
3
2
2
2
1
2
1
3:18
2
3
1
4INA!
2
3
1
3 4INA#
1
1
2
3
1
4INA!
1
2
3
www.jokabsafety.com
1
3
-"
2
3
1
3
-!
One Vital supervises the entire robot cell!
The cell has dynamic protection connected to
a Vital, with the following functions:
1
2
er
s 4WOCHARGINGSTATIONS
!TEACHCHARGINGSTATIONALIGHTCURTAINCHECKSFOR
anyone putting their hand into a risk area, and an
%DENSENSORCHECKSWHETHERAROBOTISINSIDETHE
same risk area. This means that a stop is only ordered if a robot and a person are in the same area.
When the station is clear, the person presses the
reset button connected to the light curtain.
3
A
er
B
4
2ESET
,IGHTCURTAIN
2ESET Door/
%MERGENCYSTOP
s &ENCEWITH%DENINTERLOCKEDDOOR
If the door is opened, the robot stops. To reset
the robot system, the door must be closed and a
supervisory reset button operated.
A
Door
Dynamic safety circuit in accordance with
category 4 EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1
s 4HREEEMERGENCYSTOPSWITH4INAUNITS
If any of the emergency stop buttons is pressed,
the robot performs an immediate emergency stop.
5
2ESET
,IGHTCURTAIN
B
6
7
Connection example for the protection solution above
Smile 11EA Tina
Eden
Focus
Reset
FMI
Eden Smile 11EA Tina
Eden
Focus
Reset Smile 11EA Tina
FMI
8
Transmitter Receiver
Transmitter Receiver
Tina 1A
2
2
3
M12-3B 1
2
1
3
3
M12-3B 1
Tina 10B
2
9
2
1
3
10
Tina 10B
3
2
3
M12-3M
M12-3M
1
1
11
Tina 8A
Pluto
0LUTO
12
Vital
www.jokabsafety.com
3:19
13
Remote sensor expansion unit
with reset capability for Vital/Pluto
Tina Duo 1/2
Approvals:
Safety unit for:
%XPANSIONUNITFORINCREASing the number of sensors
INA6ITALOR0LUTOCIRCUITWITH
automatic or manual local
reset.
Features:
4HE 4INA $UO UNIT CAN EXPAND THE NUMBER OF SENSORS IN A 6ITAL0LUTO
SYSTEM )T CREATES A FURTHER DYNAMIC CIRCUIT IN WHICH UP TO ACTIVE
SENSORS STANDARD SENSORS WITH 4INA OR OFF 4INA $UOS CAN BE
connected. It also permits resetting of the new sensors. The Tina Duo
SPLITSTHESIGNALINTOTWOCIRCUITS!AND"#IRCUIT"ISTHEEXPANDED
CIRCUITWHEREEXTERNALRESETISPOSSIBLECIRCUIT!ISRESETBYTHE6ITAL
0LUTO4HE4INA$UOISEQUIVALENTINTERMSOFTIMINGTOTHREE%DENOR
4INAUNITSINCIRCUIT!
4WOJUMPERSARELOCATEDUNDERTHEBOTTOMCOVER4HEYDElNE-ANUAL
!UTO2ESETAND%VEN/DDNUMBEROFSENSORSBETWEEN""
4HE4INA$UOCONTAINSAgSLIMMEDDOWNgVERSIONOF6ITALTHATMONITORS
CIRCUIT"4HEREFOREITISPOSSIBLETOCONNECTASMANYSENSORSTOCIRCUIT
" AS FOR A hREGULARv 6ITAL )T IS HOWEVER IMPORTANT TO NOTE THAT WHEN A
SENSORISOPENEDINCIRCUIT"THEFALLTIMEOFTHEMAINUNIT0LUTO6ITALIS
INCREASEDBYMS&OREACHADDITIONAL4INA$UOTHATISCONNECTEDITIS
possible to select local resetting with indication, or automatic resetting.
,OCALRESET
4INA$UO
%XTERNALWITH&-)%
4INA$UO
Integral push button.
%ASYCONNECTIONWITH
-CONNECTORS
,%$INDICATIONFOR
%VEN/DDNUMBERS
of sensors.
-ANUAL!UTOMATICRESET
Information output.
The system can have 'an infinite' number of sensors connected to one
main Vital unit.
Reset
Pluto
Vital
supervise
door
3:20
www.jokabsafety.com
Technical data Tina Duo 1/2
Manufacturer
*/+!"3!&%49!"3WEDEN
Ordering data:
4INA$UO
WITH-CONNECTORFORRESET
button)
4INA$UOWITH
integral reset button)
Safety category with Vital 1 or
Pluto in accordance with
EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1
Colour:
1
4INA$UO
2
9ELLOWPROlLEWITHBLACKFRONT
and end covers
Weight:
G
Power supply:
6$#RIPPLE
Consumption:
7
Response time:
!DDMSFOREACHCIRCUIT
Connectors:
-MALEANDFEMALE
LED's:
)NFO!UTO-ANUAL2ESET
%VEN/DD
Jumpers behind
bottom cover:
-ANUAL!UTOMATIC2ESET
%VEN/DDNUMBERSOFSENSORS
Dimensions:
XXMM
3
Tina Duo 2
4
5
6
7
Connection diagram
8
"ROWN
White
"LUE
"LACK
'REY
9
").
POLEMALE-CONNECTOR
"/54).
POLEFEMALE-CONNECTOR
"ROWN White
"ROWN White
"LUE
"LACK
"LUE
"LACK
10
'REY
'REY
!/54
POLEFEMALE-CONNECTOR
11
!).
POLEMALE-CONNECTOR
"ROWN White
"ROWN White
"LUE
"LACK
"LUE
"LACK
'REY
12
'REY
Man./ %VEN
!UTO /DD
www.jokabsafety.com
3:21
13
Tina Duo with two separate local automatic reset circuits
Tina Duo 2 and Tina 4A with manual local reset
3:22
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Tina Duo with three circuits each with separate manual reset and with or
without external power supply
2
3
4
5
6
7
HH3300F Vital 1 with Tina 8B Profibus and different types of safety devices
8
9
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
3:23
13
Contents
Page
HH3300F Vital 1 with Tina 8B Profibus and different types of safety devices ____________ 3:23
HA3300A Connection example Vital 1 ____________________________________________ 3:25
HA3301A Vital 1 with several Eden ______________________________________________ 3:25
HA3302A Vital 1 and Tina 4A with 4 Eden ________________________________________ 3:26
HA3302B Vital 1 and 2 Tina 4A and 4 Eden and emergency stop _____________________ 3:26
HA3303A Vital 1 with emergency stop/Tina 2A_____________________________________ 3:27
HA3304A Vital 1 with emergency stop/Tina 3A ____________________________________ 3:27
HA3305A Vital 1 with Eden and lightgrid Focus/Tina 10C____________________________ 3:28
HA3306C Vital 1 with 2 lightbeams Spot _________________________________________ 3:28
HA3306D Vital 1 with 3 lightbeams Spot__________________________________________ 3:29
HA3307A Vital 1 with Eden, lightgrid/Tina 3A and emergency stop/Tina 7A _____________ 3:29
HD3800A Vital 1 with safety light beam Spot ______________________________________ 3:30
HD3801A Vital 1, series and parallel _____________________________________________ 3:30
HE3811A Safety light beam Spot with time-limited reset _____________________________ 3:31
HE3824C Lightbeam with time-limited bypass 0,2–40 s. ____________________________ 3:31
HE3824D Eden and bypassed lightbeam with Eden ________________________________ 3:32
HE3824E Lightbeams with time-limited bypass 0,2–40 s. ____________________________ 3:32
HE3824F Eden and 2 bypass lightbeams with Eden ________________________________ 3:33
HE3824G Eden and 2 separetely bypassed lightbeams _____________________________ 3:33
HH3300A Vital 1 with different types of safety devices and M12–3A __________________ 3:34
HH3300D Vital 1 with Tina 4A and different types of safety devices ___________________ 3:34
HH3302D Vital 1 with Tina 8A and different types of safety devices ___________________ 3:35
HH3301E Connection example Vital 1 ____________________________________________ 3:35
HH3400A2 Vital 1 Solutions ____________________________________________________ 3:36
HB0005A Vital with Eden and Smile emergency stop, with separate reset ______________ 3:36
HB0006A Vital with 4 Eden units + Reset via M12-3E and Tina 4A ____________________ 3:37
HB0007A Vital with two Dalton units via Tina 12A __________________________________ 3:37
HB0001A Pluto with Smile emergency stop unit + Reset via M12-3E and Adam via Tina 4A _ 3:38
HB0002A Pluto with five Eden units, for two zones via M12-3E and Tina 4A ____________ 3:38
HB0003A Pluto with five Smile emergency stop units, via Tina 11A and Tina 4A _________ 3:39
HB0004A Pluto with different zones for Eden + Reset and two Eden units +via M12-3E _____ 3:39
3:24
www.jokabsafety.com
HA3300A Connection example Vital 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
It is the user's responsibilty to ensure that all control devices are correctly installed, cared for and operated to meat European, nationel and local codes/regulations. Subject to change without notice.
7
HA3301A Vital 1 with several Eden
8
9
10
11
12
It is the user's responsibilty to ensure that all control devices are correctly installed, cared for and operated to meat European, nationel and local codes/regulations. Subject to change without notice.
www.jokabsafety.com
3:25
13
HA3302A Vital 1 and Tina 4A with 4 Eden
It is the user's responsibilty to ensure that all control devices are correctly installed, cared for and operated to meat European, nationel and local codes/regulations. Subject to change without notice.
HA3302B Vital 1 and 2 Tina 4A and 4 Eden and emergency stop
It is the user's responsibilty to ensure that all control devices are correctly installed, cared for and operated to meat European, nationel and local codes/regulations. Subject to change without notice.
3:26
www.jokabsafety.com
HA3303A Vital 1 with emergency stop/Tina 2A
1
2
3
4
5
6
It is the user's responsibilty to ensure that all control devices are correctly installed, cared for and operated to meat European, nationel and local codes/regulations. Subject to change without notice.
7
HA3304A Vital 1 with emergency stop/Tina 3A
8
9
10
11
12
It is the user's responsibilty to ensure that all control devices are correctly installed, cared for and operated to meat European, nationel and local codes/regulations. Subject to change without notice.
www.jokabsafety.com
3:27
13
HA3305A Vital 1 with Eden and lightgrid Focus/Tina 10C
It is the user's responsibilty to ensure that all control devices are correctly installed, cared for and operated to meat European, nationel and local codes/regulations. Subject to change without notice.
HA3306C Vital 1 with 2 lightbeams Spot
It is the user's responsibilty to ensure that all control devices are correctly installed, cared for and operated to meat European, nationel and local codes/regulations. Subject to change without notice.
3:28
www.jokabsafety.com
HA3306D Vital 1 with 3 lightbeams Spot
1
2
3
4
5
6
It is the user's responsibilty to ensure that all control devices are correctly installed, cared for and operated to meat European, nationel and local codes/regulations. Subject to change without notice.
7
HA3307A Vital 1 with Eden, lightgrid/Tina 3A and emergency stop/Tina 7A
8
9
10
11
12
It is the user's responsibilty to ensure that all control devices are correctly installed, cared for and operated to meat European, nationel and local codes/regulations. Subject to change without notice.
www.jokabsafety.com
3:29
13
HD3800A Vital 1 with safety light beam Spot
It is the user's responsibilty to ensure that all control devices are correctly installed, cared for and operated to meat European, nationel and local codes/regulations. Subject to change without notice.
HD3801A Vital 1, series and parallel
It is the user's responsibilty to ensure that all control devices are correctly installed, cared for and operated to meat European, nationel and local codes/regulations. Subject to change without notice.
3:30
www.jokabsafety.com
HE3811A Safety light beam Spot with time-limited reset
1
2
3
4
5
6
It is the user's responsibilty to ensure that all control devices are correctly installed, cared for and operated to meat European, nationel and local codes/regulations. Subject to change without notice.
7
HE3824C Lightbeam with time-limited bypass 0,2–40 s.
8
9
10
11
12
It is the user's responsibilty to ensure that all control devices are correctly installed, cared for and operated to meat European, nationel and local codes/regulations. Subject to change without notice.
www.jokabsafety.com
3:31
13
HE3824D Eden and bypassed lightbeam with Eden
It is the user's responsibilty to ensure that all control devices are correctly installed, cared for and operated to meat European, nationel and local codes/regulations. Subject to change without notice.
HE3824E Lightbeams with time-limited bypass 0,2–40 s.
It is the user's responsibilty to ensure that all control devices are correctly installed, cared for and operated to meat European, nationel and local codes/regulations. Subject to change without notice.
3:32
www.jokabsafety.com
HE3824F Eden and 2 bypass lightbeams with Eden
1
2
3
4
5
6
It is the user's responsibilty to ensure that all control devices are correctly installed, cared for and operated to meat European, nationel and local codes/regulations. Subject to change without notice.
7
HE3824G Eden and 2 separetely bypassed lightbeams
8
9
10
11
12
It is the user's responsibilty to ensure that all control devices are correctly installed, cared for and operated to meat European, nationel and local codes/regulations. Subject to change without notice.
www.jokabsafety.com
3:33
13
HH3300A Vital 1 with different types of safety devices and M12–3A
It is the user's responsibilty to ensure that all control devices are correctly installed, cared for and operated to meat European, nationel and local codes/regulations. Subject to change without notice.
HH3300D Vital 1 with Tina 4A and different types of safety devices
a
b
c
a
It is the user's responsibilty to ensure that all control devices are correctly installed, cared for and operated to meat European, nationel and local codes/regulations. Subject to change without notice.
3:34
www.jokabsafety.com
b
Dominate
HH3302D Vital 1 with Tina 8A and different types of safety devices
1
2
3
4
5
6
It is the user's responsibilty to ensure that all control devices are correctly installed, cared for and operated to meat European, nationel and local codes/regulations. Subject to change without notice.
7
HH3301E Connection example Vital 1
8
9
10
11
12
It is the user's responsibilty to ensure that all control devices are correctly installed, cared for and operated to meat European, nationel and local codes/regulations. Subject to change without notice.
www.jokabsafety.com
3:35
13
HH3400A2 Vital 1 Solutions
It is the user's responsibilty to ensure that all control devices are correctly installed, cared for and operated to meat European, nationel and local codes/regulations. Subject to change without notice.
HB0005A Vital with Eden and Smile emergency stop, with separate reset
It is the user's responsibilty to ensure that all control devices are correctly installed, cared for and operated to meat European, nationel and local codes/regulations. Subject to change without notice.
3:36
www.jokabsafety.com
HB0006A Vital with 4 Eden units + Reset via M12-3E and Tina 4A
1
2
3
4
5
6
It is the user's responsibilty to ensure that all control devices are correctly installed, cared for and operated to meat European, nationel and local codes/regulations. Subject to change without notice.
7
HB0007A Vital with two Dalton units via Tina 12A
8
9
10
11
12
It is the user's responsibilty to ensure that all control devices are correctly installed, cared for and operated to meat European, nationel and local codes/regulations. Subject to change without notice.
www.jokabsafety.com
3:37
13
HB0001A Pluto with Smile emergency stop unit + Reset via M12-3E and Adam via Tina 4A
It is the user's responsibilty to ensure that all control devices are correctly installed, cared for and operated to meat European, nationel and local codes/regulations. Subject to change without notice.
HB0002A Pluto with five Eden units, for two zones via M12-3E and Tina 4A
It is the user's responsibilty to ensure that all control devices are correctly installed, cared for and operated to meat European, nationel and local codes/regulations. Subject to change without notice.
3:38
www.jokabsafety.com
HB0003A Pluto with five Smile emergency stop units, via Tina 11A and Tina 4A
1
2
3
4
5
6
It is the user's responsibilty to ensure that all control devices are correctly installed, cared for and operated to meat European, nationel and local codes/regulations. Subject to change without notice.
HB0004A Pluto with different zones for Eden + Reset and two Eden units +via M12-3E
7
8
9
10
11
12
It is the user's responsibilty to ensure that all control devices are correctly installed, cared for and operated to meat European, nationel and local codes/regulations. Subject to change without notice.
www.jokabsafety.com
3:39
13
Safety Relays
www.jokabsafety.com
Contents
Page
Why should you use Safety relays?______________________________________4:2
The smallest and most flexible Safety relays on the market________________4:3
Safety relay summary_________________________________________________4:4
Safety relay - RT - series
• RT6__________________________________________________________________________ 4:6
• RT7_________________________________________________________________________ 4:10
• RT9_________________________________________________________________________ 4:14
• JSBRT11____________________________________________________________________ 4:18
Safety relay - JSB - series
•
•
•
•
•
•
JSBR4_ _____________________________________________________________________4:20
JSBT4_______________________________________________________________________4:22
BT50(T)_ ____________________________________________________________________4:24
BT51(T)_ ____________________________________________________________________4:26
RT10________________________________________________________________________4:28
JSBT5(T)_ ___________________________________________________________________4:30
1
2
3
4
5
Safety timers
6
Expansion relays
7
• JSHT1A/B_ __________________________________________________________________4:32
• JSHT2A/B/C_________________________________________________________________4:34
•
•
•
•
E1T_________________________________________________________________________4:36
JSR1T_______________________________________________________________________4:38
JSR2A_______________________________________________________________________4:40
JSR3T_______________________________________________________________________4:42
8
Connection examples_______________________________________________ 4:44
9
10
11
While every effort has been taken to ensure the accuracy of information contained in this book and any associated promotional and information material
JOKAB SAFETY cannot accept responsibility for errors or omissions and reserves the right to make any improvements without notice. It is the users
responsibility to ensure that this equipment is correctly designed, specified, installed, cared for and operated to meet all applicable local, national and
international codes/regulations. Technical data in our book is correct to the level of accuracy of Jokab Safety´s test procedures as verified by various
international approved bodies. Other information (such as application examples, wiring diagrams, operation or use) is intended solely to illustrate
the various uses of our products. JOKAB SAFETY does not guarantee or imply that the product when used in accordance with such examples in
a particular environment will fulfil any particular safety requirement and does not assume any responsibility or liability for actual use of the product
based on the examples given. 2008 v02.
www.jokabsafety.com
4:1
12
13
Why should you use
safety relays?
– to meet existing safety standards!
”A fault in the control circuit logic, or failure of or damage
to the control circuit must not lead to dangerous situations”.
This is the requirement in the EU´s Machinery Directive
98/37/EC under the heading 1.2.7. “ Failure of the control
circuit”. The directive implies that no person should be put
at risk if for example, a relay sticks or if a transistor or two
electrical conductors short-circuit.
A safety relay will fulfill these requirements. A safety relay
has, for example, inputs that are checked for short-circuits and
dual redundant circuits that are checked at each operation.
This can be compared to the dual brake circuits in a car. If
one of the circuits is faulty the other will stop the car. In a
safety relay there is an additional function which only allows
a machine to start if both circuits are ok.
The standard for safety related parts of the control system describes various safety categories depending on the
level of risk and application. One single universal relay with
selectable safety categories solves this.
– to supervise safety devices!
Light beams
Light curtains/
Light grids
Three position devices
Safety
interlock
switches
Two-hand
devices
Emergency
stop
Safety strips Safety mats
& Bumpers
– for safe stops and reliable restarts!
Dual stop signals when the
gate is opened.
Entering or putting a hand or
limb into a hazardous area
must cause all machinery that
can cause personal injury
to stop safely. Many serious accidents occur when
machinery is believed to
have stopped but is in fact
only pausing in its program
sequence. The safety relay
monitors the gate interlock
switch and cables and gives
dual stop signals.
4:2
Supervised reset when
there can be a person
within the risk area.
To make sure that nobody
is within the restricted area
when activating the reset
button. A supervised reset
button must be pressed and
released before a reset can
occur. Many serious accidents have been caused by
an unintentional and unsupervised reset.
Timed reset when you
cannot see the entire risk
area.
Sometimes a double reset
function is necessary to
make sure that no one is left
behind in the risk area. First,
after ensuring no other person is inside the hazardous
area, the pre-reset button
must be activated, followed
by the reset button outside
the risk area within an acceptable time period e.g 10
seconds. A safety timer and
a safety relay can provide
this function.
www.jokabsafety.com
Automatic reset for small
hatches.
Where body entry is not
possible through a hatch,
the safety circuit can be
automatically reset.
The safety relays are reset
immediately when the hatch
interlock switch contacts are
closed.
The most flexible safety relays
on the market!
We have the most flexible safety relays on the market. Our
first universal relay was developed in 1988.
Nowadays, the flexibility is even greater and size has been
reduced by 85 %.
A universal relay is a safety relay with various input options
for various safety devices and risk levels.
Internally, the safety relay is of the highest safety level
(category 4 according to EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1).
A machine supplier can therefore, with one single safety relay,
select the input configuration that best suits their customers' safety requirements. In addition, our safety relays have
detachable connector blocks for ease of replacement and
testing. As our universal relays incorporate all input options,
Inputs for various safety devices.
they are compatible with all our previous safety relays as well
as with other manufacturers' products.
Is a universal relay expensive? No, our latest patented
construction is extremely simple and the number of major
components is less compared to our previous universal
relays. This means that the safety relays are even more reliable than before.
We also have a great deal of experience from safety
solutions in our own system developments. It would be our
pleasure to share these experiences with you! Please see
the complete safety solutions in the section “Connection
examples”. Please do not hesitate to contact us if you should
require any other safety solutions.
1
2
3
4
5
Input for manual or
automatic resetting.
6
RT7: the most
flexible safety
relay on the
market!
7
8
Scale 1:1
9
Detachable connector blocks.
Outputs for program stop, gate opened
or closed and reset indication.
10
Safety outputs for immediate and delayed stops at optional times.
11
Some of the advantages with JOKAB SAFETY’s safety relays:
• Universal relays
• Excellent reliability
• Approved in Europe, USA, Canada
• Supervised reset
• Time reset
• Small and compact
• Detachable connector blocks
• Low power consumption
• Permits the use of long emergency stop cables
• EX compatibility
www.jokabsafety.com
• Functions set by external hardwired links
• LED indication for inputs and outputs
• Powerful switching capacity
12
4:3
13
summary
- Which safety relay should you choose?
To facilitate the choice of safety relay or combinations of
safety relays, please see:
– the table below dividing the safety relays into
application fields
– the table on the opposite page showing possible input and output options
– the relevant data sheet giving comprehensive
information about each specific safety relay
– the circuit diagram for various applications in the
section “Connection examples”.
First of all, we would recommend the selection of one of
our latest universal relays in the RT-series. These are both
practical and cost effective.
Note: All earlier types of relays that can now be replaced
by those in this manual are still kept as stock items and
can be supplied upon request.
JSBT5, BT50, BT51
l
l
l
l
l
l
Light curtains
l
l
l
l
Light beams
l
l
l
l
Safety mats
l
l
Contact strips
l
l
Two-hand control device
l
l
l
l
l
l
Hold to run/enabling device
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Foot control device
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Area supervision
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Time resetting
l
Time bypassing
l
Inching
Delayed output
l
l
Emergency stop
Output expansion
JSR2A
JSBT5T, BT50T, BT51T
l
l
JSR1T
JSBT4
l
l
Expansion relays
E1T
JSBR4
l
l
RT10
JSBRT11
l
RT9
l
RT7
l
RT6
l
Interlocking switch/Gate/Hatch
JSHT2A/B/C
Safetytimers
Safety relays
JSR3T
Application fields
JSHT1A/B
SAFETY RELAYS
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Input alternatives (see also technical data on the next page)
Single-channel, 1 NO from +24 V
Safety category 1.
The input must be closed before the
outputs can be activated. A stop signal
is given when the input is opened.
4:4
Two-channel, 2 NO from +24 V
Safety category 3
Both the inputs must be closed before the
outputs can be activated. A stop signal
is given if one or both of the inputs are
opened. Both the inputs must be opened
and reclosed before the outputs can be
reactivated. A short-circuit between the
inputs is not monitored by the safety relay. Category 4 can only be achieved if a
safety device with short circuit monitored
outputs is connected.
Two-channel, 1 NO & 1 NC from +24V
Safety category 4
One input must be closed and one must
be opened before the outputs can be
activated. A stop signal is given if one or
both of the inputs change position or if
the inputs short-circuit. Both inputs must
be put into their initial position before the
outputs can be reactivated.
www.jokabsafety.com
Two-channel, 1 NO from 0 V &
1 NO from +24 V. Safety category 4
Both the inputs must be closed before the
outputs can be activated. A stop signal
is given if one or both of the inputs are
opened. Both the inputs must be opened
and reclosed before the outputs can be
reactivated. A Stop signal is given if there
is a short-circuit between the inputs.
1
1–4 1–4 1–4 1–4
4
2
JSR3T
JSR2A
E1T
Expansion relays
JSHT2A/B/C
RT10
BT51
BT50 (JSBT5)
BT51T
BT50T
JSBT5T
JSBT4
JSBR4
JSBRT11
RT9
RT7
RT6
Safety category
JSHT1A/B
Safetytimers
Safety relays
JSR1T
Technical data
4 1–4° 1–4° 1–4° 1–4° 1–4° 1–4 1–4 1–4 1–4 1–4 1–4 1–4
3
Safety input
Single-channel, 1 NO from +24 V
l
l
l
l
Two-channel, 2 NO from +24 V
l
l
l
l
Two-channel, 1 NO & 1 NC from +24 V
l
l
l
l
Two-channel, 1 NO from 0 V & 1 NO from + 24 V l
l
l
l
Contact strips/Safety mats
l
l
l
Monitored manual
l
l
l
l
Automatic/Unmonitored manual
l
l
l
l
Testing of contactors, relays, valves, etc.
l
l
l
l
3
2
2
7
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
5
l
Reset & test input
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
3
3
3
4
2
l
6
l
Output
NO
NO delayed
2
3†
3
4
NO impulse outputs
2¤
NC
1
1
2
1
1
NC delayed
2
3
1
4
3
2
4*
4*
4*
4*
4
2¤
2¤
1
1†
Info. output
1*
1
9
4
4
4
1*
1
1
4‡
4‡
8
1
4
4
4A/250VAC/1000VA/100W
4
2
¤
6A/250VAC/1380VA/138W
5
2
2¤
¤
2‡
10A/250VAC/1840VA/192W
Width (mm)
9
5
45
45 22,5 100 45
45 22,5 22,5 22,5 22,5 22,5 22,5 45
45 22,5 45
45 22,5
10
* Indicates the possibility of selecting delayed outputs
Indicates one relay contact per output (other relays having two contacts per output)
‡
delayed ° Category 4 depending on connection (When used as expansion relay with Pluto Safety PLC, then Category 4) † fixed 0.5 s delay
¤
Contact strips/Safety mats
Safety category 1.
For an unpressurised mat/strip, both
the relay inputs must be closed for the
outputs to be activated. In the case of an
activated mat/strip and short-circuit input
channels, the relay will be de-energized.
Current limitation prevents the safety
relay from being overloaded when the
channels short-circuit.
7
1
Switching capacity (resistive load)
6A/250VAC/1500VA/150W
4
Monitored manual reset
Safety category 4.
A monitored reset means that the safety
relay will not be reset if the reset button gets jammed when pressed in or if
the input short-circuits. In order for the
resetting to be complete, the input must
be closed and opened before the outputs
can close.
Automatic/unmonitored manual
reset
Automatic reset means that the outputs
are closed immediately when both the
input conditions are satisfied and the
test input is closed.
11
Testing of contactors, relays &
valves
Can be carried out with both automatic and manual reset.
12
T9T114
www.jokabsafety.com
4:5
13
Approvals:
Safety relay
RT6
Safety relay for:
Emergency stops
Light curtains
Three position devices
Interlocked gates/hatches
Magnetic switches
Light beams
Safety mats
Contact strips
Foot operated switches
Features:
Five input options
Single or dual channel input
Would you like a single safety relay for all your safety
applications?
Then choose the RT6 universal relay to supervise both your
safety devices and the internal safety of your machinery. In
addition you can select the safety level required for each
installation. All this is possible because the RT6 has the most
versatile input option arrangement available on the market.
Many other relays can therefore be replaced by the RT6.
The relay also comes with other options such as manual
or automatic reset. Manual supervised reset can be used
for gates and other safety devices that can be bypassed.
Automatic reset can be used for small hatches, if deemed
acceptable from risk assessment.
The RT6 also has information outputs that follow the inputs and outputs of the relay. These outputs will for example
indicate if a gate is open or closed and if the safety relay
needs to be reset.
The RT6 is designed with a minimum amount of components thus keeping both production costs and component
acquisitions to a minimum.
Choose the RT6 to simplify your safety circuits and reduce
your costs.
4:6
www.jokabsafety.com
Manual supervised or automatic reset
Test input for supervision of
external contactors
Width 45 mm
LED indication of supply,
inputs, outputs, short-circuit
and low voltage level.
3 NO / 1 NC relay outputs
Two voltage free transistor
information outputs
Supply 24 VDC, 24, 48,
115 or 230 VAC
Quick release connector
blocks
1
Technical information - RT6
Inputs
The RT6 can be configured to operate with any of the following
input options:
1. Single channel, 1 NO contact from +24 V DC, safety cat. 1.
2. Dual channel, 2 NO contacts from +24 V DC, safety cat. 3.
3. Dual channel 1 NO, 1 NC contact from +24 V DC, safety cat. 4
4. Dual channel, 1 NO contact from 0V and 1 NO contact from
+24 V DC, safety cat. 4.
5. Safety mats/contact strips 1 ‘contact’ from 0V and 1 ‘contact’ from +24 V DC, safety cat. 1.
When the input/inputs are activated and the test/supervised reset
is complete, relays 1 and 2 are energized. Simultaneous activation
is not required where there are dual channels. The two relays are
de-energized when the input/inputs are de-activated in accordance
with the input option chosen or in case of a power failure. Relays
1 and 2 must both be de-energized before the outputs can be
activated again
Transistor output status information
The RT6 has two voltage free transistor outputs that can be connected to a PLC, computer or other monitoring device. These
outputs give the input and output status of the relay.
Reset and testing
The RT6 has two reset options; manual and automatic. The manual
supervised reset is used when the RT6 is monitoring safety devices
that can be bypassed, i.e. to ensure that the outputs of the safety
relay do not close just because a gate is closed. The automatic
reset should only be used if deemed an acceptable risk.
In addition, the RT6 can also test (supervise) whether, for example, contactors and valves etc are de-energized/de-activated
before a restart is allowed.
Indication of low voltage
The ‘On’ LED will flash if the relay supply voltage falls below an
acceptable level. This indication will also be given if a monitored
safety mat/contact strip is actuated. See connection option 5.
Safety level
The RT6 has internal dual and supervised safety functions. A shortcircuit, internal faulty component or external interference will not
present a risk to options with the highest safety level. A manual
reset requires that the reset input is closed and opened before the
safety relay outputs are activated. A short-circuit or a faulty reset
button is consequently supervised.
When the RT6 is configured for dual channel input, both the
inputs are supervised for correct sequence operation before the
unit can be reset.
The input options 3 and 4 have the highest safety levels as all
short-circuits and power failures are supervised. This in combination
with internal current limitation makes the relay ideal for supervision
of safety mats and contact strips.
Regulations and standards
The RT6 is designed and approved in accordance with appropriate directives and standards. Examples of such are 98/37/EC,
EN ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1and EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1.
Connection examples
For examples of how our safety relays can solve various safety
problems, see the section “Connection examples”.
3
4
5
6
7
**Only for AC supply
8
Connection of supply - RT6
DC supply
2
AC supply
9
DC-supply of AC-units
10
The RT6 DC option should be supplied
with +24 V on A1 and 0 V on A2.
The RT6 AC option should be supplied
with the approprate supply voltage via
connections A1 and A2.
All AC-units can also be supplied by
+24 VDC to S53 (0VDC to S23).
11
The S23/
must be connected to
protective earth.
12
Note
With both DC and AC modules, if cable shielding is used
this must be connected to an earth rail or an equivalent
earth point.
www.jokabsafety.com
4:7
13
Connection of safety devices - RT6
1. SINGLE CHANNEL, 1 NO from +24V
3. DUAL CHANNEL, 1 NO, 1 NC from
+24V
5. Safety mat/Contact strip
The input (contact to S14) must be closed
before the outputs can be activated. When
the input contact is opened the relay safety
output contacts open.
One input contact must be closed (S14) and
one opened (S44) before the relay outputs
can be activated. The safety relay contacts
will open if one or both of the inputs
change state or in case of a short-circuit
between S14 and S44. Both inputs must
return to their initial positions before the
relay outputs can be reactivated.
Both ‘contact’ inputs from a inactivated
safety mat/contact strip must be made in
order to allow the RT6 relay outputs to be
activated. When the safety mat/contact
strip is activated or a short-circuit is detected
across S14-S23, the relay will de-energize
(safety outputs open) and the ‘ON’ LED
will flash. As output S13 has an internal
current limit of 70 mA, the RT6 will not be
overloaded when the mat/contact strip is
activated or a short-circuit is detected.
2. DUAL CHANNEL, 2 NO from +24V
Both input contacts (S14 and S34) must
be closed before the relay outputs can be
activated. The safety relay contacts will
open if one or both of the input contacts
are opened. Both the input contacts must
be opened and reclosed before the relay
can be reset. A short-circuit between inputs
S14 and S34 can only be supervised if the
device connected to the inputs has shortcircuit supervised outputs, e.g. JOKAB
Focus light curtains.
4. DUAL CHANNEL, 1 NO from +24V,
1 NO to 0V
Relay functions as for option 2, but a shortcircuit, in this case between inputs S14
and S24, is supervised (safety outputs
are opened).
Reset connections - RT6
Manual supervised reset
Automatic reset
Testing external contactor status
*
*connected to S13 for safety mat/
contact strip
The manual supervised reset contact connected to input X1 must be closed and
opened in order to activate the relay outputs.
Automatic reset is selected when S53,
X1 and X4 are linked. The relay outputs
are then activated at the same time as
the inputs.
Contactors, relays and valves can be
supervised by connecting ‘test’ contacts
between S53 and X1. Both manual supervised and automatic reset can be used.
Output connections - RT6
Relay outputs
Transistor outputs
***Note
These outputs are only for information
purposes and must not be connected to
the safety circuits of the machinery.
The RT6 has three (3 NO) safety outputs
and 1 NC information output.
In order to protect the output contacts
it is recommended that loads (inductive)
are suppressed by fitting correctly chosen
VDR’s, diodes etc.
Diodes are the best arc suppressors,
but will increase the switch off time of
the load.
4:8
The RT6 has two(2) voltage free transistor
outputs for information.
The transistor outputs are supplied with
voltage to Y13, either from S53 (+24V)
or an external 5-30 VDC supply. Y14 and
Y24 follow the relay inputs and outputs
as follows:
• Y14 becomes conductive when the relay
input conditions are fulfilled.
• Y24 becomes conductive when both the
output relays are activated.
www.jokabsafety.com
Technical data - RT6
Manufacturer
JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden
Article number/Ordering
data
10-026-00
10-026-02
10-026-03
10-026-04
10-026-05
RT6 24DC
RT6 24AC
RT6 48AC
RT6 115AC
RT6 230AC
Colour
black and beige
Weight
335 g (24 VDC), 485 g
(24-230 VAC)
Supply
Voltage (A1-A2)
Power consumption
DC supply, nominal voltage
AC supply, nominal voltage
Transistor outputs
External supply to Y13
Y14
Y24
Maximum load of Y14, Y24
Maximum voltage drop at
maximum load
LED indication
<2.4 W
5.3 VA
Connection S13
Short-circuit protected voltage output, 70 mA +/- 10% current
limitation. Is used for the inputs S14, S34 and S44.
Connection S53
Short-circuit protected voltage output, internal automatic fuse 270 mA.
Is used for the reset and autoreset inputs X1 and X4
Connection S23
0V connection for input S24
1
Safety inputs
S14 (+) input
S24 (0V) input
S34 (+) input
S44 (+) input
20 mA
20 mA
20 mA
30 mA
Reset input X1
Supply for reset input
Reset current
Minimum contact
closure time for reset
+24 VDC
300 mA current pulse at contact
closure, then 30 mA
100 ms
Supply voltage OK, the LED is on
Flashing light in case of undervoltage or overload
In2
Indicates that the input conditions
are fulfilled.
2 Indicates that the output relays
are activated.
Mounting
Rail
Operating temperature range
Connection block (detachable)
Maximum screw torque
Maximum connection area
Solid conductors
Conductor with socket contact
Air and creep distance
Protection class
Enclosure
Connection block
2.4 V
Contact material
Mechanical life
3
1 Nm
5
1x4mm2 /2x1.5mm2/12AWG
1x2.5mm2/2x1mm2
4kV/2 IEC 60664-1
IP 40 IEC 60529
IP 20 IEC 60529
6
7
8
Response time
Relay outputs
NO
NC
Maximum switching capacity res.
load AC
Maximum switching capacity res.
load DC
Maximum switching capacity
res. load
Minimum load
2
4
35 mm DIN rail
-10° C to + 55° C
Maximum external connection
cable resistance at nominal
voltage for
S14, S24, S34
300 Ohm
S44, X1
150 Ohm
At Power on DC/AC
When activating (input-output)
When deactivating (input-output)
At Power Loss
1
On
In1
24 VDC +15/-20%,
24/48/115/230 VAC,
+15/-10%, 50-60 Hz
Short-circuit proof
+5 to +30 VDC
Indicates that the input conditions have been fulfilled
Indicates that the output relays
are activated
15 mA /output
<90ms/<220ms
<20 ms
<20 ms
<150 ms
9
Connector blocks are detachable
(without cables having to be disconnected)
3
1
6A/24 VDC/150 W
10
12A distributed on all contacts
10mA/10 V (if load on contact
has not exceeded 100 mA)
Ag+Au flash
>107 operations
11
6A/250 VAC/1500 VA
12
www.jokabsafety.com
4:9
13
Approvals:
Safety relay
RT7
Safety relay for:
Emergency stops
Light curtains
Three position devices
Interlocked gates/hatches
Magnetic switches
Light beams
Safety mats
Contact strips
Foot operated switches
Features:
4 NO/1 NC relay outputs, 2
NO outputs can be delayed
for soft stops
Universal relay with delayed outputs
The RT7 is a universal relay that can be used to supervise both
safety devices and the internal safety of your machinery. In addition, you can select the safety level that is required for each
installation. All this is possible because the RT7 has the most
versatile input options arrangement available on the market. The
RT7 can therefore replace many other relays.
The RT7 has four (4 NO) dual safety outputs of which two
may be delayed for up to three seconds in order to achieve a
safe and ‘soft’ stop. A ‘soft’ stop allows machinery to brake
and stop gently before power is removed. A ‘soft’ stop has
many benefits: the machinery life will be prolonged, processed
products will not be damaged, and restarts from the stopped
position are made possible and easier.
Another option with the RT7 is manual or automatic resetting. A manual supervised reset is used for gates and other
safety devices that can be bypassed, while an automatic reset
is used for small safety hatches if deemed appropriate from a
risk point of view.
In addition, the RT7 has information outputs that follow the
inputs and outputs of the relay. These outputs indicate if for
example a gate is opened or closed, if there is a delay or if the
relay needs to be reset.
Choose the RT7 to simplify your safety circuits and reduce
your costs.
4:10
www.jokabsafety.com
Delay times RT7A 0; 0,5;
1,0; 1,5 s RT7B 0; 1,0; 2,0;
3,0 s
Five input options
Single or dual channel input
Manual supervised or automatic reset
Test input for supervision of
external contactors
Width 45 mm
LED indication of supply,
inputs, outputs, short-circuit
and low voltage level
Three voltage free transistor information outputs
Supply 24 VDC, 24, 48,
115 or 230 VAC
Quick release connector
blocks
Technical information - RT7 A/B
Inputs
The RT7 can be configured to operate in either of the following
input options:
1. Single channel, 1 NO contact from +24 VDC, safety cat. 1.
2. Dual channel, 2 NO contacts from +24 VDC, safety cat. 3.
3. Dual channel, 1 NO, 1 NC contact from +24 VDC, safety cat. 4.
4. Dual channel, 1 NO contact from 0V and 1 NO contact from +24 VDC, safety cat. 4.
5. Safety mats/contact strips, 1 ‘contact’ from 0V and 1 ‘contact’ from +24 VDC, safety cat. 1.
When the input/inputs are activated and the test/supervised reset
is complete, relays 1,2,3 and 4 are activated. Relays 1 and 2 are
immediately de-energized when the inputs are deactivated in accordance with the input option selected. Relays 3 and 4 are either
de-energized immediately or after the selected time delay.
All the relays (1,2,3 and 4) must be de-energized before the RT7
can be reset.
Safety level
The RT7 has internal dual and supervised safety functions. Power
failure, an internal faulty component or external interference will not
present a risk to options with the highest safety level. A manual
reset requires that the reset input is closed and opened before the
safety relay outputs are activated. A short-circuit or a faulty reset
button is consequently supervised.
When the RT7 is configured for dual channel input, both the
inputs are supervised for correct sequence operation before the
unit can be reset. The input options 3 and 4 have the highest safety
levels as all short-circuits and power failures are supervised. This
in combination with internal current limitation makes the relay ideal
for supervision of safety mats and contact strips.
Regulations and standards
The RT7 is designed and approved in accordance with appropriate directives and standards. Examples of such are 98/37/EC,
EN ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1, EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1.
Transistor output status information
The RT7 has three(3) voltage free transistor outputs that can be
connected to a PLC, computer or other monitoring device. These
outputs give the input and output status of the relay.
Reset and testing
The RT7 has two reset options; manual and automatic.
The manual supervised reset is utilised when the RT7 is used
to monitor safety devices that can be bypassed, i.e. to ensure that
the outputs of the safety relay do not close just because the gate
is closed.
The automatic reset should only be used if acceptable from a
risk point of view. The RT7 can also test (supervise), if for example,
contactors and valves etc are de-energized/de-activated before a
restart is allowed.
1
2
3
4
5
6
**Only for AC supply
7
Indication of low voltage
The ‘On’ LED will flash if the relay voltage falls below an acceptable level. This indication will also be given if a monitored safety
mat/contact strip is actuated. See connection option 5.
8
Connection examples
DC supply
The RT7 DC option should be supplied
with +24 V on A1 and 0 V on A2.
AC supply
The RT7 AC option should be supplied
with the appropriate supply voltage via
connections A1 and A2.
DC-supply of AC-units
9
10
All AC-units can also be supplied by
+24 VDC to S53 (0VDC to S23).
11
The S23/
must be connected to
protective earth
Note
With both DC and AC modules, if cable shielding is used
this must be connected to an earth rail or an equivalent
earth point.
www.jokabsafety.com
12
4:11
13
Connection of safety devices - RT7 A/B
1. SINGLE CHANNEL, 1 NO from
+24V
3. DUAL CHANNEL, 1 NO, 1 NC from
+24V
5. Safety mat/Contact strip
The input (contact to S14) must be closed
before the outputs can be activated. When
the input contact is opened the relay safety
output contacts open.
One input contact must be closed (S14) and
one opened (S44) before the relay outputs
can be activated. The safety relay contacts
will open if one or both of the inputs change
state or in the case of a short-circuit between
S14 and S44. Both inputs must be returned
to their initial positions before the relay outputs can be reactivated.
Both ‘contact’ inputs from an inactivated
safety mat/contact strip, must be made in
order to allow the RT7 relay outputs to be
activated. When the safety mat/contact strip
is activated or a short-circuit is detected
across S14-S23, the relay will de-energize
(safety outputs open) and the ‘ON’ LED will
flash. As output S13 has an internal current
limit of 70 mA, the RT7 will not be overloaded
when the mat/contact strip is activated or a
short circuit is detected.
2. DUAL CHANNEL, 2 NO from +24V
4. DUAL CHANNEL, 1 NO from +24V,
Both input contacts (S14 and S34) must 1 NO from 0V
be closed before the relay outputs can be
activated. The safety relay contacts will open if
one or both of the input contacts are opened.
Both the input contacts must be opened
before the relay can be reset. A short-circuit
between the inputs S14 and S34 can only Relay functions as option 2, but a short-circuit,
be supervised if the device connected to the in this case between inputs S14 and
inputs has short-circuit supervised outputs, S24, is supervised (safety outputs are
opened).
e.g. JOKAB Focus light curtains.
Reset connections - RT7 A/B
Manual supervised reset
Automatic reset
Testing external contactor status
*
*connected to S13 for safety mat/contact
strip
The manual supervised reset contact connected to input X1 must be closed and
opened in order to activate the relay outputs.
Automatic reset is selected when S53, X1
and X4 are linked. The relay outputs are then
activated at the same time as the inputs.
Contactors, relays and valves can be
supervised by connecting ‘test’ contacts
between S53 and X1. Both manual supervised
and automatic reset can be used.
Output connections - RT7 A/B
Relay outputs
information outputs.
Time delay outputs
The RT7 has four (4 NO) safety outputs
of which two can be delayed, and 1 NC
information output.
In order to protect the RT7 output contacts
it is recommended that loads (inductive)
are suppressed by fitting correctly chosen
VDR’s, diodes etc. Diodes are the best arc
suppressors, but will increase the switch off
time of the load.
Transistor outputs
The RT7 has three(3) voltage free transistor
The transistor outputs are supplied with
voltage to Y13 either from S53 (+24V) or
externally from 5 to 30 VDC. Y14, Y24
and Y34 follow the inputs and outputs as
follows:
• Y14 becomes conductive when the re-
lay input conditions are fulfilled.
• Y24 becomes conductive when both the output relays are activated.
• Y34 becomes conductive when both the delay output relays are activated.
Time delays are selected by linking the
appropriate T0, T1 and T2 connections.
When a stop signal is detected a program
stop command is first given to the PLC/servo
which brakes the dangerous machine operations in a ‘soft’ and controlled way.
The delayed relay safety outputs will then
turn off the power to the motors, i.e. when
the machinery has already stopped. It takes
usually around 0.5 to 3 seconds for a dangerous action to be stopped softly.
***Note
These outputs are only for information purposes and must not be connected to the safety circuits of the machinery.
4:12
www.jokabsafety.com
Technical data – RT7 A/B
Manufacturer
JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden
Article number/Ordering data
10-028-10
RT7B
10-028-12
10-028-13
10-028-14
10-028-15
10-028-20
RT7A
10-028-22
10-028-23
10-028-24
10-028-25
24DC 3 s
24AC 3 s
48AC 3 s
115AC 3 s
230AC 3 s
24DC 1,5 s
24AC 1,5 s
48AC 1,5 s
115AC 1,5 s
230AC 1,5 s
Colour
Black and beige
Weight
405 g (24 VDC) 550 g ( 24230 VAC)
Supply
Voltage (A1-A2)
Power consumption
DC supply, nominal voltage
AC supply, nominal voltage
24 VDC +15/-20%,
24/48/115/230 VAC,
+/-15%, 50-60 Hz
4.6 W
8.7 W
Relay outputs
NO direct (relays 1/2)
NO direct or delayed (relays 3/4)
NC (relays 1/2)
Maximum switching capacity
res. load
Relays 1/2 AC
DC
Relays 1/2 total
6A/250 VAC/1380 VA
6A/24 VDC/138 W
6A distributed on all contacts
Minimum load (Relays 1/2/3/4)
10 mA/10V (if load on contact
has not exceeded 100 mA)
AgSnO2+ Au flash
>107 operations
Transistor outputs
External supply to Y13
Y14
Y24
Y34
Connection S13
Short-circuit protected voltage output,
70 mA +/-10% current limitation.
Is used for the inputs S14, S34 and S44.
Maximum load of Y14,Y24, Y34
Maximum voltage drop at
maximum load
LED indication
Connection S53
Short-circuit protected voltage output,
internal automatic fuse, max 270 mA.
Is used for the reset and autoreset inputs X1 and X4.
1
Safety inputs
S14 (+) input
S24 (0V) input
S34 (+) input
S44 (+) input
20mA
20 mA
20 mA
25 mA
Reset input X1
Supply for reset input
Reset current
Minimum contact
closure time for reset
+24 VDC
600 mA current pulse at contact
closure, then 30 mA.
100ms
Maximum external connection cable resistance at
nominal voltage for
S14, S24, S34
S44, X1
300 Ohm
150 Ohm
Response time
At Power on DC/AC
When activating (input-output)
When deactivating (input-output)
At Power loss
<90/<140 ms
<20 ms
<20 ms
<80 ms
Delay time options
RT7A
RT7B
0; 0.5; 1.0; 1.5 secs
0; 1.0; 2.0; 3.0 secs
+5 to +30 VDC
Indicates that the input conditions are fulfilled
Indicates that the output relays
1/2 are activated
Indicates that the delay output
relays 3/4 are activated
15 mA /output
Connection blocks
(detachable)
Maximum screw torque
Maximum connection area
Solid conductors
Conductor with socket contact
Air and creep distance
4
5
2.4 V
Supply voltage OK, the LED is on.
Flashing light in case of undervoltage or overload.
In2
Indicates that the input conditions
are fulfilled.
2 Indicates that the output relays
1/2 are activated.
t
Indicates that the delay output
relays 3/4 are activated.
Mounting
Rail
Operating temperature range
24VDC
24-230VAC
Protection class
Enclosure
Connection block
3
On
In1
Connection S23
0V connection for input S24.
2
6A/250 VAC/1500 VA
6A/24 VDC/150 W
9A distributed on all contacts
Relays 3/4 AC
DC
Relays 3/4 total
Contact material
Mechanical life
1
2
2
1
35 mm DIN rail
6
7
8
-10° C to + 55° C
-10° C to + 45° C
1 Nm
9
1x4mm2 /2x1.5mm2 /12AWG
1x2.5mm2 /2x1mm2
4kV/2 IEC 60664-1
IP 40 IEC 60529
IP 20 IEC 60529
10
11
12
Connector blocks are detachable
(without cables having to be disconnected)
www.jokabsafety.com
4:13
13
Safety relay
RT9
Approvals:
Safety relay for:
Emergency stops
Light curtains
Three position devices
Interlocked gates/hatches
Magnetic switches
Light beams
Safety mats
Contact strips
Foot operated switches
Features:
Five input options
Single or dual channel input
Would you like a small safety relay for all your safety
applications?
Then choose the compact RT9 universal relay to supervise both
your safety devices and the internal safety of your machinery.
In addition, you can select the safety level that is required for
each installation. All this is possible due to the RT9 offering
the most versatile input option arrangement available on the
market. The RT9 can therefore replace many other relays.
Other RT9 options include selection of either manual
supervised or automatic resetting. The manual supervised
reset can be used for gates and other safety devices that can
be bypassed. Automatic reset can be used for small safety
hatches, if deemed acceptable from risk assessment.
In addition, the RT9 has a double information output that will
indicate e.g if a gate is open or if the relay needs resetting.
The RT9 uses the latest component technology and
modern assembly techniques to ensure a highly cost effective
solution.
Choose the RT9 to simplify your safety circuits and reduce
your costs.
Manual supervised or automatic
reset
Test input for supervision of
external contactors
Width 22.5 mm
LED indication of supply, inputs
and outputs, short-circuit and low voltage level
2 NO relay outputs
One changeover relay with a
double information output
Supply 24 VDC
Quick release connector blocks
4:14
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Technical information - RT9
Inputs
The RT9 can be configured to operate in either of the following
input options:
1. Single channel, 1 NO contact from +24VDC, safety cat. 1.
2. Dual channel, 2 NO contacts from +24VDC, safety cat. 3.
3. Dual channel, 1 NO, 1 NC contact from +24VDC, safety cat. 4.
4. Dual channel, 1 NO contact from 0V and 1 NO contact from +24VDC, safety cat. 4.
5. Safety mat/contact strips, 1 ‘contact’ from 0V and 1 ‘contact’ +24VDC, safety cat. 1.
When the input/inputs are activated and the test/supervised reset
is complete, relays 1 and 2 are energised. These are de-energised
when the input/inputs are de-activated in accordance with the input
option chosen or in case of a power failure.
Relays 1 and 2 must both be de-energized before the RT9 can
be reset.
Relay output status information
The RT9 has a changeover contact relay output that can be connected to a PLC, control lamp, computer or similar. The output gives
information about the status of the relay.
Reset and testing
The RT9 has two reset options; manual and automatic. The manual
supervised reset can be used when the RT9 is monitoring safety
devices that can be bypassed, i.e. to ensure that the outputs of
the safety relay do not close just because a gate is closed. The
automatic reset option should only be used if appropriate from a
risk point of view.
Due to special internal circuits the RT9 can be automatically reset
regardless of the operational voltage rise time, this being an important
factor when large loads are started up on the same power supplies
at the same time.
In addition, the RT9 can also test (supervise), if for example,
contactors and valves etc are de-energised/de-activated before
a restart is made.
Indication of low voltage
The ‘On’ LED will flash if the relay supply voltage falls below an
acceptable level. This indication will also be given if a monitored
safety mat/contact strip is actuated. Please see Connection
option 5.
Safety level
The RT9 has internal dual and supervised safety functions. Power
failure, an internal faulty component or external interference
will not present a risk to options with the highest safety level. A
manual reset requires that the reset input is closed and opened
before the safety relay outputs are activated. A short-circuit or
a faulty reset button is consequently supervised.
When the RT9 is configured for dual channel input, both
the inputs are supervised for correct operation before the unit
can be reset.
The input options 3 and 4 have the highest safety levels
as all short-circuits and power failures are supervised. This in
combination with an internal current limitation makes the relay
ideal for supervision of safety mats and contact strips.
Regulations and standards
The RT9 is designed and approved in accordance with appropriate directives and standards. Examples of such are 98/37/EC,
EN ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1, EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1.
Connection examples
For examples of how our safety relays can solve various safety
problems, please see the section “Connection examples”.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Connection of supply - RT9
DC supply
9
Short circuit
protection
Automatic
fuse
The RT9 should be supplied with +24 V on A1
and 0 V on A2.
10
Note
If cable shielding is used this must be connected
to an earth rail or an equivalent earth point.
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
4:15
13
Connection of safety devices - RT9
1. SINGLE CHANNEL, 1 NO from
+24V
3. DUAL CHANNEL, 1 NO, 1 NC from
+24V
The input (contact to S14) must be closed One input contact must be closed (S14) and
before the outputs can be activated. When one opened (S44) before the relay outputs
the input contact is opened, the relay safety can be activated.
output contacts open.
The safety relay contacts will open if
one or both of the inputs change state or
2. DUAL CHANNEL, 2 NO from +24V
in case of a short-circuit between S14 and
S44. Both inputs must be returned to their
initial status before the relay outputs can be
reactivated.
Both input contacts (S14 and S34) must
be closed before the relay outputs can be
activated. The safety relay contacts will
open if one or both of the input contacts
are opened. Both the input contacts must
be opened and reclosed before the relay
can be reset.
A short-circuit between inputs S14 and
S34 can only be supervised if the device
connected to the inputs has short-circuit
supervised outputs, e.g. JOKAB Focus
light curtains
4. DUAL CHANNEL, 1 NO from +24V,
1 NO from 0V
5. Safety mat/Contact strip
Both ‘contact’ inputs from a inactivated
safety mat/contact strip must be made
in order to allow the RT9 relay outputs
to be activated. When the safety mat/
contact strip is activated or a short-circuit
is detected across S14-S23, the relay will
de-energize (safety contacts open) and
the ‘ON’ LED will flash. As output S13
has an internal current limit of 70 mA, the
RT9 will not be overloaded when the mat/
contact strip is activated or a short-circuit
is detected.
Relay functions as option 2, but a shortcircuit, in this case between inputs S14
and S24 is supervised (safety outputs are
opened).
Reset connections - RT9
Manual supervised reset
Automatic reset
Testing external contactor status
The manual supervised reset contact
connected to input X1 must be closed
and opened in order to activate the relay
outputs.
Automatic reset is selected when A1(+), X1
and X4 are linked. The relay outputs are then
activated at the same time as the inputs.
Contactors, relays and valves can be
supervised by connecting ‘test’ contacts
between A1(+) and X1. Both manual
supervised and automatic reset can be
used.
Output connections - RT9
4:16
Relay outputs
Information outputs
The RT9 has two (2 NO) safety outputs.
In order to protect the output contacts
it is recommended that loads (inductive)
are suppressed by fitting correctly chosen
VDR’s, diodes etc. Diodes are the best arc
suppressors, but will increase the switch off
time of the load.
The RT9 has a single changeover contact
information relay output.The relay output
Y14 is connected internally to 0V and 24V
in the following way:
• Y14 is internally closed to 0V when the RT9 is not reset.
• Y14 is internally closed to +24V when the relay is reset.
www.jokabsafety.com
Technical data - RT9
LED indication
Manufacturer
JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden
Article number/Ordering data
10-029-00
Colour
Black and beige
Weight
210 g
Supply
Voltage (A1-A2)
24 VDC +/- 20%
Power consumption
Nominal voltage
Connection S13
Input currents
(at nominal supply voltage)
S14 (+) input
S24 (0V) input
S34 (+) input
S44 (+) input
Reset input X1
Supply for reset input
Reset current
Minimum contact closure time
for reset
Minimum contact closure time
(at low limit voltage -20%)
On
RT9 24DC
In1
1
Supply voltage OK, the LED is on.
Flashing light in case of undervoltage, overload or current
limiting
In2
Indicates that the input conditions
are fulfilled.
2 Indicates that the output relays
have been activated.
Mounting
Rail
Operating temperature range
2.5 W
Short-circuit protected voltage
output, 70 mA +/- 10% current
limitation. Is used for the inputs
S14, S34 and S44.
30 mA
20 mA
20 mA
25 mA
Connection blocks
(detachable)
Maximum screw torque
Maximum connection area:
Solid conductors
Conductor with socket contact
Air and creep distance
Protection class
Enclosure
Connection blocks
35 mm DIN rail
-10°C to + 55°C
Relay outputs
NO
Maximum switching capacity
res. load AC
Maximum switching capacity
res. load DC
Max. total switching capacity:
Minimum load
Contact material
Mechanical life
Relay information output
(Changeover contacts)
Y14 - (0V)
+(24V)
Maximum load of Y14
Short-circuit protection for
information output
2
3
1 Nm
1 x 4mm2 / 2 x 1.5mm2/12AWG
1 x 2.5mm2 / 2 x 1mm2
4kV/2 IEC 60664-1
4
IP 40 IEC 60529
IP 20 IEC 60529
5
+24 VDC
300 mA current pulse at contact
closure, then 30 mA
80ms
100ms
6
Maximum external connection
cable resistance at a nominal
voltage for
S14, S24, S34
300 Ohm
S44, X1
150 Ohm
Response time
At Power on
When activating (input-output)
When deactivating (input–output)
At Power Loss
1
7
<100 ms
<20 ms
<20 ms
<80 ms
Connector blocks are detachable
(without cables having to be disconnected)
8
2
6A/250/1500 VA
6A/24 VDC/150W
8A distributed on all contacts
9
10 mA/10V (if load on contact
has not exceeded 100 mA)
Ag+Au flash
>107 operations
10
Indicates that RT9 is not reset.
Indicates that RT9 is reset.
250 mA
Internal automatic fuse
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
4:17
13
Approvals:
Safety relay
JSBRT11
Safety relay for:
Emergency stop
Light curtains
Three position devices
Interlocked gates/hatches
Magnetic switches
Light beams
Foot operated switches
Features:
Selectable inputs and safety
category
A flexible safety relay with many outputs
The JSBRT11 has been designed to provide the safety system
circuit designer with the ability to select from both a range
of input connection configurations and either automatic or
supervised reset.
The unit can be hardwire configured to operate in either
of the following input configurations:
• Mode 1: Single Channel (1 NO contact from +24 VDC),
safety category 1.
• Mode 2: Dual Channel (2 NO contacts from +24 VDC),
safety category 3.
• Mode 3: Dual Channel (1 NO, 1NC contacts from + 24
VDC), safety category 4.
• Mode 4: Dual Channel (1 NO contact from 0 V and 1 NO
contact from + 24 VDC), safety category 4.
In addition the unit can also be used to test that contactors
and valves have fallen/returned to their ’reset’ state before a
new ’start’ signal is given.
Safety level
The JSBRT11 has dual and monitored internal safety functions. Power failure, internal component failures or ex­ternal
interference (with the exception of short circuiting of input
contact when used in a single channel input mode) do not
result in a dangerous function.
When wired for supervised reset, should a short circuit
appear across the reset input the relay will not automatically
reset when the input/inputs are made. Only when the supervised reset input is made and broken will the relay reset.
The JSBRT11 provides de­tection of contact failure in the
inputs when wired in dual channel mode. Both inputs have
to be opened and closed in order to enable the reactivation
of the relay.
4:18
Manual supervised or automatic
reset
Width 100 mm
LED indication for supply, inputs
and outputs
7 NO + 2 NC relay outputs
Supply 24 VDC 24, 48, 115 or
230 VAC
Quick release connector blocks
The highest safety level of the JSBRT11 is in configuration
mode 3 and 4 because all short circuits are supervised i.e.
a short circuit between the inputs leads to a safe state as
the outputs drop out.
Regulations and standards
The JSBRT11 is designed and approved in accordance with
appropriate directives and standards. Examples of such are
98/37/EC, EN ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1 and EN 954-1/
EN ISO 13849-1.
Connection examples
For examples of how our safety relays can solve various safety
problems, please see the section “Connection examples”.
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Technical data – JSBRT11
Manufacturer:
JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden
Colour:
Black and Beige
Power supply A1 - A2:
24 VDC +/- 15%
24, 48, 115, 230 VAC +/- 15%, 50-60 Hz
Power consumption:
< 3 VA
Relay Outputs:
7 NO and 2 NC
Max. switching capacity res. load AC:
6A/250 VAC/1500 VA
Max. switching capacity res. load DC:
6A/24 VDC/150 W
Max. total switching capacity:
21A distributed on all contacts
Min. load:
10mA/10 V
(if load on contact has not exceeded 100 mA)
Contact material
AgSnO2+ Au flash
Max. Input wire res. at nom. voltage:
200 Ohm (S14,S24,S34,X1,X4); 100 Ohm (S44)
Response time at deactivation (input-output):
<20 ms
Response time at activation (input-output):
<30 ms
Terminals (Max. screw torque 1 Nm):
Single strand: 1x4 mm2/2x1.5 mm2
Conductor with socket contact: 1x2.5 mm2/2x1mm2
Mounting:
35 mm DIN-rail
Protection class, enclosure:
IP 40 IEC 60259
terminals:
IP 20 IEC 60259
118
Air and creep distance:
4 kV/2 IEC 60664-1
Operating temperature range:
-10°C to +55°C
Function indication:
Electrical Supply, Input 1 and 2,
Output relays 1 and 2
Weight:
610 g (24 VDC) 790 g (24-230 VAC)
2
72
100
mm
Connector blocks are detachable
(without cables having to be disconnected)
4
Article number/Ordering data:
10-025-00
10-025-02
10-025-03
10-025-04
10-025-05
5
24DC
24AC
48AC
115AC
230AC
Technical description – JSBRT11
Supply
*
K
K
**
***
*Supervision circuit
**Test and Automatic reset circuit
The supply voltage is connected across A1
and A2. The input connection configuration
and type of reset required is set by connecting
the unit as shown in the diagrams below.
When the input/inputs and the test/supervised reset are made K1 and K2 energise.
K1 and K2 will de-energize if the power
is disconnected or a stop signal is given in
accordance to the configuration mode wired.
Both K1 and K2 have to be de-activated
before the outputs of the JSBRT11 can
be closed again.
Configuration mode 1.
When the single input opens both K1 and
K2 relays are deactivated.
*** Only for AC-supply
Configuration mode 2.
Both inputs have to be closed in order to
enable the unit to be activated. A stop signal
is given if both or one input is opened. Both
inputs have to be opened and reclosed in
order to enable the reactivation of the unit.
If the possibility of short circuits between
the inputs cannot be excluded, configuration mode 3 or 4 should be used in order to
reach the highest safety level.
Configuration mode 3.
One input has to be closed and the other
input has to be opened in order to enable
the unit to be activated. A stop signal is
given if both or one input change state.
Both inputs have to change state in order
to give a dual stop function and to allow a
new start after stop.
Configuration mode 4
Operation as mode 2 but short circuits between the inputs leads to a safe state i.e. the
relays inside the JSBRT11 will drop out.
Supervised reset connection.
The input to X1 (see diagram below) has to
be closed and opened in order to activate the
unit, after input/inputs are made according to
the configuration mode selected. This mode
is selected when X1 - X4 is open-circuit.
Automatic reset connection.
The input has to be closed in order to activate
the unit after input/inputs are made according to the configuration mode selected. This
mode is selected when a connection between
X1 and X4 is made.
Test.
Test contacts of contactors can be connected
between S53 and X1 for supervision.
DUAL CHANNEL*, 2 NO from +24V
It is recommended that all switched loads
are adequately suppressed and/or fused
in order to provide additional protection
for the safety contacts.
6
7
8
9
10
Electrical connection – JSBRT11
SINGLE CHANNEL *, 1 NO from +24V
3
DUAL CHANNEL*, 1 NO,
1 NC from +24V
Supervised manual reset
DUAL CHANNEL*, 1 NO from +24V,
1 NO from 0V
Automatic reset
Test
11
Reset
Test
12
* With the input conditions shown, the JSBRT11 is in its deenergized state, i.e. output contacts are open.
www.jokabsafety.com
4:19
13
Approvals:
Safety relay
JSBR4
Safety relay for:
Two-hand devices of type IIIc
Emergency stop
Three position devices
Interlocked Gates/Hatches
Contact strips
Safety mats
Foot operated switches
Features:
Dual input channels
synchronism 0.5 s
Supervised reset
Test input
A universal relay for two-hand- and many other safety
devices
The JSBR4 has two inputs, which both have to be closed
to keep the safety output contacts closed. A short-circuit
across the inputs will cause the output contacts to open.
The inputs can however be subjected to a continuous
short-circuit without damaging the safety relay.
In order to make the safety outputs close the reset input
must be closed and opened. In this way an unintentional
reset is prevented in the case of a short-circuit in the reset
button cable or if the button gets jammed in the actuated
position. The reset input can also be used for test/supervision to ensure that contactors or valves have returned
to their initial off/stop position before a new start can be
allowed by the safety relay.
When the JSBR4 is used as a two-hand device relay,
both buttons have to be pressed within 0.5 seconds of
each other in order to close the outputs.
When the JSBR4 is used for Safety Mats and Safety
Strips the ”stop” condition is given following detection of
a short-circuit between input channels A and B. The safety
mat, safety strip or the relay will not be damaged by a continuous short-circuit. This also gives the advantage that if
there is a failure between the inputs in the installation, the
safety relay will not be damaged.
Safety level
The JSBR4 has a twin supervised safety function. Component failure, short-circuit or external disturbance (e.g.
loss of power supply) will not prevent the safe function of
4:20
Width 45 mm
LED indication for supply, inputs and outputs
3 NO/1NC relay outputs
Supply 24 VDC, 24, 48,
115 or 230 VAC
Quick release connector blocks
the relay. This is valid both for the inputs A and B as well
as for the reset input. The JSBR4 operates at the highest
safety level for safety relays (category 4).
Regulations and standards
The JSBR4 is designed and approved in accordance with appropriate directives and standards. Examples of such are 98/37/EC,
EN ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1 and EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1.
The JSBR4 complies with the highest safety level for the
connection of a two-hand device of type IIIc in accordance
with EN 574.
Connection examples
For examples of how our safety relays can solve various safety
problems, please see the section “Connection examples”.
www.jokabsafety.com
Technical data – JSBR4
1
120
Manufacturer:
JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden
Colour:
Black and Beige
Power supply:
24 VDC +/- 15%
24/48/115/230 VAC +/- 15% , 50 - 60 Hz
Power consumption:
< 2 VA
Relay outputs:
3 NO + 1 NC
Maximum switching capacity res. load AC:
6A/250 VAC/1500 VA
Maximum switching capacity res. load DC:
6A/24 VDC/150 W
Max. res. load total switching capacity:
12A distributed on all contacts
Minimum load:
10mA/10 V (if load on contact has not exceeded
100 mA)
Contact material:
Ag + Au flash
Max. Input Wire res. at nom. voltage:
300 Ohm (S13 - S14 and S23 - S24)
Response time at deactivation:
< 20 ms (145 ms at power loss)
Terminals (Max. screw torque 1 Nm):
Single strand: 1 x 4 mm2/2 x 1,5 mm2.
Conductor with socket contact: 1 x 2,5 mm2/2 x 1 mm2.
Mounting:
35 mm DIN-rail
Protection class enclosure/terminals:
IP 40/20 IEC 60529
Article number/Ordering data
Operating temperature range:
-10°C to +55°C
Air and creep distance:
4kV/2 DIN IEC 60664-1
LED indication:
Electrical Supply, Inputs, Outputs
Weight:
350 g (24 VDC), 460 g (24 - 230 VAC)
10-002-00
10-002-02
10-002-03
10-002-04
10-002-05
2
74
mm
45
Connector blocks are detachable
(without cables having to be disconnected)
3
4
24DC
24AC
48AC
115AC
230AC
5
Technical description – JSBR4
Prot.
circ.
Reset & Supervision circ.
*
* Only for AC-supply
The electrical supply is connected across
A1 and A2. After Voltage reduction and
Rectification (AC-versions) or reverse polarity
protection (DC-version) there is an overload
protection-circuit.
When the inputs S13-S14 and S23-S24
have closed and the reset is made, the relays
K1 and K2 are activated.
A dual stop signal is given when K1 and
K2 drop, due to short circuiting between
the inputs, opening of the inputs or power
failure. If one input is opened the other input
must also be opened for K1 and K2 to be
activated again.
The monitoring circuit checks K1 and K2 and
that the reset circuit to X2 is both closed and
opened before K1 and K2 are energized. Both
the stop and reset function therefore comply
with the requirement that a component fault,
short circuit or external interference do not
result in a dangerous function.
The safety outputs consist of contacts
from K1 and K2 connected internally in
series across terminals 13 - 14, 23 -24 and
33 - 34. These contacts are used to cut
the power to components which stop or
prevent hazardous movements/functions.
It is recommended that all switched loads
are adequately suppressed and/or fused in
order to provide additional protection for the
safety contacts.
Note: Output 41-42 is intended for indication purposes only, e.g. gate opened.
No load between S14 and S24 allowed.
6
7
8
9
Electrical connection – JSBR4
10
Emergency stop with manual resetting.
Interlocked gate with manual reset.
Contact mat/strip with manual reset.
Two hand device with buttons in separate
or same enclosure. Buttons to be pressed
in within 0.5 s of each other. Footpedal
switches can be connected in the same
configuration.
Enabling device, JSHD4. Stop condition is given in both top and bottom PB
positions.
Control and supervision of external conductor, relay, valve or JOKAB SAFETY’s
expansion relays.
www.jokabsafety.com
11
4:21
12
13
Approvals:
Safety relay
JSBT4
Safety relay for:
Emergency stops
Three position devices
Interlocked Hatches
Safety mats
Contact strips
Foot operated switches
Features:
Dual input channels
synchronism 0.5 s
Test input
Safety relay with synchronised dual input channels
(within 0.5s)
The JSBT4 has two inputs, both of which have to be
closed in order to keep the safety output contacts closed.
A short circuit between inputs A and B will cause the output contacts to open. The inputs can be continuously short
circuited without damaging the safety relay.
For the outputs to close, the test input must be closed.
The test input is intended to monitor that contactors or
valves have dropped/returned before a new start is permitted.
This test input must not be confused with the reset function required for gates that a person can walk through and
where there is a high safety requirement (see JSBR4).
If the JSBT4 is used for safety Mats and safety Strips,
the "stop" condition is given following detection of a short
circuit. The safety mat, safety strip or the relay will not be
damaged by a continuous short-circuit. This also provides
the advantage that if there is a failure between inputs A
and B in the installation, the safety relay will not be damaged.
Safety level
The JSBT4 has a twin supervised safety function. Component failure, short-circuit or external disturbance (e.g. loss
of power supply) will not prevent the safe function of the
relay. Safety category level 3 or 4, depending on use.
The true two-channel safety function has the advantage
that the cabling installation demands for safety can be reduced, due to the fact that a short-circuit between the inputs will directly open the relay's safety outputs.
4:22
Width 45 mm
LED indications for power on,
inputs and outputs
3 NO/1NC relay outputs
Supply 24 VDC, 24, 48, 115
or 230 VAC
Quick release connector blocks
Regulations and standards
The JSBT4 is designed and approved in accordance with appro-
priate directives and standards. Examples of such are 98/37/EC,
EN ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1 and EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1.
Connection examples
For examples of how our safety relays can solve various safety
problems, please see the section “Connection examples”.
www.jokabsafety.com
Technical data – JSBT4
JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden
Colour:
Black and Beige
Power supply:
24 VDC +/- 15%
24/48/115/230VAC +/- 15%, 50 - 60 Hz
Power consumption:
< 2 VA
Relay outputs:
3 NO + 1 NC
Maximum switching capacity res. load AC:
6A/250 VAC/1500 VA
Maximum switching capacity res. load DC:
6A/24 VDC/150 W
Max. res. load total switching capacity:
12A distributed on all contacts
Minimum load:
10mA/10 V
(if load on contact has not exceeded 100 mA)
Contact material:
Ag + Au flash
Max. Input Wire res. at nom. voltage:
300 Ohm (S13 - S14 and S23 - S24)
Response time at deactivation:
< 20 ms, 145 ms with switched supply/power loss
Terminals (Max. screw torque 1 Nm):
Single strand: 1x4 mm2/2x1.5 mm2
Conductor with socket contact: 1x2.5 mm2/2x1mm2.
Mounting:
35 mm DIN-rail
Protection class enclosure/terminals:
IP 40/20 IEC 60529
Operating temperature range:
-10°C – +55°C
Air and creep distance:
4kV/2 IEC 60664-1
LED indication:
Electrical Supply, Inputs, Outputs
Weight:
350 g (24VDC), 460 g (24-230VAC)
input is opened the other one also has to be
opened in order to activate K1 and K2 again.
The test circuit, X1 - X2,has to be closed in
order to activate the outputs, thereafter the
test circuit can be opened or closed continously. If the test circuit is closed after the
inputs there is no requirement to close them
within 0.5 seconds of each other.
The internal supervision circuit monitors
the two Inputs and relays K1, K2. The stop
function then fulfils the requirement that one
3
4
Article number/Ordering data
10-004-00
10-004-02
10-004-03
10-004-04
10-004-05
10-004-14
10-004-20
*Only for AC-supply
The electrical supply is connected across
A1 and A2. After Voltage reduction and
Rectification (AC-versions) or reverse polarity
protection (DC-version) there is an overload
protection-circuit.
When the inputs S13-S14 and S23-S24
are closed within 0.5 seconds of each other
the relays K1 and K2 are energized . A dual
stop signal is given, K1 and K2 de-energize,
when there is a short circuit between or an
opening of the inputs or at power loss. If one
mm
45
Connector blocks are detachable
(without cables having to be disconnected)
Reset & Supervision circ.
*
2
74
Technical description – JSBT4
Prot.
circ.
1
120
Manufacturer:
24DC
24AC
48AC
115AC
230AC
115AC1 s.
24DC 1.5 s.
5
failure (short circuit, component, external
disturbance) shall not prevent the safe function of the JSBT4.
The safety outputs consist of contacts
from K1 and K2 connected internally in
series across terminals 13 - 14, 23 -24 and
33 - 34. These contacts are used to cut
the power to components which stop or
prevent hazardous movements/functions.
It is recommended that all switched loads
are adequately suppressed and/or fused in
order to provide additional protection for the
safety contacts.
The NC output 41 - 42 should only be used
for monitoring purposes e.g. Indication lamp
or PLC input etc. The output contacts are
closed until the module is reset.
Note: Output 41-42 is intended for indication purposes only, e.g. gate opened. No load
between S14 and S24 allowed.
6
7
8
9
Electrical connection – JSBT4
TEST
Emergency stop with automatic resetting.
TEST
TEST
Interlocked hatch with automatic resetting.
10
TEST
Contact mat/strip with automatic reset
11
TEST
TEST
LOAD
Monitoring to ensure that the Start button
cannot stick in pressed position. Short
circuiting over the closing contact is not monitored. The RT-series and JSBR4 have built
in short circuiting monitored re­setting.
Enabling device, JSHD4. Stop condition is
given in both top and bottom positions.
www.jokabsafety.com
Control and supervision of external contactor,
relay, valve or JOKAB SAFETY’s expansion
relays.
4:23
12
13
Approvals:
Safety relay/expansion relay
BT50(T)
Safety relay for:
Emergency stop
Interlocked hatch
Expansion of Pluto
Features:
Single and “dual” channel
Test/"reset" input
Width 22.5 mm
LED indication
3 NO/1NC relay outputs
Supply 24 VDC
Quick release connector blocks
Safety relay/expansion relay to Pluto
The BT50 is designed to connect safety devices, such as
emergency stops, directly in the voltage supply circuit to
the relay. Despite a maximum built-in width of 22.5 mm the
relay is very powerful.
With 3NO safety outputs, 1NC output (for monitoring
purposes), a test input and complete internal supervision,
the BT50 is quite unique. In addition, delayed outputs
(BT50T) can be ordered.
In order for the safety outputs to close, the supply voltage, e.g. by means of an emergency stop button, must be
connected to A1 and A2 and the test input closed. After
actuation of the relay the test input can be opened again.
The test input is intended to supervise that contactors
or valves have dropped/returned before a new start can
be permitted.The test input can also be used for starting
and the start button can be supervised (see the connection example on the next page).
More outputs
By connecting a BT50 to a safety relay/PLC it is easy to increase the number of safe outputs. This means that an unlimited number of dangerous machine operations and functions can be stopped by using just one safety relay/PLC.
Safety level
The BT50 has a twin and supervised internal safety function. Power failure, internal component faults or external
interference cannot result in dangerous functions.
Input via A1 on its own is not protected from short
4:24
BT50 - Additional power
terminals
BT50T - One changeover relay
with a double information output
(Y14)
BT50T
Delay times selectable from
0 - 1.5 s
circuiting, and therefore installation is critical for the safety level to be achieved. To achieve a higher safety level a
screened cable can be used and/or connection made to
both A1 and A2 (see the example on the next page).
Regulations and standards
The BT50 is designed and approved in accordance with appropriate directives and standards. Examples of such are 98/37/EC, EN
ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1, EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1.
Connection examples
For examples of how our safety relays can solve various
safety problems, please see the chapter “Connection
examples”.
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Technical data – BT50(T)
Manufacturer:
JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden
Colour:
Black and Beige
Operational voltage:
24 VDC + 15%/-25%
Power consumption:
< 2 VA
Relay outputs:
3 NO + 1 NC
Maximum switching capacity res. load AC:
6A/250 VAC/1500 VA
Maximum switching capacity res. load DC:
6A/24 VDC/150 W
Max. res. load total switching capacity:
12A distributed on all contacts
Minimum load:
10mA/10 V(if load on contact has not
exceeded 100 mA)
Contact material:
Ag + Au flash
Max Input Wire res. at nom. voltage:
200 Ohms
Response time at deactivation (input - output):
Version B <20 ms or delayed max 1500 ms (old
version of BT50 <60 ms)
Terminals (Max. screw torque 1 Nm):
Single strand: 2x1.5 mm2
Conductor with socket contact: 2x1mm2.
Mounting:
35 mm DIN-rail
Protection class enclosure/terminals:
IP 40/20 IEC 60529
Operating temperature range:
-10°C – +55°C
Air and creep distance:
4kV/2 IEC 60664-1
LED indication:
Electrical Supply, Relay and X4
Weight:
200 g
2
3
Connector blocks are detachable
(without cables having to be disconnected)
Article number/Ordering data
10-033-00
10-033-10
BT50
BT50T
5
Technical description – BT50(T)
The NC output 41 - 42 should only be
used for monitoring purposes e.g. indication
lamp for emergency stop pressed.
K1
Supervision circuit
4
K2
6
BT50T - Info. output
When supply voltage is connected to A1
and A2, relays K1 and K2 are activated. K1
and K2 drop if the supply voltage is disconnected. Both relays K1 and K2 must drop for
them to be activated again. Another requirement is that the test circuit, A1 - X4, must
be closed for the outputs to be activated.
Thereafter A1 - X4 can either be open or
constantly closed.
The supervising circuit ensures that both
K1 and K2 have dropped before they can
be reactivated. The stop function complies
with the requirement that a component fault
or external interference cannot lead to a
dangerous function.
The safety outputs consist of contacts
from K1 and K2 connected internally in
series across terminals 13 - 14, 23 - 24,
and 33 - 34. These contacts are used to
cut the power to components which stop
or prevent hazardous movements/functions.
It is recommended that all switched loads
are adequately suppressed and/or fused in
order to provide additional protection for the
safety contacts.
7
Max load
250 mA
BT50T - Delay times
A2 T1 T2
A2 T1 T2
0s
0.5 s
1.0 s
1.5 s
9
Electrical connection – BT50(T)
10
*
*
Emergency stop with reset when emergency
button returns.
Hatch with automatic reset.
*
Emergency stop with dual connection direct
to the supply voltage.
8
A1
BT50 as emergency stop and control
relay with Start and Stop function.
X4
Controlled monitoring of external contactor, relay, valve or JOKAB SAFETY’s
expansion relays.
11
LOAD
A1
X4
Monitoring to ensure that the On button is not stuck in pressed position. A
short circuit over the closing contact is
not monitored.
12
* BT50 has additional power terminals A1 and A2.
www.jokabsafety.com
4:25
13
Approvals:
Safety relay/expansion relay
BT51(T)
Safety relay for:
Emergency stop
Interlocked hatch
Expansion of Pluto
Features:
Single and “dual” channel
Test/"reset" input
Width 22.5 mm
LED indication
Safety relay/expansion relay to Pluto
The BT51 is designed to connect safety devices, such as
emergency stops, directly in the voltage supply circuit to
the relay. Despite a maximum built-in width of 22.5 mm the
relay is very powerful.
With 4 NO safety outputs, test input and complete internal supervising, the BT51 is quite unique. In addition
you can order delayed outputs (BT51T).
In order for the safety outputs to close, the supply voltage, e.g. by means of an emergency stop button, must be
connected to A1 and A2 and the test input closed. After
actuation of the relay the test input can be opened again.
The test input is intended to supervise that contactors
or valves have dropped/returned before a new start can
be permitted.The test input can also be used for starting
and the start button can be supervised (see connection
example on next page).
4 NO relay outputs
Supply 24 VDC
Quick release connector blocks
BT51 - Additional power
terminals
BT51T - One changeover relay
with a double information output
(Y14)
BT51T
Delay times selectable from
0 - 1.5 s
More outputs
By connecting BT51 to a safety relay/PLC it is easy to
increase the number of safe outputs. This means that an
unlimited number of dangerous machine operations and
functions can be stopped from one safety relay/PLC.
Safety level
The BT51 has a twin and supervised internal safety function. Power failure, internal component faults or external
interference cannot result in dangerous functions.
Input via A1 only is not protected from short circuiting,
and therefore installation is critical for the safety level to be
achieved. To achieve a higher safety level a screened cable can be used and/or connection made to both A1 and
A2 (see example overleaf).
4:26
Regulations and standards
The BT51 is designed and approved in accordance with
appropriate directives and standards. Examples of such
are 98/37/EC, EN ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1,
EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1.
Connection examples
For examples of how our safety relays can solve various
safety problems, please see the chapter “Connection
examples”.
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Technical data – BT51(T)
Manufacturer:
JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden
Colour:
Black and Beige
Operational voltage:
24 VDC + 15%/-25%
Power consumption:
< 2 VA
Relay outputs:
4 NO
Maximum switching capacity res. load AC:
6A/250 VAC/1500 VA
Maximum switching capacity res. load DC:
6A/24 VDC/150 W
Max. res. load total switching capacity:
12 A distributed on all contacts
Minimum load:
10mA/10 V(if load on contact has not exceeded
100 mA)
Contact material:
Ag + Au flash
Max Input Wire res. at nom. voltage:
200 Ohms
Response time at deactivation:
<20 ms or delayed max 1500 ms (BT51T)
Terminals (Max. screw torque 1 Nm):
Single strand: 2x1.5 mm2
2
Connector blocks are detachable
(without cables having to be disconnected)
Conductor with socket contact: 2x1mm2.
Mounting:
35 mm DIN-rail
Protection class enclosure/terminals:
IP 40/20 IEC 60529
Operating temperature range:
-10°C – +55°C
Air and creep distance:
4kV/2 IEC 60664-1
LED indication:
Electrical Supply, Relay and X4
Weight:
200 g
3
Article number/Ordering data
10-033-20
10-033-30
BT51
BT51T
5
Technical description – BT51(T)
6
Supervision circuit
When supply voltage is connected to A1
and A2, relays K1 and K2 are activated. K1
and K2 drop if the supply voltage is disconnected. Both relays K1 and K2 must drop for
them to be activated again. Another requirement is that the test circuit, A1 - X4, must
be closed for the outputs to be activated.
Thereafter A1 - X4 can either be open or
constantly closed.
The supervising circuit ensures that both
K1 and K2 have dropped before they can
be reactivated. The stop function complies
with the requirement that a component fault
or external interference cannot lead to a
dangerous function.
The safety outputs consist of contacts
from K1 and K2 connected internally in
series across terminals 13 - 14, 23 - 24, 33
- 34 and 43 - 44. These contacts are used
to cut the power to components which stop
or prevent hazardous movements/functions.
It is recommended that all switched loads
are adequately suppressed and/or fused in
order to provide additional protection for the
safety contacts.
BT51T - Info. output
7
Max load
250 mA
8
BT51T - Delay times
A2 T1 T2
A2 T1 T2
0s
0.5 s
1.0 s
1.5 s
9
Electrical connection – BT51(T)
10
*
*
Emergency stop with reset when emergency
button returns.
Hatch with automatic reset.
BT51 as emergency stop and control
relay with Start and Stop function.
11
LOAD
*
Emergency stop with dual connection direct
to the supply voltage.
4
A1
X4
Controlled monitoring of external contactor, relay, valve or JOKAB SAFETY’s
expansion relays.
A1
X4
Monitoring to ensure that the On button is not stuck in pressed position. A
short circuit over the closing contact is
not monitored.
12
* BT51 has additional power terminals A1 and A2.
www.jokabsafety.com
4:27
13
Approval:
Safety relay
RT10
Not ready at the time of printing
Safety relay for:
Contact rails
Safety mats
Advantages:
Manual or automatic reset
facility
Test input for monitoring
external contacts
22.5 mm width
LEDs to indicate power on,
inputs and outputs, shortcircuits and open circuits
2 NO relay outputs
One relay output with dual
information
Operating voltage 24 V DC
Detachable connection blocks
Two-wire connection
Safety relay for contact rails, bumpers and safety
mats
The RT10 is a safety relay that monitors one or more seriesconnected contact rails, bumpers or safety mats with a
two-wire connection and termination resistance.
Operation, a short-circuit or an open circuit in the contact
rail, bumper or safety mat, or a change in the termination
resistance will be detected by the RT10 and any hazardous
machinery movement inhibited.
Despite its compact design, the RT10 has two safety
outputs, two information outputs, five LEDs, dual connection
terminals for supply voltage and a detachable terminal block
which considerably simplifies installation and servicing.
In addition there is a manual or automatic reset facility.
Manually supervised resetting can be used, for example,
4:28
with safety mats across which passage is permitted. Automatic resetting can be used when passage over or through
the protection area is not possible and if suitable from a
risk viewpoint.
Regulations & standards
The RT10 is designed and approved in accordance with
appropriate directives and standards.
Examples of applicable regulations and standards are
98/37/EC, EN ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1 and EN 954-1/
EN ISO 13849-1.
Connection examples
You will find examples of how our safety relays can solve
various safety problems in “Connection examples”.
www.jokabsafety.com
LED indications
Technical data - RT10
Manufacturer
JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden
Article number/ordering data:
10-029-50
Colour
Black and beige
Weight
210 g
Operating voltage
Operating voltage (A1-A2)
24 VDC +/- 20%
Power consumption
At nominal voltage
2W
Safety input resistance S15/S16
OK
Short-circuit
Open circuit
1.2 kOhm
less than 150 Ohms
more than 1.5 kOhm
Reset input X1
Supply for reset
X1
Minimum closing time at nominal
voltage
Minimum closing time at undervoltage
(-20%)
Supply voltage OK, LED continuously lit. LED flashing on undervoltage,
overload or current limiting.
S/O
Indicates short-circuit or open circuit
at safety input.
R
Input conditions fulfilled OK.
1
2 Indicates that the output relays are
activated.
RT10 24DC
Installation
Rail
Ambient temperature
+ 24 V DC
300 mA pulse when closing
thereafter 30 mA
Connection blocks (detachable):
Max. torque, terminal screws
Max. connection area:
Solid conductors:
Conductor with socket contact:
Air and creep distance:
Protection class
Enclosure
Connection blocks
80 ms
35 mm DIN rail
-10°C to + 55°C
<100 ms
<20 ms
<20 ms
<80 ms
Relay outputs
NO
Max. switching capacity res. load AC
Max. switching capacity res. load DC
Max. total switching capacity res. load
Max. switching capacity
Contact material
Mechanical life
2
6A/250 V AC/1500 VA
6A/24 V DC/150 W
8A distributed on all contacts
10 mA/10 V (at max. load <100 mA)
Ag + Au flash
107 operations
Indicates that the RT10 is not reset.
Indicates that the RT10 is reset.
250 mA
Internal automatic fuse
1
2
3
1 Nm
1 x 4 mm2/2 x 1.5mm2/12 AWG
1 x 2.5mm2/2 x 1 mm2
4 kV/2 IEC 60664-1
4
IP 40 IEC 60529
IP 20 IEC 60529
100 ms
Response times
At activation
At start (input-output)
At deactivation
At loss of power
Relay output with dual information
Y14 -(0V)
+(24V)
Max. load at Y14
Short-circuit protection for
information output
On
5
6
Connector blocks are detachable
(without cables having to be disconnected)
7
8
Electrical connections – RT10
9
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
4:29
13
Approvals:
Safety relay
JSBT5(T)
Safety relay for:
Emergency stop
Interlocked hatch
Features:
Single and “dual” channel
Test/start input
Width 22.5 mm
LED indication
3 NO/1NC relay outputs
Single channel safety relay
The JSBT5 is designed to connect safety devices, such as
emergency stops, directly in the voltage supply circuit to
the relay. Despite a maximum built-in width of 22.5 mm the
relay is very powerful.
With 3 NO safety outputs, 1 NC, test input and complete
internal supervising, the JSBT5 is quite unique. In addition
you can order delayed outputs (JSBT5T).
In order for the safety outputs to close, the supply voltage, e.g. by means of an emergency stop button, must be
connected to A1 and A2 and the test input closed. After
actuation of the relay the test input can be opened again.
The test input is intended to supervise that contactors
or valves have dropped/returned before a new start can
be permitted.The test input can also be used for starting
and the start button can be supervised (see connection
example on next page).
Safety level
The JSBT5 has a twin and supervised internal safety function. Power failure, internal component faults or external
interference cannot result in dangerous functions.
Input via A1 only is not protected from short circuiting,
and therefore installation is critical for the safety level to be
achieved. To achieve a higher safety level a screened cable can be used and/or connection made to both A1 and
A2 (see example overleaf).
4:30
(T) = delayed outputs 0.5 sec.
Supply 12 VDC, 24 VDC/AC
Regulations and standards
The JSBT5 is designed and approved in accordance with
appropriate directives and standards. Examples of such are
98/37/EC, EN ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1, EN 954-1/
EN ISO 13849-1.
Connection examples
For examples of how our safety relays can solve various safety
problems, please see the section “Connection examples”.
www.jokabsafety.com
Technical data – JSBT5(T)
Manufacturer:
JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden
Colour:
Black and Beige
Operational voltage:
12 VDC, 24 VDC/AC + 15%/-25%, 50 - 60 Hz
Power consumption:
< 2 VA
Relay outputs:
3 NO + 1 NC
Maximum switching capacity res. load AC:
6A/250 VAC/1500 VA
Maximum switching capacity res. load DC:
6A/24 VDC/150 W
Max. total switching capacity:
9A distributed on all contacts
Minimum load:
10mA/10 V
(if load on contact has not exceeded 100 mA)
Contact material:
AgCuNi
Max Input Wire res. at nom. voltage:
200 Ohm
Response time at deactivation:
<60 ms or delayed max 500 ms (JSBT5T)
Terminals (Max. screw torque 1 Nm):
Single strand: 2x1.5 mm2
Conductor with socket contact: 2x1mm2.
Mounting:
35 mm DIN-rail
Protection class enclosure/terminals:
IP 40/20 IEC 60529
Operating temperature range:
-10°C – +55°C
Air and creep distance:
4kV/2 IEC 60664-1
Function indication:
Electrical Supply
Weight:
200 g
1
99
2
82
3
mm
22.5
4
Article number/Ordering data
10-005-01
10-005-07
10-005-11
JSBT5 24AC/DC
JSBT5 12VDC
JSBT5T 24AC/DC
5
Technical description – JSBT5(T)
6
When supply voltage is connected to A1
and A2, relays K1 and K2 are activated.
K1 and K2 drop if the supply voltage is
disconnected. Both relays K1 and K2 must
drop for them to be activated again. Another
requirement is that the test circuit, X1 - X2,
must be closed for the outputs to be activated. Thereafter X1 - X2 can either be open
or constantly closed.
The supervising circuit ensures that both
K1 and K2 have dropped before they can
be reactivated. The stop function complies
with the requirement that a component fault
or external interference cannot lead to a
dangerous function.
The safety outputs consist of contacts
from K1 and K2 connected internally in
series across terminals 13 - 14, 23 - 24,
and 33 - 34. These contacts are used to
cut the power to components which stop
or prevent hazardous movements/functions.
It is recommended that all switched loads
are adequately suppressed and/or fused in
order to provide additional protection for the
safety contacts.
The NC output 41 - 42 should only be
used for monitoring purposes e.g. indication
lamp for emergency stop pressed.
7
8
9
Electrical connection – JSBT5(T)
10
Emergency stop with automatic reset when
emergency button returns.
Hatch with automatic reset.
JSBT5 as emergency stop and control
relay with Start and Stop function.
11
Emergency stop with dual connection direct
to the supply voltage.
Controlled monitoring of external contactor,
relay, valve or JOKAB SAFETY’s expansion
relays.
www.jokabsafety.com
Monitoring to ensure that the On button is not stuck in pressed position. A
short circuit over the closing contact is
not monitored. The JSBR4 has built in
short circuit monitored resetting.
4:31
12
13
Approvals:
Safety timer
JSHT1
Safety timer for:
Time reset
Time bypassing
Features:
Hardwire time selection 5 – 40 s
Selectable single or dual
channel input
Test input
Width 45 mm
LED indication for supply,
inputs and outputs
The JSHT1A/B closes two independent relay outputs
during a guaranteed maximum time when the inputs
are opened.
Time reset
Time reset can prevent unintentional reset of safety systems when someone is still in the dangerous area of the
machine. During a guaranteed maximum time, one or several PB´s for reset must be activated. The reset buttons
should be sited in such a way that operatives have a clear
overview of the whole area which is guarded. Time reset
is made by the combination of a safety relay and the timer
relay JSHT1A/B.
1+1 NO relay outputs
Supply 24 VDC, 24, 48, 115
or 230 VAC
Quick release connector blocks
Connection examples
For examples of how our safety relays can solve various safety
problems, please see the section “Connection examples”.
Time bypassing
The JSHT1 can also be used for time bypass of light
beams for e.g. autotruck into a dangerous area.
1
2
Operation
When the inputs open the output contacts close. The output contacts open when the inputs close or when the time
period has expired. The time period is hardwire selectable
on terminals T1, T2 and T3. The time given is the maximum
time. One or two channel operation is also hardwire selectable.
Light beam being bypassed
for a maximum pre-set time
Regulations and standards
e.g. 5 sec. by the JSHT1
The JSHT1A/B is designed and approved in accordance during entrance and exit with
with appropriate directives and standards. Examples of the JSHD4 Three Position
such are 98/37/EC, EN ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1, Enabling device.
EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1.
4:32
www.jokabsafety.com
Time reset procedure. First push
PB1, then exit dangerous area and
close the door, then push PB2
(PB1 and PB2 must be pressed
within the predetermined time period selected). After this procedure
the machine can be safely restarted.
Technical data – JSHT1 A/B
1
120
Manufacturer:
JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden
Colour:
Black and Beige
Power supply:
24 VDC ± 15 %, 24/48/115/230 VAC ± 15 %,
50 - 60 Hz (AC versions JSHT1A only)
Power consumption:
< 3 VA
Max Input Wire res. at nom voltage/channel:
100/200 Ohm (1 Channel/ 2 Channel))
Response time at activation:
< 30 ms
Response time at deactivation:
< 15 ms
Selectable time(± 15 % at nom. v.):
JSHT1A: 5-10-15-20 sec
JSHT1B: 5-15-30-40 sec
Relay outputs:
2 x 1 NO
Maximum switching capacity res. load AC:
4A/250 VAC/1000 VA
Maximum switching capacity res. load DC:
4A/24 VDC/100 W
Max. total switching capacity:
8A distributed on all contacts
Minimum load:
10mA/10 V (if load on contact has not exceeded
100 mA)
Contact material:
AgCuNi
Terminals (Max. screw torque 1 Nm):
Single strand: 1x4 mm2/2x1.5 mm2
Conductor with socket contact: 1x2.5 mm2/2x1mm2
Mounting:
35 mm DIN-rail
Article number/Ordering data
Protection class enclosure/terminals:
IP20/IP40 IEC 60529
Operating temperature range:
-10°C – +55°C
Air and creep distance:
4 kV/2 IEC 60664-1
LED indication:
Electrical Supply, Inputs, Outputs
Weight:
24 VDC: 330 g 24/48/115/230 VAC: 430 g
10-011-00
10-011-02
10-011-03
10-011-04
10-011-05
10-011-10
2
74
mm
3
45
Connector blocks are detachable
(without cables having to be disconnected)
4
JSHT1A 24DC
JSHT1A 24AC
JSHT1A 48AC
JSHT1A 115AC
JSHT1A 230AC
JSHT1B 24DC
5
Technical description – JSHT1 A/B
Connection and
monitoring circuit
6
7
Timer
**
** Only for AC-supply.
The electrical supply is connected across
A1 and A2. The internal supervising circuit
is activated directly when the supply is on.
The inputs A and B must both be closed
and then opened. Thereafter K1 and K2
are activated and the outputs close. K1
and K2 are activated for the hardwired
selected time (set by connections on the
terminals T1, T2 and T3). If there is a short
circuit between the inputs or the inputs
are closed again before the set time period has expired the outputs will open. In
order to close the outputs again both the
inputs have to be closed and both internal
relays K1 and K2 deactivated (controlled by
the supervising circuit) and the inputs again
opened.
By external hardwire connections the
JSHT1 can be made single or dual channel input. See figure below.
8
9
Electrical connection – JSHT1 A/B
Connection for single channel input
10
Connection for dual channel input
11
Selection of time by hardwire links
JSHT1A
JSHT1B
* It is recommended that all switched loads are adequately
suppressed and/or fused in order to provide additional protection for the safety contacts. In the figure the monitoring
of two contactors in the test input is shown.
www.jokabsafety.com
4:33
12
13
Approvals:
Safety timer
JSHT2
Safety relay for:
Time bypassing
Inching
Features:
Hardwire time selection
0.2 – 40 s
Selectable single or dual
channel input
Test input
Width 45 mm
LED indication for supply, inputs
and outputs
The JSHT2A/B/C closes two independent relay outputs
during a guaranteed maximum period of time when
the inputs are closed.
1+1 NO relay outputs
Supply 24 VDC, 24, 48, 115 or
230 VAC
Time bypassing
Sensors detect the autocarrier and are connected to the
JSHT2 which supervises the sensors and bypasses the
light beam for a maximum predetermined time.
Inching
Inching applications require safety outputs to be closed
for a predetermined maximum period of time, allowing the
machine to move only a short distance each time the inching control is activated. For each new motion the inching
control e.g. PB or pedal must be released and activated
again.
Quick release connector blocks
Connection examples
For examples of how our safety relays can solve various safety
problems, please see the section “Connection examples”.
Operation
When the inputs close the output contacts close. The output contacts open when the input opens or when the time
period has expired. The time is hardwire selectable on the
terminals T1, T2 and T3. The time given is the maximum
time. Single or dual channel operation is also hardwire selectable.
Regulations and standards
The JSHT2A/B/C is designed and approved in accordance
with appropriate directives and standards. Examples of
such are 98/37/EC, EN ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1,
EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1.
4:34
Light beam being bypassed
only for the time it takes the
autocarrier to pass.
www.jokabsafety.com
Shaft only turns a small
amount each time the PB is
pressed.
Technical data – JSHT2 A/B/C
1
120
Manufacturer:
JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden
Colour:
Black and Beige
Power supply:
24 VDC ± 15 %
24/48/115/230 VAC ± 15 %, 50 - 60 HZ
Power consumption:
< 3 VA
Max Input Wire res. at nom voltage/channel:
100/200 Ohm (1 Channel/ 2 Channel)
Response time at activation:
< 30 ms
Response time at deactivation:
< 15 ms
Selectable time(± 15 % at nom. v.):
JSHT2A: 0.2 - 0.5 - 0.7 - 1.0 sec
JSHT2B: 5 - 10 - 15 - 20 sec
JSHT2C: 5 - 15 - 30 - 40 sec
Relay outputs:
2 x 1 NO
Maximum switching capacity res. load AC:
4A/250 VAC/1000 VA
2
74
mm
45
Connector blocks are detachable
(without cables having to be disconnected)
Maximum switching capacity res. load DC:
4A/24 VDC/100 W
Max. total switching capacity:
8A distributed on all contacts
Minimum load:
10mA/10 V (if load on contact has not exceeded
100 mA)
Contact material:
AgCuNi
Terminals (Max. screw torque 1 Nm):
Single strand: 1 x 4 mm2, 2 x 1,5 mm2
Conductor with socket contact: 1 x 2,5 mm2, 2 x 1 mm2
Mounting:
35 mm DIN-rail
Protection class enclosure/terminals:
IP 20/IP 40 IEC 60529
Operating temperature range:
-10°C – +55°C
Air and creep distance:
4 kV/2 IEC 60664-1
LED indication:
Electrical Supply, Inputs, Outputs
Weight:
24 VDC: 310 g. 24/48/115/230 VAC: 410 g.
4
Article number/Ordering data
10-012-00
10-012-02
10-012-03
10-012-04
10-012-05
10-012-10
10-012-12
10-012-13
10-012-14
10-012-15
10-012-20
JSHT2A 24DC
JSHT2A 24AC
JSHT2A 48 AC
JSHT2A 115 AC
JSHT2A 230 AC
JSHT2B 24DC
JSHT2B 24AC
JSHT2B 48 AC
JSHT2B 115 AC
JSHT2B 230 AC
JSHT2C 24DC
5
6
Technical description – JSHT2 A/B/C
Connection and
monitoring circuit
3
7
Timer
**
** Only for AC-supply.
The electrical supply is connected across
A1 and A2. The internal supervising circuit is
activated directly when the supply is on. The
inputs A and B must both be opened and
then closed. Thereafter K1 and K2 are activated and the outputs close. K1 and K2
are activated for hardwired selected time
8
(set by connections on the terminals T1,
T2 and T3). If there is a short circuit between the inputs or the inputs are opened
again before the set time period has expired the outputs will open. In order to close
the outputs again both the inputs have to
be opened and both internal relays K1 and
K2 deactivated (controlled by the supervising circuit) and then the inputs closed
again.
By external hardwire connectors the
JSHT2 can be made to operate from
either single or dual channel inputs. See
figure below.
9
Electrical connection – JSHT2 A/B/C
Connection for single channel input
10
Connection for dual channel input
11
Selection of time by hardwire links
JSHT2A
JSHT2B
www.jokabsafety.com
JSHT2C
* It is recommended that all switched
loads are adequately suppressed
and/or fused in order to provide
additional protection for the safety
contacts. In the figure the monitoring
of two contactors in the test input
is shown.
4:35
12
13
Approvals:
Expansion relay
E1T
Expansion relay with:
More safety outputs
Delayed safety outputs
Features:
Width 22.5 mm
Supply 24 VDC
LED output indication
4 NO relay outputs
Single or dual channel
operation option
More outputs
By connecting expansion relays to a safety relay it is easy
to increase the number of safe outputs. This means that
an unlimited number of dangerous machine operations
and functions can be stopped from one safety relay.
Safe soft stop
When a gate is opened a program stop is first given to the
machine’s PLC/servo which brakes the dangerous operations in a soft and controlled way. The safety outputs then
break the power to the motors, that is, when the machine
has already stopped. Normally between 0.5 and 1 second
is needed to brake a dangerous machine operation softly.
Soft stop ensures many advantages:
s 4HEMACHINELASTSLONGER
s 0ARTSBEINGPROCESSEDARENOTDAMAGED
s 2ESTART FROM STOPPED POSITION IS ENABLED AND SIMPLIfied.
A safe soft stop is achieved by means of a safety relay
which gives the program stop, and an expansion relay,
E1T, which gives safe delayed stop signals. See section
”Connection examples”. The drop time delay on a E1T can
as standard be selected from 0 to 3 seconds. By connecting several E1T´s in series even longer times can be achieved.
When are delayed safe stops used?
Delayed safety stop signals can be used for emergency
stops according to EN418 § 4.1.5. Stop category 1, i.e. a
controlled stop with power to the actuator(s) available to
achieve the stop and then removal of power when stop is
achieved.
4:36
Quick release connector blocks
Stop category 1 may also be permitted when it is not
possible to gain physical access to the machine before
the safe stop is affected e.g:
s 'ATESACCESSTIMEISNORMALLYOVERSEC
s #OVERSANDGATESWHICHARELOCKEDUNTILDANGEROUS
operations and functions have been stopped.
s ,ONGDISTANCESBETWEENASAFETYDEVICEANDA
dangerous machine function.
Safety level
The E1T has twin stop functions, that is, two relays with
mechanically operated contacts. A monitored stop function is achieved by connecting the test output (terminals
X1 and X2) to the test or reset input on the safety relay
which is being expanded.
One condition for a safe delayed stop is that the delay
time cannot increase in the event of a fault. The E1T complies with this requirement.
Regulations and standards
The E1T is designed and approved in accordance with appropriate directives and standards. Examples of such are
98/37/EC, EN ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1, EN 954-1/
EN ISO 13849-1.
Connection examples
For examples of how our safety relays can solve various safety
problems, please see the section “Connection examples”.
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Technical data – E1T
Manufacturer:
JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden
Colour:
Black and Beige
Operational voltage:
24 VDC ± 15%
Power consumption:
2W
Relay outputs:
4 NO
Max. switching capacity res. load AC:
6A/250VAC/1500VA
Max. switching capacity res. load DC:
6A/24VDC/150W
2
Max. total switching capacity:
12A distributed on all contacts
Total unit switching cap:
12A distributed on all contacts
Min. switching load:
10 mA/10 V
(if load on contact has not exceeded 100 mA)
Contact material:
Ag + Au flash
Maximum external resistance at a nominal voltage: 150 Ohm (S14, S24)
3
Connector blocks are detachable
(without cables having to be disconnected)
Response time at deactivation (input - output):
< 0,020 s, 0,5 s, 1 s, 1,5 s, 2 s, 3 s, ± 20%
Terminals (Max. screw torque 1 Nm):
Single strand: 1x4 mm2/2x1,5 mm2
Conductor with socket contact: 1x2,5 mm2/2x1mm2.
Mounting:
35 mm DIN rail
Article number/Ordering data
Protection class encloure/terminals:
IP 40/20 IEC 60529
Operating temperature range:
-10°C – +55°C
Air and creep distance:
4kV/2 IEC 60664-1
LED indication:
Output status
Weight:
220 g
10-030-00
10-030-10
10-030-20
10-030-30
10-030-40
10-030-50
4
E1T 0s 24DC
E1T 0,5s 24DC
E1T 1 s 24DC
E1T 1,5s 24DC
E1T 2s 24DC
E1T 3s 24DC
5
Technical description – E1T
stop signal is given, K1 and K2 drop, if the
inputs are opened or during power failure. K1
and K2 drop either directly or after a delay* (if
incorporated). Delay time of module is fixed
and shown on front panel of device. The delay
circuit is so arranged that the design time
cannot be exceeded.
The E1T has to be connected to a safety
relay in order to fulfill the necessary safety
requirements (see connection examples
below). The safety relay controls and monitors the E1T (The E1T can be connected
for single or dual channel operation - see
below). When the inputs S14 and S24
close, relays K1 and K2 are activated. A
To check that both the relays K1 and
K2 drop during a stop signal they must be
monitored. This is achieved by connecting
X1 and X2 to the test or reset input on the
safety relay which is expanded (see below).
K1 and K2 are mechanically operated relays,
therefore, if one of the output contacts
should stick closed then the relay’s contact
in X1-X2 cannot be closed thus preventing
a new ready signal being given to the safety
relay.
Inductive loads should be equipped with
an arc suppressor to protect the output
contacts.
Diodes are the best arc suppressors
but will increase the switch off time of
the load.
Electrical connection – E1T
SAFETY RELAY RT6
6
7
8
9
SAFETY RELAY RT6
10
11
DELAYED SAFETY STOP
Single channel expansion of outputs for a
safety relay connected to an emergency
stop.
Dual channel expansion with delayed safety
outputs for a safety relay monitoring a gate.
www.jokabsafety.com
12
4:37
13
Approvals:
Expansion relay
JSR1T
Expansion relay with:
More safe outputs
Delayed safe outputs
Information output
Features:
Width 45 mm
Supply 24 VDC
LED function indication
4 NO/1 NC relay outputs
Single and dual channel
Quick release connector blocks
More outputs
By connecting expansion relays to a safety relay it is easy
to increase the number of safe outputs. This means that an
unlimited number of dangerous machine operations and
functions can be stopped from one safety relay.
Safe soft stop
When a gate is opened a program stop is first given to the
machine’s PLC/servo which brakes the dangerous operations in a soft and controlled way. The safety outputs then
break the power to the motors, that is, when the machine
has already stopped. Normally between 0.5 and 1 second
is needed to brake a dangerous machine operation softly.
Soft stop ensures many advantages:
s 4HEMACHINELASTSLONGER
s 0ARTSBEINGPROCESSEDARENOTDAMAGED
s 2ESTARTFROMSTOPPEDPOSITIONISENABLEDAND simplified.
A safe soft stop is achieved by means of a safety relay
which gives the program stop, and an expansion relay, JSR1T, which gives safe delayed stop signals. See section
”Connection examples”. The drop time delay on a JSR1T
can as standard be selected from 0 to 10 seconds. By
connecting several JSR1T´s in series even longer times
can be achieved.
When are delayed safe stops used?
Delayed safety stop signals can be used for emergency
stops according to EN418 § 4.1.5. Stop category 1, i.e. a
controlled stop with power to the actuator(s) available to
achieve the stop and then removal of power when stop is
achieved.
4:38
Stop category 1 may also be permitted when it is not
possible to gain physical access to the machine before the
safe stop is affected e.g:
s 'ATESACCESSTIMEISNORMALLYOVERSEC
s #OVERSANDGATESWHICHARELOCKEDUNTILDANGEROUS
operations and functions have been stopped.
s ,ONGDISTANCESBETWEENASAFETYDEVICEANDA dangerous machine function.
Safety level
The JSR1T has twin stop functions, that is, two relays with
mechanically operated contacts. A monitored stop function
is achieved by connecting the test output (terminals X1
and X2) to the test or reset input on the safety relay which
is being expanded.
One condition for a safe delayed stop is that the delay time cannot increase in the event of a fault. The JSR1T
complies with this requirement.
Regulations and standards
The JSR1T is designed and approved in accordance with
appropriate directives and standards. Examples of such are
98/37/EC, EN ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1, EN 954-1/
EN ISO 13849-1.
Connection examples
For examples of how our safety relays can solve various safety
problems, please see the section “Connection examples”.
www.jokabsafety.com
Technical data – JSR1T
1
120
Manufacturer:
JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden
Colour:
Black and Beige
Power supply:
24 VDC ± 15%
Power consumption:
<2W
Relay outputs:
4 NO + 1 NC
Maximum switching capacity res. load AC:
6A/250 VAC/1500 VA
Maximum switching capacity res. load DC:
6A/24 VDC/150 W
Max. total switching capacity:
16A distributed on all contacts
Minimum load:
10mA/10 V (if load on contact has not
exceeded 100 mA)
2
74
mm
45
Contact material:
Ag + Au flash
Max Input Wire res. at nom voltage:
150 Ohm (S14, S24)
Response time at deactivation(input- output):
< 0,020 s, 0,5 s, 1 s, 1,5 s, 2 s, 3 s, 5 s, 8 s,
10 s ± 20 %
Terminals (Max. screw torque 1 Nm):
Single strand: 1x4 mm2/2x1,5 mm2
Conductor with socket contact: 1x2,5 mm2/2x1mm2
Mounting:
35 mm DIN-rail
Protection class enclosure/terminals:
IP 40/20 IEC 60529
Operating temperature range:
-10°C – +55°C
Air and creep distance:
4KV/2 IEC 60664-1
LED indication:
Output Relay Supplies
Weight:
280 g
Connector blocks are detachable
(without cables having to be disconnected)
3
Article number/Ordering data:
10-015-00
10-015-05
10-015-06
10-015-10
10-015-20
10-015-30
10-015-40
10-015-50
10-015-60
JSR1T 0
JSR1T 1,5
JSR1T 8
JSR1T 0,5
JSR1T 10s
JSR1T 1
JSR1T 2
JSR1T 3
JSR1T 5
6A 24 DC
6A 24DC
6A 24 DC
6A 24 D
6A 24DC
6A 24 DC
6A 24 DC
6A 24 DC
6A 24DC
4
5
Technical description – JSR1T
signal is given, K1 and K2 drop, if the inputs
are opened or during power failure. K1 and
K2 drop either directly or after a delay* (If
incorporated). Delay time of module is fixed
and shown on front panel of device. The
delay circuit is so arranged that the design
time cannot be exceeded.
The JSR1T has to be connected to a safety
relay in order to fulfill the necessary safety
requirements (see connection examples below). The safety relay controls and monitors
the JSR1T. (The JSR1T can be connected
for single or dual channel operation - see
below). When the inputs S14 and S24
close, relays K1 and K2 are activated. A stop
To check that both the relays K1 and
K2 drop during a stop signal they must be
monitored. This is achieved by connecting
X1 and X2 to the test or reset input on the
safety relay which is expanded (see below).
K1 and K2 are mechanically operated relays,
therefore, if one of the output contacts
should stick closed then the relay’s contact
in X1-X2 cannot be closed thus preventing
a new ready signal being given to the safety
relay.
Inductive loads should be equipped with
an arc suppressor to protect the output
contacts.
Diodes are the best arc suppressors
but will increase the switch off time of the
load.
Electrical connection – JSR1T
6
7
8
9
SAFETY RELAY RT6
SAFETY RELAY RT6
10
02/'2!-34/0
11
JSR1T
JSR1T
JSR1T
Expansion of outputs for safety relay connected to emergency stop with automatic
reset.
DELAYED SAFETY STOP
Dual-channel expansion with delayed safety
outputs for safety relay monitoring a gate.
www.jokabsafety.com
12
4:39
13
Approvals:
Expansion relay
JSR2A
Expansion relay with:
More safe outputs
Greater current switching
capacity
Information output
Features:
Switching up to
10 A/250V/output
Width 45 mm
LED function indication
4 NO/1 NC relay outputs
More outputs
The JSR2A expansion relay is used to provide increased
switching capacity and number of safety outputs to a safety
relay. This means that an unlimited number of dangerous
machine operations and functions can be stopped from one
safety relay.
Greater current switching capacity
The JSR2A Expansion relay enables switching of up to 10
amps (AC/DC) per output contact.
Safety level
The JSR2A has twin stop functions, that is, two relays with
mechanically positively guided contacts. A monitored stop
function is achieved by connecting the test output (terminals
X1 and X2) to the test or reset input on the safety relay which
is to be expanded.
Regulations and standards
The JSR2A is designed and approved in accordance with
appropriate directives and standards. Examples of such are
98/37/EC, EN ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1, EN 954-1/
EN ISO 13849-1.
Connection examples
For examples of how our safety relays can solve various safety
problems, please see the section “Connection examples”.
4:40
www.jokabsafety.com
5 supply versions
Supply 24 VDC/VAC, 48 115
and 230 VAC
Quick release connector blocks
Technical data – JSR2A
JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden
Colour:
Black and Beige
Supply A1 - A2:
24 VDC/AC, 48, 115, 230 VAC + 15%, 50-60 Hz
Power consumption:
< 2.5 VA
Relay outputs:
4 NO + 1 NC
Maximum switching capacity res. load AC:
10A/250VAC/1840VA
Maximum switching capacity res. load DC:
10A/24 VDC/192W
Max. total switching capacity:
26A distributed on all contacts
Minimum load:
10mA/10V/100mW
(if load on contact has not exceeded 100 mA)
Contact Material:
AgSnO2 + Au flash
Max. wire resistance at nominal voltage:
24 VDC/VAC:
48/115/230 VAC:
100 Ohm
200 Ohm
Mechanical operational Life:
>107 operations
Response time:
At deactivation (input - output):
At activation (input - output):
<25 ms
<15 ms
Terminals (removable):
Max. screw torque:
1 Nm
Connection Area (max.):
Single strand:
Conductor with socket contact:
1 x 4 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2 /12AWG
1 x 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1 mm2
Mounting:
35 mm DIN rail
Operating temperature range:
-10oC to +55oC
Air and creep distance:
4kV/2 IEC 60664-1
Protection class:
Enclosure:
Terminals:
IP 40 IEC 60529
IP 20 IEC 60529
LED indication:
1
On
2
74
(mm)
3
45
Connector blocks are detachable
(without cables having to be disconnected)
Supply voltage
2 Output relays 1 and 2
313 g
Weight:
1
120
Manufacturer:
Note
The total switching capacity of the JSR2A
is 26A.
The load on each single contact must not
exceed 10 A.
Min. switching requirement of 10mA is not
valid after the contact has been subjected
to load currents exceeding 100 mA.
Article number/Ordering data:
10-027-01
10-027-03
10-027-04
10-027-05
JSR2A
JSR2A
JSR2A
JSR2A
10A 24AC/DC
10A 48 AC
10A 115AC
10A 230AC
4
5
6
7
Technical description – JSR2A
Outputs
Supply
Test
The JSR2A has to be connected to a suitable safety relay in order to fulfill the necessary safety requirements (see chapter
“Connection examples”). The Safety Relay
controls and monitors the JSR2A unit. (The
JSR2A can be connected for single or dual
channel operation - see Electrical connection
diagrams below). When the inputs to S14
and S24 close, internal relays K1 and K2
are activated. A stop signal is given, K1 and
K2 drop, if the inputs are opened or during
power failure.
To check that both the K1 and K2 relays
drop during a stop signal they must be
monitored. This is achieved by connecting
X1 and X2 to the test or reset input on the
safety relay which is expanded. K1 and
K2 have mechanically positively guided
contacts, therefore, if one of the output
contacts should stick closed then the
relay’s contact in X1-X2 cannot be closed
thus preventing a new ready signal being
given to the safety relay.
8
9
10
11
Electrical connection – JSR2A
One channel expansion of RT6 with
JSR2A connected for manual reset.
12
Reset
Dual channel expansion of RT6 with JSR2A
connected for automatic reset.
www.jokabsafety.com
4:41
13
Approvals:
Expansion relay
JSR3T
Expansion relay with
delay with:
Hardwire selection of
delay time
Delayed safe outputs
Features:
Width 22.5 mm
Supply 24V AC/DC
Output indication
2 x 1 NO relay outputs
Hardwire Selectable Delay
0.5 - 10.0 sec by hardwire links
and Time trim potentiometer
Delayed outputs
By connecting the JSR3T expansion relay to a compatible
Safety relay it is easy to obtain safe "delayed" outputs.
The JSR3T provides the system designer with the facility
to hardwire selected time delays in steps between 0.5 and
10 seconds.
Use of delayed outputs
There are many applications where delayed outputs are necessary and permissible. For example delayed stop signals can
be used for emergency stops according to EN418 § 4.1.5
Stop Category 1 (a controlled stop with power to the machine
actuator(s) available to achieve the stop and then removal of
power when stop is achieved). Stop Category 1 may also be
permitted when it is not possible to gain physical access to
the machine before the safe stop is effected e.g. by:
• Covers and Gates which are locked until dangerous
operations and functions have been stopped.
• Long distances between a safety device and dangerous
machine functions.
Using this technique of stopping a machine provides many
advantages i.e.:
• Machines last longer as they are not subjected to excessive
loading etc when requested to stop.
• Parts being processed are not damaged.
• Restarting machines from stopped position is simplified.
A safe "Soft" stop is achieved by means of a safety relay
giving a programme stop to the machine control system.
e.g. when a gate is opened or emergency stop is activated.
The output of the Safety relay is used to provide both a stop
signal to the machine control system i.e. via a PLC which
applies the necessary braking/stopping of the machine in a
4:42
controlled way, and to switch a delayed expansion relay e.g
JSR3T. The delayed safety outputs of the JSR3T expansion
relay are then used to control the safe disconnection of the
power to the actuators/motors etc. of the machine.
Safety level
The JSR3T has twin stop functions, using two positively
guided contact relays.
In order to achieve the level of monitoring required the
JSR3T must be used with a suitable Safety Relay e.g.
JSBR4, or RT6. The JSR3T test output (terminals X1 and
X2) must be connected to the test input of the Safety relay
being expanded (see connection examples).
The JSR3T provides delay times that even in the event of
an internal fault condition complies with the requirement that
the set delay cannot increase in time.
Regulations and standards
The JSR3T is designed and approved in accordance with
appropriate directives and standards. Examples of such are
98/37/EC, EN ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1, EN 954-1/
EN ISO 13849-1.
Connection examples
For examples of how our safety relays can solve various safety
problems, please see the section “Connection examples”.
www.jokabsafety.com
Technical data – JSR3T
Manufacturer:
JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden
Colour:
Black and Beige
Power supply:
24 VAC/DC, 50 - 60 Hz
Power consumption:
< 2 VA
Relay Outputs:
2 x 1 NO (See Connection examples)
Maximum switching capacity res. load AC:
4A/250VAC/1000 VA
1
99
2
82
Maximum switching capacity res. load DC:
4A/24 VDC/100 W
Max. total switching capacity:
6A distributed on all contacts
Minimum load:
10mA/10V (if load on contact has not
exceeded 100 mA)
Contact material:
AgNi
Max. Input wire res. at nom voltage:
100 Ohm
Response time at activation:
<20ms
Response time at deactivation:
<0.5 - 10.0 sec. at nom. voltage. Selected delay
can be lowered by up to approx. 30% by means
of preset potentiometer on front panel.
Terminals (Max. screw torque 1 Nm):
Single strand: 2x1.5 mm2
Conductor with socket contact: 2x1mm2.
Mounting:
35 mm DIN-rail
Protection class, enclosure/terminals:
IP 40/20 IEC 60529
Operating temperature range:
–10°C to +55°C
Air and creep distance::
4kV/2 IEC 60664-1
LED indication:
Outputs
Article number/Ordering data:
Weight:
158 g
10-017-01
3
mm
22.5
4
5
JSR3T 24 AC/DC
Technical description – JSR3T
6
Note 1
Max. time set by hardwire links can only be
reduced (up to approx. 30% reduction) by
Time Trim potentiometer.
When supply voltage is connected to A1 and
A2, relays K1 and K2 are activated. When
the supply voltage is removed relays K1 and
K2 remain energized for a time period de-
termined by the hardwire link configuration
chosen (set by connecting links on the terminals Y1, Y2, Y3 and Y4.) and the setting
of the Time Trim potentiometer.
NOTE 2
Both the output contacts of K1 and K2 (13
- 14 and 23 - 24) must be used. Output
contacts must be either connected in series (forming one safety output) or used in
parallel circuits in order to obtain necessary
redundancy.
7
8
9
Electrical connection – JSR3T
10
11
It is recommended that all switched loads are adequately suppressed and/or
fused in order to provide additional protection for the safety contacts.
Selection of time delay by hardwire links (Y1, Y2, Y3, Y4).
12
Selected delay can be lowered by up to approx. 30% by means of preset
potentiometer on front panel.
www.jokabsafety.com
4:43
13
Contents
Page
HA5400A Connection examples JSBR4 ___________________________________________ 4:45
HA6400A Connection examples JSBT4 ___________________________________________ 4:45
HA6500A Connection examples JSBT5____________________________________________4:46
HA6500B Connection examples BT50 ____________________________________________4:46
HA6501B Connection examples BT50T ___________________________________________ 4:47
HA6500C Connection examples BT51 ____________________________________________ 4:47
HA6501C Connection examples BT51T ___________________________________________4:48
HA7100A Connection examples JSBRT11 _________________________________________4:48
HA7600A Connection examples RT6 ______________________________________________4:49
HA7600B Principle drawing RT6 _________________________________________________4:49
HA7672A Enabling device JSHD4 - EX with RT6 ____________________________________4:50
HA7700A Connection examples RT7 ______________________________________________4:50
HA7900A Connection examples RT9 ______________________________________________4:51
HE3811B Safety Light Beam Spot with time-limited reset _____________________________4:51
HE3824C Lightbeam with time-limited bypass 0.2–40 s ______________________________4:52
HE3824E Lightbeams with time-limited bypass 0.2–40 s _____________________________4:52
HG7636B Focus light grid/curtain with three-position device __________________________4:53
HG7611A Interlocked door with RT6 and pre-reset __________________________________4:53
HG7636A Interlocked door with three-position device ________________________________4:54
HG7646A Interlocked door with three-position device and time-limited entrance/exit ______4:54
HG7654A Interlocked door with RT6 and output expansion JSR1T _____________________ 4:55
HG7658A Interlocked door with RT6 and output expansion JSR2A _____________________ 4:55
HG7673A Interlock switch JSNY8 with RT6 ________________________________________4:56
HG7674A Safety interlock switch JSNY9M/MLA with RT6 ____________________________4:56
HG7674B Safety interlock switch JSNY9S/SLA with RT6 _____________________________ 4:57
HH0000C Three-position device JSHD4 with various safety modules ___________________ 4:57
HI8552A Connection examples JSHT2 intermittent running ___________________________4:58
HK7600A Safety mat/Contact strip with RT6 _______________________________________4:58
HK7100A Safety mat/Contact strip with RT10 ______________________________________4:59
HL7600B Several JSNY7 connected to one RT6 with unique indication _________________4:59
HM0000A Magnetic switch JSNY7 with various safety modules________________________4:60
HN7660A Delayed outputs RT6 with output expansion JSR3T and RT7 _________________4:60
HP7600A Machine control - Isolation of PLC inputs and outputs _______________________4:61
HP7600B Machine control-Isolation of PLC outputs __________________________________4:61
HR7200B Focus light curtain/beam _______________________________________________4:62
HR7800B Focus lightbeam/curtain ________________________________________________4:62
HT5400A Two-hand device with safety relay JSBR4 _________________________________4:63
HB0008A Focus light curtain/light beam connected to an RT9 with the aid of a M12-3D _____ 4:63
4:44
www.jokabsafety.com
HA5400A Connection examples JSBR4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
HA6400A Connection examples JSBT4
8
9
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
4:45
13
HA6500A Connection examples JSBT5
HA6500B Connection examples BT50
4:46
www.jokabsafety.com
HA6501B Connection examples BT50T
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
HA6500C Connection examples BT51
8
9
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
4:47
13
HA6501C Connection examples BT51T
HA7100A Connection examples JSBRT11
4:48
www.jokabsafety.com
HA7600A Connection examples RT6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
HA7600B Principle drawing RT6
8
9
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
4:49
13
HA7672A Enabling device JSHD4 - EX with RT6
HA7700A Connection examples RT7
4:50
www.jokabsafety.com
HA7900A Connection examples RT9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
HE3811B Safety Light Beam Spot with time-limited reset
8
9
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
4:51
13
HE3824C Lightbeam with time-limited bypass 0.2–40 s
HE3824E Lightbeams with time-limited bypass 0.2–40 s
4:52
www.jokabsafety.com
HG7636B Focus light grid/curtain with three-position device
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
HG7611A Interlocked door with RT6 and pre-reset
8
9
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
4:53
13
HG7636A Interlocked door with three-position device
HG7646A Interlocked door with three-position device and time-limited entrance/exit
4:54
www.jokabsafety.com
HG7654A Interlocked door with RT6 and output expansion JSR1T
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
HG7658A Interlocked door with RT6 and output expansion JSR2A
8
9
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
4:55
13
HG7673A Interlock switch JSNY8 with RT6
HG7674A Safety interlock switch JSNY9M/MLA with RT6
4:56
www.jokabsafety.com
HG7674B Safety interlock switch JSNY9S/SLA with RT6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
HH0000C Three-position device JSHD4 with various safety modules
8
9
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
4:57
13
HI8552A Connection examples JSHT2 intermittent running
HK7600A Safety mat/Contact strip with RT6
4:58
www.jokabsafety.com
HK7100A Safety mat/Contact strip with RT10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
HL7600B Several JSNY7 connected to one RT6 with unique indication
8
9
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
4:59
13
HM0000A Magnetic switch JSNY7 with various safety modules
HN7660A Delayed outputs RT6 with output expansion JSR3T and RT7
4:60
www.jokabsafety.com
HP7600A Machine control - Isolation of PLC inputs and outputs
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
HP7600B Machine control-Isolation of PLC outputs
8
9
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
4:61
13
HR7200B Focus light curtain/beam
HR7800B Focus lightbeam/curtain
4:62
www.jokabsafety.com
HT5400A Two-hand device with safety relay JSBR4
1
2
3
4
5
6
HB0008A Focus light curtain/light beam connected to an RT9 with the aid of a M12-3D
7
8
9
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
4:63
13
Light curtains, Light grids,
Light beams and Scanner
www.jokabsafety.com
Page
1
Why use light beams/light curtains?_ ___________________________________5:2
• Reset – 3 alternatives___________________________________________________5:4
• Muting______________________________________________________________5:5
• Blanking_____________________________________________________________5:5
2
Light curtain for short safety distance___________________________________5:6
3
Contents Cycle initiation with light curtain________________________________________5:7
Safety light curtain and light grid - Focus ___________________________________5:10
• Summary__________________________________________________________ 5:11
• Technical data_ _____________________________________________________ 5:12
• Reset_____________________________________________________________ 5:12
• Laser aligner JSRL-3__________________________________________________ 5:13
• Muting with MF-T and MF-L units_________________________________________ 5:13
• Muting with FMC and FMI units__________________________________________ 5:15
4
Muting sensors – Mute R____________________________________________ 5:18
6
5
Muting sensors – Mute D____________________________________________ 5:19
Focus stand system - Bjorn__________________________________________ 5:20
7
Focus Wet_ ________________________________________________________ 5:22
Blanking programming – BP 1_ ______________________________________ 5:23
8
Connection examples_______________________________________________ 5:24
Safety Light Beam Spot_ ____________________________________________ 5:32
9
Laser scanner Look_________________________________________________ 5:36
10
11
While every effort has been taken to ensure the accuracy of information contained in this book and any associated promotional and information material
JOKAB SAFETY cannot accept responsibility for errors or omissions and reserves the right to make any improvements without notice. It is the users
responsibility to ensure that this equipment is correctly designed, specified, installed, cared for and operated to meet all applicable local, national and
international codes/regulations. Technical data in our book is correct to the level of accuracy of Jokab Safety´s test procedures as verified by various
international approved bodies. Other information (such as application examples, wiring diagrams, operation or use) is intended solely to illustrate
the various uses of our products. JOKAB SAFETY does not quarantee or imply that the product when used in accordance with such examples in
a particular environment will fulfil any particular safety requirement and does not assume any responsibility or liability for actual use of the product
based on the examples given. 2008 v02.
www.jokabsafety.com
5:1
12
13
Why use light grids
and light curtains?
Light beams and light curtains are a production friendly safety component that do not
physically impact on the actions of the machine operator. Light barrier protection is also a
good safety component for use when goods are to be passed in and out of a risk area.
5:2
How does a light beam/light curtain
work?
What is the difference between a light
curtain and a light beam?
Both light grids and light curtains utilise optical transmitter
and receiver units. From the transmitters beams of infrared
light are sent to the receiver. When a light beam is interrupted
a dual stop signal is given to the dangerous machines inside
the light beam/curtain protected area.
A light curtain has several beams that are placed closely
together whereas a light grid consists of only one, two,
three or four light beams. The beams are closest on a light
curtain that is used for finger detection. Then the resolution
ISMM,IGHTCURTAINBEAMSAREATTHEIRWIDESTSPACING
when used for thigh detection (90mm resolution). For light
grids the beams are normally placed at a relative distance
OFTOMM4HECHOICEBETWEENLIGHTGRIDORLIGHT
curtain is often a question of available safety distance, reach
ANDPRICE,IGHTCURTAINSAREOFTENCHOSENFORSHORTSAFETY
DISTANCES,IGHTGRIDSARECHOSENFORLONGDISTANCESUPTO
MANDFORALOWPRICE
www.jokabsafety.com
Light grids for long distances
Light grids with monitored bypassing during material transport
1
2
3
Light curtain for short safety
distances
Light curtain to protect during
cycle initiation
4
5
6
Light curtain as area
protection
Light curtain for inner area
limiting
7
8
9
What safety requirements are there for a light protection device?
High safety demands are stated in the standard
%.WHICHDEALSWITHLIGHTPROTECTION4HEMAIN
demands are on a safe stopping function and that light from
light sources other than the transmitter or other disturban
ces do not affect the safety function.
Depending on how the safety function is built up there
are safety components of type 2 and 4 to choose between.
Type 2 and 4 relates in principle to category 2 and 4
ACCORDINGTO%.%.)3/
Type 4 which has the highest safety level, states that a
fault is not allowed to affect the safety function and that the
fault shall be detected by the outputs falling immediately
ORTHATTHEYDONOTRECONNECTAFTERBEINGDISCONNECTED
-AXIMUMALLOWEDSCATTERINGANGLEFORTHELIGHTIS¼²
Type 2 states that a simple but monitored safety function is
required, which means that the safety function shall be moni
tored through periodic tests which break the output when a
fault occurs. Between the testing times there can though be
faults which result in the safety component malfunctioning.
The test function can either be built into the safety device
or an external unit (e.g. the machine´s control system) can
INITIATE A TEST -AXIMUM ALLOWED SCATTERING ANGLE FOR THE
LIGHTIS¼²
,IGHT BEAMS AND LIGHT CURTAINS ARE INCLUDED AMONG THE
products in the machine directive´s appendix 4, which me
ans that an external certifying procedure with an officially
recognised institution is called for.
www.jokabsafety.com
5:3
10
11
12
13
Reset – 3 alternatives
Supervised manual reset
When a light beam/light curtain is interrupted it will give
a stop signal to dangerous machines within the risk area
ITPROTECTSANDARESETLAMPWILLBELIT&ORANEWSTARTOF
the machine the light beam/light curtain has to be reset.
This is done with the reset button which is placed where it
cannot be reached from within the area which is protected.
4HEREAREHIGHREQUIREMENTSONTHERESETFUNCTIONNEITHER
a short circuit nor a component fault shall give automatic
reset. When the reset button has been set the outputs are
ACTIVATEDANDTHERESETLAMPISTURNEDOFF
Reset button with light indication.
Supervised time-reset
$URING TIMERESET UNINTENTIONAL RESET IS PREVENTED WHEN
someone is inside the risk area. To reset the light beam
(see figure) button 1 must first be pressed and afterwards
BUTTONWITHINEGSECONDS4HISISESPECIALLYIMPORTANT
when one cannot see the entire area that is protected by
the light beam.
1
2
Button 1 is pressed and afterwards, within a chosen
time e.g. 5 seconds, button 2 is pressed for resetting
the light beam.
Automatic reset
Automatic reset is used when the light beam is used for
area monitoring. When the light beam is actuated this in
dicates that e.g. a robot is in the area. The robot is stop
ped if a person enters the same area e.g. through a gate.
When the light beam is free again the control unit will be
reset automatically.
a
b
A
B
A light beam b indicates that the robot is situated in area
A. In this position it is possible to walk in through the gate
to area B without stopping the robot.
5:4
www.jokabsafety.com
Muting
Bypassing may be needed for different reasons. One of the
most common reasons for bypassing is during in and out
feeding of material on a conveyor, auto industrial trucks, etc.
Another common application is bypassing while passing with
ATHREEPOSITIONDEVICETOTHERISKAREA
Important aspects for bypassing are that it should be safe ,
not be activated by mistake and be difficult to defeat. In other
words it should give a reliable bypassing when a loading
carrier comes but not allow a human to pass. To achieve the
highest safety level a dual and supervised bypassing system
is needed (usually with at least two independant signals).
If this is done with sensors, it is recommended they be of
different kinds, because of the probability of them both mal
functioning for the same reason e.g. common mode failure.
An example of a solution is to use a mechanical limit switch
ANDAPHOTOCELLSENSOR
To avoid deliberate defeating/ manipulation of the bypassing
SENSORSSIGNALSASAFETYRELAYORASAFETY0,#ISCONNECTED
thereby monitoring that the sensors are both activated and
deactivated in every bypassing cycle.
The number of variations in bypassing systems are almost
infinite.This depending on the specific requirements of each
plant/machine. For Focus there are a number of bypassing
possibilities prepared.
(bypassing)
1
2
3
4
5
6
Automatic bypassing of light beam when an auto industrial truck
passes.
7
8
9
Blanking (fixed or floating)
Blanking, (fixed or floating,) means permanent switching
off of a number of beams in the protected field of a light
curtain. This is a function that is permitted and used when an
object that is larger that the resolution of the light curtain is
permanently located in the protected area, without breaking
the safety outputs (OSSD). If the object is removed from the
protected area, the safety outputs are broken.
”Fixed blanking” means that the area that is intentionally
switched off does not change while the machinery is
operating. Other protected areas remain unaffected, with
unchanged resolution.
”Floating blanking” means that the area that is intentionally
10
switched off can be changed and follow the location of the
object that is being moved around in the protected area
while the machinery is operating. Other beams are active
and providing normal protection, but often with reduced
resolution.
When a “blanking” function is used, it is very important that
the light curtain provides protection and can detect objects
as small as a finger or hand, depending on the resolution,
anywhere outside the area that is rendered inactive because
the object is there.
It must not be possible to select the “blanking function”
without using a key, tool or similar unlocking device.
www.jokabsafety.com
5:5
11
12
13
Light curtain for short
safety distance
A light curtain can be used in a machine or a production
plant in the same way as a hatch. There is a great difference
though when it comes to the risk situation. When one has a
light curtain installed with a short safety distance in front of
a dangerous machine, there is a high risk for spontaneous
ENGAGEMENTINTOTHEMACHINEOFTENCALLEDAFTERGRASP)FTHE
dangerous machine movement does not stop during such an
engagement, one has a small chance of avoiding injury be
CAUSEONECANREACHTHERISKPLACEWITHINMAYBEMS
Therefore it is of great importance that the whole chain
in the stopping circuit is fully dualled and supervised. Even
valves and contactors which ultimately control dangerous
movements normally have to be doubled up and supervi
sed.
Hand resolution
Automatic machines
For light curtains on automatic machines there shall be a
reset function which is active when the machine is set for
automatic production whether or not it is a passable protec
tion. After an engagement one must first use a reset function
then the restart of the cycle should be made with a seperate
starting device. The same reset applies for machines with
SEMIAUTOMATICDRIVE
Operator protection during manually
serviced machines
With manually operated machines where one or more
operators pick in and out parts between every cycle. This
type of application is the most risky because the number of
engagements into the machine´s dangerous area is often
several times per minute.
Light curtains on presses
,IGHTCURTAINSHAVETRADITIONALLYBEENACOMMONPROTECTION
method among press applications and there has since long
existed detailed information on the usage of light curtains
on presses. (see next spread for presses)
Finger resolution
Safety level
Only light curtains of type 4 are accepted on presses.
Reset
On the servicing side i.e. the side or sides where there is an
operator that picks in and out parts, there shall be a seperate
reset function for the light curtain, usually a button. If there
are several light curtains e.g. on the front and back there
shall be one for each. If the light curtain is actuated during a
5:6
dangerous movement the press should not be able to restart
without being reset. During engagement after the end of the
cycle no reset is needed.
For a light curtain which is placed as protection on those
sides which are not servicing sides, there shall be a reset
button which always needs to be activated after an engage
ment.
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Cycle initiation with
light curtain
2
Cycle initiation
#YCLEINITIATIONISACONCEPTWHENTHEMACHINEISDESIGNEDSO
that a new cycle starts when you take your hand out from the
light curtain. A cycle is defined as the hand being placed in
and taken out once. Usually it is possible to choose between
ONECYCLEANDTWOCYCLEOPERATION$URINGONECYCLEANEW
press stroke is started when the light curtain has has been
ACTUATEDONCEANDDURINGTWOCYCLEWHENTHELIGHTCURTAIN
has been actuated twice. The operator thereby operates the
press by the action of putting parts in and out.
Because the press starts without any particular command
there are some risks involved and therefore many conditions
have to be met before the machine operates.
To restrict the usage to smaller presses which cannot be
entered there are the following limitations: The table height
MAY NOT BE LOWER THAN MM THE STROKING LENGTH MAY
not be larger than 600 mm and the table depth may not be
LARGERTHANMM4HELIGHTCURTAINSHALLHAVEMMOR
HIGHERRESOLUTION)FTHEPRESSISNOTSTARTEDWITHINAPPROX
seconds after the the end of the cycle, a new cycle should
not be accepted without the light beam being again manually
reset. Note. For machines with cycle initiation, the installa
tion of the light curtain must be in accordance with machine
parameters and all relevant standards and regulations.
3
4
5
MAXMM
6
7
Installation of light curtain
4HELIGHTCURTAINMUSTBEINSTALLEDSONOONECANREACHA
trapping/crushing risk without actuating the light curtain.
The most important thing is that there are no gaps under,
on the sides and over the top during cycle operation. The
lower edge of the light curtain must therefore be slightly
below the press table edge. Also if it is open above the light
curtain the height must be adapted so that it is not possible
TOREACHOVERTHEPROTECTIONAREASEE%.0OSSIBLE
physical adjustment possibilities must be limited so that no
gaps can occur.
Between the light curtains protection area and mechanical
PARTSTHERESHALLONLYBEMAXMMGAPTOPREVENTAHUMAN
from standing there. In practise to acheive this demand and the
required safety distance one usually has to complement with
e.g. additional mechanical protection or additional horizontally
POSITIONED LIGHT CURTAINS IE STEPIN LIGHT CURTAIN !NOTHER
solution could be a lying or an angled light curtain.
8
9
Installation – correct and incorrect during cycle initiation
10
11
Correctly installed.
The operator cannot reach
into the machine without
actuating the light curtain.
Incorrect intallation.
Gap below the light curtain.
The operator can reach into
the machine without actua
ting the light curtain.
Incorrect installation. Gap
above the light curtain. The
operator can reach into the
machine without actuating the
light curtain.
www.jokabsafety.com
Correctly installed.
,IGHTCURTAINCOMPLE
mented with a horizontal
light curtain to detect
the operator.
5:7
12
13
Safety distance - light curtain according to EN999
The safety distance ’S’ is a minimum distance between
a light curtain and a dangerous area. The safety dis
tance shall guarantee that a person is not able to reach a
dangerous machine part before the machine movement
has stopped. This is calculated with the formula from
%. -ACHINE 3AFETY 0LACEMENT OF SAFETY DEVICES
with concern to the speed in which the body approaches
the risk area.
3+X4#
S = safety distance in mm
K = body/part of body (e.g. hand) speed in mm/s
T = T1 + T2
where
T1 = the safety device´s reaction time in seconds
T2 = the machine´s reaction time in seconds
#FURTHERDISTANCEINMMBASEDUPONTHEBODY|SINTRU
sion towards the risk area before the safety device has
been actuated.
Resolution for finger
(≤14 mm) gives C = 0
Calculation of safety distances for vertical and horizontal installation according
to EN999
S = safety distance in mm
(THELOWERBEAMMAYNOTBESITUATEDHIGHERTHAN
mm above the ground
H2 = the upper beam may not be situated lower than 900 mm
above the ground
The safety distance for vertical installation
For S ≤ 500 mm the safety distance is calculated
with the following formula:
The safety distance for horizontal installation is
calculated with the following formula:
3X4X(
3X4XD
where H is the safety field´s height above the reference
plane , e.g. the ground
where d is the light curtain´s resolution in mm.
nX(MAYNOTBELESSTHANMM$EPENDING
on the resolution, d, that the light curtain has, there is a
minimum height that the safety field may be placed. This is
calculated with:
(XDn
(CANNOTBELESSTHAN7ITHARESOLUTIONDORMM
one can therefore install the light curtain from H = 0 and
up. The higher it is situated, the shorter the safety distance
gets. The highest permissable height H of the safety field
is 1000 mm.
When you use a horizontal light curtain as entry protec
TIONTHEDEPTHOFTHELIGHTCURTAINSHOULDBEATLEASTMM
to prevent people from inadvertently stepping over it. The
estimated safety distance is measured from the machine’s
hazardous section to the outermost beam of the horizontal
light curtain (seen from the machine).
K here is 2000 mm/s which represents the speed of
THEHAND4HEEXPRESSIONXDMAYNEVERBELESS
THAN-INIMUMSAFETYDISTANCE3ISMM
If the safety distance according to the formula
above gets larger than 500 mm one can instead
use:
3X4XD
K is1600 mm/s which represents the speed of the body.
-INIMUM SAFETY DISTANCE ACCORDING TO THIS FORMULA IS
MM
5:8
S = safety distance in mm
H = the light curtain field must be positioned between 0 and
1000 mm above the floor
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Safety distances for new and old presses
New presses
&OR NEW #%MARKED PRESSES THERE ARE SPECIlC REQUIRE
ments from the standards EN 692-ACHINETOOLSn3AFETY
n-ECHANICALPRESSESn3AFETYANDEN 693-ACHINETOOLS
n3AFETYn(YDRAULICPRESSES
Old presses
N.B. For old presses there are different rules for each
country.
2
The same requirements apply for vertical installation on
presses as with vertical installation on other machines with
THEDIFFERENCETHAT#ISGIVENACCORDINGTOTHEFOLLOWING
Resolution,
d, (mm)
Safety distance
addition, C (mm)
≤ 14
0
>14 20
80
>20 40
240
>40
3
Cycle
initiation
4
0ERMITTED
Not
permitted
5
6
Other manually serviced machines
The rules for presses may well be applied to other machines
which function in a similar way and that have the same risk
situation. There is no other standard which is as detailed on
the usage of light curtains.
For cycle initiation the light curtains resolution, d, must be
≤MM4HISAPPLIESTOBOTHOLDANDNEW#%MARKED
presses.
7
8
Safety distance for light beams according to EN999
For light beams the safety distance is calculated
from the following:
To fulfill the requirements the beams should be installed at
the following heights:
9
3X4MM
4HEFORMULAAPPLIESWHETHERONEINSTALLSORBEAMS)T
is the risk assessment that decides the number of beams
that are to be chosen. The following possibilities must be
considered.
sTOCRAWLUNDERTHELOWESTBEAM
sTOREACHOVERTHETOPBEAM
sTOREACHINBETWEENTWOBEAMS
sTHATTHEBODYPASSESINBETWEENTWOBEAMS
Number of beams
Height over the reference
plane, e.g. ground
4
2
400, 900
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
5:9
13
Approvals:
Safety Light Grids and
Safety Light Curtains
Focus
Application:
Optical protection in an
opening or around a risk area
Features:
Type 2 or 4 according to EN
61496
Flexible assembly
,%$INDICATION
(IGHPROTECTIONCLASS)0
2ANGEM
Time reset
Fixed / floating blanking
-UTING
,IGHTGRID%STOPAND%DEN
in the same safety circuit with
6ITALOR0LUTOENABLESSAFETY
category 4 according to
%.%.)3/
A light grid/light curtain with many
possibilities
The Focus units are light grids/curtains with safety func
tions intended for applications where it is of great impor
tance to protect persons from a dangerous machine, robot
or other automated systems where it is possible to access
to a dangerous area.
Focus creates a protection field with infrared beams. If
any beam is interrupted the safety mechanism is trigge
red and the dangerous machine is stopped. Focus fulfills
THEREQUIREMENTSFORNONCONTACTSAFETYEQUIPMENTTYPE
(Focus 2 series) and type 4 (Focus 4 series) according to
THEINTERNATIONALREGULATIONSTANDARD%.
5NITSAREAVAILABLEWITHSAFETYHEIGHTSBETWEENAND
MM!LLELECTRONICCONTROLANDMONITORINGFUNCTIONS
are included in the light curtain profiles. External connec
TIONISMADEVIAA-CONNECTIONATTHEENDOFTHEPROlLE
Synchronization between transmitter and receiver is achie
ved optically. No electrical connection between the units is
REQUIRED#ONTROLANDMONITORINGOFTHEBEAMTRANSMISSION
ISCARRIEDOUTBYTWOMICROPROCESSORSWHICHALSOGIVEIN
formation on the status and alignment of the light curtain via
SEVERAL,%$S
Muting and Override included in all Focus
4HEv-UTINGvANDv/VERRIDEvFUNCTIONSAREAVAILABLEONALL
5:10
Focus light grids/curtains and is enabled directly when an
INDICATIONLAMP,-3ISCONNECTED-UTINGIMPLIESTHATONE
or more segments or the whole light curtain can be bypas
sed during in and out passage of material.
)NTHE&OCUSWITH-UTINGTHEREISALSOAN/VERRIDEFUNC
tion which makes it possible to bypass the light grid/curtain
i.e. activate the outputs if a machine start is necessary even
if one or more light beams are interrupted. This is the case
when the muting function is chosen and the A and B inputs
are activated. If for example during the muting operation a
loading pallet has stopped inside the safety field after a vol
tage loss, the override function is used to enable the pallet
to be driven clear.
Floating blanking or fixed blanking
It is also possible to obtain the Focus light grids/curtains
with either ”floating blanking or fixed blanking”. Floating
blanking makes it possible to ’disconnect’ a defined num
ber of beams from the safety field. The object is then free
to move in the safety field without the safety function being
triggered. During ”fixed blanking” the object is not able to
move in the safety field. The other beams are active with
normal resolution.
www.jokabsafety.com
Focus light curtain
Focus light grid
-UTINGBYPASSINGPARTLYORCOMPLETELY
Supervised output for muting lamp. Over
RIDE-ANUALLYSUPERVISEDORAUTOMATIC
RESET4IMERESET
Option:
Fixed or Floating blanking.
Standard:
KL2-500D:
Muting-unit for Focus
Standard: -UTINGBYPASSINGOFONETWOTHREEOR
four beams. Supervised output for
muting lamp. Override.
-ANUALLYSUPERVISEDORAUTOMATIC
RESET4IMERESET
Light grids for tough environments with two
parallel beams of light for improved reliability.
Standard:
-UTINGBYPASSINGOFLIGHTCURATINORLIGHT
GRIDINONEORTWODIRECTIONS,FORM4FORM
The unit is connected directly to the light
CURTAINGRIDVIAA-CONNECTION
FMC-Focus Muting Connector with
M12 connection
Standard: &-#ISASMALLOPTIMISEDCONNECTION
BLOCKWITH-INPUTS&-#ISUSEDFOR
-CONNECTIONOFMUTINGSENSORSMUTING
LAMPPRERESETFORTIMERESETRESETBUTTON
with indication, override and safety outputs.
Muting-unit MF-T with four beams connected
directly to the bottom of a light grid with a
M12-connection. The entire T-unit is then
connected with an M12-connection on the
muting-unit.
1
2
3
4
5
Summary - Focus light curtain/grid, Type 2 (F2-) and 4 (F4-)
6
Type (x) X=2 or 4
Resolution (mm)
Safety field
height (mm=zzz)
Other heights on request
Range (m)
type 2 K
type 4 K
type 4 KL
Reaction time (ms)
Fx-14-zzz
14
150
300
450
600
750
900
1050
1200
1350
1500
1650
0,2-6
Fx-35-zzz
35
150
300
450
600
750
900
1050
1200
1350
1500
1650
0,2-15
Fx-K(L)4-zzz
300/400
Fx-K(L)3-800
400
Fx-K(L)2-500
500
Fx-KL2-500D
500
Fx-K1C-500/LD
500
7
900
1200
800
500
500
0,5-50
4-50
0,2-25
0,5-50
4-50
0,2-25
0,5-50
4-50
0,2-25
0,5-50
500
8
0,2-6/0,5-12
9
0,2-25
15 - 45
14 - 26
14
14
14
14
14
MF-T
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
MF-L
¤1
¤1
¤1
¤1
¤1
¤1
¤1
2
2
¤
Fixed Blanking
¤
2
¤2
Dyn. adaption to Vital
¤3
¤3
¤3
¤3
¤3
¤3
¤3
Manual reset
Automatic reset
Time reset
Muting inputs (bypassing)
Supervision of muting-lamp
Override
Floating Blanking
¤
10
11
12
sStandard
¤¹ When ordering add ”L”
¤² When ordering add ”B”
¤With Tina 10A/10B/10C or FMC-Tina
Note! &ORORDERINGDATAANDARTICLENUMBERSEETHE0RODUCTLIST&ORMOREINFORMATIONSEEOURHOMEPAGE
www.jokabsafety.com
5:11
13
Function description
Focus consists of two units, a transmitter unit and a recei
ver unit. All the optical units are scanned regularly so that
all objects that are placed between the transmitter and the
receiver will be detected.
If any light beam is interrupted, the dangerous machine
movement will be stopped by the outputs from the light
curtain. The reaction time for the Focus varies from 14 ms
TOMSDEPENDINGONTHENUMBEROFBEAMSINTHELIGHT
CURTAIN 4HE lVE ,%$|S IN THE RECEIVER AND THE TWO IN THE
transmitter show the status of the light curtain/grid.
Safety outputs OSSD 1 and OSSD2
&OCUSHASTWO0.0OUTPUTS/33$AND/33$)FTHE
load to be switched is alternating current or requires a hig
HERCURRENTTHANM!THENONESHOULDUSEASAFETYRELAY
EG240LUTO0,#ORTHE&2-UNITCONVERTSTHEOUT
PUTS TO RELAY CONTACTS FROM *OKAB 3AFETY 4HE &-#4INA
and Tina 10A/10B converts the outputs to a dynamic signal
FORCONNECTIONTO0LUTOOR6ITAL0LUTOCANALSOWORKDIRECTLY
WITHTHE/33$OUTPUTS
Technical data – Focus
JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden
6$#RIPPLE
10 W max (transmitter and receiver connected)
NM
XMM
)0
TO²#
Manufacturer:
Supply voltage:
Power consumption:
Wavelength on transmitter LED:
Profile dimensions:
Protection class:
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Outputs:
Max. load:
Response time:
Connection transmitter:
Connection receiver:
Indication:
-TO²#
SUPERVISED0.0OUTPUTSWITHCROSSCIRCUITMONITORING
M!OVERLOADCCPROTECTION
nMS
-PIN
-PIN
,%$|SON2ECEIVERAND4RANSMITTERSHOWINGALIGNMENTSTATUSAND
power supply
Aluminium painted yellow
4YPEANDACCORDINGTO%.
Enclosure:
Certified to standard:
LED information - Focus
The LED´s in the receiver indicate the following:
5PPER9ELLOWn!LIGNMENT
"REAK2EDn)SLITIFTHELIGHTCURTAINSBEAMISINTER
rupted
'UARD'REENn)SLITWHENTHEENTIRELIGHTlELDISFREE
,OWER9ELLOWn)SLITDURINGNORMALOPERATIONWHEN
there is dirt on the light curtain´s front glass.
Is flashing during normal operation when the OSSD
OUTPUTSARESHORTCIRCUITED
0OWER'REENn)SLITWHENTHERECEIVERHASSUPPLY
voltage.
The LEDs in the transmitter indicate the following:
0OWER'REENn)SLITWHENTHETRANSMITTERHASSUPPLY
voltage.
3TATUS9ELLOWn)SLITWHENTHETRANSMITTERISFUNCTION
ing correctly.
Is flashing or is turned off during an error in the
transmitter.
Note! 4HE,%$SAREALSOUSEDFORTROUBLESHOOTING
Reset - Focus
On every Focus there are inputs for reset and other
functions:
2ESET!LIGNMENTAND/VERRIDEBYPASSINGISONLYPOSSIBLE
when muting is used.)
Reset possibilities
s Automatic reset n7HENTHELIGHTlELDISFREETHEOUT
puts are closed directly. (Setting when delivered).
s Manual resetn&OCUSGIVESAREADYSIGNALWHENTHE
light field is free and the reset button has been actuated.
5:12
s Time reset n$URINGMANUALRESET4ORESETTHE&OCUS
APRERESETBUTTONMUSTlRSTBEACTUATEDANDAFTER
wards within 8 seconds a reset button outside the risk
area must be actuated.
Choice of reset
2ESET ALTERNATIVES ARE CHOSEN WITH DOUBLE CHANGEOVER
switches in the Focus receiver. On delivery the Focus is set
for automatic reset.
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Laser aligner JSRL-3
Facilitates alignment of light beams or light curtains, parti
cularly when the solution involves one or more mirrors. The
*32,ISSIMPLYSECUREDBYTHEACCOMPANYINGELASTICATED
tape around the transmitter and receiver unit, which must
be located so that the flat rear of the unit is up against the
front glass of the light curtain. When the laser aligner is
switched on the red laser spot must be visible, if appro
priate via a mirror, at the corresponding unit.
4HE*32,CONTAINSTWOTYPE!!!BATTERIESTHATARECHAN
ged by unscrewing the bottom end lid.
2
3
Muting (bypassing) - Focus
"UILTINMUTINGFOR&OCUSISAVAILABLEINTHREEWAYS
s 0REMADEMUTINGUNITS-&4AND-&,WHICHHAVE
INTEGRALPHOTOCELLS5NITSAREMANUFACTUREDWITHTHE
same profile as Focus.
s #ONNECTIONOFMUTINGSENSORSVIAA&-#
s3EPARATECONNECTIONOFMUTINGSENSORS!AND"
directly to the Focus receiver unit.
Muting with MF-T and MF-L units
-&4AND-&,AREMUTINGUNITSWITHINTEGRATEDPHOTOCELLS
in the same profile type as the Focus light grid/curtain. No
additional sensors are required because the muting units
CONTAINTHEREQUIREDCOMPONENTS-&4-&,ISCONNECTED
DIRECTLYTO&OCUSWITH-CONNECTORS
Alternative 1
F
o
c
u
s
&OCUS-&4
out/in from
risk area
Conditions for muting
A-UTINGINPUT!MUSTBEACTUATEDATLEASTMSBEFORE
muting input B for muting to be possible.
B-UTINGISACTIVATEDASLONGASTHECONDITIONSAREFULlLLED
3EEALSOREQUIREMENTSFORMUTINGIN)%#43CHAP
TERSAND
MF-T (Diagram 1)
-&4CONTAINSFOURPHOTOCELLS!""AND!ARRANGED
as shown. They are configured for installations where ma
terial is transported ”in” or ”out” or in both directions ”in
and out”.
4
5
6
7
NOTE. All standard Focus light grids/curtains are delivered
CONNECTEDTOFUNCTIONTOGETHERWITHTHE-&4
Alternative 2
F
o
c
u
s
MF-L (Diagram 2)
-&,CONTAINSTWOPHOTOCELLS!AND"WHICHAREACTUA
ted before exiting through the light grid/curtain. The light
grid/curtain being bypassed just prior to the exit of the ma
terial.
&OCUS-&,
NOTE. 5NIT -&, IS PRIMARILY INTENDED FOR MATERIAL TRANS
port ”out” of a working area. The standard Focus light grid/
CURTAINDELIVEREDDOESNOTFUNCTIONTOGETHERWITHTHE-&,
version. They need to be ordered separately together with
THE-&,UNIT
out from
risk area
M12 connection
between Focus
and MF-T
Alternative 3
(Alternative 4)
M12 to control cabinet
Muting-lamp
In the Focus receiver unit it is also possible to directly con
NECTAMUTINGLAMP)TISALSOPOSSIBLETOCONNECTTHEMUT
INGLAMPVIAA&-#$URINGBYPASSINGTHEMUTINGLAMPISLIT
"YPASSINGISONLYPOSSIBLEIFTHEMUTINGLAMPISFUNCTIONING
MF-T Reflex (Alternative 3)
#ONTAINSFOURTRANSMITTERSRECEIVERSANDASEPARATEREmECTOR
UNIT2ANGEM5SEDINTHEMUTINGMODEFORTRANSPORTOFMA
terial into and/or out of hazardous areas. For other functions
REFERTO!LTERNATIVE4HISUNITTOGETHERWITHLIGHTBEAM&
+#PROVIDESELECTRICALCONNECTIONSONONLYONESIDE
MF-L Reflex (Alternative 4)
#ONTAINSTWOTRANSMITTERSRECEIVERSANDASEPARATEREmECTOR
UNIT2ANGEM5SEDINTHEMUTINGMODEFORTRANSPORTOFMA
terial into and/or out of hazardous areas. For other functions
REFERTO!LTERNATIVE4HISUNITTOGETHERWITHLIGHTBEAM&
+#PROVIDESELECTRICALCONNECTIONSONONLYONESIDE
www.jokabsafety.com
5:13
8
9
10
11
12
13
Examples on how the muting sensors can be placed
A solution with Focus Muting unit MF-T with integrated muting sensors.
0OSSIBLEDIRECTIONOFMOVEMENTINOUTOFRISKAREA
Risk area
A solution with Focus Muting unit MF-L with integrated muting sensors
This solution shall only be used for movement out from a risk area.
B1 A1
Risk area
d2 = 260 mm
D = 300 mm
NOTE. the muting sensors A and B must be placed so
THATTHESENSOR!ISALWAYSACTIVATEDATLEASTMSBEFORE
sensor B.
5:14
D: indicates the minimum length of the material that is
to actuate the muting sensors that must be maintained
during the passage through the light grid/curtain.
DINDICATESTHEMEASUREMENTBETWEENTHETWOFOURPRE
ASSEMBLEDMUTINGSENSORSWITHINTHE-&,AND-&4
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Muting with FMC and FMI units
2
3
4
The FMC Focus Muting Connector, is a small, optimal
unit which is used when the Focus light grid/curtain is re
quired to be bypassed for in and out passage to and from
A DANGEROUS AREA 4HE &-#UNIT IS EASILY CONNECTED TO
&OCUSWITHA-CONNECTOR
The FMI Focus Muting Indicator, is a small unit with
BUILTIN MUTING LAMP RESET BUTTON vPOWER OFFv FOR ALIGN
MENTANDOVERRIDE4HE&-)UNITISCONNECTEDTOTHE&-#
UNITWITH-CONNECTORSTOFACILITATETHEMUTINGFUNCTION
connection.
5
6
Various FMC, FMI, FRM- versions and Tina units
7
4HE4INAVERSIONSHAVEDYNAMICSAFETYOUTPUTSFOR6ITAL0LUTO
&-#
7ITHCONNECTORSFORMUTINGSENSORS
(A+B), reset, power off and muting
LAMP2AND-
&-)!
ONLYMUTINGLAMPS
&-)#
WITHRESETANDPOWEROFF
&-)$
ITHRESETPOWEROFFANDRESISTOR
W
instead of muting lamp.
&-)%
A SPRERESETlTTEDINCONNECTOR!
!ON&-#4INAORASRESET
FOR4INA$UOIN2CONNECTOR
&-)'
ITHRESETANDRESISTORINSTEADOF
W
muting lamp.
8
9
&-#4INATHESAMEAS&-#BUTMADEFOR
CONNECTIONOF6ITALOR0LUTO
Tina 10A:
adapter unit for connection of Vital
OR0LUTO
4INA"
SIMPLIlED&-#4INABUTWITH
ONLY2CONNECTOR
4INA#
SIMPLIlED&-#4INABUTWITH
ONLYPOWERFEEDATCONNECTOR
--
BYPASSUNITFOREASYCONNECTION
outside the enclosure.
&2-!
CONVERTSTHETWO/33$OUTPUTSTO
relay outputs (and power feed).
*330
BLANKINGPLUGFORUNUSEDINPUTS
*3!0
ADAPTERFOR&-#UNITSFORUSE
WITHOUT&-)"OR$AT2CON
nector with muting resistor.
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
5:15
13
Connection of Focus and muting components with FMC-1 and FMI-1
Ex 1. #ONNECTIONOFLIGHTCURTAINWITHCONNECTIONBLOCK
&-#TESTRESETBUTTONANDSWITCHFORSUPPLYVOLTAGE
placed in (by) the control cabinet.
Ex 2. #ONNECTIONOFLIGHTCURTAINWITHCONNECTIONBLOCK
&-#4HE2ESETUNIT&-)MUSTBEPLACEDOUTOFREACH
from the risk area.
#ABINET
#ABINET
-UTINGLAMP
-UTINGLAMP
&-)
0OWERvOFFv
2ESET
0OWERvOFFv
4EST2ESET
#ONNECTION
UNIT&-#
#ONNECTION
UNIT&-#
-UTING
photocells
-UTING
photocells
Connection of Focus and muting components directly to the control cabinet
-UTINGLAMP
#ABLETO
lamp
Test & reset
buttons
Supply
cable
-UTING
cable
&2CABLE
&4CABLE
0ROTECT
cables
s 4HE4%342%3%4BUTTONSHALLBEPLACEDSOTHEOPERA
tor can see the protected area during reset, testing, and
bypassing. It should not be possible to reach the button
from within the risk area.
s 4HE ,-3 LAMP FOR INDICATION OF MUTING AND BYPASSING
shall be placed so that it can be seen from all directions
from where it is possible to access the dangerous area
s )FPHOTOCELLSAREUSEDASMUTINGSENSORSTHENTHESEN
sor receivers should be assembled on the light curtain´s
transmitter side to minimise the interference risk.
s 4HE SYSTEM IS PROTECTED AGAINST DANGEROUS FUNCTIONS
caused by damage on the transmitter cable and/or the
receiver cable. However, we recommend that the cables
be protected so that physical damage to them can be
minimised.
M12-connection device with screw connectors
-#
5:16
-#
-#
www.jokabsafety.com
-#
1
Muting with Mute R and Mute D
A solution with two sensors (here photocells) and one (or two) movement directions for material transport:
2
0OSSIBLEDIRECTIONOFMOVEMENT).%VEN)./54ISPOSSIBLE
2ISKAREA
3
d3
d4
B
S
A
DMM
d4 the least possible
S = dafety light curtain/light beam
4
A solution with four sensors and one movement direction for material transport:
5
0OSSIBLEDIRECTIONOFMOVEMENT).
D
6
2ISKAREA
B2
A2
B1
S
d1
7
A1
d2
D
d1 < 200mm
d2 > 250mm
D=(d1x2)+d2+40
8
A solution with four sensors and two movement directions for material transport:
9
0OSSIBLEDIRECTIONOFMOVEMENT)./54
D
10
2ISKAREA
A2
B2
B1
S
d1
d2
D
11
A1
d1 < 200mm
d2 > 250mm
D=(d1x2)+(d2x2)+40
12
D: indicates the minimum length on the material that is to actuate the muting sensors that must be main
tained during the passage through the light grid/curtain.
d1 must be as short as possible, and definitely less than 200 mm
d2: indicates the distance between A1 and B1
www.jokabsafety.com
5:17
13
Muting sensors – Mute R
2ETROREmECTIVE with polarizing filters
Features:
2ANGEADJUSTABLE
,IGHTRESERVEWARNING
indicator
4RANSISTOROUTPUT0.0
1000 Hz switching frequency
3HORTCIRCUITPROTECTION
reverse polarity protection
ANDPOWERUPOUTPUT
suppression
#ONNECTOR-
%-#TESTEDACCORDINGTO
)%#AND%.
%. 6$#
0.0
$ARKONOUTPUT
Technical data
Manufacturer
JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden
Supply voltage
6$#
Allowable ripple
¼OF5S
Current consumption (without load) M!
Article number/ordering data:
-UTE2&342
Output
0.0DARKON
Max. load current
100 mA
#ONNECTOR -
Residual voltage
<1,6 V
Yes
Max. switching frequency
1000 Hz
MWITHREmECTOR&:2
MWITHREmECTOR&:2
Protection class
)0
Temperature
(operating and storage)
TO²#
Weight
approx.G
Connection
Range adjustment
Range
Light source
6ISIBLEREDNMPULSEDWITH
polarizing filter
All technical data at 25˚ C and 24V.
PNP output
2l
1
2
3UPPLYVOLTAGE6
4
4 $ARKONOUTPUT
3UPPLYVOLTAGE
Dark-on output
The output is activated when an object interrupts the light.
Connector M12
#ONNECTOR-
2ANGEADJUSTMENTAND
function indicator
0LASTICHOUSING
2
1
4
5:18
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Muting sensors – Mute D
$IFFUSEREmECTIVEWITHBACKGROUNDREJECTION
2
Features:
Electronically adjustable
background rejection
3
,IGHTRESERVEWARNING
indicator
$UALTRANSISTOROUTPUTS0.0
3HORTCIRCUITPROTECTIONRE
verse polarity protection
ANDPOWERUPOUTPUTSUPP
ression
5
#ONNECTOR-ROTATABLE
6$#
0.0
LIGHTONOUTPUT
DARKONOUTPUT
Technical data
%-#TESTEDACCORDINGTO
)%#AND%.
%. Allowable ripple
Article number/ordering data:
-UTE$*3/'0
Max. load current
200 mA
0.0LIGHTANDDARKON
Residual voltage
<1,6 V
#ONNECTOR-
Max. switching frequency
200 Hz
Yes
Protection class
)0
Range (depending on material)
0.2... 0.8 m
Operating temperature
TO²#
Light source
)NFRARED,%$NMPULSED
Weight
APPROXG
Supply voltage
6$#
All technical data at 25° C and 24V.
Connection
Range adjustment
7
¼OF5S
JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden
Output
6
Current consumption (without load) M!
Manufacturer
4
8
9
1 Function indicator
2ANGEADJUSTMENT
'LASSCOVEREDOPTICS
#ENTEROFTHEOPTICALAXIS
0REFERREDDETECTIONDIRECTION
"OREFORMMSELFTAPPINGSCREW
#ONNECTOR-
/PENINGFOR-NUT
10
11
Connector M12
PNP output
1
2
2l
2l
4
3UPPLYVOLTAGE6
2 $ARKONOUTPUT
4 ,IGHTONOUTPUT
3UPPLYVOLTAGE
2
Light-on output:
Output energized when object is present.
Dark-on output:
Output energized when no object is present.
www.jokabsafety.com
1
12
5:19
13
4
Application:
Bjorn
A strong support for light grids
and mirrors
0ROTECTSLIGHTCURTAINLIGHT
grids and mirror
Features:
2OBUST
Adjustable
Bjorn is a very stable and flexible stand system
in which Focus safety light beams and mirrors
are mounted in the stand. The fixings for the mir
rors in the stand can be turned to provide either
vertical or horizontal angles. The robust material
of the Bjorn protects Focus units from direct col
lisions, and thus prevents unnecessary material
damage and halts in production.
Bjorn is available in stock as a standard version
for dual safety light beams. Bjorn versions can
ALSOBEORDEREDFOR&OCUSANDBEAMS
2ECEIVER
-
-
Bjorn N2
-
Bjorn V2
vertical
Transmitter
-
Bjorn H2
horizontal
5:20
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Technical data - Bjorn
Manufacturer:
JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden
Article number/ordering data:
"JORN(
"JORN6
"JORN(
"JORN(
"JORN(
"JORN.
"JORN.
"JORN.
"JORN.
"JORN.
2
3
H = Horizontal reflection
V = Vertical reflection
N = Floor stand for Focus
Colour:
9ELLOWPOWDERCOATED2!,
Material:
MMSTEEL
Dimensions:
#ROSSSECTION
Foot
MMXMM
MMXMM
Weight:
H2, V2 och N2
(
((
.
KGST
17 kg/st
20 kg/st
27 kg/st
Protection against water and dust
for Focus light curtains and light
beams
≤
4
5
6
7
8
Bjorn N2
22-041-45
Bjorn N3
22-041-46
Bjorn N4-1
22-041-47
Bjorn N4-2
22-041-48
Bjorn N5
22-041-49
Bjorn H2
22-041-40
Bjorn V2
22-041-41
Bjorn H3
22-041-42
Bjorn H4-1
22-041-43
9
Bjorn H4-2
22-041-44
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
5:21
13
Application:
Focus-Wet
nPROTECTIONAGAINSTWATERAND
dust for Focus light curtains and
light beams
0ROTECTIONINSEVERE
environments
Features:
!DJUSTABLE¼²
2OTATABLEANDREPLACEABLE
tube
#APABLEOFDRAININGAND
through ventilation
Technical data – Wet
Manufacturer:
JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden
Article number/ordering data:
Colour:
Transparent plastic
Length including lid:
light curtain/light beam + 66 mm
Material:
Tube
Lid
Angle bracket
0#
0%($
Stainless steel
Max. ambient temperature:
²#
Installation adjustment
¼²
Protection rating
)0)0+
-#ABLE
gland
Wet is used for protection against water (or dust)
where extreme washing conditions are encounte
RED4HEPROTECTIVEENCAPSULATIONRATING)0NOW
enables Focus light curtains and light beams to
be used for such applications as the food industry
where the use of high pressure washing for cleaning
machinery often occurs. The draining and through
ventilation capabilities mean that condensation
can be avoided.
Wet, with Focus light curtains or light beams, is
PREASSEMBLEDCOMPLETEWITHCABLINGONREQUEST
During installation on a machine a Wet unit can
BE ADJUSTED BY ¼ ² WITH THE ACCOMPANYING
angle bracket. The plastic tube is rotatable and
the outside is easy to clean.
5:22
www.jokabsafety.com
7ET
7ET
7ET
7ET
7ET
7ET
7ET
7ET
7ET
7ET
7ET
7ET+
7ET+
7ET+
7ET+
7ET+#
7ET+$
7ET-&4
7ET-&,
Blanking programmer BP1
AQUICKWAYTOPROGRAMBLANKING
A switch at the cable connection of the light
curtain receiver enables a choice of whether a
blanking function and if so which is to be used.
Once this choice has been made, programming
of the unit in the light field is made easy by using
THE"LANKINGPROGRAMMER"0)FTHEEXTENTOFTHE
object in the protected field then changes, the light
curtain can be reprogrammed, only 11 seconds
AFTERTHEPUSHBUTTONONTHEFRONTOFTHE"0HAS
been pressed.
4HE"0ISEASILYCONNECTEDINSERIESWITHTHE
cable to the light curtain receiver unit, using the
-CONNECTORANDTHEFREELENGTHOFTHEUNITS
cable.
The unit can be fitted during operation.
www.jokabsafety.com
5:23
HR7000C-01 Focus - Connection without and with muting function
HR7000E-01 Focus - Connection with pre-reset function
5:24
www.jokabsafety.com
1
HR7000F-01 Focus - Connection with muting to safety relay
2
3
4
5
6
7
HR7000G-01 Focus - Connection with MF-T/MF-L units
8
9
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
5:25
13
HR7000H-01 Focus - Connection with FMC/Tina Interface
HR7000I-01 FMC
5:26
www.jokabsafety.com
1
HR7000J-01 FMC-1 or FMC-1 Tina with muting sensors and reset unit
2
3
4
5
6
7
HR7000K-01 FMC-1 or FMC-1 Tina connected with Pre Reset
8
9
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
5:27
13
HR7000L-01 Tina 10A, 10B and 10C connection example
HR7000M FRM-1 - Changing OSSD outputs to relay contacts
5:28
www.jokabsafety.com
1
HR7000O-01 Connection example FMC/FMI
2
3
4
5
6
7
HR7000P Cable connection example
8
9
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
5:29
13
HR7000Q Cable connection example
HR7000S Focus; Muting with the aid of Pluto, FMC and a transfer cable
5:30
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Focus - Certificates
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
5:31
13
Approvals:
Safety Light Beam
Spot
Application:
0HOTOELECTRICGUARDINGOFAN
entrance or around a risk area
Features:
Safety level Type 4 according
to EN 61496
Versatile mounting
,%$INDICATION
0ROTECTIONCLASS)0
MORMRANGE
Bypassing possibility
A light beam for the highest safety level
#ANBECONNECTEDWITHSEVERAL
other different safety devices in
the same safety circuit at cate
GORYTOGETHERWITH6ITAL0LUTO
ACCORDINGTO%.
The light beam is available in two versions Spot 10 for dis
TANCESUPTOMAND3POTFORUPTOM4HELIGHT
beams can be mounted at different heights and be angled
around a machine using our mirrors and brackets.
3POTAND6ITAL0LUTOINCOMBINATIONFULlLSTHEREQUIREMENTS
FOR#ATEGORYACCORDINGTO%.ANDTYPEACCORDING
to EN 61496. Several light beams, Eden sensors and emer
gency stops can be connected in series achieving the high
safety level for the safety circuit. A number of solutions for
bypassing of light beams for material transport are available.
&ORINDICATIONTHEREARE,%$|SONTHETRANSMITTERANDON
the receiver which indicate ’contact’ between transmitter
and receiver and safety status. The ’contact’ information is
available via the light beam receiver connection cables.
Function
The Spot light beam is supervised by the Vital safety mo
DULEORBYTHE0LUTOSAFETY0,#!UNIQUECODEDSIGNALIS
sent out from the control unit to the transmitter (Spot T).
4HE SIGNAL WHICH COMES BACK FROM THE RECEIVER 3POT 2
IS THEN COMPARED IN THE 6ITAL0LUTO )F THE CORRECT CODED
SIGNAL IS RECEIVED THE 6ITAL0LUTO SWITCHES THE NECESSARY
safety output contacts to permit dangerous machine mo
VEMENTS #ODING GUARANTEES THAT NO OUTPUT SIGNALS CAN
be produced by light from other sources, interference or
faults in components in the transmitter or receiver. The light
beam is dynamically supervised which means that if the
signal stops pulsating at the correct frequency it is imme
diately detected. By means of coding, the dynamic signal
can pass between up to 6 pairs of transmitters and recei
vers, with only one pair needing to be electrically connec
ted to a Vital.
5:32
4RANSMITTER2ECEIVER 4RANSMITTER2ECEIVER
3POT4
3POT2
3POT4 3POT2
10 m
M
10 m
M
*
*
#ODEDPULSETRANSMISSION
#ODED
pulse
transmission
www.jokabsafety.com
*
6$#4HISSUPPLYDOES
not need to be the same as
connected to the Vital.
#ODEDPULSETRANSMISSION
Vital Safety module can accomodate up
to 6 Spot systems.
Mounting and alignment – Spot
1
Safety distance
The basic principle is that dangerous machine movements
should be stopped before a person reaches the dangerous
AREAWHICHSHOULDBEATLEASTMMFROMTHELIGHTBEAMS
When determining the correct safety distance the stopping
time of the machine and the risk level must be taken into
ACCOUNT SEE ALSO %. #ONTACT US FOR FURTHER INFOR
mation.
2
3
Accessories and Mounting
The Spot light beam can be mounted using a variety of
brackets, posts and mirrors. See ordering list for further
information.
4
900
1100
700
400
5
mm
Mounting heights for 2 or 3 light beams.
6
Different sizes of mirrors, mounting brackets and profiles
are available. See component ordering list.
Note. Every mirror reduces the sensing distance of the beam
BYAPPROX
7
JSM64
Pivot M18 bracket for Spot 10
or MUTE R (FSTR1) for example
8
Alignment
When aligning the light beam, look towards the transmitter.
In the lens will be seen a strong red light. When this light
is seen from the receiver (via mirrors if fitted) the light beam
IS BASICALLY ALIGNED 4HE ,%$ ON THE RECEIVER IS ON WHEN
the receiver is aligned with the transmitter. By moving the
transmitter up/down and left/right the best alignment can
be found.
When vertically mounting, (as shown in the diagram) the
receiver should be mounted above the transmitter as this will
simplify the alignment and minimise the risk of extraneous
LIGHTDISTURBANCE)NEXCEPTIONALLIGHTDISTURBANCEENVIRON
ments the received light can be adjusted by a screw on the
REAROFTHE3POTRECEIVER/N3POTTHISADJUSTMENT
can be made on the transmitter. To make the alignment even
EASIERTHE,ASER!LIGNER*32,CANBEUSEDFOR3POT
The laser has visible light (class IIa) and is easy to mount for
ALIGNING3UPPLYTOTHE,ASER!LIGNERISTAKENFROMTHE3POT
42CONNECTOR
NOTE! 7HENUSING,ASERALIGNERdo not look directly into
the laser. Observe all necessary precautions when using
laser devices, failing to do so can result in eye damage.
www.jokabsafety.com
9
2
10
T
11
12
Laser aligner JSRL2 for
light beam Spot T/R.
5:33
13
Technical data
Operating temperature range
o#o#
-lXEDCONNECTOR
Manufacturer
JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden
Cable connection
Article number/Ordering data
Casing Material
Spot 10:
Safety level with Vital/Pluto
(according to EN 61496)
3POT42
3POT42
3POT
Type 4
Safety category together with
Vital/Pluto (according to
4
EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1)
Power supply
6$#RIPPLE¼
Current consumption
Transmitter:
2ECEIVER
Info. output
M!
M!
+10 mA max.
Light source
2EDVISIBLELIGHTNM¼²
Optical power
Spot10:
3POT
< 0,1 mW
< 0,2 mW
Function indication
'REENTRANSMITTER,%$ON
'REENRECEIVER,%$STATUS
On:
Flashing:
Off:
0OWERSUPPLYOK
Alignment ok, safety circuit
closed
Alignment ok, earlier safety
circuit open
Beam interrupted, safety circuit
open
Protection class
)0
Range
Spot 10
3POT
M
M
Installation
Spot 10:
3POT
Colour
Spot 10:
3POT
Steel grey
Yellow/black
Weight
Spot 10:
3POT
2 x 21g
2 x 100 g
Connections
Transmitter: Brown (1)
White (2)
"LUE
2ECEIVER "ROWN
White (2)
"LUE
Black (4)
'REY
6$#
Dynamic signal in
6$#
6$#
6$#
Dynamic signal out
Info output
6$#WHEN,%$ISGREENORmASHING
TOLERANCE6$#
06$#WHEN,%$ISOFF
TOLERANCE6$#
67
mm
61
-
-
X-NUTSPROVIDED
Either via mounting holes in the
casing or with angle bracket
*3-PROVIDED
Spot 10 T/R
Connection of Spot T/R to Vital1
5:34
Steel housing with polyacryl lens
protection.
0OLYAMIDEHOUSINGWITHPOLYA
cryl lens protection.
www.jokabsafety.com
Spot 35T/R
1
Vital 1 with 2 light beams Spot
2
3
4
5
6
7
Vital 1 with 3 lightbeams Spot
8
9
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
5:35
13
Approvals:
Laser scanner
Look
Application:
0HOTOELECTRICGUARDINGOF
several risk areas
Features:
4YPE)%#
Easy to install
0ROTECTEDFROMWELDING
sparks/arcs
Easy to program
4 individual programmable
PROTECTIONAREASSIMULTAN
EOUSLYWITH0LUTO
A laser scanner that has the ability to scan
four individual areas
4HE ,ASER 3CANNER ,OOK HAS THE ABILITY TO SCAN FOUR
individual areas. Each area can be programmed individually
FORTHESPECIlCAPPLICATIONMAKINGITIDEALFORAUTOCARRIERS
that need to operate along different paths. The safety level
ISACCORDINGTO4YPE%.)TISAPPROVEDFORUSE
as personnel protection in robot working areas, conveyor
equipment etc. The small design makes it easy to install.
Technical Data
Article number/Ordering
data
General data
Scanning rate:
Scanning angle:
Operating voltage:
Transmitter:
#URRENTCONSUMPTION
Angle resolution:
Weight:
Housing:
Personnel protection field
Scanning distance:
Area:
Output:
2ESOLUTION
2ESPONSETIME
2EmECTANCEFACTOR
5:36
,OOK*3
3CANSSEC
²
6$#
,ASERDIODE0ROTECTIONCLASS
APPROXM!
²
2 kg
(MM7MM
$MM
,OOK IS NOT AFFECTED BY AMBIENT LIGHT LEVELS SUN ETC OR
welding arcs/sparks. The protection fields are quick and
EASYTOCREATEONA0#INA7INDOWSENVIRONMENT)THAS
four individual programmable protection areas. Each area
consists of one personnel protection field with maximum 4
MRADIUSANDONEWARNINGlELDOFMAXIMUMMRADIUS
#HANGING BETWEEN THE AREAS IS EASILY ACHIEVED USING
additional sensors.
Warning field
Scanning distance:
Area:
Output:
2ESOLUTION
2ESPONSETIME
2EmECTANCEFACTOR
2ADIUSM
AREASSWITCHABLEBY6$#
input
0.0TRANSISTOR6$#M!
MMATM¼
80 ms
MIN
Contour measurement
-EASUREMENTRANGE
Output:
2ESPONSETIME
2EmECTANCEFACTOR
2ESET
Suitable interface safety relay:
2ADIUSM
23
80 ms
MIN
manual or automatic
242424*3"24OR0LUTO
2ADIUSM
AREASSWITCHABLEBY6$#
input
X/33$M!FAILSAFE
TRANSISTOR0.0OUTPUTS6$#
70 mm at 4 m
80 ms
MIN
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Software - Look scanner
Function buttons
Dialog box for selecting
which area pair to display
Inactive safeguarded
AREAPAIR
-EASUREDAREALIMITS
2
3
4
5
Warning indication,
an object is inside the
safeguarded area
An object is detected
inside the detection area,
the machine stops
6
Active safeguadred area pair 1
2ED$ETECTIONAREA
Green: Safeguarded area
7
Connection example - Look scanner with RT9
8
9
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
5:37
13
Stopping time and
machine diagnosis tool
Smart
www.jokabsafety.com
Contents Page
Stopping time________________________________________________________6:2
Stopping time and Machine Diagnosis Tool - Smart_______________________6:3
Smart Manager_ _____________________________________________________6:4
Smart and accessories________________________________________________6:6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
While every effort has been taken to ensure the accuracy of information contained in this book and any associated promotional and information material
JOKAB SAFETY cannot accept responsibility for errors or omissions and reserves the right to make any improvements without notice. It is the users
responsibility to ensure that this equipment is correctly designed, specified, installed, cared for and operated to meet all applicable local, national and
international codes/regulations. Technical data in our book is correct to the level of accuracy of Jokab Safety´s test procedures as verified by various
international approved bodies. Other information (such as application examples, wiring diagrams, operation or use) is intended solely to illustrate
the various uses of our products. JOKAB SAFETY does not quarantee or imply that the product when used in accordance with such examples in
a particular environment will fulfil any particular safety requirement and does not assume any responsibility or liability for actual use of the product
based on the examples given. 2008 v02.
www.jokabsafety.com
6:1
12
13
Stopping time
Why measure stopping time?
— to find out which safety arrangements can be used in a certain area
around a machine, and where they should be located.
Stopping time
The safety distance (how far away from the risk area a safety
component must be placed) is based upon the machines stopping time. The basic idea is that a safety component should
be placed so far from the risk area that it is not possible to
enter the area before the machine has stopped.
The stopping time for manually operated machines is especially important when light beams and light curtains are used
as safety components. By reflex action the operator tries to
grab or adjust if something has gone wrong in the machine
tool, even if the machine has started. It is then imperative that
the machine stops before the hand reaches the risk area.
A short stopping distance is also of importance for getting
good ergonomics.
Grabbing or adjusting is also common when using automatic machines. Usually this is done to prevent production
down-time by quickly adjusting a work piece. The stopping
time is also of great importance if someone trips and falls
into the machine.
Stopping time, walking speed (1.6 m/s) and hand speed
(2.0 m/s) is used for the calculation of safety distances.
Sometimes a fixed minimum distance is also used. See
the standard EN 999 for more details on the calculation of
safety distances.
Stopping distance
For safety contact strips it is extra important that the stopping distance is monitored. An incorrect stopping distance
could in many cases result in very high risks. The stopping
distance is also needed during area limiting e.g. for robots
when dividing the working area into sectors.
For door sensitive edges, it is important that the stopping distance is shorter than the soft part of the sensitive edge.
Regulations and standards
It is also important to measure the stopping time, to meet the
requirements set by the machinery standards, directives and
regulations. Here we can help, with our long experience in
the practical application of regulations and standards, from
the viewpoints of both the authorities and production. In addition we collaborate with the standardisation committees
responsible for producing these standards. One example is
the revision of EN 999, which deals with the placing of safety
6:2
Where the safety distance is small, one can for example sit close
to the machine and work, as in the picture on the left. If the safety
distance is greater, it may be necessary to approach the machine
to intervene, and also perhaps use additional protection to prevent
starting when someone is within the protected distance.
devices around a machine based on its stopping time. When
it is complete, this standard will become EN ISO 13855. The
standard is general for all types of machinery, although for
some, where there is a harmonised C standard, the requirements for minimum distance and stopping time measurement
will apply. In the case for example of mechanical press tools
there is also a requirement in EN 692 for how stopping
time measurements are to be performed, and in the case of
hydraulic press tools this is in EN 693.
Annual checks
Wear in a machine is something that can affect braking and
motors, which means that the stopping time of a machine
can change with time. Certain other changes in a machine,
such as changing the weight of a workpiece or alterations in
pneumatic pressure, can also affect the stopping time. For
these and other reasons it is important to perform an annual
check on the stopping time.
How the stopping time affects the choice of protective
equipment – an example
There was a case where we measured the stopping time of
the rollers in a textile industry company. The company had
planned to place light beams or a light curtain in front of the
rollers to prevent the operators from being caught in the
material and dragged in. The stopping time measurement
showed that it took over one second for the rollers to stop.
During this time the material was pulled in by almost two
metres. In order to obtain sufficient protection distance, the
light beams would have needed to be positioned almost
three metres from the machinery, and a light curtain about
two metres away. The factory did not have so much space,
nor was it realistic. The solution became instead vertical
sliding safety barriers.
www.jokabsafety.com
Stopping time and Machine
Diagnosis Tool
Smart
Approvals:
1
Smart shows graphs/values for:
Stopping time
2
Stopping distance
3
Speed
Position of stopping signal
4
Features:
Easy to use
Measurements with or without electrical connection
5
Ideal for machine performance diagnosis
6
Calculation of correct safety
distances
Smart is ideal for safety supervision and for
diagnosis of machine operation
Smart has many valuable features for machine diagnosis:
• Graphic presentation of measurements
• Easy to analyse stopping characteristics and movement
• Gives parameters for safety design (e.g. stop time)
• Calculates minimum allowed safety distance
• Shows how the stop distance can be optimised
• Electrical reaction time and mechanical/hydraulic
breaking can be identified and analysed
• Digital in/out signals and analogue inputs
Smart is perfect for periodic monitoring of safety parameters
and other conditions for the maintenance and trouble-shooting of machines. Because Smart can compare old and new
graphs, it becomes easy to find out the reasons for machine
malfunctions. One can also supervise machines during operation and compare how they perform over time.
Stopping units and sensors
Smart is a further development of our well established JSSM1
Stopping Analyser. All the stopping units and sensors for
the JSSM1 can also be used with Smart. The amount of
connection possibilities have also increased. Smart has 9
digital I/O, one input for an incremental sensor (for position
and speed) and two analogue inputs. This makes it easy to
measure sequences in conjunction with motion lapse and
other analogue values.
Webbsupport - Smart
On our web site http://customer.jokabsafety.com we
have a special page for you as a Smart customer.
Here you can keep up to date by downloading the latest
version of Smart Manager, manuals, drive routines or
read the FAQs.
7
8
9
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
6:3
13
Smart Manager
Smart is controlled in real time by a computer using the Smart Manager
program. This performs measurements, and the measured data can be
saved and analysed. The measurements are saved in an SQL database,
with the ability to export data to Microsoft Excel if necessary. The program
calculates the stopping time and protective distance, and can print out the
results, together with a graph of the event sequence. Smart Manager is
available in several languages: English, Swedish, Danish, German, French,
Czech and Polish. Translation into other languages can easily be arranged
as necessary. The program is free, and is available for downloading from
our web site when purchasing equipment to measure stopping times.
Benefits:
Simple program structure
Shows the entire stop sequence
Provides a machine movement
“fingerprint”
Compares measurements
Calculates stopping time
Saves measurements to a
database
Exports measured data to Excel
Prints out a complete
measurement report
•Current values from sensors and the system
•Start conditions
•Stop signal conditions
•Shutdown conditions
• Measuring settings can be saved
Start menu
• Stop time data
• Zoom control
• Own cursors
Measuring
form
Stop signal
given
Measured
result
Relay contacts
drop out
Machine
stopped
•Min., max. and average value and
standard deviation from a series of measurements
•Protective distance can be calculated
System requirements
Windows XP/2000/Me/NT
100 MB free dsk space
Pentium II 233 MHz
128 MB RAM
6:4
Calculations
www.jokabsafety.com
Saving
•Select measurement series
•State extra information, e.g.
the conditions and special
circumstances for the measurements.
Archiving
•Search filter
•Saved measurements
•Exported measurements
Conversion of analogue signals
Smart can measure and show graphs for two different analogue sensors at the same
time, with its inputs for 0/4-20 mA. Conversion of the measured current values can be
done automatically by setting minimum and maximum values and the units for the inputs.
In this way, for example, the results from an analogue pressure sensor can be shown and
calculated as 0-400 bar instead of 4-20 mA, or an analogue load cell as 0-2 kN. This also
means that if it is desired for the system to be triggered at a certain force, that force can
be defined instead of needing to calculate the equivalent current value.
Printout
Printing out is one of the most important functions of the program. Here is shown all the vital information about the measurements that is needed for such items as annual checking or providing the basis for CE labelling of a machine. Since
the entire measuring sequence is shown in graphical format, one can understand why the stopping time has a certain
value and also, in some cases, see what needs to be done to minimise the stopping time. The graph also acts as a kind of
“fingerprint" of the machine movements, which means that different measurements can be compared with each other to
see how the stopping sequence varies from time to time, or from year to year. In this way the effects of e.g. worn brakes
or the effect on the machine control system can be seen. In order to get a complete basis from a measurement it is also
important to state what assumptions have been made and what conditions applied when deciding when and how the stop
signal was given.
Among other things, the stop signal details the person measuring, the measuring equipment, the machinery, the calculations and the protective distance. The printout also has a replaceable company logo and a field for extra information.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
6:5
13
Smart and accessories
Smart Logger
The Smart Logger is the principal unit for
data collection. The logger has a USB
connection to the PC and 8 off M12 connections: one for the power supply to the
I/O, one connection for an incremental
sensor, two connections for analogue
sensors and four connections for other
I/O signals.
The Logger encapsulation is watertight,
with M12 connections to prevent the
entry of particles and fluids in the workshop environment. To prevent the Smart
Logger from being damaged by incorrect
currents and voltages from external
equipment, all inputs and outputs, and
external units, are electrically isolated
from the processor in the Smart Logger
by means of opto-couplers.
Manufacturer:
JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden
Article number/Ordering data:
70-300-01 Smart Logger
Dimensions:
62 x 220 x 80 mm. (wxhxd)
Weight:
0.5 kg
Protection class:
IP 67
Supply voltage:
24 VDC
Response speed:
max 1 ms
Positional accuracy:
+/- 0.1 mm
Digital I/O:
8 inputs, 4 outputs (NPN OC)
Analogue inputs:
2 off, 0/4-20 mA
Encoder:
1 connection for a pulse sensor
Manufacturer:
JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden
Article number/Ordering data:
70-300-02 SM2 Button unit
Dimensions:
Size: 50 x 100 x 25 mm. (wxhxd)
Weight:
0.2 kg
Application area:
Two-handed control unit, Emergency
stop, etc.
Supply voltage:
Fed from the Smart Logger
Manufacturer:
JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden
Article number/Ordering data:
70-300-03 SM3 Relay unit
Dimensions:
85 x 72 x 49 mm. (wxhxd)
Weight:
0.2 kg
Application area:
Electrical connection providing a stop
pulse.
Supply voltage:
Fed from the Smart Logger
Relay outputs:
2 NO, 2 NC, 6A/250 VAC.
Encoder:
1 connection for a pulse sensor
Manufacturer:
JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden
Article number/Ordering data:
70-300-11 SM11 Flag unit
Dimensions:
145 x 85 x 37 (wxhxd). Shaft ø3 x 45 mm
Weight:
0.6 kg
Application area:
Ligh curtain, light beam
Protection class:
IP 40
Batteries:
10 rechargeable 1.2 V NiMH batteries.
Total 12 V
Power:
Max 1200 mAh (approx. 200 operations).
Temperature:
0 to +45°C.
Installation:
On a table or a standard ¼” camera
tripod
Charger:
SM14
SM2 Button unit
The SM2 is used in conjunction with the
Smart Logger for measuring with a manual
stop impulse, without an electrical
connection to the machine. When an SM2
is, for example, pressed against an
emergency stop button to stop the
machine, the SM2 sends a signal to the
Smart Logger to start the measurement.
An LED on the SM2 lights when the
desired stop position is reached. The SM2
is connected to the Smart Logger by an
M12 connection.
SM3 Relay unit
The SM3 is used in conjunction with the
Smart Logger for automatic stopping
time measurements at the set position, or
alternatively a manual stop pulse. When a
stop signal comes from the Smart Logger
a relay switches in the SM3.
The SM3 then sends a signal to the
Smart Logger to start measuring, and
also activates the relay outputs to stop
the machine. The relay in the SM3 is
reset via the software when a new
measurement is to be made. The SM3
is connected to the Smart Logger by an
M12 connection.
SM11 Flag unit
The Smart Logger is used in conjunction
with the SM11 for automatic measurements of the stopping time and stopping
distance. The unit is located in a light
curtain with the flag parallel to the beam.
When the flag is activated, the light
beam/light curtain is interrupted, and the
machine stops. The SM11 is connected
to the Smart Logger by an M12 connection.
6:6
www.jokabsafety.com
1
SM5 1250/2500 Linear sensor
The SM5 is an incremental pulse sensor
for connection to a Smart Logger. The
sensor is protected by a robust enclosure. The sensor and end of the cable
are secured to the machine by powerful
magnets. The SM5 is connected to the
Smart Logger by an M12 connection.
Manufacturer:
JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden
Article number/Ordering data:
SM5/1250: 70-300-04 Linear sensor
SM5/2500: 70-300-05 Linear sensor
Dimensions:
SM5/1250: 106 x 88 x 100 mm (wxhxd)
SM5/2500: 114 x 125 x 116 mm (wxhxd)
Weight:
SM5/1250: 1 kg
SM5/2500: 1.4 kg
Application area:
Linear movement, e.g. press tools
Supply voltage:
Fed from the Smart Logger
Max length:
1250 or 2500 mm
Max speed:
5 m/s
Resolution:
0.1 mm
Manufacturer:
JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden
Article number/Ordering data:
70-300-07 SM7 Rotation sensor
Dimensions:
Sensor size: 46 x 40 x 59 (wxhxd)
Stand size: Extended, approx. 400 x 50 x
90 (wxhxd)
Weight:
1.7 kg including stand
Application area::
Rotating motion, e.g. lathes, rollers
Supply voltage:
Fed from the Smart Logger
Max speed:
5 m/s
Resolution:
0.1 mm
Wheel circumference:
125 mm
2
3
SM7 Rotation sensor
The SM7 is an incremental sensor for
connection to a Smart Logger. The
sensor detects rotational movement via
a wheel rolling against a shaft. The stand
secures the sensor with the aid of just
one knob. The stand itself is secured to
the machine by a powerful magnetic foot.
The SM7 is connected to the Smart Logger by an M12 connection.
4
5
6
SM13 Battery pack
SM13 is a battery pack for the Smart
Logger, which makes the Smart a
completely mobile measuring tool. With
the SM13 you don’t need to connect the
Logger to a wall socket for power, and
can easily move it from one machine to
another when you are measuring. Since
the SM13 battery pack is the same
physical size as the SM11 flag unit, it
fits snugly into the SM9 carrying case.
The charger for the SM13 is called the
SM14 and provides a charging time of
about 3 hours 15 minutes (2100 mAh).
The SM14 also acts as afast charger for
the SM11.
Manufacturer:
JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden
Article number/Ordering data:
70-300-23 SM13 Battery pack
Dimensions:
145 x 85 x 37 mm (LxWxH)
Weight:
0.8 kg
Protection class:
IP 40
Connector:
Negative pole at the centre of the charging connector
Current rating:
Maximum 0.9A
Power:
2100 mAh. With normal use lasts
about 10-12 hours. (Higher capacity on
request.)
Batteries
20 rechargeable 1.2 V NiMH batteries of
size AA(R06). Total 24 V
Manufacturer:
JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden
Article number/Ordering data:
70-300-09 SM9 Carrying case
Dimensions:
535 x 155 x 430 mm (LxWxH)
Weight:
3.5 kg
Name
Article number
Description
SM6
70-300-06
AC/DC converter for Smart
SM14
70-300-24
Charger for flag unit SM11 and
battery pack SM13.
USB cable
70-300-15
USB cable for communication with
computer
Encoder adapter
70-300-13
Adapter for old type JSSM sensor
Stop unit adapter
70-300-14
Adapter for old type JSSM stop units
Extension cables
20-056-20, 20-056-21, 20-056-22,
20-056-23 and 20-056-24
Jokab Safety's extension cables with 5
conductors ideal for all Smart accessories
7
8
9
SM9 Carrying case
The SM9 is a practical carrying case with
pockets to suit the various Smart units.
Part of the protective foam insert in the
lid of the case can be removed to make
room for a laptop computer, so that all
the equipment required can be carried in
a single case.
10
11
Other accessories
www.jokabsafety.com
12
6:7
13
Sensors and switches
www.jokabsafety.com
Contents
Page
1
Why should you use sensors/switches?_________________________________7:2
How safe is a switch/sensor? _________________________________________7:3
2
Non-contact safety sensor Eden _______________________________________7:4
Safety Interlock switch JSNY5 _________________________________________7:8
3
Magnetic Switch JSNY7 ____________________________________________ 7:10
Safety Interlock Switch JSNY8 _______________________________________ 7:12
4
Safety Interlock Switch JSNY9 _______________________________________ 7:14
Magnetic lock Magne ______________________________________________ 7:16
5
Process lock Dalton ________________________________________________ 7:20
Safety lock Knox___________________________________________________ 7:24
6
7
8
9
10
11
While every effort has been taken to ensure the accuracy of information contained in this book and any associated promotional and information material,
JOKAB SAFETY cannot accept responsibility for errors or omissions, and reserves the right to make any improvements without notice. It is the users
responsibility to ensure that this equipment is correctly designed, specified, installed, cared for and operated to meet all applicable local, national and
international codes/regulations. Technical data in our book is correct to the level of accuracy of Jokab Safety´s test procedures as verified by various
international approved bodies. Other information (such as application examples, wiring diagrams, operation or use) is intended solely to illustrate
the various uses of our products. JOKAB SAFETY does not guarantee or imply that the product when used in accordance with such examples in
a particular environment will fulfil any particular safety requirement and does not assume any responsibility or liability for actual use of the product
based on the examples given. 2008 v02.
www.jokabsafety.com
7:1
12
13
Why should you use
sensors/switches?
- to supervise doors and hatches around
dangerous machines!
Assurance that a machine stops when a door or a hatch is
opened can be solved by using different types of switches
and sensors which are monitored with a safety relay or a
safety PLC. Switches and sensors are available both as
non-contact (dynamic or magnetic) and various types of
interlocking devices. Interlocking devices can be used when
it is required, via a signal, to lock a gate during processes
that cannot be stopped during certain operations. They are
also used with machines that have a long stopping time to
prevent someone from entering before the machine has
stopped.
- to ensure that a position is reached!
The sensor monitors that the robot is standing still in a
monitored position when someone enters the robot´s working area. The robot is then only stopped by the program. If
the robot leaves the position the power will be cut directly.
This is used when the robot does not stop safely without
restarting problems.
- to manage the safety in harsh
environments!
Non-contact dynamic sensors have a long lifetime because
they are not physically mechanically operated. They also
endure very harsh environments, e.g. cold, heat, high-pressure wash-down which is important in the food industry
for example. Because the sensors are small, they are very
easy to position and can even be completely concealed in
doors and hatches.
7:2
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Eden highest safety level and reliability
Safety level
Our recommendation is to use the Eden sensor because
it is the safest and most reliable solution. The Eden sensor
is a non-contact switch and has a dynamic function. Also
it is possible to connect up to 30 Eden sensors in series
and still achieve safety category 4, in accordance with EN
954-1/EN ISO 13849-1.
2
Eden sensor with
dynamic signal
3
What requirements should one have on
sensors/switches?
The sensor/switch shall be reliable from both the safety
and production point of view.
s!PERSONMUSTBEABLETOTRUSTTHATDANGEROUS
movements and functions are safely stopped by the
sensors/switches.
s&ROMTHEPRODUCTIONPOINTOFVIEWUNINTENTIONALSTOPS
should be avoided.
4
Magnetic switch
Safety Interlock
switch
Reliability
5
6
7
How safe is a sensor/switch?
In order to trust the safety function it is essential to be aware that a safety
sensor/switch must be mounted and be used according to the specifications.
The certification authorities only test the product according to the appropriate
standards and to the specifications from the manufacturer.
Mechanical switches
For mechanical switches, e.g. key operated, this means that
a door or a hatch has to constructed to small tolerances in
order for the switch, the key or the mounting brackets to last
according to the life time specification from the supplier. The
screws holding the parts have to be locked in such a way
that they cannot be loosened. In order to prevent material
from getting into the slot for the key the environment has to
be clean. If a door goes outside the design tolerances from
wear, the screws loosen or material comes into the slot, this
may lead to the interlocked switch not giving a stop signal
when the door is opened. Even two mechanical switches
on a door could fail to an unsafe state if the door somehow
gets outside the tolerances of the switches. To prevent accidents the mechanical switch normally needs continuous
checks of both the switch and the installation.
Non-contact sensors/switches
For non contact sensors the risks associated with mechanical switches (see above) do not exist. If screws, brackets
or sensors get loose, it will lead to a stop signal. Therefore
only one sensor with dual or dynamic function is needed in
8
order to reach the highest safety level. There are two types
of non-contact sensors - active and passive. The active
sensor, Eden, is constantly communicating via a dynamic
signal between the two parts and any failure will directly
lead to a stop signal. The passive type, a magnet switch, has
two reed contacts which are activated by a coded magnet.
Both the passive and the active sensors are checked every
time a door is opened. From a safety point of view the active sensor, Eden, is to be preferred because it is checked
constantly whereas the passive sensor is only checked
when a door opens.
From the reliability point of view a long detection distance
with large tolerances and a well defined on and off position
is needed. The active sensor, Eden, fulfils these demands. A
magnet switch has smaller tolerances and an intermediate
position where only one contact opens. A bad installation
or vibrations can lead to an unintentional stop if one contact
opens and closes again. The supervision of a two channel
system is based on both contacts having to be operated
in order to permit a new start. In a dynamic safety circuit
there is only one pulsed signal and therefore no intermediate position.
www.jokabsafety.com
7:3
9
10
11
12
13
Approvals:
Non-contact safety sensor
Eden
Safety sensor for:
Doors and hatches
Position control
Sector detection
Slot detection
Features:
13 ± 2
1
13 ± 2
15 ± 2
mm
Safety category 4 according to
EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1
together with Vital or Pluto
Non-contact detection, large
sensing distance 0 - 15 mm
± 2 mm
5
5
Flexible mounting and
The ability to operate at
long distances.
A non-contact safety sensor for the highest
safety level
Eden - Adam and Eva is a non-contact safety sensor for use on
interlocked gates, hatches etc. A coded signal is transmitted from
the control device Vital or from the safety PLC Pluto via Adam
to Eva which modifies the signal and sends it back again. The
maximum sensing distance between Adam and Eva is currently
15 mm ± 2 mm.
Up to 30 Edens can be connected in series to Vital and still
achieve the same safety level in the safety circuit. It is also
possible to connect safety light beams and E-stops in the same
safety circuit.
Adam is available with cable lengths up to 10 m and with
M12 connectors. The LED on Adam provides indication of three
different conditions, contact/non-contact between Adam and
Eva and safety status. The same information is also available
via the Adam connection cable. Eden E is available for harsh
environments, as are Adam E and Eva E. Rapid blinking serves
as an alignment aid. There are also coded versions, Eden C,
Eden EC, Adam EC and Eva EC.
7:4
www.jokabsafety.com
Up to 30 sensors connected in
series to Vital at safety category 4
Versitile mounting, 360°
detection
Protection class IP 67/IP69.
Signal will penetrate through
non-metallic materials (wood,
plastic, etc)
Safety light beams, E-stops and
Eden can be connected in the
same safety circuit together with
Vital or Pluto meeting safety
category 4 (EN 954-1/
EN ISO 13849-1).
LED indication on sensor and
status information via the connector cable
Small hysteresis (< 1mm)
1
Application examples - Eden
Eden to detect position
Adam and Eva has contact
only if they are within 15 mm
from each other.
2
Adam on
wall.
3
Eva on robot.
Eden used for sector detection
Metal stops the signal between Adam and
Eva. Additional Eden sensor(s) can be
mounted to detect metal plate(s) in place.
Metal
4
Eden used to detect the position of the
saw guard.
Wood, plastic and other non-metallic
materials let the signal pass between
Adam and Eva.
5
6
Wood, plastic
etc
Eden can be hidden in doors and hatches
Non-metallic door material between
Adam and Eva allows the signal through
Mounting – Eden
80
7
8
mm
Mounting Adam with integral cable.
115
DA1
9
Mounting with one protection plate (DA1) for Adam
M12 using prewired moulded M12 connector.
120
Mounting with two protection plates (DA1) for Adam
M12 using M12 connector with glanded cable.
10
DA1 x 2
Wrong mounting without protection plate may
cause permanent damage to sensor.
*
DA1, protection plate 2,5 mm
DA2
Notes:
Four protection plates plates are supplied with Adam M12.
To protect Adam and Eva protection plate (DA1) can be
used on both sides.
DA2 mounting
The DA2 mounting spacer must be used in order to
physically protect Eden from damage. Four spacers are
provided with each Adam and Eva.
11
12
* Safety screw
www.jokabsafety.com
7:5
13
Connection of Eden to Pluto
Connection of Eden to Vital 1
7:6
www.jokabsafety.com
Technical data – Eden
Manufacturer
JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden
Article number/Ordering data: 20-046-00
20-046-06
20-051-00
20-051-02
20-051-04
20-051-05
20-051-06
20-051-07
20-051-08
20-051-14
20-051-16
Eva
Eva E
Adam M12
Adam 3 m
Adam 10 m
Adam 20 m
Adam E 10 m
Adam E 0.5 M12
Adam E 20 m
Eden C 10 m
Eden EC
Safety category with Vital or
Pluto (in accordance with
EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1) 4
4
Colour
Yellow and black
Weight
Eva: 26 g
Eva E/Eva EC: 36 g
Adam M12: 30 g
Adam 3 m: 220 g incl. cable
Adam 10 m: 650 g incl. cable
Adam E10 m: 660 g incl. cable
Adam EC 10 m: 660 g incl. cable
Adam E 0,5 m + M12: 100 g incl.
cable
>107 cycles
Material
Macromelt (Based on polyamid)
Eden E and Eden EC is also
covered by PUR (polyurethan).
Chemical resistance
Macromelt:
PU (Eden E and Eden EC):
LED on Adam
Green:
Cutting oils, vegetable and
animal oils, hydrogen peroxide,
diluted acids and bases: good
Alcohol and strong acids: not
recommended
Cutting oils, vegetable and
animal oils,hydrogen peroxide,
diluted acids and bases,
alcohols: good
Strong oxidating acids: not
recommended
Eva within range, safety circuit
closed (door closed)
Eva within range, earlier safety
circuit open (door closed)
Eva out of range, safety circuit
open (door open)
Eva is within 2 mm from maximum
sensing distance (door closed)
Flashing:
Red:
Fast flashing:
Cable
3 or 10 m, ø 5.7mm, black, PVC
5 x 0.34mm² + screen, UL 2464
Power supply
24VDC +15%-25%
Connector
M12: 5-pin male contact
Power consumption
Adam: without info output 45 mA
with info output max 55 mA
Connections
Brown (1)
White (2)
Blue (3)
Black (4)
Grey (5)
+24 VDC
Dynamic signal in
0 VDC
Dynamic signal out
Info output, see below
Max cable length
Ambient temperature
Eden/Eden C
Eden E/EC
Protection class
Eden
Eden E/EC
Mounting
see Vital technical data
-40°C … +70°C (operation)
-25°C … +70°C (stock)
-40°C … +70°C (operation)
(Test ok +90°C ... +100°C)
-25°C … +70°C (stock)
1
Life
3
4
5
6
7
24 VDC when LED is green or flashing
(tolerance -2 VDC), 10 mA max
0 VDC when LED is red. (tolerance +2 VDC)
Warning: Incorrect connection may cause permanent damage to
Adam devices.
IP67
IP69K
Eden
8
Eden E/EC
Installation Eden/Eden C
M4 screw, e.g. safety screw
20-053-42. Max. torque 2 Nm.
Screw to be locked with Loctite
or similar.
9
Installation EdenE/Eden EC
M4 screw, e.g. safety screw
20-053-42. Max. torque 2 Nm.
Screw to be locked with Loctite
or similar.
Detection distance max
Adam/Eva
15 ± 2 mm
Adam C/Eva C 12 ± 2 mm
Adam E/Eva E 12 ± 2 mm
Adam /Eva EC 10 ± 2 mm
Hysteresis approx. 1 mm
2
Flash 2 mm before red position.
Flash 2 mm before red position.
Flash 2 mm before red position.
Flash 2 mm before red position.
Metal may have influence on detection distance.
This can be prevented by protection plates, DA1.
10
Adam 3 m
Adam 10 m
Adam C 10 m
Adam M12
Minimum distance to metal
when there is metal on one or
more sides.
Eva
Safety screw. For more
screw options see the
product list.
11
Safety screwdriver bit
Adam/Eva, Adam EC/Eva EC,
Adam E/Eva E
Adam C/Eva C
One
0 mm
0 mm
5 mm
Minimum distance between
Eden pairs
50 mm
More
2,5 mm
0 mm
5 mm
M12
www.jokabsafety.com
Adam E 0,5 M12,
Adam E/EC 10
m and Eva E/
EC for extreme
surroundings.
12
7:7
13
Approvals:
Safety Interlock switch
JSNY5
Application:
Gates
Hatches
Features:
2 NC + 1 NO (actuator in)
4 actuating positions
Actuator holding force 10 or
30 N
Switch operational description
JSNY5 offers three contacts which gives both the two contacts needed for high safety level as well as a contact for
the indication of operating status.
The advanced design offers the choice of four operating
positions from only two actuator entries by simply rotating
the head through 180o.
However, when installed and in it's working condition only
one entry can be used, ensuring no other element can tamper
with the switch function.
When mounting the switch from the front two elongated
holes are provided to aid alignment with two set screw holes
for accurate fixing. Top fixing is also possible.
Three cable entries allow for a variety of cabling options
including through wiring.
Positive forced disconnected contacts
The design assures that the contacts will not fail or be held
in a normally closed position, due to failure of the spring
mechanism or the welding/sticking of the contacts.
Protection from unauthorised or incidental access
To avoid unauthorised operation the JSNY5 switch is
manufactured using multicoding to GS-ET 15. The switch
cannot be defeated by screwdrivers, magnets or any other
mechanism.
Safety level
The positive forced disconnect contacts gives a high safety
level. By combining the JSNY 5 with one of our suitable safety
7:8
After opening the snap-on cover, the head portion can be removed
(version A), after turning the head through 1800 (version B) it
can be replaced onto the body of the switch and be locked into
position by closing the snap-on cover. This ensures 4 actuating
positions are possible.
relays as for example from the RT-series, the safety PLC Pluto
or Vital (Tina) the requirements for both hatch and gate switch
supervision can be fulfilled. To obtain the same level of safety
as Eden, two switches per gate are required.
Regulations and Standards
The JSNY5 is designed and approved in accordance with
appropriate directives and standards. Examples of such are
98/37/EC, EN ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1, EN 954-1/
EN ISO 13849-1, EN 1088 and GS-ET 15.
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Technical data
Manufacturer
JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden
Article number/Ordering data:
20-022-00
20-022-01
Colour
Black and yellow label
Enclosure/Cover
PA 6 (UL94-VO)
Actuator
Steel
Min. opening radius for actuator on a hatch
150 mm
Ambient operating temperature
-30°C to +80°C
Contacts (actuator in)
2 NC + 1NO (NC are direct opening action)
Mechanical life
1 Million switch operations
Max switching frequency
30/min
Fixing
body 2 x M5, actuator 2 x M5
Cable entry
2x M20 x1.5
Weight
approx. 0.13 kg
Degree of protection
IP65 IEC 60529 / DIN VDE 0470 T1
Rated insulation voltage
400 V AC
Rated operational current
5A
Utilisation category
AC-15/DC-13
Short-circuit protection
Fuse 6A Slow acting, 16A quick acting
CSA
5A 300V AC B300 (same polarity)
JSNY5A holding force 10 N
JSNY5B holding force 30 N
2
3
4
5
Assembly - JSNY5
6
Easy accessibility for wiring
The snap-on cover is released by a screwdriver and can be opened to an angle of
1350 providing easy access to the wiring terminals. Should the snap-on cover
not provide adequate security, a retaining
screw can be used.
Protected contact block
A transparent cover protects the contact
block from external elements during the
installation and wiring process.
Prevention of actuator dismantling
A cover plate with a one-way snap-fit
which seals the mounting screws prevents
unauthorised dismantling of the actuator
assembly. The cover plate must be mounted to prevent overtravel of the switching
mechanism.
Contact Description - JSNY5
8
-1
21 2
-2
2
33
-3
4
9
11
mm
21,5
7
Actuator
withdrawn
5
Actuator
inserted
3,5
3,0
Overlapping contact 33 - 34.
The overlapping contact 33 -34 enables
operational status indication of eg. incorrect
adjustment of switch before the positive
forced disconnect NC contacts open.
Note!
The switch must not be used as an end
stop!
Traction travel
10
11
Accessories and spare parts
s3TANDARDACTUATOR
s&LEXIBLEKEYFORSMALLEROPENINGRADIUS
s#ABLEGLAND
s3NAPONCOVER
s4INA!WITH-CONNECTIONFORADYNAMICLOOP
s4INA"WITHCABLECONNECTION
s4INA!WITH-AND-CONNECTIONSFORADYNAMICLOOP
www.jokabsafety.com
7:9
12
13
Approvals:
Magnetic Switch
JSNY7
EMC
Application:
Gates
Hatches
Position control
Features
Small size
IP 67
Switch operation description
The magnetic switch is designed to operate in dirty industrial
environments and is certified to the highest level of safety
regulation when working together with a suitable JOKAB
SAFETY safety relay or Safety-PLC Pluto. The magnetic
switch is small and resistant to both dirt and water, and has
no dust collecting cavities making it usefull in environments
where hygiene is paramount. The small size of the switch
makes it easy to position and hide on gates and hatches.
The magnetic switch has a long working life since no
mechanical contact is made during operation.
Contacts
The magnetic switch has one closing and one opening
contact. Both contacts have to be monitored. The contacts
may be monitored by either the RT9 safety relay or other
suitable relays in the new RT-series, i.e. RT6, RT9 or Safety
PLC Pluto.
JSNY7 is resistant to both dirt and water.
Protection from unauthorised or incidental access
To avoid unauthorised operation of the JSNY7 switch it is
only possible to actuate the JSNY7R with the coded magnet,
JSNY7M. Other magnets, screwdrivers and tools have no
affect on the switch contacts.
Safety level
The JSNY7 is approved to the highest level of safety regulations, category 4 according to EN954-1 together with safety
relay in the RT-series. The magnetic switch is approved and
certified by DNV and BG.
7:10
Regulations and Standards
The JSNY7 is designed and approved in accordance with
appropriate directives and standards. Examples of such are
98/37/EC, EN ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1, EN 954-1/
EN ISO 13849-1, EN 1088 and GS-ET 15.
www.jokabsafety.com
1
4,5
Article number/ordering data:
20-023-00
JSNY7R-3 Magnetic switch
3 m cable
JSNY7R-6 Magnetic switch
6 m cable
JSNY7R-10 Magnetic switch
10 m cable
JSNY7M Magnetic switch
20-023-01
20-023-02
20-024-00
Black
Enclosure/Cover
PA 6 (UL94-VO)
Supply voltage max
30 VDC
Switch current max
100 mA
Max switching frequency
1 Hz
Mechanical life
3 x 108 switch operations, depending on load
Operating temperature range
-5oC to +70oC (moveable)
-20oC to +70oC (fixed)
Connection
Cable ø4.5, 4x0.25 mm2, 3 meter ; PVC
(other lengths upon request)
Switching point
Min. switch-on point 5 mm
Max. switch-off point 14 mm
Weight
Coded magnet: 32 g
Sensor with 3m cable: 133 g
Protection class
IP67
78
14
88
5
2
0
13
Colour
mm
68
10,7
7,2
2,5
JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden
25
Manufacturer
6,5
Technical data
3
3
Electrical connection
Two-channel switching, high safety level.
black
4
brown
5
grey
blue
6
Electrical connection description - JSNY7
7
Door 1
Door 2
Door 3
Electrical Connection example
Three JSNY7 connected to RT6
safety
relay.
NOTE!
Safety components drawn in released position.
NOTE!
This solution with 3 magnetic
switches only complies with category 3 as per EN 954-1/EN ISO
13849-1.
To reach highest level of safety only
one magnetic switch should be connected to the safety relay.
8
9
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
7:11
13
Approvals:
Safety Interlock Switch
JSNY8
Application:
Gates
Hatches
Features:
Robust design
Universal installation
2 NC + 2 NC outputs
1000 N actuator holding force
Description
The JSNY8 Safety Interlock Switch, in conjunction with the
machine control system, enables gates/movable guards etc to
be locked in their protective positions, thus preventing access
to machinery until dangerous operations have ceased.
Applications include:
s PROCESSESWHICHCANNOTBEINTERRUPTEDSUCHASWELDING
s MACHINERY WITH A LONG STOPPING PROCEDURE SUCH AS PAPER
machinery that requires a long braking operation.
s PREVENTIONOFUNAUTHORISEDACCESSTOAPARTICULARAREA
In the magnetic lock (JSNY8M) version, the locking mechanism is only in the locked position when the solenoid (E1-E2)
is supplied with operating voltage. Release of the actuator key
is only possible when the operating voltage is removed from
the solenoid (E1-E2).
The JSNY8 has 2 NC + 2 NC positive force disconnection
contacts. The first pair closes when the actuator key is pushed
into the head. The other pair closes when the locking mechanism
is in the locked position. The head can be set in four positions,
thus providing the safety device with four different operating
positions. These are selected by twisting the head as shown
in the diagram above. The leading edges of the actuator key
are reinforced and bevelled in order to guide it properly into the
hole. The JSNY8 is encased in a robust metal housing (IP67)
providing a high level of protection to the internal operating
components.
Tamper-proof
The JSNY8 is tamper-proof. The safety device cannot be manipulated by screwdrivers, magnets or other tools.
Two versions
The JSNY8 is available in two basic versions, either with a spring
lock or a magnetic lock.
In the spring lock (JSNY8S) version, the locking mechanism
moves into the locked position directly when the door is closed
and the actuator key is pushed into the lock. The actuator key can
only be released and the gate opened by supplying operational
voltage to the solenoid (E1-E2).
The JSNY8S also has a emergency ’unlocking’ facility to enable the actuator key to be released without the energisation
of the solenoid (E1-E2).
7:12
Optional features
The following optional features are available:
sACTUATORTOOPERATEATSMALLERRADIUS
s CUSTOMERSPECIlCAPPLICATIONS
Safety level
The JSNY8 has double forced disconnection contacts to the
actuator key and the locking mechanism. The actuator key has
a triple coding design. To achieve maximum safety level in the
connection to the machine’s control system, it is recommended
that the JSNY8 is monitored by an appropriate Jokab Safety
safety relay, Pluto safety-PLC or Vital. To obtain the same level
of safety as Eden, two switches per gate are required.
JSNY8S
JSNY8M
Regulations and Standards
The JSNY8 is designed and approved in accordance with
appropriate directives and standards. Examples of such are
98/37/EC, EN ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1, EN 954-1/
EN ISO 13849-1, EN 1088, GS-ET 19 and EN 60947-5-1.
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Technical data
Manufacturer
JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden
Article number/Ordering data:
20-030-00
20-030-01
20-030-05
20-030-15
Colour
Black
Enclosure
Metal housing
Actuator key
Steel & plastic (PA6)
Min. operating radius for hatch
400 mm (smaller radius on request)
Actuator holding force
1000 N
Working temperature
-30°C to +60°C
Contacts
actuator key inserted
locking mechanism, locked position
2 NC
2 NC
Mechanical service life
1 million switch operations
Installation fixings
3 x M5
Cable entry
2x M20 x 1.5
Weight
550 g
Enclosure class
IP67
Operating voltage
24V DC, 230 V AC
Rated insulation voltage
250V
Rated operating current
10A
Utilisation category
AC 12 250V/10A
AC 15 230V/4A
Short-circuit protection
Fuse 10A slow-acting, 16A quick-acting
Power consumption
5.2 W
JSNY8M 24DC
JSNY8S 24DC
JSNY8S 230AC
JSNY8M 230AC
2
3
50
30
,5
ø5ø5.5
2200
4
55
81
JSNY8/9N2
Rmin: 150 mm
Flexible actuator.
5
6
7
8
Note: Do not use switch as end
stop!
9
10
Contact description JSNY8S/M - JSNY8S/M
Contact
travel
Actuator withdrawn
Contact opened
11
Contact closed
JSNY8S
Key actuator inserted
Normally locked
(E1-E2 unpowered)
JSNY8M
Key actuator inserted
Normally unlocked
(E1-E2 unpowered)
www.jokabsafety.com
12
Actuator inserted
Fmin= 20 N
7:13
13
Approvals:
Safety Interlock switch
JSNY9
Application:
Gates
Hatches
Features:
Compact and robust
Universal installation
2 X (1NO+1NC)
Actuator holding
force 1500 N
Eight head configurations
The control unit offers eight operating positions that provide the
actuator with eight different input
options.
Description
The JSNY9 is used for locking a gate/hatch, to prevent access
to machinery, until hazardous operations have ceased.
Applications include:
sPROCESSESWHICHCANNOTBEINTERRUPTEDEGWELDING
sMACHINERYWITHALONGSTOPPINGTIMEEGPAPERMACHINERY
which requires a long braking operation.
sPREVENTIONOFUNAUTHORISEDACCESSTOAPARTICULARAREA
The JSNY9 is equipped with a 2 x (1NO +1 NC) contact
configuration, the first pair of contacts changeover when the
key is inserted. The second pair of contacts changeover when
the locking mechanism is in the locked position.
The JSNY9 switch is encased in a robust plastic housing
and can be mounted either horizontally or vertically. The
advanced design of the head provides eight possible key
insertion options, this is achieved by mounting the head
either vertically or horizontally on the base unit, as shown in
the diagram. The location for the actuator key is reinforced
and bevelled to ensure a smooth operation.
Two versions
The JSNY9 switch is available in two basic versions, either with
a spring lock or an electro-magnetic locking mechanism.
The JSNY9S (spring lock) switch operates immediately
when the gate/hatch is closed, i.e. when the key actuator is
inserted into the locking mechanism. The gate/hatch can be
opened and the actuator key released only by supplying the
operational voltage to the solenoid connections (E1 E2). The
JSNY9S also has a manual emergency unlocking facility to
enable authorised release of the actuator key.
7:14
LED status indication (optional)
In the JSNY9M (magnetic lock) version, the mechanism
is only locked when the gate/hatch is closed i.e. the actuator key inserted and the solenoid (E1 E2) supplied with the
operating voltage. The gate/hatch can only be opened when
this operating voltage is removed.
Optional features
The following optional features are available:
s,%$ DISPLAY INDICATING THE STATUS OF THE ACTUATOR KEY
locking mechanism and contacts.
s!CTUATORTOOPERATEATSMALLERRADII
s#USTOMERSPECIlCAPPLICATIONS
Protection from unauthorised access
The JSNY9 is designed to protect against unauthorised
access; screwdrivers, magnets or similar tools cannot
operate the safety switch.
Safety level
In order to achieve a high safety level, the JSNY9 switch is
equipped with dual sets of contacts operated with a coded
actuator key . In order to meet the required installation safety
level it is recommended that the JSNY9 safety switch is
monitored by an appropriate JOKAB SAFETY safety relay.
To obtain the same level of safety as Eden, two switches
per gate are required.
Regulations and Standards
The JSNY9 is designed and approved in accordance with
appropriate directives and standards. Examples of such are
98/37/EC, EN ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1, EN 954-1/
EN ISO 13849-1, EN 1088, GS-ET 19, EN 60947-5-1.
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Technical data
Manufacturer
JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden
Article number/Ordering data:
20-036-01
20-036-12
20-036-21
20-036-32
Colour
Black
Enclosure/Cover
Polyamid PA6
Actuator
Steel & plastic (PA6)
Min. key operating radius
400 mm (smaller radius available on request)
Actuator holding force
1500 N
Operating temperature
- 25o C to + 70o C
Contacts
(actuator in)
Locking mechanism in locked position
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC (NC are direct opening action)
Mechanical life
1 million switch operations
Installation fixing
4 x M5
Cable entry
3 x M20 x 1.5
Weight
approx. 300 g
Enclosure Class
IP67
Operating voltage
24 V AC/DC
Isolation voltage
250 V
Thermal Current
2.5 A
Utilisation category
AC 15 230V / 4A
Short-circuit protection
Fuse 6 A slow acting
Power consumption
1.1 VA (56 VA during 0.2s)
JSNY9S 24VUC
JSNY9SLA 24VUC with LED
JSNY9M 24VUC
JSNY9MLA 24VUC with LED
2
3
4
5
NB.
The safety switch must not be
used as an end stop!
6
7
Rm
40
ø4,8
19,5
15
32-36
0
9,6
in:
22,4
20
15
5
9
37,5
45
51
21
50
ø14
3xM20
135
170
7,8
3
79,4
30
8
JSNY8/9N1
5,5
ø
124
20
ø5,3
5
81
9
30
42,5
32
2
5
JSNY8/9N2
184
Rmin: 150 mm
10
Contact description - JSNY9 S/M
Actuator travel
Actuator extracted
11
Contact open
Contact closed
JSNY9S
Actuator inserted
Locked position
(E1-E2 unpowered)
JSNY9M
Actuator inserted
Unlocked position
(E1-E2 unpowered)
JSNY9SLA/MLA
See separate data sheet
for switches with LED
indication.
www.jokabsafety.com
12
Actuator inserted
Fmin= 27 N ± 15%
7:15
13
Approval:
Magnetic lock
Not ready at time of print
Magne
Magne 2
For safety supervision the Magne 2
has an integrated Eden.
Magne 1
Magnetic lock with indication
Features:
The Magne 1 is a magnetic lock which has been adapted for
use in industrial applications and other harsh environments.
It can electrically lock and hold a door closed with up to
1500 Newtons of force and when power is turned off no
magnetic material will stick on the magnet surface.
Magne 1A can be used together with Eden door position
sensors providing protection from dangerous machine
movements. Magne 2 already has an Eden sensor built in.
Use of M12 connectors makes it easy to connect several
Magne units and Eden sensors in series enabling control
and monitoring by either a Pluto safety PLC or a Vital safety
module. Via the connection cable it is also possible to
obtain an indication signal informing if the Magne unit is
locked or not.
Accessories:
s -OUNTINGKITFORCONVENTIONALDOORWITHFITTINGAND
screws for assembly on Jokab safety Quick-Guard
fencing system (5-15mm door gap)
s 0LASTICHANDLE
s (ANDLEPROFILEFORMOUNTINGONAHINGEDDOORWITH*OKAB
Safety’s Quick-Guard fencing system (5-15 mm door gap).
Magne 1A with installation kit
(JSM D21B) and handle (incl. screw)
fitted on profile.
Product numbers: 42-022-00,
42-023-05 and 42-023-10
7:16
Application:
Electrical locking of doors and
hatches to production applications that are sensitive to unintentional/unnecessary interruptions.
Magne 2A with installation kit
(JSM D23) for sliding door fitted
on profile.
Product numbers: 42-022-10
and 42-023-02
www.jokabsafety.com
Robust construction
No moving parts
Strong Magnetic holding
force: 1500N
Can stand and operate in
harsh environments
Locked/unlocked indicationPossible to connect in series
with Eden sensors
No current peaks on activation
Magne 2 in combination with
a handle profile provides a
complete door solution
Handle profile that hides
Magne completely when
the door is closed.
Article no.: 42-023-01
Magne 2A with installation kit
(JSM D21B, JSM D24) and
handle (incl. screw) fitted on
profile.
Product numbers: 42-022-10
42-023-05, 42-023-03 and
42-023-10
1
Technical Data Magne
Manufacturer:
JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden
Article number/ordering data:
42-022-00 Magne 1A including anchor plate
42-022-10 Magne 2A including anchor plate and Eva
42-022-01 Magne 1B incl. anchor plate
42-022-12 Magne 2B incl. anchor plate and Eva
42-023-05 JSM D21B Anchor plate installation kit
42-023-01 Handle profile for Magne
42-023-02 JSM D23 Sliding door fittings
42-023-03 JSM D24 Installation kit for Eva
42-023-04 Anchor plate with permanent magnet
42-023-10 Handle for JSM D21B
Power supply:
Magnet: 24 VDC + 15% -20%
Eden: 17–27 VDC, ripple max 10 %
Power consumption:
Magnet: 7 W (300 mA at 24VDC)
Eden: 45–55 mA (see data for Eden)
Operating temp. range:
-20°C to +50°C
Protection class:
IP67
Weight:
Magne 1: 610 g
Magne 2: 700 g
Anchor: 290 g
Holding force:
24 VDC: Min 1500 N
0 VDC: 0 N (Magne 1A/2A)
0 VDC: 30 N (Magne 1B/2B)
Contacts:
Reed sensor (not safe)
Switch current max
100 mA
Mechanical life:
>107 switch operations
Connector:
M12 5-pole male connector (Magne 1)
M12 8-pole male connector (Magne 2)
Connections:
Magne 1:
(1) Brown Locking, +24 VDC
(2) White Sensor supply
(3) Blue 0 VDC
(4) Black NO-contact
(5) Grey NC-contact
Magne 2:
(1) White Dynamic signal input
(2) Brown +24V DC
(3) Green Locking +24V DC
(4) Yellow Locking 0V DC
(5) Grey Information closed (max. 10 mA)
(6) Pink Dynamic signal output
(7) Blue 0V DC
(8) Red Information locked (max. 100 mA)
2
Installation tolerance
3
4
Dimensions - anchor
5
6
Anchor plate for Magne 1B/2B
with permanent magnet
7
10 mm
Dimensions - cell rubber
8
Dimensions Magne 1
9
10
11
Dimensions Magne 2
12
www.jokabsafety.com
7:17
13
Holding force - Magne 1 and 2
Holding force / Hållkraft
1600
1400
1200
Newton
1000
800
600
400
200
0
0
5
10
15
20
Volt
Connection example - Magne 1 and 2
7:18
www.jokabsafety.com
25
30
35
1
Connection example - Magne 1 in series
2
3
4
5
6
7
Connection example - Magne 2 in series
8
9
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
7:19
13
Approval:
Process lock
Not ready at the time of printing
Dalton
Use:
Doors and hatches
Advantages:
Small and robust
Integrated with Eden
Flexible installation
High enclosure classification
– IP 67
Withstands severe environments
Low current consumption
Status information with LED on
the lock housing and in the cable
connection.
Dalton M12 Eden M122 for severe environments
Dalton – the intelligent process lock
Dalton is a locking unit that is intended for use in preventing
unnecessary process stoppages, i.e. it is not a safety lock. It
can be used either as a free-standing lock or integrated with
Eden as a safety sensor. In the unlocked state the door is
held closed by a ball catch and locked mechanically. If necessary, the holding force of the ball catch can be adjusted.
The unit only permits locking if the ball catch is secured and
when the Eva is in contact with the Adam (depending on
the variant). When an input is supplied with voltage, the ball
catch is locked.
Dalton is easily connected with an M12 connector. The
Tina junction block can also be used for distribution of
both the safety and locking functions. The Dalton status is
indicated by LEDs and can also be read by a PLC via the
information output.
Dalton with 5-pole
or 8-pole connector
7:20
Assembly
Dalton can be assembled with its opening in two directions.
In order to ensure that Dalton works without any problems,
the ball latch must be resting, i.e. not pressed in by the lock
tongue when the door is closed Dalton's brackets are therefore made to ensure the lock tongue and ball latch positions
can be adjusted.
Dalton Eden with
5-pole or 8-pole
connector to Dalton
www.jokabsafety.com
Dalton M121
Dalton M122
1
BW00314 - Example connection of Dalton to Vital 1
2
3
4
5
6
BW00196 - Dalton and Eden connected to Vital 1 or Pluto
7
8
9
10
11
Tina 12A junction block
Tina 12A can be used to connect two Daltons with Edens with a cable to the apparatus enclosure.
The summed information that indicates the states of both the Dalton and Eden also goes to the apparatus enclosure.
12
Transfer cables
A transfer cable can be used when the Dalton's 8-pole contact is to be connected to that of the Tina 4A, or
the Tina 8A's 5-pole M12 outlet. Note that the information from the Dalton and Adam cannot be
used.
www.jokabsafety.com
7:21
13
Technical data - Dalton
Manufacturer
Article number/
ordering data:
Dalton M111
Dalton M311
Dalton L001
Dalton M315
Dalton M113
JOKAB SAFETY AB
20-038-00 8-pole male plug
20-038-07 5-pole male plug,
locking pin 4
20-038-90 Only ball latch, no
electrical functions
20-038-10 5-pole male plug,
locking pin 4, small
mounting plate for
the tongue
20-038-04 8-pole male plug,
angle brackets for
Jokab enclosure
Dalton - Lock with securing plate for separately connected
Eden
Dalton M112
Dalton M312
Dalton L002
20-038-03 8-pole male plug
20-038-08 5-pole male plug,
locking pin 4
20-038-91 Only ball latch, no
electrical functions,
mounting plate also
for Eden
Resistance
Stainless steel
Good resistance to most acids,
except for hydrochloric and
sulphuric acids.
Connector to connect Dalton
(varies depending on type)
8-pole male plug, M12
5-pole male plug, M12
Outlet for externally connected
Adam female plug M12, 5-pole
Connections
Colour markings (pins)
Function
Dynamic input signal, Adam
+24 VDC
Lock signal
Not used
Information Adam
Dynamic output signal, Adam
0 VDC
Information Dalton
8-pole Colour
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
(White)
(Brown)
(Green)
(Yellow)
(Grey)
(Pink)
(Blue)
(Red)
5-pole Colour
1
4
2
(Brown)
(Black)
(White)
3
5
(Blue)
(Grey)
Warning
Dalton locks mechanically. If the lock is forced, the Dalton can be
permanently damaged.
Dalton - Lock with M12 connector for connection of separately
mounted Eden
Dalton M121
20-038-01 8-pole male plug
Dalton - Lock with integrated Eden
Dalton M122
20-038-02 8-pole male plug
Dalton M124
20-038-09 8-pole male plug,
5-pole female plug
for Adam, angle
brackets for Jokab
enclosure
Accessories
DA 1
7:22
20-053-00 Spacer 2.5 mm for
Adam and Eva.
M12-CT0214
20-060-01 Transfer cable 0.2
m M12 5-pole plug
8-pole female plug
Tina 12A
20-054-18 Distribution block for
two Dalton Edens
with 8-pole cables
Locking function
M - Locked when energised
L - Only ball latch
Colour
Black
Operating voltage
24 VDC +25/–20%
Current consumption
Unlocked
Locked
Lock input
Information output
40 mA
130 mA
5 mA
Max. 10 mA
Eden
See the data for Adam M12
Enclosure classification
IP67
Holding force
Unlocked
Locked
1Hz Eden or ball catch not in
position = open
1Hz Open, locking not permitted
25-100 Nm
2000 Nm
1Hz Lock has not entered the
locked state
Material
Ball catch, securing plate
Enclosure
Lock tongue, securing plate
Anodised aluminium
Anodised aluminium
Stainless steel
1Hz Undervoltage - locking not
permitted
1Hz Overvoltage
1Hz Overtemperature (> 80°C)
LED indication
=Red
=Green
=Paus
Information function
1 Locked
0 Closed but unlocked
0 Open
Alarm:
1Hz Lock has not entered the
unlocked state
www.jokabsafety.com
Dimensions drawing, Dalton M111,
Dalton M311, Dalton L001
(and Dalton M121)
1
Dimensions drawing, Dalton M124
2
3
4
Dimensions drawing, Dalton M122,
Dalton L002 and Dalton M112
Dimensions drawing, Dalton M315
5
6
7
8
Dimensions drawing, Dalton M113
9
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
7:23
13
Approval:
Safety lock
Under review
Knox
Application:
Locking doors to cells/lines
with long stop times.
When you need a robust
lock
Knox for secure locking
Advantages:
Double locking function as
specified in PL e/cat. 4 (EN
ISO 13849-1)
Withstands harsh
environments
Status information with LEDs
on lock housing and at cable
connection.
Knox - Double safety lock as specified in PL e/cat. 4
Knox is a double lock that complies with the highest safety level (two lock cylinders
with monitored positions) that can be used both as a safety and process lock.
The locking function is electronically controlled and is bi-stable, i.e. it retains its
position (unlocked/locked) in the event of a power failure.
The handles operate as they would on a normal door apart from the exterior
handle also having a reset function, and an interior handle that can be used for
emergency opening. Its design and durability mean that it is ideal for harsh environments as the sensors in the lock are non-contact and the lock is manufactured
of stainless steel.
Open
7:24
Emergency opened
Reset,
openable
www.jokabsafety.com
Controlled to locked and
unlocked positions - remain
locked/unlocked in the event
of power failure.
Electronic connection only on
the door frame
Operational mode
locked and reset
(emergency opening
only)
Technical data – Knox
Make
JOKAB SAFETY AB
LED indicator
=Red
Product number/
ordering data:
Knox lock cylinder right hung
Knox lock cylinder left hung
Knox frame section
Accessories
Tina 12A
Lock function
Operating voltage
Power consumption
Electronics
Lock/lock inverse
Total max
Information output
Insulation class
Holding strength
Unlocked
Locked
Connection
Colour marking (pin)
Function
Dynamic input signal
+24 VDC
Lock
Lock inverse
Information Locked
Dynamic output signal
0 VDC
Information reset
1
LED indicator – Knox
=Green
=Paus
Function
LED 1
20-105-00
20-105-01
20-105-20
2
Locked (and reset)
Locked, no dynamic signal in
Unlocked
20-054-18 Distribution block for
two Knox
S/M - unlocked and locked with
voltage.
LED 2
Reset
Not reset
3
Dirt indicator reset sensor
Alarm LED 2
24 VDC +/- 15%
Reset
Not reset
70 mA (in locked position)
135 mA (when locking/unlocking)
150 mA
Max. 10 mA
4
IP65
5
5000 N
(10,000 N ultimate breaking
strength)
5000 N
(10,000 N ultimate breaking
strength)
100 ±3
Male plug M12, 8-pole
8-pole
Colour
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
(White)
(Brown)
(Green)
(Yellow)
(Grey)
(Pink)
(Blue)
(Red)
6
228
124
7
Warning
Knox locks mechanically. Forcing the lock may damage Knox permanently.
8
10 ±7,50
9
58
40
110
10
256
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
7:25
13
Connection example - Knox
Connection example - Knox and Pluto
7:26
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Connection example - Knox with other unlocking
2
3
4
5
6
7
Connection example - Knox with downtime monitor
8
9
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
7:27
13
Control devices
www.jokabsafety.com
Contents
Page
1
Why should control devices be used? __________________________________8:2
Three-position devices - JSHD4 _______________________________________8:4
s Highest safety level ____________________________________________________8:5
s Versions and possibilities ________________________________________________8:6
s Technical data ________________________________________________________8:8
s Connection examples __________________________________________________8:9
Unique world-wide two-hand device - Safeball ________________________
s Technical data ______________________________________________________
s Connection examples ________________________________________________
s4WOHANDCONTROLDESK*34$WITH3AFEBALL _______________________________
8:10
8:11
8:13
8:14
2
3
4
Two hand device - JSTD20 _________________________________________ 8:18
s Technical data ______________________________________________________ 8:19
s Connection examples ________________________________________________ 8:19
5
Safety foot-operated switch - Fox ____________________________________ 8:20
s Technical data ______________________________________________________ 8:22
s Connection examples ________________________________________________ 8:23
6
7
8
9
10
11
While every effort has been taken to ensure the accuracy of information contained in this book and any associated promotional and information material
JOKAB SAFETY cannot accept responsibility for errors or omissions and reserves the right to make any improvements without notice. It is the users
responsibility to ensure that this equipment is correctly designed, specified, installed, cared for and operated to meet all applicable local, national and
international codes/regulations. Technical data in our book is correct to the level of accuracy of Jokab Safety´s test procedures as verified by various
international approved bodies. Other information (such as application examples, wiring diagrams, operation or use) is intended solely to illustrate
the various uses of our products. JOKAB SAFETY does not guarentee or imply that the product when used in accordance with such examples in
a particular environment will fulfil any particular safety requirement and does not assume any responsibility or liability for actual use of the product
based on the examples given. 2008 v02.
www.jokabsafety.com
8:1
12
13
Control devices
7HYSHOULD#ONTROL$EVICESBEUSED
..for the machine operator to be able to directly start
and stop dangerous machine movement.
Three-position device
Three-position devices, hold-to-run devices and enabling
devices are used during trouble-shooting, programming and
test running when no other safety components are possible
or suitable. The device is held in the hand and the operator
can in an emergency situation either press harder or entirely
release the device to stop the machine.
In an emergency situation the operator can either
press harder or release the three-position device
to stop the machine.
§
From Directive 98/37/EC, 1.2.5
If, for certain operations, the machinery must be able
to operate with its protection devices neutralized, the
mode selector must simultaneously:
...
- permit movements only by controls requiring sustained action,
...
Ergonomic three-position device, JSHD4
with double three-position button that gives a stop signal
when released or fully pressed in.
8:2
www.jokabsafety.com
1
The two-hand device protects against "after-grasp";
if the operator by reflex tries to enter or reach into a
machine during the dangerous machine movement.
2
Two-channel all the way out to the hand
Safeball is an ergonomic two-hand control device with
four built-in buttons.
3
Two-hand control device
A two-hand control device is used when it must the guaranteed that the operator's hands will be kept outside the risk
area. If there is a risk that someone else other than the operator can reach into the machine without the operator seeing
it, the safety device must be supplemented by something
more, e.g. a light beam.
To be able to operate the machine with the two-hand device, all the buttons on the device have to be operated within
SECONDSOFEACHOTHER4HISISCALLEDCONCURRENCE!LL
the buttons also have to be returned to their initial position
before one can start again. If any button is released during
the machine movement the machine will be stopped. Using
the stopping time one can calculate the necessary safety
distance. A safety distance of less than 100 mm must not
be used.
The highest safety level is assured by connecting the
buttons of the two-hand device to a safety relay. The safety
relay checks for concurrence and that all the buttons have
returned to their initial position before a new start can be
made. The safety relay also gives a stop signal if any of the
buttons are released.
§
4
From Directive 98/37/EC, 1.3.8
Guards or protection devices designed to protect exposed persons against the risks associated with moving
parts contributing to the work (such as cutting
tools, moving parts of presses, cylinders, parts in the
process of being machined, etc.) must be:
...
- otherwise, movable guards complying with requirements 1.4.1 and 1.4.2.2.B or protection devices such
as sensing devices (e.g. nonmaterial barriers, sensor
mats), remote-hold protection devices (e.g. two-hand
controls), or protection devices intended automatically to prevent all or part of the operator’s device from
encroaching on the danger zone in accordance with
requirements 1.4.1 and 1.4.3.
...
5
6
7
8
The foot operated switch is used when the operator has to hold the material with both hands during
processing.
9
10
Safety foot operated
switch with three-position
function.
§
11
Foot operated switches
A foot operated switch is used when the operator has to
hold the material during processing. The pedal must have a
safety cover to prevent unintentional start. For seated work
one must also have a foot support to facilitate the operator
holding his foot in the pedal´s off position.
The highest safety level is secured by monitoring the pedal
with a safety relay.
From EN 693 Machine tools - Safety - Hydraulic
presses
5.4.6.1 Push button, foot switch and start control devices shall be adequately shrouded to prevent accidental
operation. Foot switches shall permit access from one
direction only and by one foot only.
www.jokabsafety.com
8:3
12
13
Three-position
device the safest solution
during trouble shooting,
programming and testing
Why three-positions?
An operator who is under pressure must be able to give a
stop signal, whether in panic he/she pushes harder on the
button or just lets go of it.
Three-position devices, hold-in and acceptance devices
can be used for trouble shooting, programming and test
running in situations where no other protection is available
or feasible.
If the operator has to enter a risk area to trouble shoot or run
a test, it is extremely important that he/she is able to stop the
machinery without having to rely on someone else to stand
by a stop button that is further away. In addition, no-one else
should be able to start the machinery from the outside after
it has been stopped by use of the three-position device.
Hold to run device or Acceptance device, what is the
difference?
Hold to run device: The start signal is given when the button is pressed. The stop signal is given when the button is
released or pushed fully in.
Acceptance device: The start signal for separate starting is given when the button is pressed. The stop signal is
given when the button is released or pushed fully in. “Separate start” means, for example, that a program start signal
is sent to the robot via a separate button in the acceptance
device.
Use:
Troubleshooting
Test running
Programming
Advantages:
Ergonomic
,%$INFORMATION
Adaptable
2EDANDGREEN,%$S
Front and top buttons with
selectable functions.
Duplicated three-position
button that provides a
stop signal when it is released or pressed fully in.
The three-position device is designed to be ergonomic
The device is ergonomic, both in respect of its shape, fitting to the hand, and the way the buttons are operated. It
is easy to operate the three-position device using just the
fingers, and the middle position provides a secure resting
POSITION4HEDEVICEHAS,%$INDICATIONSTHATSHOWTHEOPerational status, i.e. stop or ready signal. The two additional
buttons can be used, for example, for start/stop, up/down
or forward/back. Internally the device is duplicated. The
three-position function itself is built up of two completely
independent three-position buttons which are felt by the
user to be one button.
Three-position devices in different versions
8:4
Approvals:
www.jokabsafety.com
fety.com
RT9 safety relay that monitors
the duplicated three-position buttons
and wiring.
1
Highest safety level
whether the button is pushed or released 2
3
4
When the three-position button is released you will obtain a dual
stop. It is essential that the machine stops when you put aside the
three-position device, for example during adjustment.
When the three position button is pushed all the way in you will
obtain a dual stop. It is essential that the machine stops in an
emergency situation.
6
How does a a three-position device work?
Safety level
A safe Enabling or Hold to Run device should function
as follows:
1. The Stop signal in released (top) and bottom position
shall have the same safety level.
2. Provide a ‘Start’ or ‘Ready’ signal in a distinct middle
position.
3. After a ‘Stop’ in the bottom position, a ‘Start’ signal or
‘Ready’ signal is not permitted until the three position
push-buttons have been totally released and again
pressed to the middle position.
This function is achieved mechanically within the three
position push-buttons in the device.
4. A Short or Open circuit in the connection cables
shall not lead to a dangerous function e.g. ‘Start’ or
‘Ready’ signal.
In order to meet the above conditions, the three-position
switch must be connected to a suitable safety relay with
a two channel function, e.g. RT6, RT9 or JSBT4, which
can monitor that both three-position buttons are working
and that there is no short or open circuit in the connection cable or the switch.
5
Released position
7
8
Middle position
Bottom position
9
Regulations and standards
4HE *3($ IS DESIGNED AND APPROVED IN ACCORDANCE
with appropriate directives and standards. Examples of
the applicable regulations and standards are: 98/37/EC,
%.)3/%.%.)3/
10
11
12
Three-position device fitted to a
machine control unit.
www.jokabsafety.com
Panel assembly of JSHD4H2 on a
programming unit for robots.
8:5
13
Three-position
device
versions and possibilities
Top button
4HE*3($THREEPOSITIONDEVICEISREADILYAVAILABLEIN
many standard versions. It is also possible to customize
the three-position device for specific applications.
The three-position device can be customized by the
selection of the following parts:
s Front button - for programme start, low speed, etc.
s Top button - for programme stop, grip devices, etc.
s Bottom plate - wide bottom plate for fixing
interlocking devices and Eden (non-contact sensor)
or narrow bottom plate for more flexible handling.
Cable, straight or spiral cable with connectors or
assembled on the device
s LEDs, alternative connections
s Designed to work with a PLC or a safety relay
Bottom plates
Connections
Cables
8:6
www.jokabsafety.com
Front button
1
Dimensions
JSHD4
63
2
3
160
173
Three-position push button JSHD2C
The button is the main component in a safe three-position
solution. To achieve the highest safety level two buttons are
used in a two-channel system.
4
-8
5
Panel assembly JSHD4H2
A panel assembly suitable for building into programming units
or similar control boxes. Provides simultanous activation of
both of the three-position buttons.
6
40
ø2,8
17.3
8
18
12
21
60
22
JSHD4H2
External assembly JSHD4H2A
The external assembly is similar to the panel assembly unit,
although it is a ‘handle’ design making it suitable for assembly
on the outside of a control box.
7
(2x)
14.3
3.4
20.7
16
1.4
JSHD2C
62
10.3
mm
9
mm
80
JSHD4H2A
10
-
34
11
Upgrading kit JSHD4S2
This kit is used to upgrade `older robot´ control systems
and will, together with a suitable safety relay, achieve a safe
two-channel three-position function.
www.jokabsafety.com
mm
39
12
106
8:7
13
Technical data - JSHD4
JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden
Manufacturer
Pin
Color STD
A
White
Color JSHK-S
White
B
Brown
Brown
Electrical contact ratings
Three-position button:
Extra button:
6$#MAX!MINM!6
6!#$#MAX!
C
Green
Green
D
Yellow
Yellow
Protection class
)0
E
Grey
-
Operating temperature
TO²#
F
Pink
Grey
G
Blue
Pink
{9ES|GREEN,%$
{.O|RED,%$
H
Red
Blue
I
Black
Red
Material
Polyamide 6.6
J
Purple
-
Insulation resistance
min 20 M Ohm
K
-
-
Operation force
APPROX.
L
-
-
Mechanical life
1 000 000 cycles to middle position
STD: JSHK, JSHK-E, JSHK-T
Function indication
Three-position buttons ready signal:
Ordering data/Article numbers
Article numbers
Description
Standard versions
*3($4HREEPOSITIONDEVICEWITHEXTRABUTTONSTOPFRONT
*3($$4HREEPOSITIONDEVICEWITHEXTRABUTTONFRONT
*3($%4HREEPOSITIONDEVICEWITHEXTRABUTTONTOP
*3($&4HREEPOSITIONDEVICEWITHOUTEXTRABUTTONS
*3($8.4HREEPOSITIONDEVICEFORHARSHENVIRONMENTS
*3($-54HREEPOSITIONDEVICEFOR%DEN
*3($&!4HREEPOSITIONDEVICEFOR0,#WITHSPIRALCABLE
*3($0$4HREEPOSITIONDEVICEWITHPOTENTIOMETER
*3($(!4HREEPOSITIONDEVICEFOREXTERNALPANELASSEMBLY
*3($34HREEPOSITIONDEVICE!""UPGRADINGKIT
*3($(4HREEPOSITIONDEVICEFORINTERNALPANELASSEMBLY
*3($#TYPE%4HREEPOSITIONBUTTON
*3($#TYPE+4HREEPOSITIONBUTTON
JSHK0 12 pole
connector for JSHD4.
Spiral cable, available in
different lengths.
Accessories
20-003-03
JSHK0 12 pole connector
*3(+-ETRECABLEANDCONNECTOR
20-003-01
JSHK10 10 Metre cable and connector
*3(+-ETRECABLEANDCONNECTOR
20-003-04
JSHK20 20 Metre cable and connector
*3(+-ETRECABLEANDCONNECTOR
20-003-30
*3(+%METREEXTENSIONCABLE
JSHK-T1 Cable drum
20-003-20
20-003-21
20-003-22
20-003-23
20-003-24
20-003-26
JSHK16S 1.6 Metre spiral cable and connector
JSHK20S 2.0 Metre spiral cable and connector
JSHK28S 2.8 Metre spiral cable and connector
JSHK32S 3.2 Metre spiral cable and connector
JSHK40S 4.0 Metre spiral cable and connector
*3(+3-ETRESPIRALCABLEANDCONNECTOR
JSHK80S 8.0 Metre spiral cable and connector
*3-!7ALLBRACKETFORINTERLOCKSWITCHESAND
three-position device
*3-!7ALLBRACKETFOR!DAM
*3-7ALLBRACKETFORTHREEPOSITIONDEVICE
Cable, available in
different lengths.
Cable drum
JSM5A Wall bracket for
interlock switches and
three-position device.
NOTE! Contact us for other variants.
8:8
www.jokabsafety.com
JSM52A Wall bracket
for three-position device.
1
Connection example - Three-position device JSHD4 to Pluto
2
3
4
5
S3
Time-limited entrance/exit
!FTERLIFTINGTHETHREEPOSITIONDEVICEOUTOFITSHOLDER*3-!THEINTERLOCKEDGATECANBEPASSEDFORENTRANCE
into the risk area within x sec. The time limit is set in the Pluto program.
6
7
Connection examples - Three-position device JSHD4 with various safety modules
8
9
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
8:9
13
Approvals:
One and two hand devices
Safeball™
Safeball for:
Presses
Punches
Fixtures
Shearing machines
Features:
Two hand device
One hand device
Ergonomic
Low activation force
Flexible mounting
Several grip possibilities
Highest safety level
Two channel switching in each
hand
SAFEBALL™
Unique World Wide Two hand device
A two hand device which is
comfortable and easy to use.
Safeball™ consists of a spherical ball containing two embedded pushbutton switches, one on each side of the ball. By
using this pushbutton configuration, the risk of unintentional
activation is minimised and the device is simple and ergonomic to use.
Safeball™ can be utilised for either One hand (one Safeball™) or Two hand (two Safeballs™) applications. In either
application, and in order to meet the required level of safety,
the Safeball™ switches are monitored by specified/certified
JOKAB SAFETY Safety relays (see electrical connection).
In the case where Two hand control is used, both Safeballs™ i.e. all four pushbuttons have to be activated within
SECONDS)FONEORMOREPUSHBUTTONSARERELEASEDA3TOP
signal is given to the machine. In order to provide the highest
level of safety the Safeball™ design provides the operator
with a dual switching function and short-circuit supervision
in each hand.
Each Safeball™ is ergonomically designed and has both
its cover and actuator made of environmentally-friendly
polypropylene. The design allows for comfort of use for all
hand sizes and operation from numerous gripping positions.
Mounting of the Safeball™ is also very flexible allowing the
device to be mounted in the most ergonomic position for
the operator.
8:10
When can a Two hand or One hand control be used ?
A Two hand control can be used when it is necessary to
ensure that the operator is outside and must be prevented
from reaching into the hazardous area. If the operator decides, after the start signal has been given to the machine,
to make an ‘after-grasp’ i.e. try to adjust the part that has
been placed into the machine, then a dual stop signal is
given to the machine.
A one hand control device can be used when the operator
cannot reach the hazardous area with his/her free hand or
on less dangerous machines.
Highest Safety Level
4HE3AFEBALL»ISCERTIlEDBY$.6 (Inspecta) in Sweden for
use as a Two hand control device, when used with a JSBR4
JOKAB SAFETY Safety relay or Pluto Safety-PLC, in accordANCEWITHTHEHIGHESTSAFETYLEVELINSTANDARD%.TYPE
)))CAND%.%.)3/SAFETYCATEGORY
www.jokabsafety.com
A top cover is not needed as activation switches
are fitted on each side of the Safeball™.
Technical data - Safeball
Manufacturer:
JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden
Article number/Ordering data:
*34$!3AFEBALLWITHM
cable
*34$"3AFEBALLWITHM
cable
*34$#3AFEBALLWITHM
cable
*34$%3AFEBALL././
0,2 m cable
Material:
Polypropylene
Colour:
Yellow and black
Size:
Height: approx. 71 mm,
$IAMETERMINMM
$IAMETERMAXMM
$IAMETERBASEMM
2
3
23
Weight:
0.2 kg with 2 m cable
0.7 kg with 10 m cable
0.1 kg with 4x0.2 m wires
Temperature:
²#TO²#OPERATING
²#TO²#STORAGE
Protection class:
IP67. Not intended for use under water
Operating force:
Approx. 2 N
Actuator travel:
1.3 +/- 0.6 mm
Max switching load:
6!$#RESISTIVELOAD
Recommended load:
6M!$#
Min switching load:
6M!$#RESISTIVELOAD
Contact resistance:
100 mohm
Life, mechanical:
> 1x106 operations at max. 1 Hz
Life, electrical:
$EPENDANTUPONELECTRICALLOAD
characteristics
Connection cable:
*34$!
*34$"*34$%
*34$#
68
71
1
72
23
ŒX
mm
4
Chemical resistance at 20°C.
Chemical
Alcohols
Paraffin oil
Milk
Silicon oil
Acetone
Resistance
good
good
good
good
good
5
Please contact us for more information.
6
M06#CABLEXMM
XMM2 wires, approx. 0.2 m
M06#CABLEXMM2
2
Function - Safeball
Two hand control device
The Two hand control device is implemented by using
two Safeballs™, each having two internal pushbuttons.
The Safe-balls™ must be mounted a minimum distance
between each other (see Mounting description).
By utilising two pushbuttons in each device a double
safety function is provided in each hand.
The highest safety level is achieved by connecting all
four pushbuttons to the JOKAB SAFETY JSBR4 safety
relay or Pluto Safety-PLC. The safety relay gives a dual and
supervised safety function and requires input activation
WITHINSECONDSINORDERTOSTARTTHEMACHINE)TALSO
checks that all four pushbuttons have returned to their
deactivated positions before a new start is allowed. The
JSBR4 safety relay also provides a stop signal if one or
more pushbuttons are released.
One hand control device
Safeball™ is also a very practical method of providing a one
hand control device as it is very easy to find and activate
by the machine operator. One hand devices should only be
used when the operator cannot reach into the hazardous
area with his/her free hand or on less dangerous machines.
Before fitting the necessary risk assessment must be made
to determine suitability of this type of control. To achieve
the highest safety level for One hand control the Safeball™
must be connected to a JOKAB SAFETY safety relay (See
Electrical Connection).
7
Versions
Safeball is available in several versions to meet different
mounting requirements.
s JSTD1-A - The standard version with actuators made of
plastic and 2 m of cable.
s J STD1-B - Similar to the standard version but without a
cable. Instead it has four wires, each 0.2 m long.
s JSTD1-C3IMILARTO*34$!BUTWITHMCABLE
s JSTD1-E3IMILARTO*34$"BUTWITH./CONTACTS
8
9
10
Activation of a
pushbutton.
11
12
3AFEBALL»*34$ISCERTIlEDBY$.6
Approval number:
01-MAL-CM-0101 (Two-hand device)
01-MAL-CM-0100 (One-hand device)
www.jokabsafety.com
8:11
13
Mounting - Safeball
The Safeballs™ can be mounted in many different ways.
They can be mounted on a table, a machine, on a support
or wherever suitable for ergonomic reasons. The Safeball™
can be mounted in a fixed position or on a tilting and/or
rotating support. This flexibility of mounting permits the
Safeball™ to be fitted in the best ergonomic position
for the ease of operation by the operator. The distance
requirement between two Safeballs™ or between a Safeball™ and a wall or edge of a table depends on how the
Safeball™ is mounted. Safeball™ can be mounted with
FOUR-SCREWSOR34SELFTAPPINGSCREWS
Alternative mounting methods
Mounting on a table.
Note: When Safeballs™ are mounted in such a way that
the distance between them can be adjusted to less than
the specified minimum, the mounting screws must be
locked to ensure any changes in the distance between
the two balls cannot be made.
Example of alternative
mounting.
Mounting with ball joint,
which can be rotated and
angled.
Approved Two hand device
To be an approved Two hand device, both Safeballs™ must be mounted a minimum distance apart in order to prevent
operation of both balls with one hand. Safeballs™ must be fitted a minimum distance from the edges of tables or
a wall. It is essential that Safeballs™ are correctly installed in order to prevent unintended activation of the devices
with part of the body in combination for example with a wall.
Mounting distance -Safety distance - Safeball
Mounting distance
Table mounting of two Safeballs™.
In order to prevent cheating the distances shown are the minimum allowed.
120
mm
180
Safety distance
The Safety distance is the distance between the Safeballs™ and the dangerous machine movement. The
safety distance requirement can be calculated using
the following formula for Safeball™ in accordance with
the approving authority and EN 999: S= KxT+C
Where
S= safety distance in mm
K= hand speed, 1600 mm/s
T= total stopping time for the dangerous movement
(including the response time of the safety relays
in seconds)
C= Constant= 0 mm for Safeball.
8:12
120
S
The safety distance is the distance between the
Safeballs™ and the dangerous machine movement.
Note: S must never be less than 100 mm.
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Electrical connection - Safeball
Two hand device
Safeballs™ are designed to be connected to a Jokab Safety JSBR4 Safety relay or Safety PLC to achieve the highest safety
requirements for a Two hand device.
2
Example of two devices connected to a Jokab Safety
JSBR4 safety relay. Response time on receiving a stop
SIGNALFROM*34$MS
blue
grey
black
red
blue
grey
black
red
3
4
5
6
7
One hand device
When used as a One hand device the Safeball™ is designed to be connected to a Jokab Safety RT6, RT7 or RT9 Safety relay in order
to achieve the highest possible safety level for this type of control.
8
Example of a single Safeball™ connected to a Jokab Safety relay RT9.
[email protected]
9
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
8:13
13
Two hand control station
JSTD25
with Safeball
With a JSTD25 two hand control station you have a prepared two hand unit that is easy to install, while utilising the
good ergonomics of the Safeball. There are several variants to meet differing needs. All versions meet EN 574, EN
954-1 and EN 13849-1 and are supplied with the internal connections made, to simplify installation.
JSTD25 for fixed installation
*34$ !% 4WO 3AFEBALLS MOUNTED ON A STEEL HOUSING
Replaces a traditional two hand device. Is available with
an emergency stop button and ball joint fixtures for the
Safeballs. Three 22 mm openings are prepared on the top
for buttons or signal lamps. Hatch for wiring routeing in the
base, securing holes for mounting on the rear. The Safeballs
are connected to terminal blocks, for the user to connect
the external wiring through one of the two inlet alternatives
(underneath or at the rear).
JSTD25A!RTICLENO4WOHANDCONTROLstation
with 2 Safeballs.
JSTD25D!RTICLENO4WOHANDCONTROLstation
WITH3AFEBALLS*3-#
JSTD25B!RTICLENO4WOHANDCONTROLstation
with 2 Safeballs and emergency stop button.
8:14
JSTD25E!RTICLENO4WOHANDCONTROLstation
WITH3AFEBALLS*3-#ANDEMERGENCYSTOPBUTTON
www.jokabsafety.com
1
For mobile installation
2
*34$&!RTICLENO4WOHANDCONTROLUNITWITH
2 Safeballs.Two Safeballs mounted on the ends of an aluminium profile, shielded by over hand guards. Replaces a
traditional two hand device. Installed with the aid of grooves
in the aluminium profile. Connection to an M12 connector
underneath. Can be equipped with an external emergency
STOP 3-),% AND AN %$%. SENSOR FOR POSITION CONTROL
Its low weight makes this particularly suitable for frequent
repositioning.
JSTD25G Article no. 20-007-62 3IMILARTO*34$&BUTTHE
dimensions additional equipment and type of connection
can, to a large extent, be customised before delivery. Can
also be equipped with doubled protection plates for use in
particularly severe conditions.
3
4
5
For mobile installation with a built-in Eden sensor
6
7
JSTD25P-1!RTICLENO4WOHANDCONTROLUNIT
portable. Two Safeballs mounted on the ends of an aluminium
profile, shielded by over hand guards. With built-in Eva senSORFORPOSITIONCONTROL$EVELOPEDASAPORTABLETWOHAND
device, where the response of the machine to operation
can vary at different operating stations, since each station
can be connected separately. Connection via an 8+1 Zylin
connector. Accessories are a connector, spiral cable with
connector and suspension shelf.
9
Accessories - JSTD25
JSTS31 Article no. 20-007-41
3TANDWITHSPACERRINGFOR*34$!%
(JSTS30 without spacer ring).
8
JSM C5 Article no. 20-007-09
Angled ball joint for installation
of a Safeball on a table or a steel
housing.
JSTK40S
Article no. 20-007-67
MLONGSPIRALCABLEFOR*34$0
10
JSTK80S
Article no. 20-007-68
MLONGSPIRALCABLEFOR*34$0
11
Height
MM
ø43
32
12
23
23
www.jokabsafety.com
8:15
13
Connection example - JSTD25/A/B/D/E
Connection example - JSTD25F
Connection example - JSTD25H
8:16
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Connection example - JSTD25P-1
2
3
4
Dimension sketch - JSTD25
5
90.5 ±0.5
129 ±2
95
370 ±1
6
M12, 5-pole male
220±0.5
4
356 ±2
7
8
9
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
8:17
13
Approvals
Two hand device
JSTD20
JSTD20 for:
Presses
Punching machines
Cutting machines
Fixtures
Features:
$URABLEMATERIAL
With or without emergency
stop pushbutton
&ULlLSREQUIREMENTSOF%.
Highest level of safety
Conventional Two hand device
4HECONVENTIONAL*34$4WOHANDDEVICEUTILISESAWELDED
steel housing. Two operating pushbuttons are protected
by over hand guards. Between these pushbuttons there is
space for a emergency pushbutton and two extra controls
or indication lamps. Below each of the operating pushbuttons is one normally open and one normally closed contact.
To start and run the machine both pushbuttons must be
ACTIVATED WITHIN SECONDS )F ONE OR BOTH PUSHBUTTONS
are released a stop signal is given to the machine, and all
contacts must return to their deactivated positions before a
new start is allowed.
The design is robust and can withstand harsh environments
and long use. The pushbuttons and contact blocks are simple
to assemble for quick and easy installation. The device can
be mounted directly on the machine, on the Jokab Safety
fencing system or on the JSTS30 floor mount. For use with
portable Two hand devices the JSTS31 floor mount, which
is provided with a spacer ring to fulfil the requirements of
%.ISRECOMMENDED4HE*34$ISAVAILABLEWITHOR
without an emergency stop pushbutton.
Highest level of safety
Correct connection to a Jokab Safety JSBR4 safety relay or
Pluto Safety PLC ensures the highest level of safety with dual
and supervised safety function and requires input activation
8:18
OFBOTHOPERATINGPUSHBUTTONSWITHINSECONDSTWOHAND
DEVICETYPE)))#INACCORDANCEWITH%.ANDCATEGORY
INACCORDANCEWITH%.%.)3/)FTHEEMERgency pushbutton is installed it should be provided with two
normally closed contacts and be connected to a separate
safety relay, e.g. from the RT series or Pluto.
Why use a Two hand device?
A two hand device can be used when it is necessary to
ensure that the operator is outside and must be prevented
from reaching into the hazardous area. If the operator decides, after the start signal has been given to the machine,
to make an ’after grasp’ i.e. try to adjust the part that has
been placed inside the machine, then a dual stop signal is
given to the machine.
4HENEW*34$ISEQUIPPEDWITHANEWTYPEOFLARGE
OVERHANDGUARDSINACCORDANCEWITH%.4HESEPREVENT
unintended activation by for instance a knee or elbow.
A Two hand device only protects the operator using it. Large
machines operated by several operators can be equipped
with one control for each operator.
To calculate the correct safety distance, which depends
on the machine’s stopping time including the response time
of the relay, the use of the JOKAB SAFETY Smart Stopping
analyser is recommended.
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Technical data - JSTD20
Manufacturer
JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden
Article number/
ordering number
20-007-20
20-007-21
20-007-22
Weight
JSTD20: 6.4 Kg
JSTS30: 20 Kg
JSTS31: 23 Kg
Colour
Black housing, Black pushbuttons,
Black floor stand.
Temperature
-10°C…+70°C (Operating)
-20°C to +70°C (storage)
Material
Housing: 3mm Steel
Gasket: Rubber
Pushbuttons: Plastic
Operating pushbuttons
Diameter
Operating force
Operating distance
Mechanical life
Emergency pushbutton
(JSTD20B only)
Diameter
Operating force
Mechanical life
Contacts
mm
JSTD20A
JSTD20B
JSTD20C
5
14
170
2
3
490
60 mm
Approx. 9N
3.5±1mm
106 operations
4
40 mm
40N
3 x 105 operations
Mechanically separated contact
blocks
Operating pushbuttons
1 NO + 1 NC
Emergency pushbuttons
2 x NC
Isolation voltage
690V rms
Contact resistance
20 mohm
Rated current
10A
Utilisation categories
AC 15 240V 3A
DC 13 240V 0.27A
Cabling
screw clamp terminals, 1 or 2 wires
with max. cross-section 2.5 mm2.
Contact material
silver alloy on brass
Protection class:
IP 65
Standards
EN 418, EN 574, EN 954-1,
EN ISO 13849, EN 60947-1,
EN 60947-5-1, EN 999
5
6
7
Connection example - JSTD20
The Two hand device is intended for use with Jokab Safety’s JSBR4 safety relay (or Pluto Safety PLC ) to ensure the
highest level of safety. The JSBR4 ensures that all contacts have returned to their deactivated positions before a new
start is allowed. The safety relay also requires that all contacts are activated within 0.5 seconds. The JSBR4 gives a
stop signal if one or both of the pushbuttons are released.
JSTD20A Two hand device without
emergency stop
JSTD20B Two hand device with
emergency stop
8
9
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
8:19
13
Safety foot operated switch
Approvals:
Fox
Foot operated switch for:
Presses
Rolls
Bending machines
Machine adjustment, etc.
Features:
Control device that frees the
hands
Three-position pedal
High safety level
Robust
Fox – a safety foot operated switch
which provides extra safety for the
operator
The Fox safety foot operated switch is used when the operator has to have both hands free. Fox is very safe because
of its unique three-position function, duplicated contacts
and robust safety cover. Fox has been developed for industrial applications i.e. it has high mechanical durability. Fox is
used for presses, bending machines, during adjustment of
machinery, etc. Fox is available in single and double pedal
versions (the double pedal is used for such tasks as steering
back and forth).
Three-position function, Fox 31/32
A safe three-position foot operated device means that:
1. Stop signals are provided in the top and bottom positions.
2. Start/ready signals for separate starting are provided in
a distinct middle position.
3. After a stop in the bottom position a start or clear signal
cannot be given before the reset knob has been operated
and then the pedal pushed into its middle position.
8:20
Two-position function, Fox 21/22
A two-position foot operated device means that:
1. A stop signal is provided in the top, or pedal released,
position.
2. A start/ready signal for separate starting is given in the
bottom, or fully depressed, position
Safety cover protects against unintentional actuation
A robust metal safety cover prevents unintentional machine
start by a person or falling objects, thereby fulfilling the
standards which demand this. The robust aluminium safety
cover can withstand harsh environments.
Safety level
A high safety level is secured by monitoring the pedal´s
double contacts with one of our safety relays (see "Connection examples"). Furthermore the third 'emergency' position of the Fox 31/32 pedal enhances safety.
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Pedal function - Fox 31/32
1. The Pedal (A) is in its initial position. The contacts are
open and the machine is stopped.
(A) Pedal (B) Contact point
(C) Lockout Reset knob
2. The contacts are closed when the pedal (A) is pressed
down until the distinct contact point (B) is reached, and the
machine starts.
2
3. If the operator in an emergency situation presses the
pedal to the bottom, a stop signal is immediately sent to the
machine (the contacts open). The switch is mechanically
locked in this position and it has to be reset before a new
start can be made.
3
4. Reset: The contacts will only be disengaged after the
knob (C) is reset and the pedal is returned to its initial position (A).
4
Versions - Fox
5
Fox 31
Pedal with three-position
execution and reset knob.
Fox 21
Pedal with two-position
execution.
6
Note. Also available as a double pedal, Fox 22
7
Fox 32
Double pedal with threeposition execution and reset
knobs.
8
Technical data - all versions of Fox
Manufacturer
JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden
Ordering data/
Article number
Fox 21
Fox 22
Fox 31
Fox 32
20-160-21
20-160-22
20-160-01
20-160-02
Colour
Yellow and black
Rated insulating voltage Ui
690 V
Connection cable cross sections
1-4 mm²
single resp. multi-strand
Fine wire with core end bush
(DIN 46228)
MM¶
Terminal screws
M4
Short circuit protection, fusible
!MAX
cut-out (gL)
Insulation requirements met
up to
Switching capacity AC-15:
Degree of protection as per
EN 60529, DIN VDE 0470/1
9
x6!
x6!
6!
)0
10
Mechanical life
(Number of operations)
Position 2
Position 3
1x10
3x10
Material
Safety cover
Pedal
Aluminum
Shockproof thermoplastic
Ambient operating
temperature
²TO²#
Weight (approx.)
with safety cover
Fox 31
Fox 32
1.7 kg
3 kg
6
11
12
480V~
www.jokabsafety.com
8:21
13
Dimensions - Fox 31/21
1 x M 20
Dimensions - Fox 32/22
2 x M 20
8:22
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Connection example - Fox
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
8:23
13
Emergency stops
www.jokabsafety.com
Contents
Page
1
Why do you need an Emergency stop? _________________________________9:2
Emergency stop for enclosure installation – INCA 1 _____________________9:4
2
Emergency stop with LED – Smile _____________________________________9:6
Emergency stop with LED – Smile Tina _______________________________ 9:10
3
Emergency stops in series with Tina (adapter unit) ____________________ 9:14
Emergency-stop Grab Wire Safety Switch JSNY10 _____________________ 9:16
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
While every effort has been taken to ensure the accuracy of information contained in this book or any associated promotional and information material
JOKAB SAFETY cannot accept responsibility for errors or omissions and reserves the right to make any improvements without notice. It is the users
responsibility to ensure that this equipment is correctly designed, specified, installed, cared for and operated to meet all applicable local, national and
international codes/regulations. Technical data in our book is correct to the level of accuracy of Jokab Safety´s test procedures as verified by various
international approved bodies. Other information (such as application examples, wiring diagrams, operation or use) is intended solely to illustrate
the various uses of our products. JOKAB SAFETY does not guarantee or imply that the product when used in accordance with such examples in
a particular environment will fulfil any particular safety requirement and does not assume any responsibility or liability for actual use of the product
based on the examples given. 2008 v02.
www.jokabsafety.com
9:1
12
13
Why do you need an
Emergency stop?
So that anyone shall be able to stop a machine during a machine break-down or if
someone is in danger.
How do I recognise an E-stop?
All E-stops which comply with the relevant standards for
marking are red with a yellow background. An emergency
stop grab wire shall be red for high visibility. A sign that
indicates the location of the E-stop shall be green with a
white picture and possibly with text in the local country's
language.
How shall an E-stop stop the machine?
From 98/37/EC
An E-stop shall stop the machine as quickly as possible. To
obtain a quick stop one either removes the power directly
or one lets a frequency converter 'run down' and afterwards
after a little delay, remove the power. An E-stop shall not
create other hazards. Therefore a risk analysis must be made
for the E-stop to be correctly connected.
...
This device must:
- have clearly identifiable, clearly visible and quickly
accessible controls,
- stop the dangerous process as quickly as possible, without creating additional hazards,
- where necessary, trigger or permit the triggering
of certain safeguard movements.
...
Requirements for E-stops are stated in the following standards and regulations
9:2
98/37/EC The Machinery Directive
Clause 1.2.4 in Annex 4 gives requirements for the emergency stop function for new machines). See also clause
1.2.2 Control devices. (see chapter “Standard and Regulations”)
EN ISO 13850 Safety of machinery – Emergency
stop — Principles for design
A harmonized standard that gives technical specifications
for the requirements in the Machinery Directive. Could also
be used for older machinery.
Council Directive 89/655/EEC of 30 November
1989 concerning the minimum safety and health
requirements for the use of work equipment by
workers at work
Clause 2.4 gives the requirements for the emergency stop
function for older machines. See also clause 2.1. (see
chapter “Standard and Regulations”)
EN 60204-1 Safety of Machinery - Electrical equipment of machines – Part 1: General requirements.
Harmonized standard that gives requirements for the electrical equipment of machinery including the emergency stop
actuator/function. Se clauses 9.2.2 and 9.2.5.4.2.
www.jokabsafety.com
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
9:3
13
Emergency stop for enclosure
installation
INCA 1
INCA 1 Tina
Approval:
C E R T I F I E D BY
Application:
Emergency stop for fitting in
housing
As general stop (black print)
Advantages:
Terminal blocks
Several emergency stops in
series
sELECTRICALCAT)NCA4INA
sPRINTMECHANICALCAT
Only 53 mm's construction
depth
With LED info in print
Info output (Inca1 Tina)
Print IP65, connector IP20
INCA 1 is an emergency stop device designed for installation in a 22.5 mm slot in an apparatus enclosure. There are
two versions, the "INCA 1 Tina" with electronic adaptation
for connection to a dynamic safety circuit and connection
to Vital and Pluto units, and "INCA 1" that contains only
contacts, for connection to a safety relay. The electrical
connections are easily made in an apparatus enclosure
with a detachable terminal block, which also provides excellent measuring points.
INCA 1(S)
Pluto
+24V
IQ 10
A pulse
0V
I1
I0
Pluto
+24V
A
(+) S13
S34
(A2) S23
A2
1
2
3
4
5
S24
S14
Vital
IQ 10
A1
T
0V
I0
A2
R
Yellow front ring and emergency stop signs for emergency stop.
0V
INCA 1(S) Tina
1
A
2
A pulse
9:4
There is an LED in the emergency stop button, which
shows the current status:
s'REENALL/+
s2EDTHISEMERGENCYSTOPHASBEENPRESSED
s5NLIT).#!ORmASHINGREDGREEN).#!4INAA
protective device earlier in the circuit has been pressed
in.
0V
3
4
5
www.jokabsafety.com
Technical data - INCA 1/INCA 1 Tina
Manufacturer:
Jokab Safety AB, Sweden
Article no./Ordering data:
30-054-01
30-054-00
30-054-03
30-054-02
30-054-04
30-054-05
30-054-06
Impact resistance
(half sinusoidal)
Vibration resistance
(sinusoidal)
Climate resistance
Damp heat, cyclical
Damp heat, sustained
Dry heat
Cooling
Salt mist
INCA 1
INCA 1 Tina
INCA 1S
INCA 1S Tina
Front ring Yellow
for INCA
Emergency
stop sign S D F,
22.5mm
Emergency
stop sign E F D,
22.5mm
Max. 150m/s², pulse width 11 ms,
3-axis, as per EN IEC 60068-2-27
Max. 50 m/s² at 10 Hz…500 Hz,
10 cycles, 3 axis, as per EN IEC
60068-2-6
96 hours, +25 °C / 97%, +55 °C
/ 93 % relative humidity, as per EN
IEC 60068-2-30
56 days, +40 °C / 93 % relative
humidity, as per EN IEC 60068-2-78
96 hours, +70 °C, as per EN IEC
60068-2-2
96 hours, -40 °C, as per EN IEC
60068-2-1
96 hours, +35 °C in a chemical
solution with NaCl as per EN IEC
60068-2-11
Safety category:
INCA 1: 4 with relay or Pluto
INCA 1 Tina: 4 with Vital or Pluto
Colour:
Yellow, red and black
Weight:
Approx. 45 grams
Size:
See drawing
Material:
Polyamide PA66, Macromelt,
Polybutylenterephthalate PBT
5,6
Temperature:
-10°C to +55°C (operation), -30°C
to +70°C (storage)
Enclosure classification
Print: IP 65, Connector: IP20
Installation:
22,5 mm
Emergency stop LEDs:
INCA 1:
'REEN3AFETYDEVICE/+SAFETY
circuit OK
Not lit: emergency stop pressed
previously.
Red: This emergency stop has been
pressed.
INCA 1 Tina:
'REEN3AFETYDEVICE/+SAFETY
circuit OK
Flashing: Safety device OK, safety
circuit previously broken.
Red: This button is pressed in, and
the safety circuit is broken.
Operating voltage (LED):
INCA 1: 24 VDC
INCA 1 Tina: 24VDC +15% -25%
Current consumption (LED):
INCA 1: 15 mA
INCA 1 Tina: 47 mA
Emergency stop button
Operating force:
22 ± 4 N
Operating movement:
Approx. 4 mm to locked position
Contact material:
'OLDPLATEDSILVERALLOY
Minimum current:
INCA 1: 10 mA 10 VDC/ 10 VAC
INCA 1 Tina: —
Maximum current:
INCA 1: 2 A 24 VDC, 1 A 125 VAC
INCA 1 Tina: —
Mechanical life:
> 50 000 operations
Standards:
EN 60204, EN 60947-5-1 & -5
EN ISO 13850
Accessories
30-054-04 Yellow surround for
emergency stop button
www.jokabsafety.com
9:5
Emergency stop with LED
Smile
Approvals;
C E R T I F I E D BY
Application:
To stop a machine or a
process
As general stop (black print)
Features:
Several emergency stops in series
sELECTRICALCAT
sPRINTMECHANICALCAT
With LED info in print
Robust
Print IP 65, housing IP67
Smile - small and cost effective E-stop
In order to fulfil the need for a small and easy to install E-stop,
Smile has been developed. The size of the device makes it possible to be installed wherever you want. With M12 connection/s or
cable and centralised mounting holes Smile is very easy to install,
especially on aluminium extrusions. Smile is available for E-stops
in both dynamic and static safety circuits i.e. for interfacing to
Vital/Pluto and Safety relays. Each version is available with either
one or two M12 connections or cable. In the top of the Smile Estop unit, LED’s show the actual status:
'REENPROTECTIONISOK2EDTHIS%STOPHASBEENPRESSEDAND
if the LED is off an E-stop earlier in the circuit has been pressed.
Smile emergency stop has six different variants:
1. Smile 10EA has a 1 m cable connected through the base of
the unit.
2. Smile 10EK has four 1 m short connecting leads through the
base of the unit. No LED.
3. Smile 11EA has a five-pole M12 connector on one end of the
unit.
4. Smile 12EA has two five-pole M12 connectors, one on each
end of the unit.
5. Smile 11EAR has one 5-pole M12 connector at one end.
6. Smile 12EAR has two 5-pole M12 connectors at each end.
1
2
3
4
5
6
9:6
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Connection examples – Smile
Smile 10EA can be connected to either Pluto or a
safety relay. Single channel example with LED indication.
Safety category 1. The connection cable exits from
underneath the unit.
+24V
Pluto
safety
PLC
0V
A
(+) S13
1
+24V
1
(+) S13
2
A
S34
Safety
relay
E.g. RT6,
RT9
I0
Smile 10EA can be connected to either Pluto or a safety
relay. Two channel example with LED indication.
Safety circuit category 4.
2
A2
IQ 10 A-pulse
Pluto
safety
PLC
3
0V
2
(A2) S23
Safety
relay
E.g. RT6,
RT9
0V
3
3
0V
A2
S34
4
I0
S24
4
S14
5
I1
S14
5
Smile 10EA
Smile 10EA
4
Smile 11EA can be connected to either Pluto or a
safety relay. Single channel example with LED indication. Safety category 1. Connection via M12 connector.
+24V
Pluto
safety
PLC
0V
+24V
A2
IQ 10 A-pulse
Pluto
safety
PLC
3
0V
4
S34
I0
5
S14
0V
I1
4
S24
5
S14
Smile 11EA
Smile 12EA can be connected to either Pluto or a safety
relay. Two channel example with LED indication. Safety
circuit category 4. Connection via M12 connector + termination connector.
Smile 12EA can be connected to either Pluto or a
safety relay. Single channel example with LED indication. Safety category 1. Connection via M12 connector
+ termination connector.
A
1
(+) S13
6
3
0V
A2
Smile 11EA
+24V
A
JST2
1
(+) S13
+24V
1
0V
Safety
relay
E.g. RT6,
RT9
(A2) S23
IQ 10 A-pulse
A2
S34
I0
2
2
S14
0V
3
3
4
4
5
5
Pluto
safety
PLC
Safety
relay
E.g. RT6,
RT9
2
2
0V
I0
I1
Smile 12EA
A2
0V
3
3
S24
S14
4
4
5
5
9
Smile 12EA
Smile 12EA can be connected to either Pluto or a safety relay. Two channel serial connection example with LED
indication. Safety circuit category 3. Connection via M12 connectors. Note that there is no termination connector for
the Smile 12EA (C), this unit being connected back to the Pluto/safety relay via a separate cable.
+24V
S34
IQ 10 A-pulse
Pluto
safety
PLC
(A2) S23
I0
Safety
relay
E.g. RT6, A2
RT9
S24
I1
S14
0V
0V
A
1
1
2
2
3
3
1
(+) S13
B
C
1
1
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
Smile 12EA
www.jokabsafety.com
10
1
5
Smile 12EA
7
8
JST2
1
S34
Pluto
safety
PLC
5
2
(A2) S23
Safety
relay
E.g. RT6,
RT9
A
1
(+) S13
S34
2
Safety
relay
E.g. RT6,
RT9
I0
A
1
(+) S13
Smile 11EA can be connected to either Pluto or a safety
relay. Two channel example with LED indication. Safety
circuit category 4. Connection via M12 connector.
11
12
Smile 12EA
9:7
13
Connection examples – Smile
Smile 12EA and 11EA can be connected to either Pluto or safety relay. Two channel example with LED indication.
Safety circuit category 3. Connection via M12 connectors. Note that there is no termination connector as the Smile
11EA (C) completes the circuit without the need for a termination connector (JST2) or return cable.
S34
IQ 10 A-pulse
Pluto
safety
PLC
0V
I0
A
1
1
2
2
3
4
5
1
(+) S13
+24V
B
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
C
(A2) S23
Safety
relay
E.g. RT6,
RT9
A2
0V
S24
I1
S14
Smile 12EA
E-Stop Button status
A
B
C
↔
R
R
R
↔
R
R
D
↔
R
D
R
↔
R
D
D
↔
D
R
R
↔
D
R
D
↔
D
D
R
↔
D
D
D
LED Indication
A
B
C
'
'
'
'
'
Rd
'
Rd
B
'
Rd
B
Rd
B
B
Rd
B
B
Rd
B
B
Rd
B
B
Smile 12EA
Smile 11EA
The table shows the LED indication status of the E-Stop
buttons from the example shown in above example.
!3MILE%!
"3MILE%!
#3MILE%!
22ELEASED
$$EPRESSED
''REENLIGHTFROMTHETOPOFTHEBUTTON
2D2EDLIGHTFROMTHETOPOFTHEBUTTON
""LANKNOLIGHT
Termination
device JST2
Smile 10EA/11EA/12EA are like any other emergency stops when 0V to the LED indication is not connected. This means
that any suitable Safety PLC or safety relay can be used. If the LED indication is used, the voltage between Pin 1(+) and Pin
3 (-) should be between 19.2 – 28.8 VDC. The following examples show connections to Safety PLC and Safety relay.
Single channel PLC connection
Output 1
Two channel Safety relay connection
1
2
PLC
Output 1
1
Output 2
2
Safety
Relay
3
3
4
Input 1
5
Input 2
4
Input 1
5
Smile 11EA
Smile 11EA
Smile 10EA
Brown
White
Blue
Black
'REY
Smile 10EK
1
2
3
4
5
Brown
White
Black
'REY
The cable is connected to Smile 10EA via the lid at the back.
The leads are connected to Smile 10EK via the lid at the back.
No LED connection.
1. Input 1
2. Input 2
3. 0 VDC (to be connected only if LED indication is required)
4. Output 2
5. Output 1
Brown
White
Black
'REY
Input 1
Input 2
Output 2
/UTPUT
Smile 12EA (R)
Smile 11EA (R)
Brown
White
Blue
Black
'REY
1
2
3
4
5
1. Input 1
2. Input 2
3. 0 VDC (to be connected only if LED
indication is required)
4. Output 2
5. Output 1
9:8
Brown
White
Blue
Black
'REY
1
2
3
4
5
1. Input 1
2. Input 2
3. 0 VDC (to be connected only if LED
indication is required)
4. Output 2, feedback
5. Output 1, feedback
www.jokabsafety.com
1
2
3
4
5
Brown
White
Blue
Black
'REY
1. Output 1
2. Output 2
3. 0 VDC
4. Input 2, feedback
5. Input 1, feedback
1
Technical data – Smile
Manufacturer:
JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden
Article number/ordering data:
30-051-04 Smile 10EA with 1 m cable
30-051-06 Smile 10EK with short connecting
leads (No LED connection)
30-051-00 Smile 11EA with M12 male connector
30-051-02 Smile 12EA with male and female M12
connectors
30-051-01 Smile 11EAR
30-051-03 Smile 12EAR
30-051-09 Smile 11 SA
30-051-10 Smile 12 SA
30-051-11 Smile 11 SAR
30-051-12 Smile 12 SAR
30-051-13 JST2 termination for Smile 12.
Note. There are versions for dynamic technology
(with Tina).
Impact resistance (half sinusoidal)
max. 150 m/s2, pulse width 11 ms, 3-axis, as per
EN IEC 60068-2-27
Vibration resistance (sinusoidal)
max. 50 m/s2 at 10 Hz, 10 cycles, 3-axis, as per
EN IEC 60068-2-6
Climate resistance
Damp heat, cyclical
Damp heat, sustained
Dry heat
Cooling
Salt mist
Safety category:
96 hours, +25 °C / 97%, +55 °C / 93 % relative
humidity, as per EN IEC 60068-2-30
56 days, +40 °C / 93 % relative humidity, as per
EN IEC 60068-2-78
96 hours, +70 °C, as per EN IEC 60068-2-2
96 hours, -40 °C, as per EN IEC 60068-2-1
96 hours, +35 °C in a chemical solution with NaCl
as per EN IEC 60068-2-11
2
3
4
Sign for emergency stop
5
Safety circuit up to Cat. 4 acc. To EN 954-1/EN
ISO 13849-1, together with appropriate control unit.
Colour:
Yellow, red and black
Weight:
Approx. 65 grams
Size:
Length: 84 mm + M12 contact(s) (12.5 mm each)
Width: 40 mm
Height: 52 mm
Material:
Polyamide PA66, Macromelt, PolybutylenterePHTHALATE0"40OLYPROPYLENE005,6
Ambient temperature:
-10°C to +55°C (operation), -30°C to +70°C (stock)
Protection class:
IP 65
Mounting:
Two M5 recessed hexagon head screws, L ≥25 mm.
Hole cc: 44 mm
LED on E-Stop:
'REEN3AFETYDEVICEOK3AFETYCIRCUITCLOSED
Off: Safety circuit broken (When an E-Stop is
depressed all
following units in the circuit lose the LED function).
Red: Safety device actuator depressed and Safety
circuit broken.
Input voltage (LED):
17-27 VDC ripple ±10% (LED supply voltage)
Current consumption (LED):
15 mA
E-Stop button
Actuating force:
22±4 N
Actuator travel:
Approx. 4 mm to latch
Material, contacts:
Silver alloy gold plated
Life, mechanical:
> 50 000 operations
Standards:
EN ISO 13850, EN 60204, EN 60947-5-1 & -5
Min current:
10 mA 10 VDC/10 VAC
Max current:
2 A 24 VDC, 1 A 125 VAC
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
9:9
13
Emergency stop with LED
Smile Tina
Approvals:
C E R T I F I E D BY
Application:
To stop a machine or a
process
As general stop (black print)
Features:
Several emergency stops in
series
sELECTRICALCAT
sPRINTMECHANICALCAT
Light grids, emergency stop
and Eden in the same safety
loop together with Vital or
Pluto gives safety category
4 as per EN 954-1/EN ISO
13849-1
With LED info in print
Robust
Smile Tina - small and cost effective E-stop
In order to fulfil the need for a small and easy to install E-stop,
Smile has been developed. The size of the device makes it possible to be installed wherever you want. With M12 connections or
cable and centralised mounting holes Smile is very easy to install,
especially on aluminium extrusions. Smile is available for E-stops
in both dynamic and static safety circuits i.e. for interfacing to Vital
system/Pluto safety PLC and Safety relays. Each version is available with either one or two M12 connections or cable. Two M12
connectors are used to enable the connection of E-stops in series,
which is often used with dynamic safety circuits fulfilling safety
category 4. In the top of the Smile Tina E-stop unit, LEDs show the
actual status according to the dynamic system:
'REENEVERYTHINGIS/+2ED%STOPACTIVATED&LASHING2ED
'REEN3TOPACTIVATEDFROMANOTHERPRECEDINGDEVICE
The Smile Tina emergency stop is available in four versions:
1. Smile 10EA Tina has a 1 m cable connected via the base of
the unit.
2. Smile 11EA Tina has a five-pole M12 connector on the end of
the unit for connecting the Jokab Safety cable.
3. Smile 12EA Tina has two five-pole M12 connectors, one on
each end of the unit for connecting the Jokab Safety cable.
4. Smile 12EAR Tina has two five-pole M12 connectors, one at
each end, for the connection of Jokab Safety cabling.
5. Smile 11EAR Tina has one 5-pole M12 connector at one end
for connection of cable from Jokab Safety.
Info-signal from each emergency stop
Print IP 65, housing IP67
1
2
3
4
5
9:10
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Connection examples – Smile Tina
Smile 10EA Tina can be connected to either a Pluto or Vital system. Safety circuit category 4 with LED indication/information. The connection cable exits from underneath the
unit.
IQ10
Pluto
Vital
2
T
R
I0
Smile 10EA Tina
3
Smile 11EA Tina can be connected to either a Pluto or Vital system. Safety circuit category
4 with LED indication/information. Connection via M12 connectors. The circuit below shows
three Smile 11EA Tina units connected in series via connection terminals in the electrical
cabinet.
4
Electrical cabinet
IQ10
5
A
T
R
I0
Vital
Connection termination
Pluto
Smile 11EA Tina
6
B
Smile 11EA Tina
7
C
Smile 11EA Tina
8
Smile 11EA Tina can be connected to either a Pluto or Vital system. Safety circuit category
4 with LED indication/information. Connection via M12 connectors. The circuit below shows
three Smile 11EA Tina units and one Eden connected in series via a Tina 4A connection
block.
9
A
T
IQ10
Pluto
3
Tina 4A
Vital
I0
1
R
2
Smile 11EA Tina
4
10
B
Smile 11EA Tina
11
C
Smile 11EA Tina
Eden = Adam & Eva
www.jokabsafety.com
12
9:11
13
Connection examples – Smile Tina
E-Stop Button status
A
B
C
↔
R
R
R
↔
R
R
D
↔
R
R
R
↔
R
R
D
↔
D
R
R
↔
D
R
D
↔
D
D
R
↔
D
D
D
Information output signal
The table shows the information output signal status from each of the Smile
A
B
C
11EA Tina units in the previous connection examples.
H
H
H
In the example showing connection with an Eden sensor, the Eden status
H
H
L
information signal acts in the same way as the Smile Tina 11EA units.
H
L
H
The status information signal can be connected to e.g. PLC input.
H
L
L
Note. The information signal must not be used as a safety signal. The sigL
H
H
nal should only be used to indicate the status of connected devices.
L
H
L
!3MILE%!4INA
$$EPRESSED
L
L
H
((IGHIESUPPLYVOLTAGE
"3MILE%!4INA
L
L
L
#3MILE%!4INA
,,OW6$#
22ELEASED
Smile 12EA can be connected to either a Pluto or Vital system. Safety circuit category 4 with
LED indication/information. Connection via M12 connectors. The last Smile 12 EA Tina unit feeds
the dynamic signal back to the Pluto/Vital.
A
IQ10
Vital
I0
R
LED Indication
A
B
C
'
'
'
'
'
Rd
'
Rd
F
'
Rd
Rd
Rd
F
F
Rd
F
Rd
Rd
Rd
F
Rd
Rd
Rd
Smile 12EA Tina
Smile 12EA Tina
Smile 12EA Tina
The table shows the LED indication status of the E-Stop buttons in the previous connection examples, where three Smile 10 EA, Smile 11EA or 12EA
Tina units are connected in series.
2D2EDLIGHTFROMTHETOPOFTHE
!3MILE%!4INA
"3MILE%!4INA
button
#3MILE%!4INA
&&LASHESBETWEENGREENANDRED
22ELEASED
light
$$EPRESSED
''REENLIGHTFROMTHETOPOFTHE
button
Smile 12EA can be connected to either a Pluto or Vital system. Safety circuit category 4 with LED indication/information.
Connection via M12 connectors. The circuit shows two Smile
12EA Tina’s, one Eden sensor and one Focus Light Curtain
connected in series.
Eden = Adam & Eva
Focus
M12-3A
M12-3A
T
IQ10
Pluto
C
T
Pluto
E-Stop Button status
A
B
C
↔
R
R
R
↔
R
R
D
↔
R
D
R
↔
R
D
D
↔
D
R
R
↔
D
R
D
↔
D
D
R
↔
D
D
D
B
Vital
I0
Tina 10A
R
Smile 12EA Tina Smile 12EA Tina
M12-3B
Smile 10EA Tina
Brown
White
Blue
Black
'REY
1
2
3
4
5
+
1. Input voltage,17-27 VDC ripple+/- 10%
2. Dynamic input signal
3. 0 VDC
4. Dynamic output signal
5. Information output
-
The connection cable is connected to the Smile 10EA Tina unit via the back panel.
Smile 11EA Tina
Brown
White
Blue
Black
'REY
1
2
3
4
5
+
-
1. Input voltage,17-27 VDC ripple+/- 10%
2. Dynamic input signal
3. 0 VDC
4. Dynamic output signal
5. Information output
9:12
Smile 12EA Tina
Brown
White
Blue
Black
'REY
1
2
3
4
5
+
+
-
-
1. Input voltage,17-27 VDC
ripple+/- 10%
2. Dynamic input signal
3. 0 VDC
4. Not used
5. Not used
www.jokabsafety.com
1
2
3
4
5
Brown
White
Blue
Black
'REY
1. Output voltage to next unit
2. Dynamic output signal (To next
Smile or to Pluto or Vital system)
3. 0 VDC
4. Not used
5. Information output
1
Technical data – Smile Tina
Manufacturer:
JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden
Article number/ordering data:
30-050-04 Smile 10EA Tina with 1 m connection cable
30-050-00 Smile 11EA Tina with M12 male connector
30-050-02 Smile 12EA Tina with male and female
M12 connectors
30-050-01 Smile 11EAR Tina
30-050-03 Smile 12EAR Tina
30-050-05 Smile 11 SA Tina
30-050-06 Smile 12 SA Tina
30-050-07 Smile 11 SAR Tina
30-050-08 Smile 12 SAR Tina
Note. There are versions for use with relay technology
(without Tina).
Impact resistance (half sinusoidal)
max. 150 m/s2, pulse width 11 ms, 3-axis, as per
EN IEC 60068-2-27
Vibration resistance (sinusoidal)
max. 50 m/s2 at 10 Hz, 10 cycles, 3-axis, as per
EN IEC 60068-2-6
Climate resistance
Damp heat, cyclical
Damp heat, sustained
Dry heat
Cooling
Salt mist
Safety category:
96 hours, +25 °C / 97%, +55 °C / 93 % relative
humidity, as per EN IEC 60068-2-30
56 days, +40 °C / 93 % relative humidity, as per
EN IEC 60068-2-78
96 hours, +70 °C, as per EN IEC 60068-2-2
96 hours, -40 °C, as per EN IEC 60068-2-1
96 hours, +35 °C in a chemical solution with NaCl
as per EN IEC 60068-2-11
2
3
4
Sign for emergency stop
5
Safety circuit Cat. 4 acc. to EN 954-1/
EN ISO 13849-1, together with appropriate Vital or
Pluto control unit.
Colour:
Yellow, red and black
Weight:
Approx. 65 grams
Size:
Length: 84 mm + M12 contact(s) (12.5mm each)
Width: 40 mm Height: 52 mm
Material:
Polyamid PA66, Macromelt, PolybutylenterephthaLATE0"40OLYPROPYLEN005,6
Ambient temperature:
-10°C to +55°C (operation) -30°C to +70°C (stock)
Protection class:
IP 65
Mounting
Two M5 hexagon socket screws, L ≥25 mm.
Hole centres: 44 mm
LED on E-Stop
'REEN3AFETYDEVICE/+3AFETYCIRCUIT/+
Flashing: Safety device OK, Break in safety circuit
Red: Breaks in safety device and safety circuit
Time delay:
1:1.5 (Two Smile units are equal to three Edens in
time delay)
Input voltage:
17-27 VDC ripple ±10%
Current consumption:
47 mA (57mA with max. current from information output)
Current from information output:
10 mA max
E-Stop button Actuating force:
22±4 N
Actuator travel:
Approx. 4 mm to latch
Material, contacts:
Silver alloy gold plated
Life, mechanical:
> 50 000 operations
Standards:
EN ISO 13850:2006, EN ISO 13850,
EN 60204 and EN 60947-5-1 & -5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
9:13
13
Emergency stops in series
with Tina
Approvals:
Application:
To stop a machine
or a process
Features:
Several E-stops in series to
Category 4
Light beam, E-stop and Eden
in the same safety circuit together with Vital/Pluto enables
safety category 4 according to
EN 954-1
Indication at every E-stop
Robust construction
Information signal from each
E-stop
IP 67
Several E-stops in series in accordance with Category 4
Our E-stops have built-in Tina 2A or Tina 3A units which
makes it easy to connect up to 30 E-stops in a safety circuit
in accordance with safety category 4, EN 954-1. The safety
circuit, which is dynamic, is monitored either by the Pluto
safety PLC or the Vital safety module.
Standards and regulations
The E-stop is designed to fulfil the applicable standards
and regulations. An example of such standards is EN 418/
EN ISO 13850 (E-stop norm).
LEDs which indicate status
On every E-stop with Tina units there are LEDs which
show the status of each individual E-stop. The E-stop
status information signal is also available via the Tina unit
connection cable.
Our E-stops are available in three versions
s %STOPWITH4INA!WITHCABLECONNECTIONFORCONNEC
tion to the dynamic circuit of Pluto or Vital
s %STOPWITH4INA!WITH-CONNECTORANDCONNECtion to the dynamic circuit of Pluto or Vital.
s %STOPONLYWITHPOSITIVEFORCEDDISCONNECTDUALCON
tacts for cable connection (traditional E-stop)
9:14
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Technical data - E-stops
Article number/ordering data
30 001-10 JSKL1-NS/2A
30 001-11 JSKL1-NS/3A
30 003-02 JSKL1-NS
LED´s on Tina 2A, 3A
E-stop with Tina2A
E-stop with Tina3A
E-stop with 2NC
'REEN%STOP/+3AFETYCIRCUIT/+
Flashing: E-stop OK, break in safety circuit
Red: Break in E-stop and safety circuit
2
For additional information concerning Tina units,
see the section describing Tina.
Mechanical life
105 operations
Max. operating frequency
10 operations/min
Operating force
50 N
Degree of protection according to
IEC/EN 60529
IP67
Climatic proofing
Constant in accordance with IEC 60068-2-3;
Cyclical in accordance with IEC 60068-2-30
Ambient operating temperature
–10°C - 70°C
Mechanical shock resistance
in accordance with IEC 60068-2-27
'
Shock duration
11 ms, half-sinusoidal
Contacts:
Rated insulation Voltage, Ui
Max. short-circuit protective device
500V
Fuse, gG/gL
10A
3
4
5
Electrical connection - E-stops
6
7
8
9
Dimensions - E-stops
10
11
Tina 3A
12
www.jokabsafety.com
9:15
13
Approvals:
Emergency stop Grab Wire
Safety Switch
JSNY10
Application:
Machines
Transportation lines
Features:
Easily accessible
Forced contacts
Double switching in both
directions of travel
5PTOM7IRELENGTH
IP 65
Duplicated safety in both directions
The JSNY10 can provide an easy to reach emergency
stop along machines, transportation lines and processes.
The device is easier to install than several individual
emergency-stop buttons.
The JSNY10 can be utilised in several different ways to
suit various applications e.g the wire could be positioned
at waist height along a transportation line, the emergency
stop being activated if somebody walks into or falls onto
the line or the wire could be positioned at head height
making it easy to grab by anyone requiring to initiate an
Emergency Stop.
The JSNY10 has four contacts. When the switch
is installed and the correct wire tension is set, all four
contacts are closed. If the wire is pulled, two of the
contacts open; if the wire breaks the other two contacts
open. In both cases a dual channel machine stop signal
will be given.
In order to reset the JSNY10 the integral mushroomhead slam button has to be activated.
Forced Disconnected Contacts
The contacts of the JSNY10 are forced disconnected.
Forced disconnection means that the contacts are
mechanically pulled apart thus ensuring protection
against contact welding/sticking.
Safety level
The forced disconnected contacts provide a high level of
safety. By combining the JSNY10 with a suitable Jokab
Safety safety relay a high level of safety in respect of the
connection of the machine control system is guaranteed.
JSNY10 can be combined with Tina units for connection
to a safety circuit with several safety components in
accordance with Safety Category 4.
Regulations and Standards
The JSNY10 is designed and approved in accordance to
relevant standards. Examples of relevant standards are
EN ISO 13850, EN60947-1, EN 60947-5-1, VDE 0113,
EN ISO 12100-1, -2 and VDE 0660 T200.
Emergency-stop Grab Wire easily
accessible during normal work
operation along a machine
9:16
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Technical data - JSNY10
Supplier
JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden
Ordering data
see Component ordering list
Colour
Black with yellow label
Housing Material
Cast aluminium
Lid Material
Aluminium
Operating temperature
-30°C to +80°C
Switching contacts
4 NC (2 forced)
Protection class
IP 65, EN 60529
Mechanical life
1 million switching cycles
Max. switching frequency
20/min
Reset method
mushroom-head slam button
Max. wire length
25 m
Mounting
4 x M5
Terminals
Screw terminal, 8 x M4
Cable access
2 x M20 x 1.5
Weight
700g
Max. voltage
400 VAC
Thermal current
16 A
Utilisation category
AC 15, DC 13
Short-circuit protection
2
3
5
45,5
69
12
ø25
ø15
(74)
7.5
35
16 A delay fuse, 20 A quick fuse
78.5
95.6
4
5
82
ø35
72
ø5.4
8.5
20.5
ø5
M20 x
1.5 (2x)
5
33
6
Mounting - JSNY10
Wire supports should be attached at a height of at least 20-25mm above the surface where the switch is to be installed.
Turnbuckles may be used to 'tune' the pull-wire system to the correct tension. A medium operating temperature should be maintained
during installation. The wire should be pulled heavily several times, then the tension of the wire should be readjusted to compensate
for the elongation of the wire resulting from thimble distortion.
Reset button
Wire clamp
Wire turnbuckle
7
Eye bolt
8
min. 20-mm
9
2 to max. 5 m
max. 300 mm
max. 50 m (2 switches)
10
Component ordering list - JSNY10
JSNY10 (20-034-00)
JSNY10-K (20-034-07)
Switch
Mounting kit 25
m:
Plastic coated steel cable wire
1 pce Wire turnbuckle
4 pcs thimble
4 pcs wire clamp
5 pcs eye bolts with nuts
JSNY10-S6 (20-034-02) Eye bolt M6x50
11
JSNY10-M6 (41-060-03) Nut M6 (to eyebolt)
JSNY10-V6 (20-034-06) Wire turnbuckle M5x50
JSNY10-L3 (20-034-04) Wire clamp, duplex
12
JSNY10-W3 (20-034-05) Wire plastic coated red 3 mm/4 mm JSNY10-T4 (20-034-03) Wire thimble
(core/sleeve) per Meter
JSNY10-R5 (20-034-13) Swivel for wire
www.jokabsafety.com
9:17
13
8 mm
200N
6 mm
2 mm
0 mm
axis
open
scribed
line
closed
socket
13-14
25-26
33-34
45-46
Contact Adjustment JSNY10
80N
Tolerance of force: +/- 15%
When the wire is installed with the correct tension all contacts are closed. Adjust the turnbuckle to get correct tension,
the scribed line on the axis of the JSNY10 should be just visible at the top of the socket.
When an emergency stop condition occurs, switches 25-26 and 45-46 open, when the wire breaks contacts 13-14
and 33-34 open.
Mounted wire with correct tension
Emergency stop
Wire breakage
Electrical Connection JSNY10
Electrical connection of JSNY10,
highest level of safety.
Note!
The connection shows the JSNY10 in
a correctly tensioned condition.
9:18
www.jokabsafety.com
Contact rails, Bumpers
and Safety Mats
www.jokabsafety.com
Contents
Page
1
When shall I use contact rails, bumpers
and safety mats? __________________________________________________ 10:1
Contacts rails and bumpers _________________________________________ 10:2
2
Safety mats _______________________________________________________ 10:8
3
4
5
While every effort has been taken to ensure the accuracy of information contained in this book and any associated promotional and information material
JOKAB SAFETY cannot accept responsibility for errors or omissions and reserves the right to make any improvements without notice. It is the users
responsibility to ensure that this equipment is correctly designed, specified, installed, cared for and operated to meet all applicable local, national and
international codes/regulations. Technical data in our book is correct to the level of accuracy of Jokab Safety´s test procedures as verified by various
international approved bodies. Other information (such as application examples, wiring diagrams, operation or use) is intended solely to illustrate
the various uses of our products. JOKAB SAFETY does not guarantee or imply that the product when used in accordance with such examples in
a particular environment will fulfil any particular safety requirement and does not assume any responsibility or liability for actual use of the product
based on the examples given. 2008 v02.
When shall I use contact rails, bumpers and safety mats?
7
8
§
Contact rails and bumpers
Contact rails are used as protection against squeezing
accidents, i.e. on moving machine parts and automatic
doors and hatches. The strips come in customised
lengths and various cross sections.
Bumpers are used as safety buffers to protect against
remote control transport vehicles and other dangerous
moving objects that require long stopping distances.
6
9
Standard: EN 1760-2 Safety of machinery Pressure sensitive protective devices - Part
2: General principles for the design and
testing of pressure sensitive edges and
pressure sensitive bars
10
§
Safety mats
Safety mats are used for protection around hazardous machinery. They are well suited for monitoring an
area used for loading and unloading of material to a
machine.
11
Standard: EN 1760-1 Safety of machinery
- Pressure sensitive protective devices
- Part 1: General principles for the design
and testing of pressure sensitive mats and
pressure sensitive floors
12
www.jokabsafety.com
10:1
13
Approvals:
Safety
contact rails
& bumpers
Utilization:
Protection against squeezing
accidents on moving machine
parts and automatic doors.
Features:
Can be connected to a
safety relay, Vital or Pluto
Supplied in customized
lengths
IP 65
Simple assembly on site
Lengths up to 25 m.
Contact!
Safety contact rails and bumpers as safety
devices for potentially dangerous machines
Safety contact rails
Contact edges are used as protection against crushing injuries, for example, moving machine parts, automatic doors.
ber protect the inner contact strip in the best way possible
against damage and also allow for a contact angle exceeding ±45˚. Normally supplied in lengths up to 25 m.
Contact edges with cast-in contact strips
Our new contact edges consist of a rubber profile with a
cast-in contact strip. They are made up simply using connection plugs that are glued to the ends together with a
terminal cap. The rubber profile is fitted on an aluminium
profile.
Available in EPDM design. Supplied in lengths up to 25 m.
Bumpers
Bumpers are employed on automatic production lines to
minimise danger to both people and machines. The large
foam rubber cushions enable long practical braking and
run-through distances, thus enabling designers to optimise
protection for both personnel and machines.
The safety contact strips are mounted inside aluminium
profiles which are, in turn, protected by the large foam cushions that are glued to the carrier profile and then sprayed
with a thin film of polyurethane which makes the bumper
waterproof and helps to minimise wear and tear.
The bumpers are delivered mounted to the carrier profile
in ordered lengths (0,2 m – 3 m).
Contact edges with contact strips SKS 18
The contact edge consists of a rubber profile with a safety
contact strip inside. The contact edge is fitted on an aluminium profile.
The special design of rubber profiles of EPDM or NBR rub-
Fields of Application
10:2
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Safety contact rails GP - General
The safety contact strip, SKS 18, the actual contactor, is located inside the safety contact rail. The safety contact strip
consist of a homogeneous highly insulating outer EPDM material and has two internal conducting contact surfaces. The conducting elastomer contains two copper wires that provide lowresistance detection even in lengths exceeding 100 metres.
Because of the contact points, the safety contact rail has
approximate 20 mm of inactive length at each end.
To provide protection against damage and to enable its
proper use, the safety contact strip is inserted into the switching chamber of the rubber contactor profile. The rubber profiles (EDPM or NBR) are then permanently sealed with a special elastic adhesive and end caps to make them watertight.
The safety contact rail is then pressed into the aluminium
profile.
Safety contact rail,
construction
2
Rubber profile
SKS 18
3
Aluminium support
profile, C-profile
4
Safety contact strip SKS 18 for contact edge GP
Safety contact strip SKS 18
Technical data
EPDM, electrical insulation >30
Mohm
EPDM, electrical elastomer with
reinforce copper wire
60 ohm / 100 meters
approx. 50 ohm
24 V / 100 mA
6.5 N/cm2
18 x 6 mm
Outer material
Inner material
Conductivity
Contact resistance
Max. electrical load
Max. applied pressure
Dimensions
5
Conductive
contact surface
Highly insulated
outer material
6
Copper wire
Construction - contact edge GE
7
Inside the contact edge there is a cast-in contact strip that
consists of two conductive alternating surfaces on the inside and a highly-effective insulating shell. There are tow
conductive wires in the contact surfaces that allow for low
ohm measurements even when the contact edge has an extended length. The cast-in contact strip is protected against
damage by the surrounding chamber. The cast end plugs
ensure a permanent contact from the conductive surfaces
in the contact strip. A special flexible adhesive is used to
make the connector ring watertight.
Aluminium profile
Connection plug
Terminal resistor
Terminal
cap
Rubber profile
with integrated
contact strip
Rubber profiles
Tekniska data
Type
GP 25-25
GP 25-40
GE 25-25
GE 25-45
45
25
25
25
40
25
25
Fixing Profile
Material
Length max (m)
Weight (g/m)
Weight incl. C-Profile
(g/m)
Activation force (N)
Actuating distance (mm)
Braking distance (mm)
Max. Actuating ( º )
8
(1) 10-metre lengths of GP
edges on request
(2) Measured with ( Ø 80 mm
test specimen),
10 mm/s
(3) Measuring speed 10 mm/s
(4) Not including DIN 31006-2
(GS - BE - 17)
9
10
25
(1)
AL 25-14
EPDM/NBR
6(10)
370
690
AL 25-14
EPDM/NBR
6(10)
480
800
Al 25-14
EPDM
25
510
820
Al 25-14
EPDM
25
770
1080
(2)
(3)
(3)
(4)
34/37
8.0/7.5
10.2/9.5
2x 45º
39/52
9.4/9.7
7.2/5.9
2x 60º
64,1
4,7
6,48
2x20˚
69,1
6,73
20,73
2x20˚
www.jokabsafety.com
11
12
NOTE! Contact us for other
profile sizes.
10:3
13
Common properties
Technical specifications
Manufacturer
JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden
Article number/
ordering data:
GP
76-025-25
GE
76-005-02
Contact rail GP25/25 EPDM.
Ordered by length
76-125-25 Contact rail GP25/25 NBR.
Ordered by length
76-025-40 Contact rail GP25/40 EPDM.
Ordered by length
76-125-40 Contact rail GP25/40 NBR.
Ordered by length
76-005-04
76-005-44
76-005-45
76-005-46
76-005-47
76-005-61
76-005-62
76-009-01 Ready-made, 2+2 m cable
76-009-05 Ready-made, 5+5 m cable
76-009-08 Ready-made, 7+7 m cable
76-009-10 Ready-made, 10+10 m cable
Contact edge GE25-25 EPDM per
metre.
Contact edge GE25-45 EPDM per
metre.
Connection plug with 2.5 m cable.
Connection plug with 5m cable
Connection plug with 10m cable
Connection plug with resistor 8.2ΓQ
Terminal cap for GE25-45
Terminal cap for GE25-25
Please contact us for more alternatives.
1
500 N
1
2x 20º
Mechanical load max
Actuating angle (DIN)
Mechanical life
105
1
Max. operate temp. range2
-20Cº to +55ºC
Max. temperature range
-25ºC to +70ºC
Protection classification
IP 65
Max. Electrical load
24V 100mA
Resistance
0.6 Ohm/m
Conductors
GP: 2x 0.38 mm2
Conductors insulation material GP: PVC
GE: 2x 0.34 mm2
GE: PUR matt blackt
(1) According to DIN 31006-2 (GS - BE - 17)
(2) Not including DIN 31006-2 (GS - BE - 17)
Physical and chemical material properties
Properties
EPDM NBR
Resistance
EPDM
NBR
1 = no effect
for lasting contact
Tensile strength
Tensile elongation
Durability
Tear resistance
Cold flexibility
Heat resistance
3
3
3
3
2
2
1
2
2
2
3
3
2
3
Water (distilled)
Acids (diluted)
Bases (diluted)
Non-oxidised acids
Oxidised acids
ASTM oil No. 3
Vegetable oil
1-2
1
2
2
4
6
5
1
3
2
3
5
1
1
2 = slight effect
non-lasting contact
Oxidation resistance
UV-resistance
Weather/ ozone
resistance
Flame resistance
1
1
3
3
Ester solvent
Ketone solvent
2
3
5
5
6
6
Aliphatic hydrocarb.
5
1
Gas permeability
4
2
Aromatic hydrocarb.
Halogenic hydrocarb.
Alcohols
6
6
2-3
5
1
5
1= excellent - 6 = poor
EPDM
NBR
ASTM
Kw
Ester
Ketone
Aliphatic
Aromatic
10:4
Good resistance to ozone and weather,
especially against chemicals
Good resistance to oil and petrol
American Society for Testing Material
Aromatic hydrocarbon
Organic solvent
Oxidized solvent
i.e. petrol
i.e. benzol
3 = moderate effect
moderate contact
4 = appreciable effect
limited contact
5 = strong effect
short-term contact
6 = extreme effect
avoid contact
Note! The information given is based on data obtained from
the respective material suppliers. Although all efforts have been
made, unforeseen factors can have a considerable effect on the
generally applied indications during practical use therefore this
information must be used as a general guide only. If there is any
doubt as to the suitability of the materials used for any specific
application/environment, we will, upon request, supply rubber
samples for your own evaluation or, if given written specifications
of your proposed environmental conditions, test the suitability of
materials for your specific application.
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Mounting and electrical connection – Safety contact rails
The selected contact profile should be mounted using
a suitable aluminium C profile (as shown opposite).
2
Mounting
3
4
Stage 1 – GP and GE
Pan or round-head screws should not be used to mount
the aluminium C profile. If such screws are used this can
result in the connecting wire in the aluminium profile being damaged.
Stage 2 – GP and GE
In order to feed the connecting wire through the profile,
an 8 mm hole must be drilled in a suitable position. Carefully remove the burr from the hole edges and insert the
supplied rubber collar. The connecting wires can also be
placed in the aluminium profile.
5
6
7
8
Stage 3 – GP
In order to make fitting of the safety contact rail easier,
the aluminium profile and the safety contact rail should
be sprayed with a water based soap solution. One side of
the rubber profile must then first be inserted into the profile and then the whole profile pressed in. Once the soap
solution has evaporated, the contact strip will be firmly
fitted into the profile. In order to prevent subsequent slipping of the safety contact rail, talcum powder, oils or similarly permanent lubricating agents must not be used.
9
Stage 3 – GE
Safety contact edges with a t-base have to be pushed
into the aluminium profile.
10
Note! Pulling or pushing the safety contact rail into the aluminium
profile can cause damage to the
contact rail and should be avoided at all costs.
Any other proposed methods of
fixing should only be attempted after consultation with Jokab Safety.
Other methods of fixing, unless
approved by Jokab Safety may invalidate the warranty and may lead
to incorrect device operation.
www.jokabsafety.com
11
12
10:5
13
The safety bumper principle
Technical data
The contact function of the JOKAB SAFETY bumper consists of the safety contact strip SKS 18 being actuated by
a special mechanical construction. This construction, which
is protected by a large foam cushion, is inserted and glued
to the carrier profile. The foam rubber is covered with a
polyurethane skin. The safety bumper is also covered with
cross-bound polyurethane, which can be provided in a
range of colours. By utilising this construction the bumper
gives a stop signal when impacted from all directions with
soft sides.
The Safety Bumper must be connected to a suitable two
input channel Safety Relay. e.g. Jokab Safety type RT6 or
RT7 which provides all necessary monitoring of the bumpers activation and detection of cable faults.
The twin cable connection makes it possible to connect
several bumpers in series.
For further information and examples of electrical connection see Connection examples.
Article number/
ordering data:
76-200-01
76-200-02
76-200-03
76-200-04
76-200-05
76-200-06
76-200-07
76-200-08
76-200-09
76-200-10
76-200-11
76-200-12
76-200-13
76-200-14
76-200-15
76-200-16
76-200-00
Bumper ASB
53/100 black
100/200 black
150/300 black
200/400 black
53/100 black/yellow
100/200 black/yellow
150/300 black/yellow
200/400 black/yellow
60/100 NBR black (63/100)
100/200 NBR black
150/300 NBR black
200/400 NBR black
200/200 black
150/150 NBR black
100/200 NBR black/yellow
150/250 NBR black/yellow
Bumper base price
Dimensions
in accordance with the illustration, or special dimensions
Actuating distance
approx. 20% of height
Braking distance
at least 50% of height
Actuating force [N]
150 N at 80 mm around the test
specimen
Life
greater than 105
Protection class
IP 65
Ambient temperature
-20º to +60º
Chemical resistance
Oil, grease
10% acid
10% alkaline (caustic) solutions
good
resistant
resistant
2 x 2 m; 2 x 0,34 mm2 PU
covered
Connection cable
Foam rubber core
Polyurethane cover
Aluminium profile
Safety contact strip
SKS 18
Carrier aluminium profile
Force
Useable
braking distance
approx. 50%
Contact at
approx. 20%
10:6
Max.
compression
to approx. 70%
www.jokabsafety.com
Deformation
(%)
1
Standard shapes
Shape A
Shape B
Customer-specified
special shape
2
3
4
5
6
Cable exits at the ends of the bumper or according to customer requirements.
7
Cross-section height
8
9
Cross-section width
10
11
Dimensions
Bumpers are available in four different standard dimensions. Other dimensions can be supplied on request.
Note that in the case of customised orders, the ratio of 2:1 for X:Y must not be exceeded. Bumpers can
be supplied in lengths of up to 3000 mm. The minimum cross-section is 53 x 100 mm.
www.jokabsafety.com
10:7
12
13
Approvals:
Safety
Mats
Safety Mats for:
Personal protection within the dangerous areas around presses, robots, production lines, machines
etc.
Certified according
to EN 1760-1.
Features:
Can be connected to a safety
relay, Vital or Pluto
Very durable
IP 67
A Safety mat used as personal
protection within dangerous areas.
The ASK Safety Mat is used as personal protection within
the dangerous areas around presses, robots, production
lines, machines etc.
When connected to a suitable monitoring system stepping on the Safety Mat will immediately be detected causing dangerous machine movements to be stopped. This is
made possible by the detection of electrical contacts closing within the sandwich construction of the Mat. As a loadbearing component the Mat is made with a bottom plate
of either synthetic material or metal. The Safety Mat is provided with a ribbed surface, which is fixed by adhesive to
the surface of the Safety Mat.
The safety mat and its connection cabling can be supervised by a suitable Jokab Safety safety relay, which provides
a category 3 safety level for the cabling, while the mat is in
category 1.
Mat construction
The basic Mat construction consists of a ground plate of
either PVC, Aluminium or Stainless Steel which provides
protection against uneven ground etc. The Mat is made up
of a sandwich construction, the pressure contact switch
consisting of two conducting sheets separated from each
other by a webbed isolating layer. The internal switching surface is cast into a durable polyurethane to protect against
moisture, and this is then covered with a top layer of ribbed
or chequered rubber mat or a thin aluminium plate.
Attachment to the floor is by means of a ramped edge
trim or a z-profile made of aluminium. The ramp profile has
a channel for connection cables.
Custom Mats can be made, i.e. special shape, resistant against harsh industrial environments (mineral oil, acid,
bleach etc.) or with a non-slip surface or M12-contacts.
Ribbed Surface
Polyurethane- Upper Surface
Contact Surface 1
Isolating Layer
Contact Surface 2
10:8
Contact!
www.jokabsafety.com
Technical Data - Safety Mats
Manufacturer
JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden
Article number/
ordering data:
76-301-00
Production cost cast mat in PU
with RF finish ASK-1U4.4-RF
76-301-02
Production cost cast mat in PU
with RF finish and cast-in ramp
edge trim ASK-1T4.4-RF
ASK-1U4.4-RF. No ramp edge
trim:
76-310-05
1000 x 750 mm
76-310-06
1000 x 1000 mm
76-310-07
1000 x 1500 mm
ASK-1T4.4-RF. Cast-in ramp
edge trim:76-310-10
1000 x 750 mm
76-310-11
1000 x 1000 mm
76-310-12
1000 x 1500 mm
The above have a PU surface
layer. Mats are available in any
size and in other materials.
Max. area
Entire mat = 2500 x 1400 mm
10 m2 (divided mat)
Height
10mm without ribbed surface
max 14.5 mm with ribbed
surface
Inactive Area
Nominally 10mm from Mat edge
Switching Force
150N (Round body 80mm)
Max. Pressure
2000 N over ø 80 mm
Material
Yellow polyurethane, black rubber coating
Protection Class
IP 67
Ambient Air Temperature
-20°C to + 60°C
Chemical Resistance
Oil, grease
10% acid
10% alkaline (caustic) solutions
good
resistant
resistant
Cable
2 x 5 m, 2 x 0,34 mm2,
PU sheathed
Mechanical Life
> 1,5x106 load shifting
1
2
3
4
5
Connection cabling including 1
off M8 male and 1 off M8 female:
76-900-32
2.5 m
76-900-33
5m
6
Edge Trim - Safety Mats
Edge trim RS 14
Eliminates vertical edges and attaches the
Safety Mat to the floor. Also provides protection and channel for connection cables.
Profile BS14
Best for use on the side nearest the machine.
Permits a shorter distance from, for example, a
wall.
Corner trim
Can be used between two RS 14 profiles as an
alternative to mitre cutting of profiles.
ASK-1U4.4-RF
7
8
Connection cable
Channel for connection cable
Surface protection
9
Fixing profile
10
Base unit
Corner connection
ASK-1T4.4-RF
Completely moulded mat
with moulded
edge profiles in PU.
Secured area + 70 mm
Non-secured area
11
Non-secured area
Non-secured area + 70 mm
Angle fixing profile
12
Connection cable
www.jokabsafety.com
10:9
13
Surface layer - Safety mats
Safety mats are normally supplied with a ribbed polyurethane non-slip surface layer that withstands tough conditions very well (oil, acid or caustic
substances) and has anti-slip properties. If required, other patterns can be
supplied, or for special requirements even other materials, such as NBR
rubber or chequer plating in aluminium or stainless steel. Safety mats can
also be supplied without a surface layer, to have a full coverage rubber sheet
glued on during installation. Please contact us for more information about
these alternatives.
Safety distance - safety mat as per EN 999
If a safety mat is used as entry protection, the smallest
permitted safety distance between the hazardous area
and the outer edge of the mat (seen from the hazard) is
calculated using the formula from EN 999.
S = (K * T) + C
where
S = smallest permitted safety distance in mm
K = body speed (velocity of propagation 1600 mm/s)
C = additional distance in mm based on the intrusion of
the body into the risk zone before the protection device
is actuated (1200 mm)
i.e.
S = (1600 * T) + 1200
Mounting - Safety Mats
The ground on which the mats are to be laid must be level, clean and dry. The mats
should not be glued to the ground.
Place mat in required position with groundplate downwards.
If more than one mat is to be installed be sure to place the mats edge to edge (without
space).
If the mats are delivered without the ribbed surface premounted, the selected surface
should be placed in position over the mats and fixed by means of a suitable adhesive.
In the case of safety mats with cast-in rubber edge trim, the mat is secured to the floor
by screws straight through the edge trim. In the case of safety mats with an aluminium
edge trim, see below.
Place the selected edge trim to the mat. Edge trims are usually mitred (at 45 degrees)
to provide complete protection around the corners of the mat.
Mark the cable routes on the edge trim and cut out slots to allow cable access into the
cable channel as indicated. Connect the cables as shown under Electrical Connection.
Mark the locations of the securing screws along the scribed line on the edge trim. It is
recommended that fixing screws should be located at 60 cm spacing.
Secure the edge trim to the ground with 6 mm plugs and suitable screws. Plug the holes
above the screws in the edge trim with the cover plugs provided.
NOTE!
Safety mats must not be rolled/twisted or modified in any way. It is also essential that
mats are not cut into any shape or shortened following delivery.
10:10
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Electrical connection - Safety contact rails, bumpers and safety mats
Contact edge, bumper or safety mat must be connected
to a suitable monitoring unit (e.g. Jokab Safety safety relays RT6, RT7A/B, RT9, RT10, Vital with Tina 6A or Pluto
safety-PLC).
2
The monitoring unit monitors the functionality of the contact protection and detects any breaks or short-circuits in
the lines. Several crush protection units can be connected
in series while still retaining the same level of safety.
3
When pressure is applied, the active surface of the contact area in the contact protection is closed and the safety output on the monitoring unit trips. A stop signal will
be sent to the machine's safety circuits preventing any
dangerous movements.
4
5
Note! If alternative units are used rather than the recommended Jokab safety relays, it is essential that the user checks their suitability with Jokab Safety before use. Failure to do so may result in incorrect operation and/or damage to the safety bumpers and
invalidate warranty.
6
7
HK7601A – Connection contact protection for safety relay RT6
8
9
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
10:11
13
HK3310A – Connection contact protection for safety module Vital 1
HK0001A – Connection contact protection for safety PLC Pluto
10:12
www.jokabsafety.com
Fencing system
Quick-Guard® and Safety Roller Door
www.jokabsafety.com
Contents
Page
1
A flexible and stable fencing system which is easy to install_____________ 11:2
Quick-Guard® is supplied in three posibilities _________________________ 11:4
2
Quick-Guard® E - design directly on site ______________________________ 11:5
Quick-Guard® E - can be ordered in sections__________________________ 11:6
3
Quick-Guard® standard and SafeCAD® _______________________________ 11:8
Quick-Guard® Assembly, standard version ____________________________ 11:9
4
Assembly using NL2 and NL3 Net-locks on welded mesh ______________ 11:10
Dimensions of aluminium profile lengths and panels __________________ 11:11
5
Components
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
!LUMINIUMPROFILES __________________________________________________________
&ITTINGS ___________________________________________________________________
$OOR#OMPONENTS __________________________________________________________
&ITTINGSFOR3WITCHES ________________________________________________________
4ERMINAL#APSAND3TRIPS ____________________________________________________
!CCESSORIES _______________________________________________________________
)NFILL0ANELS-ESHAND3HEETS ________________________________________________
11:12
11:15
11:18
11:27
11:30
11:31
11:32
Safety Roller Door ________________________________________________ 11:34
6
7
8
9
10
11
While every effort has been taken to ensure the accuracy of information contained in this book and any associated promotional and information material
JOKAB SAFETY cannot accept responsibility for errors or omissions and reserves the right to make any improvements without notice. It is the users
responsibility to ensure that this equipment is correctly designed, specified, installed, cared for and operated to meet all applicable local, national and
international codes/regulations. Technical data in our book is correct to the level of accuracy of Jokab Safety´s test procedures as verified by various
international approved bodies. Other information (such as application examples, wiring diagrams, operation or use) is intended solely to illustrate
the various uses of our products. JOKAB SAFETY does not guarentee or imply that the product when used in accordance with such examples in
a particular environment will fulfil any particular safety requirement and does not assume any responsibility or liability for actual use of the product
based on the examples given. 2008 v02.
www.jokabsafety.com
11:1
12
13
Quick-Guard® - fencing system
Quick-Guard Standard assembled with
mesh.
Quick-Guard Standard with black and
transparent Polycarbonate in-fill panels
as used for medical applications.
Quick-Guard E with few
components and easy to angle at up
to 45°.
A flexible and stable fencing system which is easy to install
Advantages
Brackets are supplied pre-mounted
with screws and nuts
Easy to adjust, assemble and modify
Designed for various types of mesh,
solid and noise reduction panels
Adaption and Modification
Quick-Guard is a very flexible fencing system consisting of
a minimum of different components, e.g. aluminium profiles,
patented brackets, net-locks, mesh, solid or noise reduction panels. Using these components there are almost no
limitations as to what can be built. Quick-Guard fencing
costs little to assemble and modify.
Short delivery time
SafeCAD, a special program for
drawing Quick-Guard in 3D, from which
2D and other 3D views can be created.
Cutting lists can also be created from
this program.
Our policy - To create systems that are
environmentally friendly and provide ergonomic
working conditions
Quick-Guard is environmentally friendly. All components
in the Fencing System can easily be disassembled and
reused. All materials in the Fencing System are 100%
recyclable. Quick-Guard can also provide a pleasing
ergonomic working environment.
Assembly
$UETOOURPATENTEDSCREWLOCKSYSTEMWECANSUPPLYALL
brackets pre-mounted with fixing screws and nuts. No holes
need to be drilled in the profiles and all cutting is straight.
This makes assembly and modification very easy.
Two versions of Quick-Guard
The Quick-Guard fencing system is available in two versions,
Quick-Guard (Standard) and Quick-Guard E which also can
be combined. The fencing systems are also easy to adjust
when production equipment is modified and/or moved.
Proposal and ordering
"YUTILISINGOUR!UTO#!$BASED3AFE#!$PROGRAMWEARE
ABLETOMAKESYSTEMDESIGNSIN$VERYQUICKLY$RAWINGS
CUTTING LISTS ETC ARE GENERATED FROM 3AFE#!$ AND THE
drawings can also be used for installation purposes.
11:2
Patented screw-lock system and netlocks keep the
mesh in place when subjected to heavy loading.
www.jokabsafety.com
1
What does the standard say?
mm
The European safety distance standard EN ISO 13857
provides information on acceptable safety distances in
hazardous areas.
These figures give examples of the safety distances required for two different fencing heights, where the risk is
considered to be low if somebody reaches into the hazardous area. If there is a risk of direct injury and/or personal can be dragged into the hazardous area the safety
distances must be increased. For accepted heights and
distances please refer to EN ISO 13857 and other relevant standards/regulations. When mesh is used there must
be a minimum distance of 200 mm (for persons older than
14 years) for a mesh size of 40x40 mm. For shorter distances and for noise reduction, polycarbonate sheet should
be considered. When the fence shall protect for example
a robot cell, the fence should be placed with a minimum
distance of 500 mm between the guard fence and the moving machine part which reaches the furthest (according
TO %. $URING TEST DRIVING AND PROGRAMMING THERE
has to be space between the fence and moving parts to
prevent the operator from being squeezed between them.
Jokab Safety will be pleased to advise on guarding design and safety distances required.
0 200 500
900
mm
0 350
2500
2500
2000
2
1600
3
Safety distance for
1600 mm
guarding with
standard mesh.
Safety distance for 2000
mm guarding with solid
screens (e.g. polycarbonate sheet).
4
5
6
Quick-Guard Fencing System, what does it manage?
Quick-Guard is a fencing system which is designed to
manage the requirements from a safety perspective. It manages to stop machine parts and material that, during a
malfunction, can be thrown against the fence. We have
made collision tests with a large industrial robot, ABB Irb
6600, which was driven into the fence at a pace of 3 m/s.
Both our Standard and Express fencing system withstood
this. Thanks to our patented net-lock, both net and polycarbonate panels remained firmly attached to the aluminum
profile. A video showing these tests is available on our
website. In our tension-tests of up to 500 kg, both net and
polycarbonate panels also remained firmly in the aluminum
profiles. The fence was deformed during the collision but it
sprung back, with some deformation as a result.
In our pulling tests of up
to 500 kg, both mesh and
polycarbonate panels remained firmly attached to the
the profile.
7
8
Patented assembly function
9
The Jokab Safety patented guide and locking method
makes it simple to assemble and dismantle the fencing
system. The nut has several advantages, it can easily be
located into the profile and automatically positions itself
when the screw is turned 90 degrees clockwise. When
in this position the bracket being fixed can be adjusted
as required and locked by turning the screw further clockwise. To remove the bracket the fixing screw is turned
anti-clockwise until the nut is in line with the profile slot.
10
#ENTRALISINGAND
turning limitations
Locking
perpendicular
to profile slot
patented
#ENTRINGWASHER
-OUNTTHElXTURESBYlRSTSLACKENINGTHESCREWTURN
anti-clockwise. Then tighten the screw clockwise in the
usual way. The nut will then automatically mechanically
lock the fixture into the profile.
!LLlTTINGSARESUPPLIED0REASSEMBLEDFittings that do
not have a cast-in tab can be provided with a centring
washer.
www.jokabsafety.com
11:3
11
12
13
Quick-Guard® is supplied in three ways
1. To be designed on site
You only order sections consisting of a few components.
Then the fencing system is built on site. A manual mesh
clipping tool, for easy cutting of the mesh, is provided
with the delivery if needed.
2. Cut to size according
to drawing
9OU GIVE US A SIMPLE SKETCH OR A !UTO#!$¸ lLE OF
how you want the fencing system to look. We input this
INFORMATIONINTO3AFE#!$ANDDESIGNTHEFENCEIN$
From this drawing, cutting and component lists and a
quotation are generated automatically.
3. Pre-mounted or assembled on site
We can deliver full/partially preassembled fencing systems or we
can assemble them on site.
11:4
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Quick-Guard® E - design directly on site
Quick-Guard E is installed quickly and cost effectively
because it only consists of patented net-locks, welded
mesh, panels of polycarbonate, u-profiles and fence posts
(profiles with floor-brackets). All parts for Quick-Guard
and pre-assembled doors are delivered immediately from
stock. The few components of the fencing system make it
easy for you to custom build and install the fencing system
yourselves.
The strength of the fencing system originates from the
fact that the welded mesh and/or panels of polycarbonate
are ‘locked’ into the profile. The outer wire of the mesh
is locked by uniquely designed ‘netlocks’ into the profile
making the fixing virtually as strong as being welded. The
polycarbonate panels are locked in with specially designed
infill-locks which, according to our tests, have been as
strong as the mesh netlock system. If you want more stable
fencing posts, you can choose a sturdier profile measuring
44 x 88 mm instead of the standard 44 x 44 mm profile.
It is always easy to combine Quick-Guard E with QuickGuard standard to achieve a complete system. It is also easy
to adjust and modify the guarding system when production
equipment is modified and/or moved.
2
3
4
5
Quick-Guard E is easy to assemble
and to angle 45°.
6
Assembly of Quick-Guard E
1.
2.
7
U-profile
8
Spacer screw
*3-
Net-lock NL2
0REMOUNTmOORlXTURESONVERTICALPOSTS-OUNTlXTURESBY
first slackening the screw anti-clockwise. Then tighten the
screw clockwise in the usual way, the nut will then automatically locate into the correct position and mechanically
LOCKTHElXTUREINTOTHEPROlLE-AKESURETHATTHENUTHAS
turned correctly.
1. Insert spacer screw into the post profiles.
0LACETHELOWERUPROlLEONTHEMESH
0USHTHEMESHINTOTHEPROlLEANDlXTHEMESHWITH
NL2 netlocks.
4. Fix top u-profile in place either before or after inserting
the mesh.
3.
4.
9
10
11
Assemble the next section. The distance between the
posts can be adjusted some mm after the mesh is locked
in with the Net-locks. The mesh can be angled up to 45°
WITHOUTUSINGHINGES*3-+
Lock the top of the mesh using NL3 netlocks; this way
the mesh is secured, stabilised and electrically grounded.
Grounding is needed when electrical devices or cables are
assembled on the mesh.
www.jokabsafety.com
11:5
12
13
Quick-Guard® E - can be ordered in sections
Quick-Guard Express can be ordered in different sections consisting of a few components. By adding the different sections, one can easily build a guard fencing system. We have also developed a software program in
Excel for you to be able to quickly calculate which components you will need and to visualize a fencing system
built with sections.
One can easily assemble the Express sections. It is also possible to angle these sections (45°). The mesh can easily
be cut to the desired size with a simple clipping tool.
Designation explanation.
H, X, Y, Z, G, S and
X = Section type
JSM E11-N/PC20H8
Express
IMAGE
11 = c-c 1100 mm
15 = c-c 1500 mm
.-ESH
20 = Height 2000 mm XMM0ROlLE
0#POLYCARBONATE 22 = Height 2200 mm XMM0ROlLE
DESIGNATION
ART.NO.
DESCRIPTION
Section X
*3-%.8
*3-%.8
*3-%.8
*3-%.0#8
*3-%.0#8
*3-%0#8
*3-%0#8
*3-%.8
*3-%.8
*3-%.8
11:6
40-106-02
40-101-03
40-102-03
40-104-01
40-105-01
40-101-53
40-102-53
40-106-10
40-101-09
40-102-08
#OMPONENTS FOR AN ADDITIONAL SECTION WITH ONLY
one post. The height can be varied between
2000 mm or 2200 mm. The section is supplied
unassembled.
Included parts: Floorbracket, netlocks/panel
locks, support screws, edge protection, Aluminum profile and welded steel mesh/panel sheet.
www.jokabsafety.com
IMAGE
DESIGNATION
ART.NO.
*3-%9
*3-%9
*3-%9
40-106-80
40-103-21
40-103-41
DESCRIPTION
1
#OMPONENTSFORACOMPLETEPOSTWITHmOORBRACKet to finalize the additional sections. The height
can be varied between 2000 mm or 2200 mm.
The section is supplied unassembled.
2
Section Y
Included parts: Floorbracket, support screw, and
Aluminum profile.
Section Z
4
*3-%.:
*3-%.:
*3-%.:
*3-%.0#:
*3-%.0#:
*3-%0#:
*3-%0#:
*3-%0#:
*3-%.:
*3-%.:
*3-%.:
40-106-04
40-101-04
40-102-04
40-104-02
40-105-02
40-106-54
40-101-54
40-102-54
40-106-08
40-101-10
40-102-09
#OMPONENTSFORACOMPLETESECTIONWITHOUT
fence posts and floor brackets. The height can
be varied between 2000 mm or 2200 mm. The
section is supplied unassembled.
*3-%.'
*3-%.'
*3-%.0#'
*3-%.0#'
*3-%0#'
*3-%0#'
*3-%0#'
40-101-05
40-102-05
40-104-03
40-105-03
40-106-55
40-101-55
40-102-55
#OMPONENTSFORCOMPLETECONVENTIONALDOOR
with outer profile 44x88 mm. The height can
be varied between 2000 mm or 2200 mm. The
section is supplied unassembled. The size of the
door can easily be adjusted on site.
Included parts: Netlocks/panel locks, edge protection and welded steel mesh/panel sheet.
5
6
Section G
4HEDOORLEAFIS
supplied pre-mounted.
3
Included parts: L-brackets, floorbrackets, netlocks/panel locks, handle, hinges, door stop,
crossbar, aluminum profiles and welded steel
mesh/panel sheet.
7
8
9
Section S
*3-%.3
*3-%.3
*3-%.0#3
*3-%.0#3
*3-%0#3
*3-%0#3
40-101-06
40-102 -06
40-104-04
40-105-04
40-101-57
40-102-56
*3-%.3
*3-%.3
40-101-11
40-102-10
#OMPONENTSFORACOMPLETESLIDINGDOORWITH
outer profile 44x88 mm. The height can be varied between 2000 mm or 2200 mm. The section
is supplied unassembled. The size of the door
can easily be adjusted on location.
Included parts: L-brackets, T-brackets, floorbrackets, netlocks/panel locks, handle, suspension
wheels, guiding components, door stop, crossbar, endcaps, aluminum profiles and welded
steelmesh/panel sheet.
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
11:7
13
Quick-Guard® Standard and SafeCAD®
Quick-Guard consists of a minimum of different components,
such as aluminum profiles, patented assembly parts, netlocks, mesh, solid or noise reduction panels. Furthermore
the cost for assembly and modification of the system is
low. Thanks to our patented screw-lock system, we can
supply all brackets pre-mounted with fixing screws and
nuts. No holes need to be drilled in the profiles and all cuts
are made straight. Assembly and modification is therefore
very easy.
To be able to quickly and easily custom design practical
safety solutions, we have developed a computer programme,
3AFE#[email protected]!UTO#!$¸. A simple sketch of the guarding system that is required is used
as the program input. The positions of doors and hatches,
choice of mesh, polycarbonate, aluminum/steel sheet or
noise reduction panels are typed in. The program automatiCALLY GENERATES $ DRAWINGS ALONG WITH COMPONENT AND
cutting lists. These drawings are also used as the basis for
assembly/ installation.
It is always easy to combine Quick-Guard E with QuickGuard to achieve a complete system. It is also easy to adjust
and modify when the production equipment is modified
and/or moved.
Brackets are delivered
Pre-assembled with
screws and nuts.
SafeCAD®
Example of component and cutting list print-outs from SafeCad.
Quote
!RTICLENO
$ESCRIPTION
*3-"+&LOORBRACKET
*3-"+,BRACKET
*3-"+4BRACKET
*3-+&LOORBRACKETINSTEEL
#UTLIST0OLYCARBONATE
*3-3UPORTSCREWFOR%CONOMY
!RTICLENO
$ESCRIPTION
*3-!%DGEPROTECTIONPROlLEFORWELDEDMESH
*3-90#!0CSHEETMMUNCOLOUREDX
1TY
1TY ,ENGTH
*3-90#!0CSHEETMMUNCOLOUREDCUTTOSIZE
*3-90#!0CSHEETMMUNCOLOUREDCUTTOSIZE
*3-90#!0CSHEETMMUNCOLOUREDCUTTOSIZE
#UTLIST7ELDED-ESH
!RTICLENO
$ESCRIPTION
*3-9.77ELDEDSTEELMESHXXBLACKX
*3-9.77ELDEDSTEELMESHXXBLACKX
*3-9.77ELDEDSTEELMESHXXBLACKCUTTOSIZE
*3-9.77ELDEDSTEELMESHXXBLACKCUTTOSIZE
*3-9.77ELDEDSTEELMESHXXBLACKCUTTOSIZE
*3-9.77ELDEDSTEELMESHXXBLACKCUTTOSIZE
11:8
1TY
5NIT
PCS
PCS
PCS
PCS
PCS
7IDTH
M
3UMM
,ENGTH
www.jokabsafety.com
7IDTH
3UMM
1
Quick-Guard® Assembly, standard version
Assembly of the Quick-Guard¸ system is very easy. All components are very light in weight and ergonomic in design. This
enables, in most cases, one man to be able to assemble both simple and complex structures with ease using very few
different types of fixing components. All fixtures can be mounted easily from “outside” by using the specially designed
”locking nut” which can be located anywhere in the extrusion channel. The fixture components, by means of integral
locating keys, ensure that correct angles are achieved and enable the number of bolts/nuts to be reduced to half the
number that would otherwise be required.
1.
2
3
2.
4
5
0REMOUNTmOORlXTURESBYlRSTSLACKENINGTHESCREWANTI
clockwise. Then tighten the screw clockwise in the usual
way. The nut will then automatically locate into the correct
position and mechanically lock the fixture into the profile.
Attach lower horizontal extrusion between vertical posts.
Use a a spacing block to ensure the correct distance from
the floor.
3.
4.
6
7
8
Insert infill panel and fix middle horizontal profile. The
distance between the profiles is the width of the infill
minus 20 mm.
Insert top infill panel. Fix top profile with fittings on the
top on both sides.
5.
6.
9
10
11
Fix the poles to the floor.
Secure infill sheet with plastic strip or Net-lock fixings.
Easy, fast and quick. See more under Assembly of netlocks.
)FTHEREISARISKOFTHEROBOTSTRIKINGTHEPOLYCARBONATE*3-
0,PANELLOCKSMUSTBEUSED
www.jokabsafety.com
11:9
12
13
Assembly using NL2 and NL3 Net-locks on welded mesh
NL2 Net-lock
NL3 Net-lock
-ESHWITHOUTERWIRE
The outer mesh
wire is locked into
the profile.
-ESHWITHOUTOUTERWIRE
max 2 mm
max 2 mm
When assembling the Net-lock NL2 it is first put into
the profile as the drawing shows. Then the Net-lock is
turned 90°. When cutting the welded mesh the wire
ends should not be longer than two (2) mm.
The outer mesh wire is
locked into the profile.
min 15 mm
The Net-lock locks
the mesh against
the profile.
When assembling the Net-lock NL3 it is first put into
the profile with the tabs on each side of the mesh wire.
The screw is then tightened. When cutting the welded
mesh the wire ends should be at least 15 mm to fit
into the profile. NL3 must be used to lock the mesh
into the slot.
Number of Net-locks
Number of Net-locks Quick-Guard
standard version
On Quick-Guard standard version NL3 is recommended
as it can handle mesh with and without an outer wire.
about 400 mm
Number of Net-locks Quick-Guard E
On Quick-Guard E both Net-lock NL2 and NL3 can be
used. For mesh edges without outer wire NL3 must be
used instead of NL2.
90 mm
NL3 is used in order
to mechanically lock
the mesh and to
electrically ground
the mesh.
approx. 350 mm
NL2 or NL3
N
e
!o
t
O
hw
m
-w
d
ted
nlish
e
NL2 or NL3
out an outer wire NL3
must be used.
90 mm
NL2 or NL3
NL2 or NL3
NOTE! On both Quick-Guard Standard and Quick-Guard E at least two NL3 should be used in order to
mechanically lock the mesh and to electrically ground the mesh. NL3 should only be used on doors.
Fixing posts to the floor when mesh is required to be fitted at a later date.
Right
Wrong
Temporarily mount at least two middle profiles before drilling and fixing posts to the floor. This method is used when
infill mesh or panels are to be fitted at a later date.
Note! Never attempt to fix the posts to the floor without
first connecting at least two middle profiles to ensure the
posts are parallel to each other and vertical.
11:10
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Dimensions for aluminum profile lengths and panels.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Material
0OLYCARBONATE
7ELDEDMESH
3TEELPANEL
Sound-absorbing panel 25mm
Sound-absorbing 50 mm
,AMINATEDGLASS
$OUBLE0C
3OUNDABSORBENTPANELPROlLE*3-!3
3OUNDABSORBINGPROlLE*3-!3
$OUBLE0CPROlLE*3-!3
Width
8MM
8MM
8MM
X-37 mm
X-37 mm
8MM
PCS8
PCS,8
PCS,8(mitred 2 x 45 degrees)
PCS,8
Height
9MM
9MM
9MM
Y-37 mm
Y-37 mm
9MM
PCS9
PCS,9
2 pcs. L=Y (mitred 2 x 45 degrees)
PCS,9
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
11:11
13
ALUMINUM PROFILES
A wide range of aluminium profiles are available and include, fencing profile, guide rails, and cable ducting. The cable
ducting is available in three sizes, and can be delivered with or without mounting holes. The cable ducting is easy to
OPENANDCANBEPROVIDEDWITHENDCAPS#OVERSTRIPSOFPLASTICAREALSOAVAILABLEINCLUDINGFENCINGPROlLESMAKING
the entire groove cross section utilisable as ‘installation conduit’ for cables. The Aluminium profiles have integral "V"
grooves to aid in centring any drilling that may be necessary.
Fencing Profile
44
20,25
11
3,3
16,5
Ø 5,6 (2x)
32
*3-!!
40-037-35 (cut to sizes)
40-037-98 (L=1400)
40-037-37 (L=2000)
40-037-38 (L=2000)
40-037-39 (L=2400)
40-037-40 (L=2500)
40-037-41 (L=6000)
11
20,25
20,25
44
v
3,3
11,5
11
v
3,3
*3-!
40-037-75 (cut to length)
40-037-79 (L=6000)
N
atural anodized aluminium
X
88
v
Ø 5,6 (4x)
v
v
v
11,5
v
v
v
3,3
88
v
v
-ATERIAL
$IMENSIONS
44
v
$ESIGNATION
Article numbers:
v
v
$IMENSIONS
Order Unit:
v
v
-ATERIAL
88
v
11,5
*3-!!
40-037-42 (cut to sizes)
40-037-43 (L=2000)
40-037-44 (L=2200)
40-037-45 (L=6000)
.ATURALANODIZED
aluminium
XMM
5 pcs/box
v
$ESIGNATION
Article numbers:
v
.ATURALANODIZEDALUMINIUM
XMM
10 pcs/box
v
v
-ATERIAL
$IMENSIONS
Order Unit:
44
v
$ESIGNATION
Article numbers:
11
20,25
-ATERIAL
$IMENSIONS
*3-!
40-037-70 (cut to length)
40-037-74 (L=6000)
.ATURALLYANODIZEDALUMINIUM
XMM
11,5
$ESIGNATION
Article numbers:
44
55,8
75,4
Ø 8 (4x)
Technical data
Angular moment
11:12
Flexural resistance
Typ
Vikt (kg/m)
lx (mm4x104)
ly (mm4x104)
Wx (mm3x103)
Wy (mm3x103)
*3-!
1.040
1.1
7.6
1.19
3.43
*3-!!
1.504
12.4
12.4
5.64
5.64
*3-!!
2.379
79.6
21.6
18.1
9.8
*3-!
3.632
143.0
143.0
32.5
32.5
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Fencing U-Profile
-ATERIAL
Weight:
*3-!
40-037-28 (cut to sizes, max 2.0 m)
40-037-27 (L=1076)
40-037-46 (L=1476)
40-037-47 (L=2000)
.ATURALANODIZEDALUMINIUM
0.230 kg/m
10,4
2
23
$ESIGNATION
Article numbers:
3
H-profile
10,4
6,7
4
3
-ATERIAL
Weight:
*3-!
*3-!CUTTOSIZES
40-037-51 (L=1076)
40-037-52 (L=1476)
40-037-53 (L=2020)
.ATURALANODIZEDALUMINIUM
0.452 kg/m
44
$ESIGNATION
!RTICLENUMBERS
5
Guide Rails
*3-!"
40-037-26
.ATURALANODIZEDALUMINIUM
c-c = 275 mm, ø = 6 mm
4.0 m
0.530 kg/m
$ESIGNATION
Article number:
*3-!
40-037-49
#UTTOSIZESINCLSCREWS
40-037-08
(Length 2.0 m, incl. screws)
40-037-48
(Length 6.0 m, incl. screws)
3CREW*3-3%
.UT*3--"
.ATURALANODIZEDALUMINIUM
c-c = 450 mm, ø = 8.5 mm
2.0; 6.0 m
1.585 kg/m
33
6
34
$ESIGNATION
Article number:
-ATERIAL
Holes:
Standard Length:
Weight:
7
79
8
v
9
17
$ELIVEREDWITH
-ATERIAL
Holes:
Standard Length:
Weight:
56
Cable Ducting
10
v
25
44
v
11
v
*3-!"
Order Unit:
Weight:
*3-!?
*3-!!
*3-!"
.ATURALANODIZEDALUMINIUM
XMM
2.0 m
WITHHOLESCCMM
ø= 5 mm
WITHOUTHOLES
10 pcs/box
KGM*3-!!
KGM*3-!"
v
$ESIGNATION
!RTICLENUMBERS
-ATERIAL
$IMENSIONS
Standard Length:
*3-!!
www.jokabsafety.com
12
11:13
13
v
60
v
v
v
68
88
v
v
*3-!
40-037-33
.ATURALANODIZEDALUMINIUM
XMM
2.0 m
1,844 kg/m
v
v
$ESIGNATION
Article number:
-ATERIAL
$IMENSIONS
Standard Length:
Weight:
44
v
*3-!"
Order Unit:
Weight:
*3-!?
*3-!!
*3-!"
.ATURALANODIZEDALUMINIUM
XMM
2.0 m
WITHHOLESCCMM
ø = 5 mm
WITHOUTHOLES
10 pcs/box
KGM*3-!!
KGM*3-!"
v
$ESIGNATION
!RTICLENUMBERS
-ATERIAL
$IMENSIONS
Standard Length:
*3-!!
v
v
v
Cable tie
$ESIGNATION
*3-8
Article number:
40-033-43
0REASSEMBLEDWITH3CREWSAND.UTS
Order Unit:
10 pcs/box
-ATERIAL
.YLONBLACK
Profiles for installation of acoustic damping
Profile for 25 mm sound-absorbing panel, JSM YLA25A_
43,4
23,7
36,5
-ATERIAL
$IMENSIONS
Weight:
*3-!3
40-037-95 (cut to length)
40-037-09 (L=2000)
.ATURALLYANODIZEDALUMINIUM
XMM
0,545 kg/m
20
$ESIGNATION
Article numbers:
29,1
Profile for 50 mm sound-absorbing panel, JSM YLA50A
51
36,5
43,3
-ATERIAL
$IMENSIONS
Weight:
*3-!3
42-021-80 (cut to length)
42-021-81 (L=6000)
.ATURALLYANODIZEDALUMINIUM
X
0,694 kg/m
20
$ESIGNATION
Article numbers:
22
44
55
Profile for double 5mm Polycarbonate panel, JSM YPC5_
11:14
4,9
23,2
-ATERIAL
$IMENSIONS
Weight:
*3-!3
40-037-96 (cut to length)
40-037-10 (L=2000)
.ATURALLYANODIZEDALUMINIUM
XMM
0,510 kg/m
16,3
$ESIGNATION
Article numbers:
40
www.jokabsafety.com
1
FITTINGS
Jokab Safety’s fencing system is put together with various types of fitting. Uprights are anchored to the floor with
floor angle fittings. With a small angle fitting it is possible to hang an electrical enclosure and strengthen the corners
OFFREESTANDINGWALLS#ORNERSANDJOINTSARECONSTRUCTEDWITHTHEAIDOF4,AND)lTTINGS)FANGLESDIFFERENTTO²
BETWEENTHEFENCESECTIONSAREREQUIREDA*3-+ANGLElTTINGCANBEUSED4HISHINGEHASADISTANCEBETWEEN
centres of 47 mm, which means that the gap between uprights will always be less than 20 mm. According to EN
ISO 13857, the minimum permitted protection distance is 120 mm for a gap narrower than 20 mm.
2
3
Floor/Angle fitting
$ESIGNATION
*3-+
Article numbers:
40-030-14
0REASSEMBLEDWITH3CREW*3-3#X
Washer 9 x 18 x 1,5 (x 2)
.UTS*3--"X
-ATERIAL
!LUMINIUM
Quantity:
10 pcs/box
4
5
$ESIGNATION
*3-"+
Article number:
40-030-06
0REASSEMBLEDWITH3CREW*3-3#X
Washer 9 x 18 1,5 (x 2)
.UT*3--"X
-ATERIAL
!LUMINIUM
Order Unit:
10 pcs/box
6
7
$ESIGNATION
*3-"+
Article numbers:
40-030-11
0REASSEMBLEDWITH 3CREWS*3-3#X
Washers 9 x 18 x 1,5 (x 4)
.UTS*3--"X
7ASHERS*3-""X
-ATERIAL
!LUMINIUM
Quantity:
10 pcs/box
$ESIGNATION
*3-+
Article number:
40-030-09
0REASSEMBLEDWITH3CREW*3-3$X
.UT*3--"X
Article number:
40-030-10
$ESIGNATION
*3-+
0REASSEMBLEDWITH3CREW*3-3$X
.UT*3--"X
-ATERIAL
:INCPLATEDSTEEL
Order Unit:
10 pcs/box
8
9
10
*3-+
11
*3-+
12
www.jokabsafety.com
11:15
13
Small Angle fitting, e.g. Electrical cabinet fitting
$ESIGNATION
*3-"+
Two counter sunk holes
*3-!+
One counter sunk hole
!RTICLENUMBER
*3-B-K)
*3-!+
0REASSEMBLEDWITH 3CREW*3-3#
.UT*3--"
-ATERIAL
!LUMINIUM
Order unit:
10 pcs/box
L-bracket
$ESIGNATION
*3-"+
Article number:
40-030-07
0REASSEMBLEDWITH3CREW*3-3!
.UT*3--"
-ATERIAL
!LUMINIUM
Order Unit:
10 pcs/box
105
105
6
41
T-bracket
169
105
$ESIGNATION
*3-"+
Article number:
40-030-08
0REASSEMBLEDWITH 3
CREW*3-3!
.UT*3--"
-ATERIAL
!LUMINIUM
Order Unit:
10 pcs/box
6
41
I-bracket, joint
85
41
$ESIGNATION
*3-!+
Article number:
40-031-04
0REASSEMBLEDWITH 3CREW*3-3!
.UT*3--"
-ATERIAL
!LUMINIUM
Order Unit:
10 pcs/box
6
44
Distance screw
$ESIGNATION
Article number:
-ATERIAL
Order unit:
11:16
*3-
40-033-31
:INCPLATEDSTEEL
100 pcs/box
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Angle bracket
2
102
$ESIGNATION
*3-+
Article number:
40-033-14
0REASSEMBLEDWITH3CREW*3-3!
.UT*3--"
-ATERIAL
:INCPLATEDSTEEL
Hole:
c-c =47 mm
Order unit:
2 pcs/box
3
Note!4HE*3-+MUSTONLYBEUSEDFOR
making fence angles.
47
75
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
11:17
13
DOOR COMPONENTS
To mount conventional doors a hinge is available which permits an opening angle of 180°. For mounting a sliding
door, guide rails and suspension wheels are utilised. Other sliding elements make it possible to build different types of
hatches. Guide rollers, for wide and heavy doors, door closers, fittings for sensors/switches etc are also available.
11:18
Conventional Door
Sliding Door
Hatch
Double Hatch
Folding Hatch
Sliding Hatch
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Hinge kit
2
102
$ESIGNATION
*3-$!Hinge
Article number:
40-033-15
0REASSEMBLEDWITH3CREW*3-3!
.UT*3--"
-ATERIAL
:INCPLATEDSTEEL
Fixing Holes :
c-c = 62 mm
Order Unit:
2 pcs/box
Note!*3-$!MUSTNOTBEUSEDASAFENCINGANGLE
fitting because its gap can exceed 20 mm.
3
62
3
95
4
22
28
5
115
$ESIGNATION
*3-$"Spring hinge
Article numbers:
42-020-47
0REASSEMBLEDWITH3PACERPLATESCREWSNUTS
-ATERIAL
Zinc-plated steel
NOTE! The door gap will be 28 mm when installed.
6
76
Handle
$ESIGNATION
*3-$Handle
Article number:
40-033-01
0REASSEMBLEDWITH 3CREW*3-3$
.UT*3--"
-ATERIAL
4HERMOPLASTICBLACK
26
150
7
8
44
9
40
22
10
150
$ESIGNATION
*3-$Handle
Article number:
42-020-50
-ATERIAL
Handle:
Thermoplastic, black
Fittings:
Aluminum
0REASSEMBLEDWITH 3CREWSAND.UTS
Suitable sliding door on the inside of the fence.
70
119
5 26
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
11:19
13
Door closer
$ESIGNATION
*3-$
(conventional door)
-ATERIAL
$OORCLOSERSTEEL
Bracket - Aluminum
Article number:
40-033-02
0REASSEMBLEDWITH 3CREWSAND.UTS
$ESIGNATION
*3-$SLIDINGDOOR
Article number:
42-020-56
-ATERIAL
:INCPLATEDSTEEL
0REASSEMBLEDWITH 3CREWSAND.UTS
Gas spring
$ESIGNATION
'ASSPRINGINCLUDINGMOUNT
Article numbers:
42-024-10
Stroke length:
300 mm
-ATERIAL
3TEEL
0REASSEMBLEDWITH 3CREWSAND.UTS
$ESIGNATION
*3-$!'ASSPRINGINCLUDING
mount
Article numbers:
42-024-11
Stroke length:
350 mm
-ATERIAL
3TEEL
0REASSEMBLEDWITH 3CREWSAND.UTS
Fixing details included:
Side fastener (42-021-27)
U fitting (42-021-28)
Specify the required force when ordering
Securing plate for padlock
Article number:
-ATERIAL
*3-$"RACKETFOR0ADLOCK
hasp
40-020-22
:INCPLATEDSTEEL
3
50
$ESIGNATION
13
Note! Two pieces are required for one complete unit.
35
62
Ball Catch
$ESIGNATION
*3-$"CONVENTIONALDOOR
Article number:
40-033-41
0REASSEMBLEDWITH 3CREWSAND.UTS
-ATERIAL
Brackets:
Aluminium
"ALL#ATCH
.ICKELPLATEDBRASS
40
70
50
11:20
5
40
www.jokabsafety.com
20
1
40
40
50
5
70
$ESIGNATION
*3-$#SLIDINGDOOR
Article number:
40-033-42
0REASSEMBLEDWITH 3CREWSAND.UTS
-ATERIAL
Brackets:
Aluminium
"ALL#ATCH
.ICKELPLATEDBRASS
2
10
20
3
80
60
4
5
68
58
$ESIGNATION
*3-$$FOLDINGDOOR
Article number:
42-020-52
0REASSEMBLEDWITH 3CREWSAND.UTS
-ATERIAL
Brackets:
Aluminium
"ALL#ATCH
.ICKELPLATEDBRASS
35
22
5
5
25
70
Upper Door bolt
60
6
40
80
35
5
7
65
90
115
30
8
10
9
1130
5
40
40
5PPER$OORBOLT
$ESIGNATION
*3-$!
Article number:
40-033-21
0REASSEMBLEDWITH 3CREWSAND.UTS
-ATERIAL
Brackets:
Zinc-plated steel
Rod:
Stainless steel
35
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
11:21
13
Lower Door bolt
$ESIGNATION
*3-$
Article number:
40-033-20
0REASSEMBLEDWITH3CREWSAND.UTS
-ATERIAL
Brackets:
Zinc-plated steel
Rod:
Stainless steel
280
130
40
10
83
25
55
8
18
Lower Door bolt
,OWER$OORBOLT
$ESIGNATION
*3-$"
Article number:
40-033-38
0REASSEMBLEDWITH 3CREWSAND.UTS
-ATERIAL
Brackets:
Zinc-plated steel
Rod:
Stainless steel
100
40
390
995
6
40
4
30
25
25
180
10
18
11:22
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Cam lock
22
Cam lock
$ESIGNATION
*3-$
Article number:
40-033-39
0REASSEMBLEDWITH 3CREWSAND.UTS
-ATERIAL
Brackets:
Aluminium
,OCKUNIT
0OLYAMIDEBLACK
60
32
20
70
2
$ELIVEREDWITHOUTKEY
Key to cam lock
$ESIGNATION
Article number:
-ATERIAL
35
3
6
*3-$FORCAMLOCK*3-$
40-033-44
:INCBLACK
4
Sliding bolt for Eden
$ESIGNATION
Article numbers:
-ATERIAL
*3-$FORHINGEDDOOR
20-302-10
3TEELPAINTEDYELLOW
110
110
5
72
Supplied without an Eden
130
14
For installation on hinged doors.
60
6
180
40
7
Magne 1A mount
$ESIGNATION
Article numbers:
-ATERIAL
*3-$
42-023-00
!NODISEDALUMINIUM
8
3UPPLIEDWITHOUT-AGNE!-AGNETICLOCK
For installation on hinged doors
9
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
11:23
13
Door stop
40
3
60
$ESIGNATION
*3-$!
Article number:
40-033-26
0REASSEMBLEDWITH 3CREWSAND.UTS
-ATERIAL
.ATURALANODIZEDALUMINIUM
25
$ESIGNATION
*3-$
Article number:
40-033-25
0REASSEMBLEDWITH3CREWS.UTSAND
vibration damper
-ATERIAL
:INCPLATEDSTEEL
60
60
For mounting on vertical profiles.
60
5
$ESIGNATION
*3-$"
Article number:
40-033-27
0REASSEMBLEDWITH3CREWS.UTSAND
vibration damper
-ATERIAL
:INCPLATEDSTEEL
40
60
75
For mounting on horizontal profiles.
5
Suspension wheels
$ESIGNATION
Article number:
*3-$
40-033-04
&ORALUMINIUMPROlLEGUIDERAILS*3-!"AND
*3-!
Sliding elements
11:24
19
40
Sliding element, (rectangular)
$ESIGNATION
*3-$
Article number:
40-033-05
0REASSEMBLEDWITH 3CREWAND.UT
-ATERIAL
0OLYAMID
www.jokabsafety.com
8
Sliding element, (round)
$ESIGNATION
*3-$
Article number:
40-033-06
0REASSEMBLEDWITH 3CREWAND.UT
-ATERIAL
0OLYAMID
1
40
19
8
2
Sliding element, (guide)
$ESIGNATION
*3-$
Article number:
40-033-07
0REASSEMBLEDWITH3CREWAND.UT
-ATERIAL
0OLYAMID
19
40
3
8
4
9,6
Guide Components for Sliding Door
Guide Bracket for Sliding Door
$ESIGNATION
*3-$
Article number:
40-033-22
0REASSEMBLEDWITH3CREWSAND.UTS
-ATERIAL
!LUMINIUMAND0!
30
5
65
5
For mounting on vertical profiles.
6
50
Guide Bracket for Sliding Door
$ESIGNATION
*3-$!
Article number:
40-033-23
0REASSEMBLEDWITH 3CREWSAND.UTS
-ATERIAL
!LUMINIUMAND0!
7
5
40
60
For mounting on horizontal profiles.
8
50
40
9
120
Bracket for Guide Pin
$ESIGNATION
*3-$"
0REASSEMBLEDWITH 3CREWSAND.UTS
-ATERIAL
!LUMINIUM
10
5
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
11:25
13
Guide roller
Guide roller for conventional door with
locking mechanism
$ESIGNATION
*3-$
*3-$+0REASSEMBLEDWITH
angle bracket
!RTICLENUMBERS
*3-$
*3-$+
$IAMETER
MM
-AXLOAD
KG
97
*3-$+
*3-$
Guide roller for sliding door
$ESIGNATION
*3-$!
*3-$!+0REASSEMBLEDWITH
angle bracket
!RTICLENUMBERS
*3-$!
*3-$!+
$IAMETER
MM
-AXLOAD
KG
95
*3-$!+
*3-$!
Diagonal bar for door
$ESIGNATION
*3-$
Article numbers:
40-033-28
Length:
1160 mm
0REASSEMBLEDWITH 3CREWSAND.UTS
-ATERIAL
.ATURALLYANODIZEDALUMINIUM
20
400/1160
$ESIGNATION
*3-$!
Article numbers:
42-021-73
Length:
400 mm
0REASSEMBLEDWITH 3CREWSAND.UTS
-ATERIAL
.ATURALLYANODIZEDALUMINIUM
5
11:26
www.jokabsafety.com
1
SWITCH FITTINGS
Eden fittings
Fittings for Eden, adapted for sliding and
conventional doors
$ESIGNATION
*3-$(
Article number
40-033-36
0REASSEMBLEDWITH 3CREWSAND.UTS
-ATERIAL
!LUMINIUM
4
2
3
100
Note!
Two fittings are needed for a complete Eden.
4
40
Eden Fitting for sliding door (flush with fence)
$ESIGNATION
*3-$*
Article number
42-020-40
0REASSEMBLEDWITH 3CREWSAND.UTS
-ATERIAL
!LUMINIUM
5
60
80
4
6
67
51
Note! /NE*3-$(ANDONE*3-$*ARENEEDED
for a complete unit.
Fittings for JSNY5 Interlock Switches
Conventional opening door Interlock
Switch Fittings.
$ESIGNATION
*3-$!
Article number:
40-033-09
0REASSEMBLEDWITH3CREWSAND.UTS
-ATERIAL
:INCPLATEDSTEEL
7
20
50
8
4
55
50
9
12
50
10
5
11
40
Conventional opening door Interlock Switch
Fittings.
$ESIGNATION
*3-$!!
Article number:
40-033-34
0REASSEMBLEDWITH 3CREWSAND.UTS
-ATERIAL
:INCPLATEDSTEEL
70
5
12
40
50
www.jokabsafety.com
11:27
13
45
Sliding Door Interlock Switch Fittings
$ESIGNATION
*3-$"
Article number:
40-033-10
0REASSEMBLEDWITH 3CREWSAND.UTS
-ATERIAL
:INCPLATEDSTEEL
60
127
40
5
60
65
5
Fittings for Magnet Switches JSNY7
3
90
Hinged door Magnet Switch Fittings
$ESIGNATION
*3-$%
Article number:
40-033-18
0REASSEMBLEDWITH 3CREWSAND.UTS
-ATERIAL
!LUMINIUM
Note! Two fittings are needed for a complete JSNY7.
35
5
Sliding Door Magnet Switch Fittings
$ESIGNATION
*3-$'
Article number:
40-033-33
0REASSEMBLEDWITH 3CREWSAND.UTS
-ATERIAL
!LUMINIUM
90
90
8
40
40
Fittings for Interlock Switches JSNY8 and JSNY9
90
40
50
138
Sliding Door Interlock Switch
for JSNY8 Fittings.
$ESIGNATION
*3-$$
Article numbers:
40-033-17
0REASSEMBLEDWITH 3CREWSAND.UTS
-ATERIAL
:INCPLATEDSTEEL
4
5
11:28
www.jokabsafety.com
42
2
154
35
1
55
40
94
60
Conventional opening door Interlock
Switch Fittings for JSNY9 and JSNY8
$ESIGNATION
*3-$#
Article number:
40-033-16
0REASSEMBLEDWITH 3CREWSAND.UTS
-ATERIAL
:INCPLATEDSTEEL
4
3
5
Sliding door Interlock Switch Fittings
for JSNY9
$ESIGNATION
*3-$&
Article number:
40-033-30
0REASSEMBLEDWITH3CREWSAND.UTS
-ATERIAL
:INCPLATEDSTEEL
5 40
4
5
96
60
40
5
134
40
6
60
7
8
9
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
11:29
13
TERMINAL CAPS AND STRIPS
Terminal caps are available to cover profile ends, thus eliminating sharp edges. Strips are also available, both narrow
and wide, to cover the side of the fencing profile.
Terminal Caps
Terminal Cap for JSM A44A
$ESIGNATION
*3-,!YELLOW
*3-,"GREY
!RTICLENUMBERS
*3-,!
*3-,"
-ATERIAL
0OLYAMIDE
$IMENSIONS
XMM
44
5
44
Terminal Cap for JSM A4488A
$ESIGNATION
*3-,!YELLOW
*3-,"GREY
!RTICLENUMBERS
*3-,!
*3-,"
-ATERIAL
0OLYAMIDE
$IMENSIONS
XMM
44
5
88
44
25
Terminal Cap for JSM A25
$ESIGNATION
*3-,
Article number:
40-034-01
-ATERIAL
0OLYAMIDEGREY
$IMENSIONS
XMM
5
44
60
Terminal Cap for JSM A60
$ESIGNATION
*3-,
Article number:
40-034-02
-ATERIAL
0OLYAMIDEGREY
$IMENSIONS
XMM
5
Cover Strip
40
/THERCOLOURSAVAILABLEUPONREQUEST
11:30
www.jokabsafety.com
2,5
Wide Cover Strip, for JSM A44A, JSM A44A,
JSM A4488A and JSM A8888
$ESIGNATION
*3-4!
Article number:
40-037-19
-ATERIAL
06#YELLOW
SOFTMATERIAL
$IMENSIONS
MM
Order Unit:
25 m/coil
16
2,5
Narrow Cover Strip, for JSM A44A, JSM A44A,
JSM A4488A and JSM A8888
$ESIGNATION
*3-49ELLOW
*3-4"'REY
!RTICLENUMBERS*3-4!
*3-4"
-ATERIAL
!"3
$IMENSIONS
MM
Order Unit:
2m
1
Accessories
Accessories
All fittings and door components are delivered complete with screws, washers and nuts pre-mounted. For cable
DUCTINGTHESCREWS3"ANDNUTS-"HAVETOBEORDEREDSEPARATELYPCSM
Designation
Article number
Description
Dimension Material
2
Order Unit
JSM S5B
3CREWTOCABLE
ducting
-X
:INC0LATEDPCSBOX
Steel
JSM S6A
3CREWFORHINGE
-X
cross-slotted Z (pozidrive)
:INC0LATEDPCSBOX Steel
JSM S8A
&IXINGSCREWCOUNTERSUNK -X
:INC0LATED PCSBOX $ACROLIT
JSM S8C
&IXINGSCREWFORmOOR
fitting and small angle
-X
:INC0LATEDPCSBOX Steel
JSM S8D
&IXINGSCREW
-X
:INC0LATED 100 pcs/box
Steel
JSM S8E
&IXINGSCREWFOR
'UIDERAIL*3-!
-X
:INC0LATED PCSBOX 3TEEL
JSM M4B
,OCKINGNUT
-
:INC0LATED PCSBOX
Steel
JSM M5B
,OCKINGNUT
-
:INC0LATED PCSBOX
Steel
JSM M6B
,OCKINGNUT
-
:INC0LATED PCSBOX
Steel
JSM M8B
,OCKINGNUT
JSM X1
JSM X2
41-900-43
EXPANSIONSHELLBOLT -X
JSM X3
41-910-00
Window cleaning fluid (Antistatic) for
polycarbonate sheets. Actuator head 0.5 L.
#ABLETIE
-
4
5
6
7
8
:INC0LATED PCSBOX
Steel
MM.YLONBLACKPCSBOX
UV-resistant
9
:INC0LATED 50pcs/box
Steel
10
per can
JSM X4
-ESHCLIPPINGTOOL
L=300
JSM B4C
#ENTRINGWASHER
Ø4,2
:INC0LATED 100 pcs/box
steel
JSM B5C
#ENTRINGWASHERL
Ø5,2
:INC0LATED 100 pcs/box
steel
JSM B6C
#ENTRINGWASHER
Ø6,2
:INC0LATED 100 pcs/box
steel
JSM B8C
#ENTRINGWASHER
Ø8,2
:INC0LATED 100 pcs/box
steel
www.jokabsafety.com
3
each
11
12
11:31
13
Surfaces
Surfaces
The choice of net and surfaces depends, among other things, on the protection distance. In the case of netting,
a minimum distance of 200 mm (for anyone aged 14 or older) with a mesh size of 40x40 mm in accordance with
%.)3/&ORCLOSERPROTECTIONDISTANCESANDFORNOISEREDUCTIONSOLIDPANELSAREUSED0ANELSAREAVAIlable in different materials. For protection of welding cells, polycarbonate welding transparencies are used.
Welded net
$ESIGNATION
Stitch:
Thread:
*3-9.7?7%?
40x40 mm
3,5 mm
Article no.
Name
Material
Dimensions
Type
*3-9.7
*3-9.7
*3-9.7
3TEELBLACKPOWDERCOATED
3TEELBLACKPOWDERCOATED
3TEELBLACKPOWDERCOATED
XMM
XMM
XMM
7ELDED
7ELDED
7ELDED
*3-9.7
*3-9.7
*3-9.7
3TEELBLACKPOWDERCOATED
3TEELBLACKPOWDERCOATED
3TEELBLACKPOWDERCOATED
XMM
XMM
XMM
7ELDED
7ELDED
7ELDED
*3-9.7
*3-9.7
*3-9.7
*3-9.7
*3-9.7%
3TEELBLACKPOWDERCOATED
3TEELBLACKPOWDERCOATED
3TEELBLACKPOWDERCOATED
3TEELBLACKPOWDERCOATED
3TAINLESSSTEEL33
XMM
#UTTOSIZE
XMM
XMM
XMM
7ELDED
7ELDED
7ELDED
7ELDED
7ELDED
XMM
#UTTOSIZE
7ELDED
7ELDED
*3-9.7%
3TAINLESSSTEEL33
*3-9.7%
3TAINLESSSTEEL33
Other colours or woven wire mesh netting supplied on request.
Net locking for welded netting with outer wire
$ESIGNATION
Article numbers:
-ATERIAL
Quantity:
*3-.,
40-031-06
0!!"3
100 pcs/box
Net locking for welded and woven wire mesh netting, with or without outer wires
$ESIGNATION
*3-.,
Article numbers:
40-031-08
0REASSEMBLEDWITH 3CREWS
-ATERIAL
:INC
Quantity:
100 pcs/box
Shockproof panelling
0LASTICPANELS
NAME*3-9?
Other materials can be supplied on request.
Plastic panel name: JSM Y_
11:32
Article no. Name
Material
Dimensions Type
0OLYCARBONATEUNCOLOURED
0OLYCARBONATEUNCOLOURED
0OLYCARBONATEUNCOLOURED
0OLYCARBONATEDARKTINTWELDPROTECTED
0OLYCARBONATEDARKTINTWELDPROTECTED
,AMINATEDGLASS
MM MM MM MM MM MM *3-90#!
*3-90#!
*3-90#!
*3-90#!#
*3-90#!#
*3-9'!
www.jokabsafety.com
X
X
#UTTOSIZE
#UTTOSIZE
X
#UTTOSIZE
1
Surfaces
#ROSSBENTSHEETMETALPANEL
Other materials are available on request.
2
8-12
Steelplate
Article no. Name
Material
'ALVANISEDSHEETMETALXCRACKED
'ALVANISEDSHEETMETALXCRACKED
*3-9'0!
*3-9'0!
Thickness
Dimensions
MM MM 3
#UTTOSIZE
#UTTOSIZE
0AINTEDSHEETMETALCANBESUPPLIEDONREQUEST
Panel fixings
*3-0,FORMMPANELS
*3-0,FORMMPANELS
11
$ESIGNATION
-ATERIAL
*3-0,
*3-0,
Quantity:
10
06#BLACK
06#BLACK
50 pcs/package
Article no.
Name
Length
*3-0,!
*3-0,"
*3-0,#
*3-0,$
MM
MM
MM
MM
*3-0,!
*3-0,"
*3-0,#
*3-0,$
MM
MM
MM
MM
4
5
6
For metal panel fixings
5
$ESIGNATION
*3-'
Article numbers:
40-038-06
-ATERIAL
%0$Standard package: 10m/roll
20
Sheet securing glass
2
10
*3-'
41-930-06
%0$50m/roll
6
8
12
$ESIGNATION
Article numbers:
-ATERIAL
Standard package:
7
3
1
1
2
9
Panel lockings
$ESIGNATION*3-0,FORMMPANELS
Article numbers:
40-038-11
0REASSEMBLEDWITH3CREWS
-ATERIAL
:INC
10
Soundabsorbing
Article no. Name
Material
Thickness
*3-9,!! outside – painted or galvanised smooth sheet metal MM inside - galvanised preformed sheet metal
core – steel wool
*3-9,!! CHECKOUTARTNRABOVE MM *3-9,!! CHECKOUTARTNRABOVE MM Dimensions Kg/m2
#UTTOSIZE
11
X
#UTTOSIZE
12
Cut to size – max dimension 2000 x 1200
NOTE!
-OUNTINGPROlLE*3-!3USEDFOR*3-9,!!?ANDMOUNTINGPROlLE
*3-!3USEDFOR*3-9,!!?
www.jokabsafety.com
11:33
13
Approvals:
Safety
Roller Door
Applications:
Allowing access to risk areas
0ROTECTIONFROMEJECTEDPARticles, e.g chips and welding
splash
Features:
Highest safety level according
to EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1
0REVENTSUNINTENTIONALSTART
Withstands harsh environments
Quick operation
High reliability
Noise absorbing
Roller door for short safety distances
and narrow spaces
3AFETY2OLLER$OORSMAKEITPOSSIBLETOHAVEASHORTSAFETY
distance to the machine. The noise absorbing roller door is
compact and it can therefore be placed in narrow spaces.
It is easy and quick to access the machine or gain access
FORSERVICINGWITHTHE3AFETY2OLLER$OOR
It demands a minimum of maintenance and offers reliable
operation. To be able to start the machine/plant the door has
to be completely closed. The closed position is monitored
by the Eden non-contact sensor from Jokab Safety. As
soon as the door begins to open the Eden sends a signal
TOTHEMACHINEPLANTVIATHE0LUTO3AFETY0,#FROM*OKAB
Safety. The roller door fulfills safety category 4 together
WITH%DENAND0LUTO
Protects against welding splash
The roller door protects against ejected particles, such
as chips and welding splash. The roller door fabric is also
resistant towards a great number of chemicals, which
permits it to be installed in harsh environments.
11:34
Simple assembly
4HE 3AFETY 2OLLER $OOR IS SIMPLE TO ASSEMBLE BECAUSE
it consists of few components and it is supplied partly
pre-assembled. It can be integrated into the Quick-Guard
fencing system from Jokab Safety as well as in other types
of fencing systems. It can also be installed on the machine
or other permanent construction.
Customized roller door
This door design is easy to customize. The largest possible
opening width is 4000 mm and the largest possible opening
height is 3000 mm. The maximum size of the door fabric
is 10 m2. If a larger door fabric is desired, contact Jokab
Safety. The door is supplied as standard with a light-grey
door fabric. Other colours can also be supplied. The roller
door can be supplied with a viewing window in full width
and at an optional height. The viewing window can also
be made in a special material that protects against welding splash. The door cloth can also be made completely
transparent with yellow vertical reinforcing strips.
www.jokabsafety.com
1
2
Standard door fabric
With viewing window
3
Fully transparent
4
Function
Highest protection in accordance with EN 954-1/
EN ISO 13849-1
The monitoring of the door´s position by two Eden sensors
TOGETHERWITHWITHA0LUTOMONITORINGUNITFULlLLSCATEGORY
according to EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1. These units are
CERTIlEDBY4¯6AND$.6
Functions
The door protects against access to moving parts in the
machine/plant. The production process can begin when
the door is fully closed. The closed position is monitored
by an Eden sensor on both sides of the door. Because the
door is monitored by Eden sensors at both sides of the door
it is impossible to lift one side of the door and reach into
the risk area without the machine/plant stopping. When
the door has moved a maximum of 10 mm upwards a stop
signal is sent to the protected machine/plant. The Eden
SENSORSAREMONITOREDBYA0LUTO3AFETY0,#WHICHHAS
failsafe outputs for stopping the machine/plant in the risk
area and to control the door.
The door also protects from particles ejected by the production process, e.g. chips and welding splash. It has a
good sound absorbing ability. Because the door operates
quickly, at 0.8-1.0 m/s, the operator has a good access
to the machine area. The door is equipped with a safety
contact strip in the bottom preventing it from causing personal injury on any person. When the safety contact strip
is affected the door is is compressed, the door movement
reverses to move upwards. The opening and closing of the
door can be controlled via the buttons or via the signals
from the control system of the machine.
Prevents an unintentional start
When the door is located in front of the machine/plant, where
the operator can enter the area with his entire body, safe
interlocking of the door´s downward movement is needed.
This is to prevent the machine from being started from the
outside when somebody is inside the roller door.
One way to solve this is to use a horizontal light curtain
which covers the area which the operator can occupy
within the risk area. Another solution is to place double light
beams in the opening, combined with a reset facility. Yet
another solution is to use time-reset. A time-reset button is
placed inside the risk area and a button is placed outside
the risk area. First, the button in the risk area should be
pressed and thereafter (within a certain amount of time,
e.g. 5 seconds) the button outside should be pressed.
After this the door can be manoeuvred downwards.
5
6
7
8
9
10
Safety distances & standards
Minimum safety distance
For the roller door to be able to provide good protection it
has to be installed a sufficient distance away from moving
machine parts.
Useful standards
EN ISO 13857 Safety of machinery - Safety distances to
prevent hazard zones being reached by upper and lower
limbs.
EN 999 Safety of machinery - The positioning of protective equipment in respect of approach speeds of parts of
the human body
Note. The roller door has good protection against welding
splash and smaller ejected particles from the the production area. The roller door is not intended to act as collision
protection. The installer of the roller door has the responsibility of ensuring that sufficient safety distance against
moving machine parts is provided.
www.jokabsafety.com
11:35
11
12
13
JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden
Colour
Frame - yellow, door cloth - grey
Other colours available on request.
Ordering data
3AFETY2OLLERDOORVIEWING
window, completely transparent
or viewing window with weld
splash protection.
$AYLIGHTHEIGHT$AYLIGHTWIDTH
Maximum size, door cloth
10 m²
If a larger size is needed,
contact Jokab Safety AB.
Maximum width
4000 mm
Maximum height
3000 mm
Driving unit
Three phase motor 200-415
6!#(ZK7'&!
Speed, roller door
0.8 – 1.0 m/s up/down
2600
Manufacturer
2000
Technical data – Safety Roller Door
175
175
2000
Max. number of cycles/minute 3 (during continous operation
24 hours a day)
Grey (RAL 7038), can be supplied
with recessed window (only in full
width). Other colours are possible.
#ANEVENBEMADETRANSPARENT
(with yellow vertical reinforcing strips)
Material frames
Aluminum extrusion
Material covering plates
06#COATEDSHEETSTEELPAINTED
with RAL 1023
Material upper wall mounting
5 mm sheet metal covered with
zinc
Sound absorption
approx. 10dB
Ambient temperature
ƒ#TOƒ
When operating in temperatures
BELOWƒ#THEOILINTHEGEAR
box should be replaced with an
oil suitable to withstand cold
temperatures.
Safety level
#ATEGORYINACCORDANCEWITH
EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1
Durability towards chemicals
Ammoniac, sodium hydrate,
phosphoric acid, tartaric acid,
oxalic acid, hydrochloric acid,
citric acid, acetic acid, oil, detergent, calcium chloride (contact
Jokab Safety for more specifications)
Control monitoring unit for
roller door
11:36
*OKAB3AFETY|S3AFETY0,#0LUTO
Outputs
4 safe outputs for connection to
machine/plant.
Monitoring of position of the
roller door
2 Eden sensors
one on each side of the door.
Contact strip
'0INTHEBOTTOMFRAMEOF
the door fabric.
The door motion is reversed if
the contact strip is compressed.
600
Door fabric colour
$AYLIGHTHEIGHT
-ULTILAYERPOLYESTERFABRICCLOTH
WITH06#MMTHICKORTRANSPARENT06#4HEVIEWINGWINDOW
can also be supplied with protection against welding flash light.
(Removes 99% of the UV-transmision from the welding process)
100
$AYLIGHTWIDTH
100
Screw holes
$AYLIGHTHEIGHT
Door fabric material
2350
www.jokabsafety.com
#LEARANCE
aperture
$AYLIGHTWIDTH
1
2
Component ordering list
Safety PLC Pluto for dynamic and static inputs
12:2
____________________________________
3
Accessories Pluto_ _______________________________________________________________________________12:2
Safety module Vital, for dynamic inputs ______________________________________________ 12:3
Safety sensor Eden ____________________________________________________________________________ 12:3
4
Light beam Spot 10, Spot 35 _ ______________________________________________________________12:5
Tina units for the connection of safety components to "Vital" circuits:
Focus light grids/light curtains, switches/sensors, emergency stops,
contact edges, bumpers and mats _______________________________________________________12:6
5
Connectors and cables _ _____________________________________________________________________ 12:8
Safety Relays ____________________________________________________________________________________ 12:10
Scanner Look ____________________________________________________________________________________ 12:13
Light curtains Focus–category 4 _______________________________________________________ 12:14
6
Light curtains Focus–category 2 _______________________________________________________ 12:15
Mirrors for light curtains_____________________________________________________________________ 12:17
Light grids Focus–category 4 ____________________________________________________________ 12:17
7
Light grids Focus–category 2 ____________________________________________________________ 12:18
Spot 10, Spot 35 and Laser Aligner ____________________________________________________ 12:18
Bypass and reset accessories
___________________________________________________________
12:19
Mechanical accessories for light curtains, light grids, light beams and
bypassing__________________________________________________________________________________________ 12:21
Stopping time measurement and Machine diagnosis
_ ________________________
8
12:24
Sensors and switches _ ______________________________________________________________________ 12:25
9
Mechanical switches _________________________________________________________________________ 12:27
Control devices - one and two hand-control devices–Safeball ____________12:29
Control devices - 2 and 3-position pedals–Fox _ _________________________________12:30
Control devices - 3-position devices and pushbuttons
________________________
12:30
10
Emergency stops Inca, Smile _ ___________________________________________________________12:33
Contact edges _ _________________________________________________________________________________12:36
Bumpers ___________________________________________________________________________________________12:36
11
Safety Mats _ _____________________________________________________________________________________ 12:37
Fencing System QuickGuard, SafeCAD, Roller Door __________________________ 12:37
12
www.jokabsafety.com
12:1
13
DESIGNATION
PRODUCT
ART.NR
DESCRIPTION
PRIS
KR.
Safety PLC Pluto for dynamic and static inputs
Pluto A20
20-070-03
Safety PLC with 8 failsafe inputs + 8 non-failsafe outputs/
failsafe inputs + 2 individually failsafe relay outputs + 2
individually failsafe transistor outputs. For use with Pluto
safety bus.
Pluto S20
20-070-05
As A20 but without Pluto safety bus and without current
monitoring on Q16 + Q17.
Pluto B20
20-070-06
As A20 but without current monitoring on Q16 + Q17.
Pluto B16
20-070-07
As B20 but without safety outputs Q0 – Q3.
Pluto B46-6
20-070-15
Safety PLC with 24 failsafe inputs + 16 non-failsafe
outputs/failsafe inputs + 4 individually failsafe relay outputs
+ 2 individually failsafe transistor outputs. For use with Pluto
safety bus. For use with a Pluto safety databus.
Pluto S46-6
20-070-16
Similar to B46-6 but without a databus.
Pluto AS-i
20-070-10
Safety PLC with AS-i databus
With 4 failsafe inputs + 4 non-failsafe outputs/failsafe inputs
+ 2 individual failsafe relay outputs + 2 individual failsafe
transistor outputs. With connection for Pluto safety databus.
Gate-P1
Gateway Pluto
Profibus
20-070-70
Gateway for 2-way communication between the Pluto bus
and Profibus.
Gate-C1
Gateway Pluto
CANopen
20-070-71
Gateway for 2-way communication between the Pluto bus
and CANopen.
Gate-D1
Gateway Pluto
DeviceNet
20-070-72
Gateway for 2-way communication between the Pluto bus
and Devicenet.
Gate-E1
Gateway Pluto
Ethernet
20-070-73
Gateway for 2-way communication between Pluto databus
and Ethernet.
IDFIX-R
20-070-20
Identifier–assigns Pluto a specific address.
IDFIX-RW
20-070-21
Identifier–assigns Pluto an address. This version is
programmable.
IDFIX DATA
20-070-23
Identifier–to give Pluto AS-i a specific address.
R-120
20-070-22
Terminating resistance for Pluto databus.
HMI-display
20-070-25
HMI display 4 x 20 LCD Graphic. UNIOP (Exor).
20-070-28
HMI-software Designer 6.
20-070-29
HMI programming cable.
Accessories Pluto
12:2
www.jokabsafety.com
1234567
1
Pluto Manager
20-070-40
Programming tool for Pluto equipped with safety function
blocks. Can be downloaded from www.jokabsafety.com.
2
Pluto
programming
cable
20-070-56
Bus cable
20-070-30
CAN-Bus cable yellow 2 x 0.50 mm2.
20-070-31
CAN-Bus cable purple 2 x 0.50 mm2 halogen free.
20-070-36
Absolute value encoder model RSA 597
(single-turn).
Absolute
encoder
For connecting PC to Pluto for programming and on-line
monitoring.
3
4
5
6
20-070-37
Absolute value encoder model RSA 698
(multi-turn).
20-070-38
Cable for absolute value sensor Unitronic LiYCY 12 x 0.25.
20-070-39
Connector for absolute encoder RSA 597.
20-070-57
Pluto communication cable for HMI-display.
7
8
Safety module Vital, for dynamic inputs
Vital 1
20-052-00
Safety module, 22.5 x 85 x 120 mm, 24 VDC.
9
Safety sensor Eden
Eva
20-046-00
10
Eva is the "target" for use with Adam sensors in the Eden
sensor system. IP67. 4 off DA2 spacer rings are included.
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
12:3
13
12:4
Eva E
20-046-06
Eva E is encapsulated in polyurethane for harsh environments.
Eva E is the "target" for use with Adam sensors in the Eden E
sensor system. IP69K.
Adam M12
20-051-00
Adam M12 is a safety sensor unit with a fixed M12 male
connector. IP67. 4 off DA1 spacer rings and 4 off DA2 spacer
rings are included in the package.
Adam 3 m
20-051-02
Adam 3 m is a safety sensor unit with 3 m of cable
(5 x 0.34 mm2 + screen). IP67.
4 off DA2 spacer rings are included in the package.
Adam 10 m
20-051-04
Adam 10 m is a safety sensor unit with 10 m of cable
(5 x 0.34 mm2 + screen). IP67.
4 off DA2 spacer rings are included in the package.
Adam 20 m
20-051-05
Adam 20 m is a safety sensor unit with 20 m of cable
(5 x 0.34 mm2 + screen). IP67. The package includes 4 off
DA2 spacer rings.
Adam E 10 m
20-051-06
Adam E 10 m is a safety sensor unit encapsulated in
polyurethane for harsh environments with 10 m of cable
(5 x 0.34 mm2 + screen)
IP 69K.
Adam E
0.5 m M12
20-051-07
Adam E 0.5 m is a safety sensor unit encapsulated in extra
polyurethane for harsh environments with 0.5 m cable
5 x 0.34 mm2+ screen and M12 male connector IP69K.
Connector IP67.
Adam E 20 m
20-051-08
Adam E 20 m is a safety sensor unit encapsulated in
polyurethane for harsh environments with 20 m cable
(5 x 0.34 mm2 + screen) IP69K. Connector IP67.
Eden C 10 m
20-051-14
Adam C with 10 m cable and Eva C in coded version.
www.jokabsafety.com
1
20-051-16
DA 1
20-053-00
Adam EC 10 m and Eva EC is a coded safety sensor unit
covered with extra polyurethane for harsh environments with
10 m cable 5 x 0.34 mm2+ screen. IP69K. Connector IP67.
Protection plate, thickness 2.5 mm, polycarbonate. For Adam
M12 and associated Eva. Not suitable for Adam E and Eva E.
2
3
4
DA 2
20-053-01
Mounting spacer 4.5 x 8 x 4 mm, in black polyamide, for use
with Adam and Eva units.
20-053-10
Mounting screw M4, length 18 mm.
20-053-20
Mounting screw, M4, length 16 mm, external mounting for
Adam and Eva.
20-053-30
Mounting screw, M4, length 25 mm, external mounting for
Adam E and Eva.
20-053-32
Mounting screw M4, in nylon, length 25 mm, for recessed or
external mounting of Adam/Eva (Adam E/Eva E).
20-053-42
Safety screw SM4 x 20, mounting of Adam and Eva.
20-053-43
Safety screw SM4 x 25, mounting of Adam E and Eva E.
20-053-44
Safety nut M4.
5
6
7
8
9
20-053-50
Safety screwdriver bit SBITS.
20-053-62
SM4 x 20 Safety screw + 1 screwdriver bit.
20-053-63
SM4 x 25 Safety screw + 1 screwdriver bit.
10
11
Light beam Spot 10, Spot 35
Spot 10T/R
20-009-06
Safety light beam for up to 10 m distance.
M18 steel casing with M12 connector.
Accessories, see “Mechanical accessories for light curtains/
light beams and bypassing”.
www.jokabsafety.com
12:5
12
13
Spot 35T/R
20-009-05
Safety light beam for up to 35 m distance.
Plastic enclosure with
M12 connector.
Accessories, see “Mechanical accessories for light curtains/
light beams and bypassing”.
JSRL2
20-008-01
Laser Aligner for use with Spot 35 T/R light beam.
Tina units for the connection of safety components to "Vital" circuits: Focus
light grids/light curtains, switches/sensors, emergency stops, contact edges,
bumpers and mats
12:6
Tina 1A
20-054-00
Blind M12 male connection plug for Tina 4A and Tina 8A.
Must be fitted into unused Tina 4A and Tina 8A sensor
positions.
Tina 2A
20-054-01
Tina 2A with M20 fitting for connection of emergency stops
and other safety devices having a suitable combination of
voltage-free contacts.
Tina 2B
20-054-11
Tina 2B with cable for internal assembly in emergency stops
and other safety sensors with voltage-free contacts.
Tina 3A
20-054-02
Tina 3A with M12 connection and M20 fitting for use with
E-stops and other safety sensors with volt free contacts.
Tina 3A, 6A and 7A are similar units but with different
housings.
Tina 3Aps
20-054-14
As Tina 3A but with + 24V and 0V available.
Tina 4A
20-054-03
Connection block with four M12 female sensor connection
inputs.
Cable diameter range: 7–12 mm.
Tina 5A
20-054-04
Bypass unit for dynamic units with supervision of the bypass
lamp.
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Tina 6A
Tina 7A
Tina 8A
Tina 8B
ProfiBus
20-054-06
20-054-07
20-054-05
20-054-10
Tina 6A with M12 male and female connectors for safety mat/
strip/bumper connection. Tina 3A, 6A and 7A have the same
electrical function in different enclosures.
Tina 7A, for installation on DIN rails in apparatus enclosures.
Electrical connection via detachable terminal blocks.
Tina 7A is used for emergency stops in the same apparatus
enclosure, or for external edge contact strips, safety mats
or bump strips. Tina 3A, 6A and 7A have the same electrical
function in different enclosures.
Connection block with eight M12 female sensor connection
inputs.
Cable diameter range 7–12 mm.
2
3
4
Connection block with eight M12 female sensor connection
inputs. The M12 connection on the end connects the input
and output of the dynamic signal, information and supply
voltage (24VDC). The information signals from the sensors
are transferred to ProfiBus which has M12 connector inputs
and outputs. For more technical description, contact the
nearest Jokab Safety distributor.
5
6
Tina 10A
20-054-12
Tina 10A adapts the OSSD outputs (PNP) from Focus to
Vital/Pluto.
Tina 10B
20-054-13
Tina 10A adapts the two OSSD outputs (PNP) from Focus to
Vital/Pluto. Tina 10B has an extra M12 connector (3) for reset,
a reset lamp and power off.
(Suitable for FMI-1C. 22-043-02).
7
Tina 10 C
20-054-16
Similar to Tina 10B but output 3 to be connected to a light
beam/light curtain transmitter.
8
Tina 11A
20-054-17
Junction block with 2 off M12 female outputs for dynamic
sensors, such as Tina, Eden or Spot.
9
Tina 12A
20-054-18
Distribution block for two Dalton process locks with Eden.
Tina Duo 1
20-051-30
Expansion and local reset unit for Vital and Pluto sensors.
With connector for external reset button.
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
12:7
13
Tina Duo 2
20-052-35
Expansion and local reset unit for Vital and Pluto sensors.
Integral reset button.
M12-3A
20-055-00
M12 ’Y’ connector, typically for serial connection of all safety
devices such as Spot light beam (transmitter and receiver),
Eden, E-stops, Switches, Safety strips, etc.
M12-3B
20-055-01
M12 ’Y’ connector, typically for connection of light beam
(transmitter and receiver), or parallel connection of two Edens
to a Tina 4/8.
M12-3D
20-055-03
M12 ’Y’ connector for connection of Focus light beam
transmitter and receiver.
M12-3E
20-055-02
M12 ’Y’ connector for connection of two dynamic sensors
with separate return lines to the same cable. For IQ
connection to Pluto.
M12-3 m
20-055-04
M12 ’Y’ connector and parallel and muting function.
Connection 3 is dominant.
M12-C61
20-056-00
6 m cable 5 x 0.34 mm2 + screen with straight M12 female
connector.
M12-C101
20-056-10
10 m cable 5 x 0.34 mm2 + screen with straight M12 female
connector.
M12-C201
20-056-14
20 m cable 5 x 0.34 mm2 + screen with straight M12 female
connector.
M12-C61V
20-056-01
6 m cable 5 x 0.34 mm2 + screen with angled M12 female
connector.
M12-C101V
20-056-11
10 m cable 5 x 0.34 mm2 + screen with angled M12 female
connector.
M12-C62
20-056-02
6 m cable 5 x 0.34 mm2 + screen with straight M12 male
connector.
Screen connected to pin 3 (OVDC) on male connector.
M12-C102
20-056-12
10 m cable 5 x 0.34 mm2 + screen with straight M12 male
connector.
Screen connected to pin 3 (OVDC) on male connector.
Connectors and cables
12:8
www.jokabsafety.com
1
M12-C112
20-056-20
1 m cable 5 x 0.34 mm2 + screen with straight female + male
connectors.
Screen connected to pin 3 (OVDC) on male connector.
M12-C312
20-056-21
3 m cable 5 x 0,.34 mm2 + screen with straight female + male
connectors
Screen connected to pin 3 (OVDC) on male connector.
M12-C612
20-056-22
6 m cable 5 x 0,34 mm2 + screen with straight female
+ M12 male
Screen connected to pin 3 (OVDC) on male connector.
M12-C1012
20-056-23
10 m cable 5 x 0.34 mm2 + screen with straight female
+ male connectors
Screen connected to pin 3 (OVDC) on male connector.
M12-C2012
20-056-24
20 m cable 5 x 0.34 mm2 + screen with straight female
+ male connectors
Screen connected to pin 3 (OVDC) on male connector.
M12-C63
20-056-30
6 m cable 8 x 0.34 mm2 + screen with straight M12 female
connector.
M12-C103
20-056-40
10 m cable 8 x 0.34 mm2 + screen with straight M12 female
connector.
M12-C203
20-056-41
20 m cable 8 x 0.34 mm2 + screen with straight M12 female
connector.
M12-C134
20-056-50
1 m cable 8 x 0.34 mm2 with straight M12 female+male.
M12-C334
20-056-51
3 m cable 8 x 0.34 mm2 with straight M12 female+male.
M12-CT0122
20-060-00
Transfer cable 10 cm 5 x 0.34 mm2.
5-pole male plug/5-pole male plug.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
M12-CT0214
20-060-01
Transfer cable 20 cm M12 5-pole female plug, 8-pole male
plug.
M12-CT0232
20-060-02
Transfer cable 20 cm M12 5-pole male plug, 8-pole female
plug.
M12-CT134F
20-060-03
Transfer cable 1 m M12 8-pole male plug, 8-pole
female plug.
C5
20-057-00
Cable 5 x 0.34 mm2 + screen, specify length.
9
10
C8
20-057-10
Cable 8 x 0.34 mm2 + screen, specify length.
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
12:9
13
C9
20-057-15
Cable 7 x 0,5 mm2 + 2 x 0,75 mm2 + screen,
specify length. For Tina 4A.
C13
20-057-20
Cable 11 x 0,5 mm2 + 2 x 0,75 mm2 + screen,
specify length. For Tina 8A.
M12-C01
20-055-10
Straight M12 female connector with 6-pole screw connection
for cable. Cable external diameter 2.5–6.5 mm, 5-pole.
M12-C02
20-055-11
Straight M12 male connector with cable screw connection.
Cable diameter range 2.5–6.5 mm. 5-pole.
M12-C03
20-055-16
Straight M12 female connector with cable screw
connection. Cable diameter range 2.5–6.5 mm. 8-pole.
M12-C04
20-055-17
Straight M12 male connector with cable screw
connection. Cable diameter range 2.5–6.5 mm. 8-pole.
20-055-21
M12, protection cap for male connector.
JS SP-1
22-070-00
M12, protection cap for female connector.
JSBR3
10-001-00
JSBR3 24DC Safety relay.
10-001-02
JSBR3 24AC Safety relay.
10-001-03
JSBR3 48AC Safety relay.
Safety Relays
JSBR4
12:10
10-001-04
JSBR3 115AC Safety relay.
10-001-05
JSBR3 230AC Safety relay.
10-002-00
JSBR4 24DC Safety relay.
10-002-02
JSBR4 24AC Safety relay.
10-002-03
JSBR4 48AC Safety relay.
10-002-04
JSBR4 115AC Safety relay.
10-002-05
JSBR4 230AC Safety relay.
www.jokabsafety.com
1
JSBT3
JSBT4
JSBT5
10-003-00
JSBT3 24DC Safety relay.
10-003-02
JSBT3 24AC Safety relay.
10-003-03
JSBT3 48AC Safety relay.
10-003-04
JSBT3 115AC Safety relay.
10-003-05
JSBT3 230AC Safety relay.
10-004-00
JSBT4 24DC Safety relay.
10-004-02
JSBT4 24AC Safety relay.
10-004-03
JSBT4 48AC Safety relay.
10-004-04
JSBT4 115AC Safety relay.
10-004-05
JSBT4 230AC Safety relay.
10-004-14
JSBT4 115AC Safety relay 1 s.
10-004-20
JSBT4 24DC 1,5s Safety relay.
2
3
4
10-005-01
JSBT5 24AC/DC Safety relay.
10-005-07
JSBT5 24AC/DC Safety relay.
10-005-11
JSBT5 24AC/DC Safety relay.
5
JSE1
10-007-00
JSE1 24DC Safety relay.
JSG1
10-008-00
JSG1 24DC Safety relay.
6
JSHT1A
10-011-00
JSHT1A 24DC Timer module.
10-011-02
JSHT1A 24AC Timer module.
10-011-03
JSHT1A 48AC Timer module.
10-011-04
JSHT1A 115AC Timer module.
10-011-05
JSHT1A 230AC Timer module.
JSHT1B
10-011-10
JSHT1B 24DC Timer module.
JSHT2A
10-012-00
JSHT2A 24DC Timer module.
JSHT2B
10-012-02
JSHT2A 24AC Timer module.
10-012-03
JSHT2A 48 AC Timer module.
10-012-04
JSHT2A 115 AC Timer module.
10-012-05
JSHT2A 230 AC Timer module.
10-012-10
JSHT2B 24DC Timer module.
10-012-12
JSHT2B 24AC Timer module.
10-012-13
JSHT2B 48 AC Timer module.
10-012-14
JSHT2B 115 AC Timer module.
10-012-15
JSHT2B 230 AC Timer module.
7
8
9
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
12:11
13
JSHT2C
10-012-20
JSHT2C 24DC Timer module.
JSN1A
10-014-06
JSN1A mains module 230/115AC/2.
JSR1T
10-015-00
JSR1T 0 Expansion relay 6A 24 DC.
10-015-05
JSR1T 1,5 Expansion relay 6A 24DC.
10-015-06
JSR1T 8 Expansion relay 6A 24 DC.
10-015-10
JSR1T 0,5 Expansion relay 6A 24 D.
10-015-20
JSR1T 10s Expansion relay 6A 24DC.
10-015-30
JSR1T 1 Expansion relay 6A 24 DC.
10-015-40
JSR1T 2 Expansion relay 6A 24 DC.
10-015-50
JSR1T 3 Expansion relay 6A 24 DC.
10-015-60
JSR1T 5 Expansion relay 6A 24DC.
JSR3T
10-017-01
JSR3T Expansion relay 24 AC/DC.
JSS1
10-018-00
JSS1 Safety relay 24 DC.
JSBRT11
10-025-00
JSBRT11 24DC Safety relay.
10-025-02
JSBRT11 24AC Safety relay.
10-025-03
JSBRT11 48AC Safety relay.
10-025-04
JSBRT11 115AC Safety relay.
10-025-05
JSBRT11 230AC Safety relay.
10-026-00
RT6 24DC Safety relay.
RT6
JSR2A
12:12
10-026-02
RT6 24AC Safety relay.
10-026-03
RT6 48AC Safety relay.
10-026-04
RT6 115AC Safety relay.
10-026-05
RT6 230AC Safety relay.
10-027-01
JSR2A Expansion relay 10A 24AC/DC.
10-027-03
JSR2A Expansion relay 10A 48 AC.
10-027-04
JSR2A Expansion relay 10A 115AC.
10-027-05
JSR2A Expansion relay 10A 230AC.
www.jokabsafety.com
1
RT7 B
RT7 A
RT9
10-028-10
RT7B 24DC Safety relay with max. 3 s delay.
10-028-12
RT7B 24AC Safety relay with max. 3 s delay.
10-028-13
RT7B 48AC Safety relay with max. 3 s delay.
10-028-14
RT7B 115AC Safety relay with max. 3 s delay.
10-028-15
RT7B 230AC Safety relay with max. 3 s delay.
10-028-20
RT7A 24DC Safety relay with max. 1,5 s delay.
10-028-22
RT7A 24AC Safety relay with max. 1,5 s delay.
10-028-23
RT7A 48AC Safety relay with max. 1,5 s delay.
10-028-24
RT7A 115AC Safety relay with max. 1,5 s delay.
10-028-25
RT7A 230AC Safety relay with max. 1,5 s delay.
10-029-00
RT9 24DC Safety relay.
2
3
4
5
E1T
10-030-00
E1T 0s Expansion relay 24DC.
10-030-10
E1T 0,5s Expansion relay 24DC.
6
10-030 -20 E1T 1 s Expansion relay 24DC.
BT50
10-030-30
E1T 1,5s Expansion relay 24DC.
10-030-40
E1T 2s Expansion relay 24DC.
10-030-50
E1T 3s Expansion relay 24DC.
10-033-00
BT50 Safety relay.
10-033-10
BT50T Safety relay.
7
8
BT51
10-033-20
BT51 Safety relay.
10-033-30
BT51T Safety relay.
9
RT10
10-029-50
RT10 Safety relay 24 VDC. For mats/edges with two-wire
function.
10
11
Scanner Look
LOOK JS4-4
50033346
Adjustable mounting disc.
50034195
LOOK JS4-4 Scanner.
50035814
LOOK Mounting plate.
www.jokabsafety.com
12
12:13
13
Light curtains Focus–category 4
F4-14-150
150 mm
F4-14-300
300 mm
F4-14-450
450 mm
F4-14-600
600 mm
F4-14-750
750 mm
F4-14-900
900 mm
F4-14-1050
1050 mm
F4-14-1200
1200 mm
F4-14-1350
1350 mm
F4-14-1500
1500 mm
F4-14-1650
1650 mm
F4-35-150
150 mm
F4-35-300
300 mm
F4-35-450
450 mm
F4-35-600
600 mm
12:14
22-010-00
F4-14-150 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-010-03
F4-14-150 B Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-010-06
F4-14-150 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
22-010-10
F4-14-300 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-010-13
F4-14-300 B Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-010-16
F4-14-300 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
22-010-20
F4-14-450 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-010-23
F4-14-450 B Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-010-26
F4-14-450 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
22-010-30
F4-14-600 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-010-33
F4-14-600 B Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-010-36
F4-14-600 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
22-010-40
F4-14-750 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-010-43
F4-14-750 B Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-010-46
F4-14-750 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
22-010-50
F4-14-900 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-010-53
F4-14-900 B Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-010-56
F4-14-900 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
22-110-10
F4-14-1050 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-110-13
F4-14-1050 B Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-110-16
F4-14-1050 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
22-010-60
F4-14-1200 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-010-63
F4-14-1200 B Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-010-66
F4-14-1200 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
22-110-30
F4-14-1350 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-110-33
F4-14-1350 B Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-110-36
F4-14-1350 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
22-010-70
F4-14-1500 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-010-73
F4-14-1500 B Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-010-76
F4-14-1500 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
22-010-80
F4-14-1650 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-010-83
F4-14-1650 B Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-010-86
F4-14-1650 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
22-011-00
F4-35-150 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-011-03
F4-35-150 B Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-011-06
F4-35-150 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
22-011-10
F4-35-300 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-011-13
F4-35-300 B Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-011-16
F4-35-300 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
22-011-20
F4-35-450 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-011-23
F4-35-450 B Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-011-26
F4-35-450 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
22-011-30
F4-35-600 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-011-33
F4-35-600 B Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-011-36
F4-35-600 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
www.jokabsafety.com
1
F4-35-750
750 mm
F4-35-900
900 mm
F4-35-1050
1050 mm
F4-35-1200
1200 mm
F4-35-1350
1350 mm
F4-35-1500
1500 mm
F4-35-1650
1650 mm
22-011-40
F4-35-750 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-011-43
F4-35-750 B Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-011-46
F4-35-750 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
22-011-50
F4-35-900 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-011-53
F4-35-900 B Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-011-56
F4-35-900 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
22-111-40
F4-35-1050 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-111-13
F4-35-1050 B Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-111-46
F4-35-1050 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
22-011-60
F4-35-1200 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-011-63
F4-35-1200 B Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-011-66
F4-35-1200 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
22-111-30
F4-35-1350 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-111-33
F4-35-1350 B Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-111-36
F4-35-1350 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
22-011-70
F4-35-1500 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-011-73
F4-35-1500 B Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-011-76
F4-35-1500 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
22-011-80
F4-35-1650 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-011-83
F4-35-1650 B Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-011-86
F4-35-1650 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
2
3
4
5
6
Light curtains Focus–category 2
F2-14-150
150 mm
F2-14-300
300 mm
F2-14-450
450 mm
F2-14-600
600 mm
F2-14-750
750 mm
F2-14-900
900 mm
F2-14-1050
1050 mm
F2-14-1200
1200 mm
22-030-00
F2-14-150 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-030-03
F2-14-150 B Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-030-06
F2-14-150 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
22-030-10
F2-14-300 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-030-13
F2-14-300 B Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-030-16
F2-14-300 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
22-030-20
F2-14-450 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-030-23
F2-14-450 B Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-030-26
F2-14-450 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
22-030-30
F2-14-600 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-030-33
F2-14-600 B Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-030-36
F2-14-600 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
22-030-40
F2-14-750 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-030-43
F2-14-750 B Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-030-46
F2-14-750 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
22-030-50
F2-14-900 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-030-53
F2-14-900 B Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-030-56
F2-14-900 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
22-130-10
F2-14-1050 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-130-13
F2-14-1050 B Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-130-16
F2-14-1050 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
22-030-60
F2-14-1200 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-030-63
F2-14-1200 B Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-030-66
F2-14-1200 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
www.jokabsafety.com
7
8
9
10
11
12
12:15
13
F2-14-1350
1350 mm
F2-14-1500
1500 mm
F2-14-1650
1650 mm
F2-35-150
150 mm
F2-35-300
300 mm
F2-35-450
450 mm
F2-35-600
600 mm
F2-35-750
750 mm
F2-35-900
900 mm
F2-35-1050
1050 mm
F2-35-1200
1200 mm
F2-35-1350
1350 mm
F2-35-1500
1500 mm
F2-35-1650
1650 mm
12:16
22-130-30
F2-14-1350 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-130-33
F2-14-1350 B Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-130-36
F2-14-1350 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
22-030-70
F2-14-1500 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-030-73
F2-14-1500 B Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-030-76
F2-14-1500 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
22-030-80
F2-14-1650 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-030-83
F2-14-1650 B Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-030-86
F2-14-1650 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
22-031-00
F2-35-150 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-031-03
F2-35-150 B Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-031-06
F2-35-150 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
22-031-10
F2-35-300 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-031-13
F2-35-300 B Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-031-16
F2-35-300 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
22-031-20
F2-35-450 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-031-23
F2-35-450 B Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-031-26
F2-35-450 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
22-031-30
F2-35-600 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-031-33
F2-35-600 B Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-031-36
F2-35-600 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
22-031-40
F2-35-750 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-031-43
F2-35-750 B Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-031-46
F2-35-750 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
22-031-50
F2-35-900 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-031-53
F2-35-900 B Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-031-56
F2-35-900 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
22-131-40
F2-35-1050 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-131-13
F2-35-1050 B Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-131-46
F2-35-1050 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
22-031-60
F2-35-1200 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-031-63
F2-35-1200 B Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-031-66
F2-35-1200 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
22-131-30
F2-35-1350 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-131-33
F2-35-1350 B Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-131-36
F2-35-1350 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
22-031-70
F2-35-1500 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-031-73
F2-35-1500 B Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-031-76
F2-35-1500 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
22-031-80
F2-35-1650 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-031-83
F2-35-1650 B Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-031-86
F2-35-1650 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Mirrors for light curtains
MF-150
22-041-01
MF-150 mirror height 150 mm.
MF-300
22-041-02
MF-300 mirror height 300 mm.
MF-450
22-041-03
MF-450 mirror height 450 mm.
MF-600
22-041-04
MF-600 mirror height 600 mm.
MF-750
22-041-05
MF-750 mirror height 750 mm.
MF-800
22-041-06
MF-800 mirror height 800 mm.
MF-900
22-041-07
MF-900 mirror height 900 mm.
MF-1200
22-041-08
MF-1200 mirror height 1200 mm.
MF-1500
22-041-09
MF-1500 mirror height 1500 mm.
MF-1650
22-041-10
MF-1650 mirror height 1650 mm.
22-041-20
Bracket for MF-mirrors.
22-012-00
F4-K4-900 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-012-06
F4-K4-900 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
22-013-00
F4-K4-1200 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-013-06
F4-K4-1200 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
22-014-00
F4-K3-800 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-014-06
F4-K3-800 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
22-015-00
F4-K2-500 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-015-06
F4-K2-500 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
22-016-00
F4-KL4-900 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-016-06
F4-KL4-900 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
22-017-00
F4-KL4-1200 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-017-06
F4-KL4-1200 Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
22-018-00
F4-KL3-800 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-018-06
F4-KL3-800 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
22-019-00
F4-KL2-500 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-019-06
F4-KL2-500 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
F4-KL2-500D
22-111-20
F4-KL2-500D Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
F4-K1C-500
22-020-00
F4-K1C-500 Focus Transmitter/Receiver + Mirror.
22-020-06
F4-K1C-500 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver/Mirror L
program.
22-020-09
FTR4-K1C-500 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L program.
2
3
4
5
Light grids Focus–category 4
F4-K4-900
900 mm
F4-K4-1200
1200 mm
F4-K3-800
800 mm
F4-K2-500
500 mm
F4-KL4-900
900 mm
F4-KL4-1200
1200 mm
F4-KL3-800
800 mm
F4-KL2-500
500 mm
6
7
8
9
10
11
500 mm
500 mm
www.jokabsafety.com
12
12:17
13
F4-K1C-500 LD
22-020-10
F4-K1C-500 LD Focus Transmitter + Receiver/Mirror L
program.
22-032-00
F2-K4-900 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-032-06
F2-K4-900 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
22-033-00
F2-K4-1200 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-033-06
F2-K4-1200 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
22-034-00
F2-K3-800 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-034-06
F2-K3-800 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
22-035-00
F2-K2-500 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.
22-035-06
F2-K2-500 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
22-036-00
F2-K1C-500 Focus Transmitter + Receiver+Mirror.
22-036-06
F2-K1C-500 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver/Mirror L.
22-036-09
FTR2-K1C-500 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.
500 mm
Light grids Focus–category 2
F2-K4-900
900 mm
F2-K4-1200
1200 mm
F2-K3-800
800 mm
F2-K2-500
500 mm
F2-K1C-500
500 mm
Spot 10, Spot 35 and Laser Aligner
12:18
Spot 10T/R
20-009-06
Safety light beam for up to 10 m distance.
M18 steel casing with M12 connector.
Spot 35T/R
20-009-05
Safety light beam for up to 35 m distance.
Plastic housing. M12 connection.
JSRL2
20-008-01
Laser Aligner for use with Spot 35 T/R light beam.
JSRL3
20-008-02
Laser Aligner for use with Focus products.
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Bypass and reset accessories
LH1
40-007-10
Bypass indication lamp (including ML1 light bulb).
ML1
40-007-15
Light bulb 24V 5W.
ML2
40-007-20
LED indicator lamp, long life, 24V AC/DC <45 mA.
MF-T
22-040-20
MF-T Muting unit with transmitter and receiver and
4 integrated photo-cells.
MF-L
22-040-30
MF-L Muting unit with transmitter and receiver and
2 integrated photo-cells.
MUTE R
(FSTR1)
22-044-00
Retro-reflecting photo-cell M18/M12
Range with FZR1: 0.15-2.5 m
FZR2: 0.15-5.1 m.
FZR1
22-044-01
Reflector Ø 80 mm incl. screw MC6S M5 x 14 + Locking nut
M5.
FZR2
22-044-02
Reflector 100 x 100 mm incl. screw MC6S M5 x 14
+ Locking nut M5.
JSOGP800/
MUTE D
22-044-10
Diffuse-reflecting photo-cell, Range 200-800 mm,
M12-connection.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
FMC-1
22-042-00
FMC-1 Focus muting connection unit with 4 connectors.
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
12:19
13
12:20
FMC-2
22-042-10
FMC-2 Focus muting connection unit with 6 connectors.
FMI-1A
22-043-00
FMI-1A muting lamp unit with M12 connector in Focus profile.
FMI-1B
22-043-01
FMI-1B muting lamp unit with reset + lamp and power “off”
button, with M12 connector.
FMI-1C
22-043-02
FMI-1C unit with reset + lamp, power”off” button, and M12
connector.
FMI-1D
22-043-03
FMI-1D unit with reset + lamp, power”off” button, muting
resistor and M12 connector.
FMI-1E
22-043-04
FMI-1E unit with reset + lamp and M12 connector.
FMC-1 Tina
22-045-00
FMC-1 Tina unit Focus connection to Vital. 4 connectors
for muting.
FMC-2 Tina
22-046-00
FMC-2 Tina unit Focus connection to Vital.
6 connectors for muting.
FRM-1A
22-048-00
FRM-1A Relay interface unit for Focus with 8-pin
M12 connector.
www.jokabsafety.com
1
BP-1
22-090-23
Blanking programming unit for Focus light curtains.
2
Bjorn
Wet
22-041-40
Bjorn H2 mirror stand for Focus.
22-041-41
Bjorn V2 mirror stand for Focus.
22-041-45
Bjorn N2 floor stand for Focus.
22-038-00
Wet-150.
22-038-01
Wet-300.
22-038-02
Wet-450.
22-038-03
Wet-600.
22-038-04
Wet-750.
22-038-05
Wet-900.
22-038-06
Wet-1200.
22-038-07
Wet-1500.
22-038-08
Wet-1650.
22-038-09
Wet-K500.
22-038-10
Wet-K800.
3
4
5
6
22-038-11
Wet-K900.
22-038-12
Wet-K1200.
22-038-13
Wet-K1C.
22-038-14
Wet-1050.
22-038-15
Wet-1350.
22-038-16
Wet-K500 D.
22-038-17
Wet-MFT.
22-038-18
Wet-MFL.
JSSP-1
22-070-00
M12 connector protection cap.
JSAP-1
22-070-10
JSAP-1 Adapter plug including resistor and 2 jumpers.
JSERS1
20-009-55
JSERS1 Electromechanical relay with socket base including
jumper.
B-Delay
22-044-03
B-delay for delaying the B sensor when muting a Focus.
7
8
9
11
Mechanical accessories for light curtains, light grids, light beams and
bypassing
22-090-00
2 x M6 x 14 stainless steel bolts with washers and lock nuts.
22-090-01
M6 x 14 Stainless steel bolt.
www.jokabsafety.com
10
12
12:21
13
JSM 66
JSM 67
12:22
22-090-02
M6 Stainless steel lock nut.
22-090-04
Washer for M6 bolt. Stainless steel.
22-090-05
2.2 x 19 mm screw for Focus.
22-090-06
Rubber seal for Focus end piece.
22-090-07
End piece without hole. For Focus profile.
22-090-08
End piece without hole. For Focus profile.
22-090-09
End piece with M12-5 male.
22-090-10
Bracket 2 mm RF A2.
22-090-11
JSM 66 Fixing complete, with 2 bolts.
22-090-12
JSM 66 Bracket, complete, including 2 bolts and screws.
22-090-13
Bracket 2.5 mm RF A2 painted black.
22-090-15
JSM 67 Plastic hinge.
www.jokabsafety.com
1
JSM 68
22-090-18
Test tool 14/35.
JSM F1-K
40-043-00
JSM F1-K Mounting screw set for Aluminium profile.
2
3
JSM F2-K
40-044-00
JSM F2-K screws for JSM64.
4
JSM F3-K
40-045-00
5
JSM F3-K Mounting kit for components to, for example,
JSM 44 Aluminium profile.
6
JSMA44 L
40-001-00
JSMA44-L Post 1100 mm with end cap.
40-001-02
JSMA44-L Post 1300 mm with end cap.
40-001-10
JSMA44-L Post 1300 mm including floor fittings.
40-001-11
JSMA44A-L Post 1100 mm including floor fittings and end
cap.
40-001-12
Post 1300 mm + 1 m including floor fittings, end cap,
brackets and mounting kit.
JSM 36-K2
40-030-10
Floor fixture with screws for mounting to post.
Normally two are used per post.
JSM60-L
40-003-00
Fixing plate for JSM 9 or JSM 63. Includes screws for profile.
JSM62-L
40-004-00
Bracket for JSM 9 for horizontal angling around a machine.
Includes screws for profile.
7
8
9
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
12:23
13
JSM6
40-006-00
Mirror for 0-10 m. Dimensions: 100 x 40 x 25 mm. Screws for
bracket included.
JSM7A
40-006-05
Mirror for 0-20 m, adjustable mirror plate. Dimensions:
115 x 80 x 30 mm. Screws for bracket included.
JSM8A
40-006-06
Mirror for 0-35 m, adjustable mirror plate. Dimensions:
160 x 135 x 30 mm. Screws for bracket included.
JSM9
40-007-00
Bracket for mirror.
JSM63
40-007-01
JSM63 Bracket for Spot 35 T/R light beam. (Two
JSM 63 units accompany each light beam.) Will gradually be
replaced by JSM 66.
JSM64
40-007-02
Wired M18 bracket for, for example, Spot 10T/R or MUTE R
(FSTR1).
Stopping time measurement and Machine diagnosis
12:24
70-099-20
Calibration unit for Stopping time analyzer equipment.
Smart Logger
70-300-01
Safety and motion analyser tool. Analysis tool for moving
machinery systems.
SM2
70-300-02
Stop unit for Smart with pushbutton for interaction with
emergency stops and other pushbuttons.
SM3
70-300-03
Stop unit for Smart with relay for electrical connection to
machinery system.
SM5/1250
70-300-04
Linear transducer for Smart with 1250 mm wire and wire
damper.
SM5/2500
70-300-05
Linear transducer for Smart with 2500 mm wire and wire
damper.
SM6
70-300-06
Mains power supply unit for Smart. 115-230 VAC/24 VDC
with detachable europlug.
SM7
70-300-07
Wheel transducer for Smart, with stand. SM9.
SM9
70-300-09
Case for Smart equipment, capable of holding all Smart
equipment and also room for a laptop computer.
SM11
70-300-11
Stop unit for Smart with rotating flag for interaction with light
curtains and other optical sensors.
SM13
70-300-23
Battery pack for Smart.
SM14
70-300-24
Battery charger for SM11 and SM13 with europlug. Also
suitable for JSSM11.
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Stop unit
adapter
70-300-14
Stop unit adapter making JSSM1 stop units compatible with
Smart.
USB cable
70-300-15
USB cable for connecting Smart Logger to a computer.
Small case for
Smart upgrading kit
70-300-40
Small case intended to hold the equipment needed to
upgrade JSSM equipment to Smart.
Upgrading kit
with a small
case
70-300-41
Smart upgrading kit with a small case. The kit consists of
a small case containing a Smart Logger, SM6, USB cable,
Encoder adapter and Stop unit adapter.
Upgrading kit
with small
case
70-300-42
Smart upgrading kit with an SM9. The kit consists of an
SM9 case containing a Smart Logger, SM6, USB cable,
Encoder adapter and Stop unit adapter.
Basic kit
70-300-43
SM9 case with Smart Logger, SM6 and USB cable.
20-046-00
Eva is the "target" for use with Adam sensors in the Eden
sensor system. IP67. 4 off DA2 spacer rings are included.
2
3
4
Sensors and switches
Eva
5
Eva E
20-046-06
Eva E is encapsulated in polyurethane for harsh environments.
Eva E is the "target" for use with Adam sensors in the Eden E
sensor system. IP69K.
6
7
Adam M12
20-051-00
Adam M12 is a safety sensor unit with a fixed M12 male
connector. IP67. 4 off DA1 spacer rings and 4 off DA2 spacer
rings are included in the package.
8
Adam 3 m
20-051-02
Adam 3 m is a safety sensor unit with 3 m of cable
(5 x 0.34 mm2 + screen). IP67
4 off DA2 spacer rings are included in the package.
Adam 10 m
20-051-04
Adam 10 m is a safety sensor unit with 10 m of cable
(5 x 0.34 mm2 + screen). IP67
4 off DA2 spacer rings are included in the package.
Adam 20 m
20-051-05
Adam 20 m is a safety sensor unit with 20 m of cable
(5 x 0.34 mm2 + screen). IP67. The package includes 4 off
DA2 spacer rings.
9
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
12:25
13
12:26
Adam E 10 m
20-051-06
Adam E 10 m is a safety sensor unit encapsulated in
polyurethane for harsh environments with 10 m of cable
(5 x 0.34 mm2 + screen) IP69K.
Connector IP67.
Adam E
0.5 m M12
20-051-07
Adam E 0.5 m is a safety sensor unit encapsulated in
extra polyurethane for harsh environments with 0.5 m cable
5 x 0.34 mm2+ screen and M12 male connector.
IP69K. Connector IP67.
Adam E 20 m
20-051-08
Adam E 20 m is a safety sensor unit encapsulated in
polyurethane for harsh environments with 20 m cable
(5 x 0.34 mm2 + screen) IP69K. Connector IP67.
Eden C 10 m
20-051-14
Adam C with 10 m cable and Eva C in coded version.
Eden EC
20-051-16
Adam EC 10 m and Eva EC is a coded safety sensor unit
covered with extra polyurethane for harsh environments with
10 m cable 5 x 0.34 mm2+ screen. IP69K.
DA 1
20-053-00
Spacer plate, 2.5 mm thick, in polycarbonate. For Adam
M12 and associated Eva. Not suitable for Adam E and Eva E.
DA 2
20-053-01
Mounting spacer ring 4.5 x 8 x 4 mm, in black polyamide, for
use with
Adam and Eva units.
20-053-10
M4 mounting screw, Length 18 mm, for recessed mounting of
Adam and Eva.
20-053-20
M4 mounting screw, Length 16 mm, for projecting mounting
of Adam and Eva.
20-053-30
M4 mounting screw, Length 25 mm, for projecting
mounting of Adam E and Eva E.
www.jokabsafety.com
1
20-053-32
M4 nylon mounting screw, Length 25 mm, for recessed or
projecting mounting of Adam and Eva (Adam E and Eva E).
20-053-42
SM4 x 20 safety screw, for mounting Adam and Eva.
20-053-43
SM4 x 25 safety screw, for mounting of Adam E and Eva E.
20-053-44
Safety nut M4.
20-053-50
Safety screwdriver bit SBITS.
20-053-62
SM4 x 20 Safety screw + 1 screwdriver bit.
20-053-63
SM4 x 25 Safety screw + 1 screwdriver bit.
20-022-00
JSNY5A Safety switch 2NC+ 1NO 10N.
20-022-01
JSNY5B Safety switch 2NC+ 1NO 30N.
2
3
4
5
Mechanical switches
JSNY5
6
7
JSNY7
JSNY4
20-023-00
JSNY7R-3 Magnetic switch 3 m cable.
20-023-01
JSNY7R-6 Magnetic switch 6 m cable.
20-023-02
JSNY7R-10 Magnetic switch10 m cable.
20-024-00
JSNY7 m Magnetic key.
20-029-00
JSNY4A Safety switch 2NC 10N.
20-029-01
JSNY4B Safety switch 2NC 30N.
8
9
10
JSNY8
JSPG11
20-030-00
JSNY8 m 24DC Safety switch.
20-030-01
JSNY8S 24DC Safety switch.
20-030-02
JSNY8 mN2 24DC Safety switch including flexible key.
20-030-03
JSNY8SN2 24VDC Safety switch including flexible key.
20-030-05
JSNY8S 230AC Safety switch.
20-030-15
JSNY8 m 230AC Safety switch.
20-031-00
JSPG11 cable gland PG11/6 mm.
www.jokabsafety.com
11
12
12:27
13
JSNYN_
12:28
20-032-00
JSNYN1 Steel key (standard).
20-032-01
JSNYN2 Key, horizontal axis.
20-032-02
JSNYN3 Key, vertical axis.
20-032-03
JSNYN4 Key with 100N holding force.
JSNYN5
20-032-06
JSNYN5 Flexible key for JSNY5.
JSNY8/9N_
20-032-04
JSNY8/9N1 standard key.
20-032-05
JSNY8/9N2 flexible key for JSNY8/9.
JSNYL1
20-033-00
JSNYL1 cover for JSNY5.
JSNY8EO
20-032-20
JSNY8EO Emergency opening button for JSNY8S.
JSNY9
20-036-01
JSNY9S 24VUC Safety switch.
20-036-02
JSNY9SN2 24VUC Safety switch including flexible key.
20-036-12
JSNY9SLA 24VUC Safety switch with LEDs.
20-036-21
JSNY9M 24VUC Safety switch.
20-036-22
JSNY9MN2 24VUC Safety switch including flexible key.
20-036-32
JSNY9MLA 24VUC Safety switch with LEDs.
JSNYL2
20-033-01
JSNYL2 cover for JSNY9.
JSNYL3
20-033-02
JSNYL3 cover for JSNY9 with LEDs.
20-033-03
Gasket for JSNYL2/L3.
20-304-01
Latch for JSNY9 including bolts.
Magne 1A
42-022-00
Magnetic lock.
Magne 2A
42-022-10
Magnetic lock with indication.
JSM D21
42-023-00
Magne installation kit.
JSMD2AGS
42-023-10
Handle/screw for JSM D21 Magne installation kit.
42-023-01
Handle profile that completely hides a Magne unit when the
door is closed.
Dalton M111
20-038-00
0.5 m cable with M12 8-pole male plug.
Dalton M311
20-038-07
0.5 m cable with M12 5-pole male plug, locking pin 4.
Dalton L001
20-038-90
Only ball latch, no electrical functions.
Dalton M315
20-038-10
5-pole male plug, locking pin 4, small mounting plate for the
tongue.
Dalton M113
20-038-04
8-pole male plug, angle brackets for Jokab enclosure.
Dalton M112
20-038-03
Lock with securing plate for separately connected Eden.
0.5 m cable with M12 8-pole male plug.
Dalton M312
20-038-08
Lock with securing plate for separately connected Eden.
0.5 m cable with M12 5-pole male plug, locking pin 4.
Dalton L002
20-038-91
Only ball latch, no electrical functions, mounting plate also for
Eden.
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Dalton M121
Dalton M122
20-038-01
20-038-02
Lock with M12 connector for connection of separately
mounted Eden.
0.5 m cable with M12 8-pole male plug.
2
Lock with integrated Eden.
0.5 m cable with M12 8-pole male plug.
Dalton M124
20-038-09
8-pole male plug, 5-pole female plug for Adam, angle
brackets for Jokab enclosure.
DA 1
20-053-00
Spacer, 2.5 mm, for Adam and Eva.
M12-CT0214
20-060-01
Transfer cable 0.2 m M12 5-pole male plug, 8-pole female
plug.
3
4
5
6
Tina 12A
20-054-18
Distribution block for two Dalton Edens with 8-pole cables.
7
Control devices - one and two hand-control devices–Safeball
JSTD20
JSTD1_
20-007-20
JSTD20A Two-hand station without emergency stop push
button.
20-007-21
JSTD20B Two-hand station with emergency stop push
button.
20-007-22
JSTD20C Two-hand station housing only.
20-007-30
JSTD1-A Safeball with 2 m cable.
20-007-31
JSTD1-B Safeball with 0.2 m cable.
20-007-32
JSTD1-C Safeball with 10 m cable.
20-007-34
JSTD1-E Safeball 1NO+ 1NO with 0.2 m cable.
JSM C5
20-007-09
JSM C5 Ball & socket table mount for Safeball.
JSTS30
20-007-40
JSTS30 Floor stand.
JSTS31
20-007-41
JSTS31 Floor stand including spacer ring.
8
9
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
12:29
13
JSTS32
20-007-42
JSTS32 Spacer ring for floor stand.
JSTD25A
20-007-50
JSTD25A Two-hand station with 2 Safeballs, no emergency
stop push button.
JSTD25B
20-007-51
JSTD25B Two-hand station with 2 Safeballs and emergency
stop push button.
JSTD25C
20-007-52
JSTD25C Two-hand station without Safeball or emergency
stop push button.
JSTD25D
20-007-53
JSTD25D Two-hand station with 2 Safeballs and JSM C5, no
emergency stop push button.
JSTD25E
20-007-54
JSTD25E Two-hand station with 2 Safeballs, JSM C5, and
emergency stop push button.
JSTD25B-1
20-007-57
JSTD25B-1 Two-hand station, grey, with 2 Safeballs and
emergency stop push button.
JSTD25F
20-007-60
JSTD25F Two-hand station with 2 Safeballs.
20-007-64
Protective plates for Safeball (kit) including fasteners.
JSTD25G
20-007-62
JSTD25G.
JSTD25P-1
20-007-65
JSTD25P-1 Two hand station, portable, with 2 Safeballs.
20-007-66
Connector for JSTD25P-1.
20-007-67
4 m long spiral cable for JSTD25P-1.
20-007-68
8 m long spiral cable for JSTD25P-1.
20-007-80
Universal shelf for JSTD25P-1.
Control devices - 2 and 3-position pedals–Fox
FOX 31
20-160-01
FOX 31 3-position footswitch, single, with reset button.
FOX 32
20-160-02
FOX 32 3-position footswitch, double, with reset button.
FOX 21
20-160-21
FOX 21 2-position footswitch, single.
FOX 22
20-160-22
FOX 22 2-position footswitch, double.
Control devices - 3-position devices and pushbuttons
JSHD2C
JSHD4
12:30
20-001-10
JSHD2C type E 3-position pushbutton, 3 cables.
20-001-13
JSHD2C type K 3-position pushbutton, 2 cables.
20-002-00
JSHD4 3-position control device with 2 extra pushbuttons
(top/front).
www.jokabsafety.com
1
JSHD4D
20-002-01
JSHD4 3-position control device with extra pushbutton
(front).
2
JSHD4E
20-002-03
3
JSHD4E 3-position control device with extra pushbutton
(top).
4
JSHD4F
20-002-04
JSHD4F 3-position control device without extra pushbuttons.
5
JSHD4FN
20-002-18
JSHD4FN 3-position device with spiral cable and
connector.
JSHD4 mU
20-002-78
JSHD4 mU 3-position control device for Eden.
JSHD4FA
20-002-79
JSHD4FA 3-position control device for PLC, spiral cable.
6
7
8
JSHD4FU
20-002-81
JSHD4FU 3-position device without extra pushbuttons.
9
10
JSHD4P
20-002-94
JSHD4P 3-position control device with extra pushbuttons, no
LEDs.
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
12:31
13
JSHD4PB
20-002-95
JSHD4PB 3-position control device with extra pushbuttons
for use together with Pluto PLC.
JSHD4PC
20-002-96
JSHD4PC 3-position control device with extra pushbuttons,
black Eva plate, spiral cable.
JSHD4PD
20-002-97
JSHD4PD 3-position control device with 2 extra pushbuttons.
JSHD4H2A
20-002-02
JSHD4H2A 3-position control device for external panel
mounting.
JSHD4S2
20-002-07
JSHD4S2 3-position control device, ABB upgrading kit.
JSHD4H2
20-002-31
JSHD4H2 3-position device for panel mounting.
JSHK_
20-003-00
JSHK5 Cable 5 m for JSHD4.
20-003-01
JSHK10 Cable 10 m for JSHD4.
20-003-02
JSHK15 Cable 15 m for JSHD4.
20-003-04
JSHK20 Cable 20 m for JSHD4.
20-003-05
JSHK25 Cable 25 m for JSHD4.
JSHK0
20-003-03
JSHK0 12-pole connector for JSHD4.
JSHK1
20-003-08
JSHK1-A Female chassis receptacle.
20-003-09
JSHK1-B Male chassis receptacle.
20-003-07
JSHK1-C Male chassis receptacle.
20-003-10
JSHK5-E Extension cable 5 m.
JSHK5-E
12:32
www.jokabsafety.com
1
JSHK10-K
JSHK5-E1
JSHK_
20-003-11
JSHK10-K cable for JSHD4K, 12-pole.
20-003-12
JSHK5-E1 Connection cable 5 m.
20-003-13
15 m Highly flexible hold-to-run cable with JSHK connector,
yellow cable.
20-003-20
JSHK16S Spiral cable 1,6 m max. with connector.
20-003-21
JSHK20S Spiral cable 2,0 m max. with connector.
20-003-22
JSHK28S Spiral cable 2,8 m max. with connector.
20-003-23
JSHK32S Spiral cable 3,2 m max. with connector.
20-003-24
JSHK40S Spiral cable 4,0 m max. with connector.
20-003-25
JSHK60S Spiral cable 6,0 m max. with connector.
20-003-26
JSHK80S Spiral cable 8,0 m max. with connector.
JSHK-T1
20-003-30
Cable drum, 12 m cable.
JSM 54A
20-205-28
JSM 54A Wall bracket for Adam.
JSM5A
40-005-03
JSM5A Wall bracket for 2 switches JSNY5.
JSM55
40-005-05
JSM55 Wall fixing for 3-position device.
2
3
4
5
Emergency stops Inca, Smile INCA 1 Tina
30-054-00
Emergency stop button for panel mounting with Tina function
and dynamic function principle. LED indication in the button.
INCA 1
30-054-01
Emergency stop button for panel mounting with
mechanical contacts. LED indication in the button.
INCA 1S Tina
30-054-02
Stop button for panel mounting with Tina function and
dynamic function principle. LED indication in the button.
Black print.
INCA 1S
30-054-03
Stop button for panel mounting with mechanical
contacts. LED indication in the button. Black print.
INCA front ring
30-054-04
Yellow surround for emergency stop button.
Emergency
stop sign
30-054-05
S D F, 22,5 mm
30-054-06
E F D, 22,5 mm
30-054-07
S D F, 32,5 mm
30-054-08
E F D, 32,5 mm
www.jokabsafety.com
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
12:33
13
12:34
Smile 11EA
Tina
30-050-00
Emergency stop for Vital, 1 xM12/5-pole male connector, red/
green LED.
Smile 12EA
Tina
30-050-02
Emergency stop for Vital, 1 xM12/5-pole male connector,
1 xM12/5-pole female connector, red/green LED.
Smile 10EA
Tina
30-050-04
Emergency stop for Vital, 1 m cable 5 x 0.34 mm2, red/green
LED.
Smile 11 SA
Tina
30-050-05
Emergencystop to Vital, 1 x M12/5-pole male, r/g LED.
Black button.
Smile 12 SA
Tina
30-050-06
Emergencystop to Vital, 1 x M12/5-pole male, 1 x M12/5-pole
female, r/g LED. Black button.
Smile 11 SAR
Tina
30-050-07
Emergencystop to Vital, 1 x M12/5-pole male, r/g LED.
Black button. Enclosure reversed.
Smile 12 SAR
Tina
30-050-08
Emergencystop to Vital, 1 x M12/5-pole male, 1 x M12/5-pole
female, r/g LED. Black button. Enclosure reversed.
Smile 11EA
30-051-00
Emergency stop 2 xNC, 1 xM12/5-pole male connector.
Smile 12EA
30-051-02
Emergency stop 2 xNC, 1 xM12/5-pole male connector,
1 xM12/5-pole female connector.
Smile 10EA
30-051-04
Emergency stop 2 xNC, 1 m cable 5 x 0.34 mm2.
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Smile 10EK
30-051-06
E-stop 2 xNC, 0,5 m wires 4 x 0,5 mm2.
2
3
Smile 11 SA
30-051-09
Emergencystop 2 x NC, 1 x M12/5-pole male. Black button.
Smile 12 SA
30-051-10
Emergencystop 2 x NC, 1 x M12/5-pole male, 1 x M12/5-pole
female. Black button.
Smile 11 SAR
30-051-11
Emergencystop 2 x NC, 1 x M12/5-pole male. Black button.
Enclosure reversed.
Smile 12 SAR
30-051-12
Emergencystop 2 x NC, 1 x M12/5-pole male, 1 x M12/5-pole
female. Black button. Enclosure reversed.
JST2
30-051-13
Termination for Smile 12.
4
5
6
JSKL1-NS/2A
30-001-10
JSKL1-NS/2A Emergency stop button box with internal
Tina 2A.
7
JSKL1-NS/3A
30-001-11
JSKL1-NS/3A Emergency stop button box with internal
Tina 3A.
JSKL1-NS
30-003-02
Emergency stop button box with internal 2NC relay.
JSNY10
20-034-00
JSNY10 Emergency stop pull-rope switch.
JSNY10-M6
20-034-01
JSNY10-M6 Nut.
JSNY10-S6
20-034-02
JSNY10-S6 Eyebolt.
JSNY10-T4
20-034-03
JSNY10-T4 Wire thimble.
www.jokabsafety.com
8
9
10
11
12
12:35
13
JSNY10-L3
20-034-04
JSNY10-L3 Duplex wire clamp.
JSNY10-W3
20-034-05
JSNY10-W3 Red plastic-coated wire.
JSNY10-V6
20-034-06
JSNY10-V6 Wire turnbuckle M6 x 60.
JSNY10-K
20-034-07
JSNY10-K Mounting kit, 25 m wire.
JSNY10-S8
20-034-09
JSNY10-S8 Eyebolt M8 x 50.
Nödstoppsskylt JSNY10
20-034-10
Emergency stop sign JSNY10 (in Swedish).
Nödstoppsskylt JSNY10
20-034-11
Emergency stop sign JSNY10 (in English).
JSNY10-R5
20-034-13
JSNY10-R5 Swivel for wire.
AL 25-14
76-002-02
AL 25-14 Aluminium profile for 25-xx.
Kabel LIYY
76-002-18
Cable LIYY 2 x 0.34.
SKL 15-10
76-015-10
SKL 15-10 Mini-safety contact rail including AL 15-8.
KKB
76-015-12
KKB 2.2 m cable for SKL15-10 2.2 m.
Klämlist
76-027-38
Safety contact rail 25-25 EPDM with lip.
76-025-25
Safety contact rail 25-25 EPDM.
Contact edges
76-025-40
Safety contact rail 25-40 EPDM.
76-025-65
Safety contact rail 25-65 EPDM.
76-035-60
Safety contact rail 35-60 EPDM.
76-035-80
Safety contact rail 35-80 EPDM.
76-125-25
Safety contact rail 25-25 NBR.
76-125-40
Safety contact rail 25-40 NBR.
76-125-65
25-65 NBR with lip.
76-135-60
Safety contact rail 35-60 NBR.
76-200-01
Bumper ASB 53/100 black.
Bumpers
Bumper ASB
12:36
76-200-02
Bumper ASB 100/200 black.
76-200-03
Bumper ASB 150/300 black.
76-200-04
Bumper ASB 200/400 black.
76-200-05
Bumper ASB 53/100 black/yellow.
76-200-06
Bumper ASB 100/200 black/yellow.
76-200-07
Bumper ASB 150/300 black/yellow.
76-200-08
Bumper ASB 200/400 black/yellow.
76-200-09
Bumper ASB 60/100 NBR black (63/100).
76-200-10
Bumper ASB 100/200 NBR black.
76-200-11
Bumper ASB 150/300 NBR black.
76-200-12
Bumper ASB 200/400 NBR black.
76-200-13
Bumper ASB 200/200 black.
76-200-14
Bumper ASB 150/150 NBR black.
76-200-15
Bumper ASB 100/200 NBR black/yellow.
76-200-16
Bumper ASB 150/250 NBR black/yellow.
www.jokabsafety.com
1
Safety Mats
ASK
76-301-05
Safety mat ASK-1U4.4RF No ramp edge trim, size to order.
76-300-03
Safety mat ASK-1P2-TBV stainless steel.
76-300-04
Safety mat ASK-1P2-ARB aluminium.
ASK
76-301-06
Safety mat ASK-1T4.4RF Size to order with cast-in ramp
edge trim.
ASK
76-310-05
Safety mat ASK-1U4.4RF No ramp edge trim
1000 x 750 mm.
76-310-06
Safety mat ASK-1U4.4RF No ramp edge trim
1000 x 1000 mm.
76-310-07
Safety mat ASK-1U4.4RF No ramp edge trim
1000 x 1500 mm.
76-310-10
Safety mat ASK-1T4.4RF Cast-in ramp edge trim
1000 x 750 mm.
76-310-11
Safety mat ASK-1T4.4RF Cast-in ramp edge trim
1000 x 1000 mm.
76-310-12
Safety mat ASK-1T4.4RF Cast-in ramp edge trim
1000 x 1500 mm.
76-900-32
Junction cable including 1 off M8 male and 1 off M8 female
connectors, 2.5 m cable.
76-900-33
Junction cable including 1 off M8 male and 1 off M8 female
connectors, 5 m cable.
RS 14
76-300-05
RS 14, Ramp rail in aluminium.
6
BS 14
76-300-08
BS 14 profile for ASK in aluminium.
7
Corner piece
76-300-09
Corner piece for RS14, in polyamide.
ASK
Junction cable
2
3
4
5
8
Fencing System QuickGuard, SafeCAD, Roller Door
9
Aluminium profiles
JSM A4416
JSM A44A
JSM A4488A
40-037-70
Aluminium profile, 44 x 16, naturally anodised, per metre.
40-037-74
Aluminium profile, 44 x 16, naturally anodised,
L=6000 mm.
40-037-35
Aluminium profile, naturally anodised, 44 x 44, per metre.
40-037-36
Aluminium profile, naturally anodised, 44 x 44, L=1100 mm.
40-037-98
Aluminium profile, naturally anodised, 44 x 44, L=1400 mm.
40-037-37
Aluminium profile, naturally anodised, 44 x 44, L=2000 mm.
40-037-38
Aluminium profile, naturally anodised, 44 x 44, L=2200 mm.
40-037-39
Aluminium profile, naturally anodised, 44 x 44, L=2400 mm.
40-037-40
Aluminium profile, naturally anodised, 44 x 44, L=2500 mm.
40-037-41
Aluminium profile, naturally anodised, 44 x 44, L=6000 mm.
40-037-42
Aluminium profile, naturally anodised, 44 x 88, per metre.
40-037-43
Aluminium profile, naturally anodised, 44 x 88, L=2000 mm.
40-037-44
Aluminium profile, naturally anodised, 44 x 88, L=2200 mm.
40-037-45
Aluminium profile, naturally anodised, 44 x 88, L=6000 mm.
www.jokabsafety.com
10
11
12
12:37
13
JSM A88
JSM A12
JSM A13
Cable duct 88 x 68 L=2000 mm.
40-037-28
U-profile edging, per metre.
40-037-27
U-profile edging L=1076 mm.
40-037-46
U-profile edging L=1476 mm.
40-037-47
U-profile edging L=2000 mm.
40-037-50
H-profile, per metre.
40-037-51
H-profile, L=1076 mm.
40-037-52
H-profile, L=1476 mm.
40-037-53
H-profile, L=2020 mm.
JSM A3130B
40-037-26
Aluminium guide rail including screws.
JSM A56
40-037-49
Aluminium guide rail including screws, per metre.
40-037-08
Aluminium guide rail including screws, L=2000 mm.
40-037-48
Aluminium guide rail including screws, L=6000 mm.
JSM A25A
40-037-13
Cable duct 44 x 25 with ”keyhole”, including lid, L=2000 mm.
JSM A25B
40-037-14
Cable duct 44 x 25 including lid, L=2000 mm.
JSM A60A
40-037-15
Cable duct 44 x 60 with ”keyhole”, including lid, L=2000 mm.
JSM A60B
40-037-16
Cable duct 44 x 60 including lid, L=2000 mm Cap, L= 2 M.
JSM A8888
40-037-75
Al-profile 88 x 88 Natural anodized aluminium
(cut to length).
40-037-79
Al-profile 88 x 88 Natural anodized aluminium L=6000.
40-037-95
Profile for 25 mm sound-absorbing panel, (per metre).
40-037-09
Profile for 25 mm sound-absorbing panel, L=2000 mm.
40-037-96
Profile for double 5 mm polycarbonate panel
(per metre).
40-037-10
Profile for double 5 mm polycarbonate panel, L=2000 mm.
JSM AS1
JSM AS2
12:38
40-037-33
www.jokabsafety.com
1
JSM AS3
42-021-80
Profile for 50 mm sound-absorbing panel
(per metre).
42-021-81
Profile for 50 mm sound-absorbing panel,
L=6000 mm.
2
JSM 30B-K
40-030-06
JSM 30B-K Floor bracket, pre-fitted, in aluminium.
3
JSM 36-K1
40-030-09
Floor bracket in steel plate, pre-fitted with 3 screws.
Fixing
4
5
JSM 36-K2
40-030-10
Floor bracket in steel plate, pre-fitted with 3 screws.
6
JSM 39-K
40-030-14
Aluminium floor bracket, pre-fitted.
7
JSM 30B-K1
40-030-11
Angle fitting, pre-fitted with 4 screws.
JSM 31AI-K
40-030-04
JSM 31A1-K Small angular bracket one countersunk hole.
JSM31B-K
40-030-13
Small angled bracket, pre-fitted.
9
JSM 32B-K
40-030-07
JSM 32B-K L-bracket, pre-fitted.
10
8
11
JSM 33B-K
40-030-08
T-bracket, pre-fitted.
12
www.jokabsafety.com
12:39
13
JSM 34A-K
40-031-04
I fitting, pre-fitted.
JSM 35-K
40-033-14
Hinge including screws, centres at 47 mm.
JSM 37
40-033-31
Spacer screw for Economy.
JSM D4A
40-033-09
JSM D4A Fittings for JSNY5, hinged door.
JSM D4AA
40-033-34
Securing fitting for JSNY5 hinged door.
JSM D4B
40-033-10
Fittings for JSNY5 sliding door with guide rail.
JSM D4E
40-033-18
Fixing plate for JSNY7 hinged door.
JSM D4G
40-033-33
Securing fitting for JSNY7 sliding door.
JSM D4C
40-033-16
JSM D4A Fittings for JSNY8 and JSNY9 hinged door.
Fixing for switches
12:40
www.jokabsafety.com
1
JSM D4D
40-033-17
JSM D4D Fittings for JSNY8 sliding door.
2
JSM D4F
40-033-30
Securing fitting for JSNY9 sliding door.
3
4
JSM D4H
40-033-36
JSM D4H Securing fitting for ADAM & EVA (EDEN) hinged
door and sliding door.
JSM D4K
40-033-45
Securing fitting for EDEN/EDEN E. Stainless steel.
JSM D4J
42-020-40
Securing fitting for Adam/Eva. Folding partitions.
5
6
7
Door components
JSM D1A
40-033-15
Hinge including screw 62 mm centres.
JSM D1B
42-020-47
Sprung hinge, complete.
8
9
10
JSM D2
40-033-01
JSM D2 Handle including screw.
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
12:41
13
12:42
JSM D18
42-020-50
Handle including spacer angle.
JSM D5
40-033-04
JSM D5 Suspension wheel.
JSM D6
40-033-05
JSM D6 Sliding element, rectangular.
JSM D7
40-033-06
JSM D7 Sliding element, round.
JSM D8
40-033-07
JSM D8 Sliding element, guide.
JSM D9
40-033-08
Castor wheel, with locking brake, 75/97.
JSM D9-K
40-033-11
Castor wheel, with locking brake, 75/97, including angle
bracket.
JSM D9A
40-033-12
Apparatus fixed wheel, 75/95.
JSM D9A-K
40-033-13
JSM D9A-K Guide roller 75/79 including angle bracket.
JSM D12
40-033-22
Guide pin for sliding door, vertical.
JSM D12A
40-033-23
Guide pin for sliding door, horizontal.
JSM D12B
40-033-24
Guide plate for sliding door.
JSM D13
40-033-25
Door stop, vertical, with vibration damper, for sliding door.
www.jokabsafety.com
1
JSM D13A
40-033-26
Door stop, right angle.
2
JSM D13B
40-033-27
Door stop, horizontal, with vibration damper, for sliding door.
3
JSM D14
40-033-28
Cross brace for door 20 x 5 L=1160 mm.
JSM D14A
42-021-73
Cross brace for door 20 x 5 L=400 mm.
4
JSM D3
40-033-02
JSM D3 Door closer, including mounting components for
hinged door.
5
JSM D19
42-020-56
Door closer incl. mounting components for sliding door.
6
7
JSM D11B
40-033-41
Ball latch for hinged door.
JSM D11C
40-033-42
Ball latch for sliding door.
8
9
10
JSM D11D
42-020-52
Ball latch folding door.
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
12:43
13
12:44
JSM D22
42-024-10
Gas spring including fixture, stroke length 300 mm.
JSM D22A
42-024-11
Gas spring including fixture, stroke length 350 mm.
JSM D10
40-033-20
Sliding bolt.
JSM D10A
40-033-21
Sliding bolt with return spring L=1000 mm.
JSM D10B
40-033-38
Door sliding bolt with spring.
JSM D15
40-033-39
Cam lock, complete, excluding key.
JSM D16
40-033-44
Key to fit JSM D15.
JSM D17
42-020-22
Securing plate for padlock.
www.jokabsafety.com
1
JSM D21
42-023-00
Magne 1A mounting fixture.
2
3
Express sections height 2000 och 2200
JSM E11
-N20X8
40-101-03
Mesh section c-c=1100 with 1 off. 44 x 88 post H=2000.
JSM E15
-N20X8
40-101-09
Mesh section c-c=1500 with 1 off. 44 x 88 post H=2000.
JSM E11
-PC20X8
40-101-53
Pc section c-c=1100 with 1 off. 44 x 88 post H=2000.
JSM E11
-N22X8
40-102-03
Mesh section c-c=1100 with 1 off. 44 x 88 post H=2200.
JSM E15
-N22X8
40-102-08
Mesh section c-c=1500 with 1 off. 44 x 88 post H=2200
JSM E11
-PC22X8
40-102-53
Pc section c-c=1100 with 1 off. 44 x 88 post H=2200.
JSM E11
-N/PC20X8
40-104-01
Mesh/Pc-section c-c=1100 with 1 off. 44 x 88 post H=2000.
JSM E11
-N/PC22X8
40-105-01
Mesh/Pc-section c-c=1100 with 1 off. 44 x 88 post H=2200.
JSM E11
-N20Z
40-101-04
Mesh for Q-G Express c-c=1100 H=2000.
JSM E15
-N20Z
40-101-10
Mesh for Q-G Express c-c=1500 H=2000.
JSM E11
-PC20Z
40-101-54
Pc for Q-G Express c-c=1100 H=2000.
JSM E11
-N22Z
40-102-04
Mesh for Q-G Express c-c=1100 H=2200.
JSM E15
-N22Z
40-102-09
Mesh for Q-G Express c-c=1500 H=2200.
JSM E11
-PC22Z
40-102-54
Pc for Q-G Express c-c=1100 H=2200.
JSM E11
-N/PC20Z
40-104-02
Mesh/Pc for Q-G Express c-c=1100 H=2000.
JSM E11
-N/PC22Z
40-105-02
Mesh/Pc for Q-G Express c-c=1100 H=2200.
JSM E11
-N20G
40-101-05
Door frame c-c=1100, door leaf with mesh H=2000.
JSM E11
-PC20G
40-101-55
Door frame c-c=1100, door leaf with Pc H=2000.
JSM E11
-N22G
40-102-05
Door frame c-c=1100, door leaf with mesh H=2200.
JSM E11
-PC22G
40-102-55
Door frame c-c=1100, door leaf with Pc H=2200.
JSM E11
-N/PC20G
40-104-03
Door frame c-c=1100, door leaf with mesh/Pc H=2000.
JSM E11
-N/PC22G
40-105-03
Door frame c-c=1100, door leaf with mesh/Pc H=2200.
www.jokabsafety.com
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
12:45
13
JSM E11
-N20S
40-101-06
Sliding door section c-c=1100 with mesh H=2000.
JSM E15
-N20S
40-101-11
Sliding door section c-c=1500 with mesh H=2000.
JSM E11
-PC20S
40-101-57
Sliding door section c-c=1100 with Pc H=2000.
JSM E11
-N22S
40-102-06
Sliding door section c-c=1100 with mesh H=2200.
JSM E15
-N22S
40-102-10
Sliding door section c-c=1500 with mesh H=2200.
JSM E11
-PC22S
40-102-56
Sliding door section c-c=1100 with Pc H=2200.
JSM E11
-N/PC20S
40-104-04
Sliding door section c-c=1100 with mesh/Pc H=2000.
JSM E11
-N/PC22S
40-105-04
Sliding door section c-c=1100 with mesh/Pc H=2200.
JSM E11
-20Y8
40-103-21
Post 44 x 88 incl. floor bracket L=2000.
JSM E11
-22Y8
40-103-41
Post 44 x 88 incl. floor bracket L=2200.
JSM E11
-N14X4
40-106-02
Mesh section c-c=1100 with 1 off. 44 x 44 post H=1400.
JSM E11
-N14X8
40-106-03
Mesh section c-c=1100 with 1 off. 44 x 88 post H=1400.
JSM E15
-N14X4
40-106-10
Mesh section c-c=1500 with 1 off. 44 x 44 post H=1400.
JSM E15
-N14X8
40-106-07
Mesh section c-c=1500 with 1 off. 44 x 88 post H=1400
JSM E11
-PC14X4
40-106-52
Pc section c-c=1100 with 1 off. 44 x 44 post H=1400
JSM E11
-PC14X8
40-106-53
Pc section c-c=1100 with 1 off. 44 x 88 post H=1400.
JSM E11
-N14Z
40-106-04
Mesh for Q-G Express c-c=1100 H=1400.
JSM E15
-N14Z
40-106-08
Mesh for Q-G Express c-c=1500 H=1400.
JSM E11
-PC14Z
40-106-54
Pc for Q-G Express c-c=1100 H=1400.
Express sections height 1400
12:46
www.jokabsafety.com
1
JSM E11
-N14G
40-106-05
Door frame c-c=1100 incl. door leaf with mesh H=1400.
JSM E11
-PC14G
40-106-55
Door frame c-c=1100 incl. door leaf with Pc H=1400.
2
3
JSM E11
-14Y4
40-106-80
Post 44 x 44 incl. floor bracket L=1400.
JSM E11
-14Y8
40-106-81
Post 44 x 88 incl. floor bracket L=1400.
4
5
6
Cap and edges
JSM L1A
40-034-00
Terminal cap for JSM A44A, yellow.
JSM L1B
40-034-03
Terminal cap for JSM A44A, grey.
JSM L4A
40-034-04
Terminal cap for JSM A4488A, yellow.
JSM L4B
40-034-05
Terminal cap for JSM A4488A, grey.
JSM L2
40-034-01
Terminal cap for JSM A25, grey.
JSM L3
40-034-02
7
8
9
Terminal cap for JSM A60, grey.
10
JSM T3A
40-037-31
Cover strip, narrow, yellow, L=2000 mm.
JSM T3B
40-037-32
Cover strip, narrow, grey, L=2000 mm.
JSM T2A
40-037-19
Wide PVC cover strip yellow.
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
12:47
13
Surfaces and fixations
JSM NL2
40-031-06
JSM NL2 Netting lock in plastic, for welded mesh.
JSM NL3
40-031-08
JSM NL3 Netting lock in zinc, for mesh.
JSM PL3
40-038-11
Securing fixture in zinc for surfacing material.
JSM PL1_
40-038-01
Edge fitting in black ABS plastic.
L=842 mm for 5 mm panels.
40-038-02
Edge fitting in black ABS plastic.
L=1152 mm for 5 mm panels.
40-038-03
Edge fitting in black ABS plastic.
L=2000 mm for 5 mm panels.
40-038-04
Edge fitting in black ABS plastic.
L=732 mm for 5 mm panels.
40-038-07
Edge fitting in black ABS plastic.
L=842 mm for 4 mm panels.
40-038-08
Edge fitting in black ABS plastic.
L=1152 mm for 4 mm panels.
40-038-09
Edge fitting in black ABS plastic.
L=2000 mm for 4 mm panels.
40-038-10
Edge fitting in black ABS plastic.
L=732 mm for 4 mm panels.
JSM G2
40-038-06
Foam rubber edging, self-adhesive 5 x 20 mm.
JSM G3
41-930-06
U-Rubber strip 12 x 2 x 6.
JSM YN40W1
40-040-13
Welded steel mesh 40 x 40 x 3,5 black 2020 x 864 mm.
JSM YN40W2
40-040-14
Welded steel mesh 40 x 40 x 3,5 black 1074 x 1816 mm.
JSM YN40W3
40-040-15
Welded steel mesh 40 x 40 x 3,5 black 1074 x 2016 mm.
JSM YN40W4
40-040-20
Welded steel mesh 40 x 40 x 3,5 black 1474 x 2016 mm.
JSM YN40W5
40-040-21
Welded steel mesh 40 x 40 x 3,5 black 1474 x 1816 mm.
JSM YN40W6
40-040-26
Welded steel mesh 40 x 40 x 3,5 black 2020 x 754 mm.
JSM YN40W7
40-040-27
Welded steel mesh 40 x 40 x 3,5 black 2020 x 1174 mm.
JSM YN40W10
40-040-28
Welded steel mesh 40 x 40 x 3,5 black 1474 x 1216 mm.
JSM YN40W11
40-040-29
Welded steel mesh 40 x 40 x 3.5 black 1074 x 1216 mm.
JSM YN40W9
40-040-16
Welded steel mesh 40 x 40 x 3,5 black per square metre.
JSM PL2_
3
1
2
1
2
12:48
www.jokabsafety.com
1
JSM YN40WE1
40-040-25
Welded steel mesh 40 x 40 x 3,5 rostfritt (SS 2333)
2020 x 864 mm.
JSM YN40WE2
40-040-18
Welded steel mesh 40 x 40 x 3,5 rostfritt (SS 2333)
1074 x 1816 mm.
JSM YN40WE9
40-040-19
Welded steel mesh 40 x 40 x 3,5 rostfritt per square metre.
JSM YPC5A1
40-039-10
5 mm clear polycarbonate panel, 2020 x 864 mm.
JSM YPC5A2
40-039-11
5 mm clear polycarbonate panel, 2020 x 1174 mm.
JSM YPC5A3
40-039-17
5 mm clear polycarbonate panel, 1076 x 1816 mm.
JSM YPC5A4
40-039-18
5 mm clear polycarbonate panel, 1076 x 2016 mm.
JSM YPC5A5
40-039-19
5 mm clear polycarbonate panel, 960 x 1698 mm.
JSM YPC5A9
40-039-12
5 mm clear polycarbonate panel, per square metre.
JSM YPC4A1
40-039-14
4 mm clear polycarbonate panel, 2020 x 865 mm.
JSM YPC4A2
40-039-15
4 mm clear polycarbonate panel, 2020 x 1175 mm.
JSM YPC4A9
40-039-16
4 mm clear polycarbonate panel, per square metre.
2
3
4
5
JSM YPC3AC1
40-039-25
3 mm dark tinted polycarbonate weld-protected panel,
2050 x 3000.
JSM YPC3AC9
40-039-24
3 mm dark tinted polycarbonate weld-protected panel, per
square metre.
JSM YGP1A9
40-039-07
1.0 mm cross-bent galvanized panel.
JSM YGP2A9
40-039-09
1.5 mm cross-bent galvanized panel.
JSM YG6A9
42-150-06
Laminated glass 6.4 mm.
JSM YHG5A9
40-039-03
Toughened glass 5.0 mm.
6
7
8
9
JSM YLA25A1
40-039-26
Sound-absorbing panel 25 mm smooth (white polyester)/
perforated (galvanized), 1963 x 1200 mm.
JSM YLA25A9
40-037-11
Sound-absorbing panel 25 mm smooth (white polyester)/
perforated (galvanized), per metre.
JSM YLA50A9
42-150-23
Sound-absorbing panel 50 mm smooth (white polyester)/
perforated (galvanized), per metre.
JSM M4B
40-035-07
Captive nut, M4 galvanized.
JSM M5B
40-035-04
Captive nut, M5 galvanized.
JSM M6B
40-035-05
Captive nut, M6 galvanized.
10
Accessories
www.jokabsafety.com
11
12
12:49
13
12:50
JSM M8B
40-035-06
Captive nut, M8 galvanized.
JSM B4C
40-035-50
Centring washer M4 galvanized steel.
JSM B5C
40-035-51
Centring washer M5 galvanized steel.
JSM B6C
40-035-52
Centring washer M6 galvanized steel.
JSM B8C
40-035-53
Centring washer M8 galvanized steel.
JSM S8D
41-014-01
Screw MC6S 8.8 M8 x 16 galvanized.
JSM S8C
41-014-02
Screw MC6S 8.8 M8 x 20 galvanized.
JSM S8A
41-019-00
Screw MC6S 10.9 M8 x 16 Dacrolite.
JSM S8E
41-019-01
K6S 10,9 M8 x 12 galvanized (for JSM A56).
JSM S5B
41-039-01
Screw MRX-Z M5 x 12 galvanized.
JSM S6A
41-039-02
Screw MKFX-Z M6 x 12 galvanized.
JSM X1
40-033-43
Cable clamp, white nylon, including screw and box of 10.
JSM X2
41-900-43
M10 x 68 expansion bolt, galvanized.
JSM X3
41-910-00
Polishing and anti-static compound for polycarbonate. 0,5 l.
JSM X4
41-911-01
Bolt croppers.
www.jokabsafety.com
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
12:51
13
12:52
www.jokabsafety.com
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
12:53
13
Confirmation of compliance - Safety relays, switches, control devices, light beams/light curtains
Other language versions may be obtained on request.
EC Declaration of conformity
Försäkran om överensstämmelse
Vi
JOKAB SAFETY AB
Boplatsgatan 3
S-213 76 Malmö
försäkrar att produkterna av fabrikat JOKAB SAFETY med nedanstående
typbeteckningar och funktioner, är i överensstämmelse med bestämmelserna i
föreskrifterna
AFS 1994:48 (98/37/EG),
ELSÄK-FS 2000:1 (73/23/EEG, 93/68/EEG)/(2006/95/EG)
ELSÄK-FS 2003:2 (89/336/EEG, 92/31/EEG, 93/68/EEG)/ELSÄK-FS2007:1
(2004/108/EG)
Certifikat/Anmält organ
Produkt
Certifikat/Anmält organ
Pulsrelä
Produkt
Säkerhetsreläer för
generell användning
JSBR3
06-SKM-CM-0124, NB0409
JSA2
JSBR4
06-SKM-CM-0516, NB0409
Trelägesdon
JSBT3
08-SKM-CM-0108, NB0409
JSHD4
06-SKM-CM-0130, NB409
JSBT4
08-SKM-CM-0109, NB0409
Ljusbommar/Ljusridåer
JSBT5(T),
06-SKM-CM-0127, NB0409
Focus, F2/4-14/35-xxx
TÜV Z10 03 05 49833 003), NB0123
BT50 (T), BT51(T)
08-SKM-CM-0144, NB0409
Focus, F2/4-Kxx-xxx
TÜV Z10 03 04 49833 002, NB0123
RT6
06-SKM-CM-0146, NB0409
Nyckelbrytare
RT7
08-SKM-CM-0110, NB0409
JSNY5
RT9
06-SKM-CM-0145, NB0409
JSNY7R/M
06-SKM-CM-0132, NB409
JSBRT8
06-SKM-CM-0123, NB0409
JSNY8
JSBRT11
08-SKM-CM-0105, NB0409
JSNY9
ET 04224, NB0340
JSE1, JSS1, JSG1
Tvåhandsdon
JSTD1, JSTD25
01-MAL-CM-0109, NB409
Expansionsrelä
JSR1T
06-SKM-CM-0126, NB409
JSTD20
01-MAL-CM-0101, NB409
JSR2A
08-SKM-CM-0106, NB409
Linnödstopp
JSR3T
08-SKM-CM-0107, NB409
JSNY10
E1T
06-SKM-CM-0143, NB409
Fotmanöverdon
Fox
Säkerhetstimer
JSHT1A/B
06-SKM-CM-0128, NB409
JSHT2A/B/C
06-SKM-CM-0129, NB409
Tillämpade harmoniserade
EN 292-1,-2/EN ISO 12100-1,-2, EN 418/EN ISO 13850
standarder
EN 954-1, EN 574, EN 1760-1, EN 1088, EN 61496-1, EN 60204-1,
EN 50081-2/EN 61000-6-4, EN 50082-2/EN 61000-6-2
Torgny Olsson
Malmö 2008-05-05
Mats Linger
Kungsbacka 2008-05-05
We
JOKAB SAFETY AB
Boplatsgatan 3
S-213 76 Malmö
Sweden
declare that the safety components of JOKAB SAFETY make with type designations and
safety functions as listed below, is in conformity with the Directives
98/37/EC,
73/23/EEC, 93/68/EEG/(2006/95/EC)
89/336/EEC, 92/31/EEC, 93/68/EEC/ (2004/108/EC)
Certificate/Notified Body
Product
Certificate/Notified Body
Pulse relay
Product
Safety relay for
genaral use
JSBR3
JSBR4
JSBT3
JSBT4
06-SKM-CM-0124, NB0409
06-SKM-CM-0516, NB0409
08-SKM-CM-0108, NB0409
08-SKM-CM-0109, NB0409
JSBT5(T),
BT50 (T), BT51(T)
RT6
06-SKM-CM-0127, NB0409
08-SKM-CM-0144, NB0409
06-SKM-CM-0146, NB0409
RT7
RT9
JSBRT8
JSBRT11
JSE1, JSS1, JSG1
Expansion relays
JSR1T
JSR2A
08-SKM-CM-0110, NB0409
06-SKM-CM-0145, NB0409
06-SKM-CM-0123, NB0409
08-SKM-CM-0105, NB0409
JSR3T
E1T
Safety timer-relay
JSHT1A/B
JSHT2A/B/C
Applicable harmonized
standards
06-SKM-CM-0126, NB409
08-SKM-CM-0106, NB409
08-SKM-CM-0107, NB409
06-SKM-CM-0143, NB409
JOKAB SAFETY AB
Boplatsgatan 3
S-213 76 Malmö
Schweden
Produkt
Sicherheitsrelais für
algemeine
Anwendungen
JSBR3
JSBR4
JSBT3
JSBT4
Torgny Olsson
Malmö 2008-05-05
JSBT5(T),
BT50 (T), BT51(T)
RT6
RT7
RT9
JSBRT8
JSBRT11
JSE1, JSS1, JSG1
Expansionsrelais
JSR1T
JSR2A
JSR3T
E1T
Sicherheits
”zeitrelais”
JSHT1A/B
JSHT2A/B/C
Harmonisierte Normen
Torgny Olsson
Malmö 2008-05-05
13:0
erklären, daß nachfolgend aufgeführte Gerätetypen des Herstellers JOKAB SAFETY
den Anforderungen der aktuellen Richtlinien
98/37/EG,
73/23/EEG, 93/68/EEG/(2006/95/EG)
89/336/EEG, 92/31/EEG, 93/68/EEG/ (2004/108/EG) entsprechen
Zertifikat/Gemeldete Stelle
Produkt
Pulsrelais
06-SKM-CM-0124, NB0409
06-SKM-CM-0516, NB0409
08-SKM-CM-0108, NB0409
08-SKM-CM-0109, NB0409
JSA2
Zustimmungsschalter
JSHD4
Lichtschranke Lichtvorhang
Focus, F2/4-14/35-xxx
Focus, F2/4-Kxx-xxx
Sicherheitsschalter
JSNY5
JSNY7R/M
JSNY8
JSNY9
Zweihandsteuerung
JSTD1, JSTD25
JSTD20
Seilzugschalter
JSNY10
Fußschalter
Fox
06-SKM-CM-0127, NB0409
08-SKM-CM-0144, NB0409
06-SKM-CM-0146, NB0409
08-SKM-CM-0110, NB0409
06-SKM-CM-0145, NB0409
06-SKM-CM-0123, NB0409
08-SKM-CM-0105, NB0409
06-SKM-CM-0126, NB409
08-SKM-CM-0106, NB409
08-SKM-CM-0107, NB409
06-SKM-CM-0143, NB409
06-SKM-CM-0130, NB409
TÜV Z10 03 05 49833 003), NB0123
TÜV Z10 03 04 49833 002, NB0123
06-SKM-CM-0132, NB409
ET 04224, NB0340
01-MAL-CM-0109, NB409
01-MAL-CM-0101, NB409
06-SKM-CM-0128, NB409
06-SKM-CM-0129, NB409
EN 292-1,-2/EN ISO 12100-1,-2, EN 418/EN ISO 13850
EN 954-1, EN 574, EN 1760-1, EN 1088, EN 61496-1, EN 60204-1,
EN 50081-2/EN 61000-6-4, EN 50082-2/EN 61000-6-2
EG-Konformitätserklärung
Wir
JSA2
Three position device
JSHD4
Light beam/Light
curtain
Focus, F2/4-14/35-xxx
Focus, F2/4-Kxx-xxx
Safety interlocking
switches
JSNY5
JSNY7R/M
JSNY8
JSNY9
Two hand device
JSTD1, JSTD25
JSTD20
Emergency stop wire
switch
JSNY10
Three position pedal
Fox
Zertifikat /Gemeldete Stelle
06-SKM-CM-0130, NB409
TÜV Z10 03 05 49833 003), NB0123
TÜV Z10 03 04 49833 002, NB0123
06-SKM-CM-0132, NB409
ET 04224, NB0340
01-MAL-CM-0109, NB409
01-MAL-CM-0101, NB409
06-SKM-CM-0128, NB409
06-SKM-CM-0129, NB409
EN 292-1,-2/EN ISO 12100-1,-2, EN 418/EN ISO 13850
EN 954-1, EN 574, EN 1760-1, EN 1088, EN 61496-1, EN 60204-1,
EN 50081-2/EN 61000-6-4, EN 50082-2/EN 61000-6-2
Mats Linger
Kungsbacka 2008-05-05
www.jokabsafety.com
Mats Linger
Kungsbacka 2008-05-05
1
Confirmation of compliance - door sensitive edges, bumpers
Other language versions may be obtained on request.
EC Declaration of conformity
Försäkran om överensstämmelse
We
declare that the safety components of JOKAB
SAFETY manufacture, with type designations and
safety functions as listed below, are in conformity
with the Directives
98/37/EC
2006/95/EC
2004/108/EC
JOKAB SAFETY
AB
Boplatsgatan 3
S-213 76 Malmö
Sweden
Produkt
försäkrar att produkterna av fabrikat JOKAB SAFETY
med nedanstående typbeteckningar och funktioner, är i
överensstämmelse med bestämmelserna i
föreskrifterna
AFS 1994:48 (98/37/EG),
ELSÄK-FS 2000:1 (2006/95/EG)
ELSÄK-FS 2007:1 (2004/108/EG)
Typbeteckning
Klämlist
GP 25-25, GP25-40
Contact rail
GP 25-25, GP25-40
Bumper
ASB Y x X
Bumper
ASB Y x X
tillsammans med vald
säkerhetsmodul
Säkerhetsreläer
RT6, RT7A, RT7B, RT9, RT10
Together with safety
module
Safety relays
RT6, RT7A, RT7B, RT9, RT10
Säkerhetsmodul och
Anpassningsenhet
Säkerhets-PLC
Vital 1 inklusive
Tina 6A
Pluto
Safety module and
adapter unit
Säkerhets-PLC
Vi
JOKAB SAFETY AB
Boplatsgatan 3
S-213 76 Malmö
Tillämpade harmoniserade
standarder
EN ISO 12100-1,-2, EN 954-1, EN 1760-2,
EN 1760-3, EN 61000-6-4, EN 61000-6-2,
EN 60204-1
Anmält organ enligt nedan har fått tillsänt teknisk dokumentation enligt AFS 1994:48,
Bilaga 6, för förvaring.
SP Sveriges Provnings- och Forskningsinstitut
Box 857
501 15 Borås
ID-nr NB 0402
Product
2
Type
3
Vital 1 inclusive Tina 6A
Pluto
Applicable harmonized
standards
EN ISO 12100-1,-2, EN 954-1, EN 1760-2,
EN 1760-3, EN 61000-6-4, EN 61000-6-2,
EN 60204-1
The technical documentation according to 98/37/EC, Annex VI, has been sent to the
following Notified Body
SP Technical Research Institute of Sweden
Box 857
501 15 Borås
Sweden
ID-nr NB 0402
4
5
Torgny Olsson
Malmö 2008-05-05
Mats Linger, VD
Kungsbacka 2008-05-05
Torgny Olsson
Malmö 2008-05-05
Mats Linger
Kungsbacka 2008-05-05
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
13:1
13
Confirmation of compliance- fencing
Other language versions may be obtained on request.
Confirmation of compliance- safety mats
Other language versions may be obtained on request.
EC Declaration of conformity
Försäkran om överensstämmelse
We
Vi
JOKAB SAFETY AB
Boplatsgatan 3
S-213 76 Malmö
försäkrar att produkterna av fabrikat JOKAB SAFETY
med nedanstående typbeteckningar och funktioner,
är i överensstämmelse med bestämmelserna i
föreskrifterna
AFS 1994:48 (98/37/EG),
ELSÄK-FS 2000:1 (73/23/EEG, 93/68/EEG)
ELSÄK-FS 2003:2 (89/336/EG, 92/32/EEG,
93/68/EEG)
Produkt
Typbeteckning
Kontaktmatta
ASK-P-RF
JOKAB SAFETY AB
Boplatsgatan 3
S-213 76 Malmö
Sweden
Product
Safety mat
declare that the safety components of JOKAB
SAFETY manufacture, with type designations and
safety functions as listed below, are in conformity
with the Directives
98/37/EG,
73/23/EEG, 93/68/EEG,
89/336/EEG, 92/31/EEG, 93/68/EEG
Type
ASK-P-RF
Together with safety relays
Safety relays
tillsammans med säkerhetsrelä
Säkerhetsreläer RT6, RT7A, RT7B, RT9
Tillämpade harmoniserade
EN ISO 12100-1,-2, EN 954-1,
standarder
EN 1760-1, EN 61000-6-4, EN 61000-6-2
Anmält organ enligt nedan har fått tillsänt teknisk dokumentation enligt AFS
1994:48, Bilaga 6, för förvaring.
SP Sveriges Provnings- och Forskningsinstitut
Box 857
501 15 Borås
ID-nr NB 0402
RT6, RT7A, RT7B, RT9
Appliacable harmonized
EN ISO 12100-1,-2, EN 954-1, EN 1760-1,
standards
EN 61000-6-4, EN 61000-6-2
The technical documentation according to 98/37/EC, Annex VI, has been sent to the
following Notified Body
SP, Technical Research Institute of Sweden
Box 857
501 15 Borås
Sweden
ID-nr NB 0402
Torgny Olsson
Malmö 2006-10-10
13:2
Mats Linger
Kungsbacka 2006-10-10
Torgny Olsson
Malmö 2006-10-10
www.jokabsafety.com
Mats Linger
Kungsbacka 2006-10-10
1
Confirmation of compliance- the Vital concept
Other language versions may be obtained on request.
2
Försäkran om överensstämmelse
Vi
JOKAB SAFETY AB
Boplatsgatan 3
S-213 76 Malmö
Produkt
Vital1
Eden (Adam , Eva)
Tina 1-8
Tina Duo 1, Tina Duo 2,
Tina 8B Profibus
Spot 10, 35
Tillämpade harmoniserade
standarder
Torgny Olsson
Malmö 2008-05-05
försäkrar att produkterna av fabrikat JOKAB SAFETY med
nedanstående typbeteckningar och funktioner, är i
överensstämmelse med bestämmelserna i föreskrifterna
AFS 1994:48 (98/37/EG),
ELSÄK-FS 2000:1 (2006/95/EG)
ELSÄK-FS 2007:1 (2004/108/EG)
Certifikat/Anmält organ
06-SKM-CM-0134, NB409
06-SKM-CM-0131, NB409
06-SKM-CM-0134, NB409
05-SKM-CM-0138, NB409
06-SKM-CM-0517, NB409
EN ISO 12100-1,-2, EN ISO 13850
EN 954-1, EN 574, EN 1760-1, -2, -3, EN 1088,
EN 61496-1, -2, EN 60204-1, EN 61000-6-4, EN 61000-6-2
EC declaration of conformity
We
JOKAB SAFETY AB
Boplatsgatan 3
S-213 76 Malmö
Sweden
Product
Vital1
Eden (Adam , Eva)
Tina 1-8
Tina Duo 1, Tina Duo 2,
Tina 8B Profibus
Spot 10, 35
Applicable harmonized
standards
Certificate/Notified Body
06-SKM-CM-0134, NB409
06-SKM-CM-0131, NB409
06-SKM-CM-0134, NB409
05-SKM-CM-0138, NB409
06-SKM-CM-0517, NB409
EN ISO 12100-1,-2, EN ISO 13850, EN 954-1, EN 574,
EN 1760-1, -2, -3, EN 1088, EN 61496-1, -2,
EN 60204-1, EN 61000-6-4, EN 61000-6-2
Torgny Olsson
Malmö 2008-05-05
Mats Linger
Kungsbacka 2008-05-05
declare that the safety components of JOKAB SAFETY manufacture,
with type designations and safety functions as listed below, are in
conformity with the Directives
98/37/EG
2006/95/EG
2004/108/EG
3
4
Mats Linger
Kungsbacka 2008-05-05
5
6
EG-Konformitätserklärung
Wir
JOKAB SAFETY AB
Boplatsgatan 3
S-213 76 Malmö
Schweden
Produkt
Vital1
Eden (Adam , Eva)
Tina 1-8
Tina Duo 1, Tina Duo 2,
Tina 8B Profibus
Spot 10, 35
Harmonisierte Normen
DÉCLARATION DE CONFORMITÉ CE
erklären, dass nachfolgend aufgeführte Gerätetypen des
Herstellers JOKAB SAFETY den Anforderungen der aktuellen
Richtlinien
98/37/EG
2006/95/EG
2004/108/EG
Nous
Zertifikat/Gemeldete Stelle
06-SKM-CM-0134, NB409
06-SKM-CM-0131, NB409
06-SKM-CM-0134, NB409
05-SKM-CM-0138, NB409
Produit
Vital1
Eden (Adam , Eva)
Tina 1-8
Tina Duo 1, Tina Duo 2,
Tina 8B Profibus
Spot 10, 35
06-SKM-CM-0517, NB409
EN ISO 12100-1,-2, EN ISO 13850, N 954-1, EN 574,
EN 1760-1, -2, -3, EN 1088, EN 61496-1, -2,
EN 60204-1, EN 61000-6-4, EN 61000-6-2
JOKAB SAFETY AB
Boplatsgatan 3
S-213 76 Malmö
Suède
Normes harmonisées
applicables
déclarons que les composants de sécurité de la marque JOKAB
SAFETY, de types et fonctions de sécurité listées ci-dessous, sont
conformes aux Directives
98/37/CE
2006/95/CE
2004/108/CE
Certificat/Organisme notifié
06-SKM-CM-0134, NB409
06-SKM-CM-0131, NB409
06-SKM-CM-0134, NB409
05-SKM-CM-0138, NB409
7
8
06-SKM-CM-0517, NB409
EN ISO 12100-1,-2, EN ISO 13850
EN 954-1, EN 574, EN 1760-1, -2, -3, EN 1088, EN 61496-1, -2,
EN 60204-1, EN 61000-6-4, EN 61000-6-2
9
Torgny Olsson
Malmö 2008-05-05
Mats Linger
Kungsbacka 2008-05-05
Torgny Olsson
Malmö 05/05/2008
Mats Linger
Kungsbacka 05/05/2008
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
13:3
13
Confirmation of compliance - Pluto safety PLC
Other language versions may be obtained on request.
Försäkran om överensstämmelse
EC declaration of conformity
Vi JOKAB SAFETY AB försäkrar att säkerhetskomponenterna av fabrikat JOKAB
SAFETY med nedanstående typbeteckningar och
Boplatsgatan 3
funktioner, är i överensstämmelse med bestämmelserna i
S-213 76 Malmö
föreskrift
AFS 1994:48 (98/37/EEG),
ELSÄK-FS 2007:1 (2004/108/EC)
ELSÄK-FS 2000:1 (2006/95/EC)
Programmerbart elektroniskt säkerhetssystem (Säkerhets-PLC) Pluto version
A20, B20, B16, S19, S20, B46-6, S46-6, AS-i
declare that the safety components of JOKAB
SAFETY manufacture, with type designations and
safety functions as listed below, are in conformity with
the Directives
98/37/EEC,
2004/108/EC
2006/95/EC
Programmable electronic safety system (Safety PLC system) Pluto version A20, B20,
B16, S19, S20, B46-6, S46-6, AS-i
We
JOKAB SAFETY AB
Boplatsgatan 3
S-213 76 Malmö
Sweden
Applicable
harmonized
standards
EN ISO 13849-1:2006/EN 954-1:1996,
EN ISO 13849-2:2003, EN 62061:2005,
EN 61496-1:2004, EN 574:1996, EN 692:2005,
EN 60204-1:1997, EN 50178:1997
EN 61000-6-2:1999, EN 61000-6-4:2007,
EN 61000-4-
Other applicable
standards and
documents
IEC/EN 61508
DIN V VDE 0801:1990 with amendment A1:1994
Tillämpade
harmoniserade
standarder
EN ISO 13849-1:2006/EN 954-1:1996,
EN ISO 13849-2:2003 ,EN 62061:2005,
EN 61496-1:2004, EN 574:1996, EN 692:2005, EN 602041:1997, EN 50178:1997,
EN 61000-6-2:1999, EN 61000-6-4:2007,
EN 61000-4-
Övriga standarder
IEC/EN 61508
DIN V VDE 0801:1990 med tillägg A1:1994,
EG-Typkontroll
TÜV-Rheinland, Anmält organ nr. 0197
EC Type-Examination TÜV-Rheinland, Notified body No. 0197
Certifikat nummer
BB 60020181 0001
Certificate no
Mats Linger
Kungsbacka 2007-11-15
Mats Linger
Kungsbacka 2007-11-15
Torgny Olsson
Malmö 2007-11-15
DÉCLARATION DE CONFORMITÉ CE
JOKAB SAFETY AB
Boplatsgatan 3
S-213 76 Malmö
Suède
Normes
harmonisées
aplicables
Autres normes et
documents
applicables
EN ISO 13849-1:2006/EN 954-1:1996,
EN ISO 13849-2:2003, EN 62061:2005
EN 61496-1:2004, EN 574:1996, EN 692:2005
EN 60204-1:1997, EN 50178:1997
EN 61000-6-2:1999, EN 61000-6-4:2007
EN 61000-4IEC/EN 61508
DIN V VDE 0801:1990 et supplément A1:1994
Examen de type
CE
TÜV-Rheinland, organisme notifié n°. 0197
n° de certificat
BB 60020181 0001
Mats Linger
Kungsbacka 2007-11-15
13:4
Torgny Olsson
Malmö 2007-11-15
Torgny Olsson
Malmö 2007-11-15
EG-Konformitätserklärung
déclarons que les composants de sécurité de la
marque JOKAB SAFETY, de types et fonctions de
sécurité listées ci-dessous, sont conformes aux
Directives
98/37/EEC,
2004/108/EC
2006/95/EC
Système de sécurité électronique programmable (automate programmable industriel
dédié sécurité) Pluto, versions
A20, B20, B16, S19, S20, B46-6, S46-6, AS-i
Nous
BB 60020181 0001
Wir
JOKAB SAFETY AB
Boplatsgatan 3
S-213 76 Malmö
Schweden
erklären, dass nachfolgend aufgeführte Gerätetypen
des Herstellers JOKAB SAFETY den
Anforderungen der aktuellen Richtlinien
98/37/EEG,
2004/108/EG
2006/95/EG
Programmierbare Sicherheitssteuerung (Sicherheits-SPS) Pluto version
A20, B20, B16, S19, S20, B46-6, S46-6, AS-i
Angewandte
harmonisierte
Normen
Andere Normen
EN ISO 13849-1:2006/EN 954-1:1996,
EN ISO 13849-2:2003, EN 62061:2005
EN 61496-1:2004, EN 574:1996, EN 692:2005
EN 60204-1:1997, EN 50178:1997
EN 61000-6-2:1999, EN 61000-6-4:2007
EN 61000-4IEC/EN 61508
DIN V VDE 0801:1990 und Änderung A1:1994
EGBaumusterprüfung:
TÜV-Rheinland, gemeldete Stelle Nr. 0197
Nummer der
Bescheinigung
BB 60020181 0001
Mats Linger
Kungsbacka 2007-11-15
www.jokabsafety.com
Torgny Olsson
Malmö 2007-11-15
1
EG-verklaring van overeenstemming
Declaração de Conformiddae EC
Nós JOKAB SAFETY AB
Boplatsgatan 3
S-213 76 Malmö
Sweden
declaramos que os componentes produzidos pela JOKAB
SAFETY, com as designações e funções de segurança
abaixo indicadas, estão em conformidade com as
98/37/EEC,
2004/108/EC
2006/95/EC
Sistema de segurança electrónico programável (Safety PLC system) Pluto versão
A20, B20, B16, S19, S20, B46-6, S46-6, AS-i
Wij
JOKAB SAFETY AB
Boplatsgatan 3
S-213 76 Malmö
Sweden
verklaren, dat ondergenoemde veiligheidscomponenten,
geproduceerd door JOKAB SAFETY, voldoen aan de
eisen zoals gesteld in de actuele richtlijnen
98/37/EEC,
2004/108/EC
2006/95/EC
EN ISO 13849-1:2006/EN 954-1:1996,
EN ISO 13849-2:2003, EN 62061:2005
EN 61496-1:2004, EN 574:1996, EN 692:2005
EN 60204-1:1997, EN 50178:1997
EN 61000-6-2:1999, EN 61000-6-4:2007
EN 61000-4-
Toegepaste
geharmoniseerde
normen:
EN ISO 13849-1:2006/EN 954-1:1996,
EN ISO 13849-2:2003 EN 62061:2005
EN 61496-1:2004, EN 574:1996, EN 692:2005
EN 60204-1:1997, EN 50178:1997
EN 61000-6-2:1999, EN 61000-6-4:2007
EN 61000-4-
Outras aplicações e
documentos standard
IEC/EN 61508
DIN V VDE 0801:1990 e correcções A1:1994
Andere normen
IEC/EN 61508:2000 deel 1 t/m 7
DIN V VDE 0801:1990 en wijzigingen A1:1994,
Tipo de exame EC
TÜV-Rheinland, Notified body No. 0197
EG-Type-onderzoek
TÜV-Rheinland, aangemelde instantie nr. 0197
Certificado no
BB 60020181 0001
Certificaat nummer
BB 60020181 0001
Mats Linger
Kungsbacka 2007-11-15
Torgny Olsson
Malmö 2007-11-15
3
Programmeerbare veiligheidsbesturing (Veiligheids-PLC) Pluto versies
A20, B20, B16, S19, S20, B46-6, S46-6, AS-i
Aplicações standard:
Mats Linger
Kungsbacka 2007-11-15
2
4
5
Torgny Olsson
Malmö 2007-11-15
6
ES-IZJAVA O SKLADNOSTI
EC dichiarazione di conformità
La
sottoscritta
JOKAB SAFETY AB
Boplatsgatan 3
S-213 76 Malmö
Sweden
Dichiara che i componenti di sicurezza prodotti da
JOKAB SAFETY identificati e svolgenti le funzioni di
sicurezza di cui sotto, sono prodotti in conformità
alle Direttive
98/37/CEE,
2004/108/CE
2006/95/CE
EN ISO 13849-1:2006/EN 954-1:1996,
EN ISO 13849-2:2003, EN 62061:2005,
EN 61496-1:2004, EN 574:1996, EN 692:2005, EN 602041:1997, EN 50178:1997,
EN 61000-6-2:1999, EN 61000-6-4:2007,
EN 61000-4-
Altri Standard e
IEC/EN 61508
documenti applicabili
DIN V VDE 0801:1990 e revisione A1:1994
Ente esaminatore EC
TÜV-Rheinland, registrato al No. 0197
Certificato n.
BB 60020181 0001
Mats Linger
Kungsbacka 2007-11-15
Torgny Olsson
Malmö 2007-11-15
JOKAB SAFETY AB
Boplatsgatan 3
S-213 76 Malmö
Sweden
zagotavljamo in potrdimo da varnostne komponente znamke
JOKAB SAFETY spodaj navedenega tipa oznake in
varnostne funkcije, so v skladu
dolocenih direktiv
98/37/EEC,
2004/108/EC
2006/95/EC
7
Programljiv elektronski varnostni sistem (Varnostni PLC sistem) Pluto razli čica
A20, B20, B16, S19, S20, B46-6, S46-6, AS-i
Sistemi programmabili di sicurezza (PLC di sicurezza) Pluto versioni
A20, B20, B16, S19, S20, B46-6, S46-6, AS-i
Standards
armonizzati
applicabili
Mi
Veljavni
harmonizirani
standardi
EN ISO 13849-1:2006/EN 954-1:1996,
EN ISO 13849-2:2003, EN 62061:2005,
EN 61496-1:2004, EN 574:1996, EN 692:2005, EN 602041:1997, EN 50178:1997,
EN 61000-6-2:1999, EN 61000-6-4:2007,
EN 61000-4-
Drugi veljavni
standardi in
dokumenti
IEC/EN 61508
DIN V VDE 0801:1990/A1:1994
ES-Preskus tipa
TÜV-Rheinland, Priglašen organ st. 0197
Certifikat število
BB 60020181 0001
Mats Linger
Kungsbacka 2007-11-15
8
9
Torgny Olsson
Malmö 2007-11-15
10
11
12
www.jokabsafety.com
13:5
13
Confirmation of compliance- Smart stop timer
Other language versions may be obtained on request.
13:6
www.jokabsafety.com
Sweden
Kungsbacka
Jokab Safety AB
Varlabergsvägen 11
SE - 434 39 Kungsbacka
Tel: +46 (0) 300-67 59 00
Fax: +46 (0) 300-67 59 01
E-mail: [email protected]
Malmö
Jokab Safety AB
Boplatsgatan 3
SE - 213 76 Malmö
Tel: +46 (0) 40-67 15 600
Fax: +46 (0) 40-67 15 601
E-mail: [email protected]
Jönköping
Jokab Safety AB
Mekanikervägen 6
SE - 564 35 Bankeryd
Tel: +46 (0) 36-37 04 60
Fax: +46 (0) 36-37 04 69
E-mail: [email protected]
Stockholm
Jokab Safety AB
Kanalvägen 17
SE - 183 30 Täby
Tel: +46 (0) 8-544 707 40
Fax: +46 (0) 8-544 707 49
E-mail: [email protected]
Västerås
Jokab Safety AB
Fältmätargatan 16
SE - 721 35 Västerås
Tel: +46 (0) 21-81 44 30
Fax: +46 (0) 21-81 44 39
E-mail: [email protected]
Global sales
Australia
Finland
Korea
Slovenia
Sensorplex Pty Ltd
Unit B3/2A Hallmarc Business Park
Cnr Westall & Centre Roads
Clayton Vic 3168
Tel: +61 (03) 9562 6699
Fax: +61 (03) 8080 5988
E-mail: [email protected]
web: www.sensorplex.com/jokab.htm
Juha-Elektro OY
Kylvöpolku 6,
P.O. Box 57
FI-00641 Helsinki
Tel: +358 (0) 10 8328 100
Fax: +358 (0) 10 8328 109
E-mail: [email protected]
Web: www.juha-elektro.fi
Hanlim Auto Co., Ltd.
Room 1124 & 1125, OPUS 1 B/D,
#611-26 Gurobon-Dong, Guro-Gu,
SEOUL
Tel: 82-2-2639-8567/8
Fax: 82-2-2639-8778
E-mail: [email protected]
Web: www.jokabsafety.co.kr
Kolektor Synatec D.O.O.
Vojkova ulica 8b
5280 Idrija, Slovenia
Tel: +386 5 37 20 677
Fax: + 386 5 37 20 660
E-mail: [email protected]
Web: www.kolektorsynatec.si
Austria
France
Netherlands
Contra GmbH
Autokaderstr. 104
A-1210 Wien
Tel: +43 (0)1 278 25 55
Fax: +43 (0)1 278 25 58
E-mail: [email protected]
Web: www.contra.at
Jokab Safety France SAS
30, rue Godot de Mauroy
75009 Paris
Tel: +33 810 08 36 20
Fax: +33 810 40 91 14
E-mail:
[email protected]
Web: www.jokabsafety.com
Isolectra B.V.
Rivium Boulevard 101
NL-2909 LK Capelle aan den IJssel
Tel: +31 (0) 10 28 55 285
Fax: +31 (0) 10 28 55 400
E-mail: [email protected]
Web: www.isolectra.nl
PK Welding Robotics
Unit 17, Eastend Prime Park
Montague Gardens, Milnerton 7441
Cape Town
Tel: +27 21 552 5249
Fax: +27 21 552 5349
E-mail: [email protected]
Germany
Automasjon og Sikkerhet
Skipperveien 16
NO-3150 Tolvsrød
Tel: +47 33 01 52 20
Fax: +47 33 01 52 04
E-mail: [email protected]
Web: www.jokabsafety.no
Belgium
Jokab Safety AB, Sweden
E-mail: [email protected]
Web: www.jokabsafety.com
Brazil
Jokab Safety Div. of ABG
Av. das Araucárias, 509 - Barigüi
CEP 83707-000 Araucária
(Curitiba) Paraná
Tel: +55 41 3643 1384
Fax: +55 41 3643 3628
E-mail: [email protected]
Web: www.abg.ind.br
Canada
NCC Electronics LTD.
7800 Twin Oaks Drive
Windsor, Ontario
Canada, N8N 5B6
Tel: +1 519 735 1106
Fax: +1 519 735 1299
E-mail: [email protected]
Web: www.jokabsafetyna.com
China
Jokab Safety China
2610/1701 Beijingxi RD
New Century Plaza
JingAn District
Shanghai 200 040
Tel: +86 21 613 242 77
Fax: +86 21 613 242 80
E-mail: [email protected]
Web: www.jokabsafety.com.cn
Czech Republic
Contra spol. S R.O.
Bohuslava Martinu 64
CZ-602 00 Brno
Tel: +420 5 43 210 046
Fax: +420 5 43 242 712
E-mail: [email protected]
Web: www.contra-brno.cz
Denmark
Jokab Safety DK A/S
Rugmarken 15
DK-3520 Farum
Tel: +45 44 34 14 54
Fax: +45 44 99 14 54
E-mail: [email protected]
Web: www.jokabsafety.dk
Jokab Safety (D) GMBH
Max-Planck-Straße 21
DE-78549 Spaichingen
Tel: +49 (0) 7424 95865 0
Fax: +49 (0) 7424 95865 99
E-mail: [email protected]
Web: www.jokabsafety.com
Jokab Safety (D) GMBH
Büro Günzburg
Ichenhauser Str. 36
D-89312 Günzburg
Tel. +49 (0) 8221 204313 0
Fax +49 (0) 8221 204313 99
E-mail: [email protected]
Web: www.jokabsafety.de
Debra GMBH (Cologne)
Bunzlauerstraße 2
DE-50858 Köln (Weiden)
Tel: +49 (0) 2234 78898
Fax: +49 (0) 2234 74071
E-mail: [email protected]
Web: www.debra-safety.de
Ireland
Pressure Hydraulics Ltd
Head Office
Unit 1/3
O’Brien Road
Carlow
Tel: +353 (0) 59 9143601
Fax: +353 (0) 59 9143731
E-mail:
[email protected]
Web: www.pressure-hydraulics.com
Italy
Jokab Safety Italia S.R.L
Via J.F. Kennedy, 19
IT-20059 Vimercate - fraz. Velasca MI
Tel: +39 039 6880134
Fax: +39 039 6085331
E-mail: [email protected]
Web: www.jokabsafety.com
Norway
Poland
Contra Sp. Z.O.O.
ul. Stawowa 71
43-400 Cieszyn
Polska
Tel: +48 33 857 53 44
Fax: +48 33 857 54 14
E-mail: [email protected]
Web: www.contra-polska.pl
Portugal
Prosistav Lda
Zona Industrial da Mota
Rua 7 lote 6 A
Gafanha da Encarnação
PT-3830-527 Ílhavo
Tel: +351 (0) 234 397 210
Fax: +351 (0) 234 181159
E-mail: [email protected]
Web: www.prosistav.pt
Singapore/Malaysia
Pics Technologies
Blk 3, Ang Mo Kio Pk 2A,
#05-06, Singapore (568 050)
Tel: +65 6744 8018
Tel: +65 6481 2894
Fax: +65 6744 1929
Fax: +65 6481 6869
E-mail: [email protected]
Slovakia
Lucob Spol S.R.O.
Obchodni Zastupce
Fialkove udolie 25
SK-811 01 Bratislava
Tel: +421 2 432 921 77
Fax: +421 2 544 124 33
E-mail: [email protected]
Web: www.lucob.sk
South Africa
Spain
Safework S.L.
C/ Bac de Roda n° 7
ES-08005 Barcelona
Tel: +34 93 308 07 38
Fax: +34 93 307 22 62
E-mail: [email protected]
Web: www.safework.es
Switzerland
Mattle Industrieprodukte AG
In der Mühle 5
CH-8340 Hinwil
Tel: +41 44 938 13 33
Fax: +41 44 938 13 34
E-mail: [email protected]
Web: www.mattle-ag.ch
Turkey
S-Mikron Elektronik Elektrik Sanayi
Taah. Ltd. Şti
Nilüfer Ticaret Merkezi 66. Sok. No:8
16110 Nilüfer – Bursa/turkey
Tel: +90224 443 52 33
Fax: +90224 443 52 42
Web: www.s-mikron.com.tr
United Kingdom
Jokab Safety (UK) Ltd
Unit G, Old Stratford Business Park
Falcon Drive
Old Stratford
Milton Keynes
Northamptonshire
MK19 6FG
Tel: +44 (0) 1908 261595
Fax: +44 (0) 1908 267100
E-mail: [email protected]
Web: www.jokabsafety.com
USA/Mexico
Jokab Safety North America
6471 Commerce Drive
Westland, Michigan
48185 U.S.A.
Tel: +1 734 595 6087
Fax: +1 734 467 7311
E-mail: [email protected]
For other countries see www.jokabsafety.com
The Safety handbook
Sweden
Kungsbacka +46 (0) 300 67 59 00
Malmö +46 (0) 40 67 15 600
Bankeryd +46 (0) 36 37 04 60
Stockholm +46 (0) 8 544 707 40
Västerås +46 (0) 21 81 44 30
Experience – Systems – Products
Global sales
Australia Sensorplex Pty Ltd +61 (03) 9562 6699
Austria Contra GmbH +43 (0)1 278 25 55
Belgium Jokab Safety AB, Sweden +46 (0) 300 67 59 00
Brazil Jokab Safety Div. of ABG +55 41 3643 1384
Canada NCC Electronics LTD. +1 519 735 1106
China Jokab Safety China +86 21 613 242 77
Czech Republic Contra spol. S R.O. +420 5 43 210 046
Denmark Jokab Safety DK A/S +45 44 34 14 54
France Jokab Safety France SAS +33 810 08 36 20
Germany
Jokab Safety (D) GMBH +49 (0) 7424 95865-0
Jokab Safety (D) GMBH Büro Günzburg +49 (0) 8221 204313 0
Debra GMBH (Cologne) +49 (0) 2234 78898
Ireland Pressure Hydraulics Ltd +353 (0) 59 9143601
Italy Jokab Safety Italia S.R.L +39 039 6880134
Korea Hanlim Auto Co., Ltd. +82 2 2639 8567/8
Netherlands Isolectra B.V. +31 (0) 10 28 55 285
Norway Automasjon og Sikkerhet +47 33 01 52 20
Poland Contra Sp. Z.O.O. +48 33 857 53 44
Portugal Prosistav Lda +351 (0) 234 397 210
Singapore/Malaysia Pics Technologies +65 6744 8018
Slovakia Lucob Spol S.R.O. +421 2 432 921 77
Slovenia Kolektor Synatec D.O.O. +386 5 37 20 677
The Safety handbook
Finland Juha-Elektro OY +358 (0) 10 8328 100
South Africa PK Welding+Robotics LTD +27 31 914 0990
Spain Safework S.L. +34 93 - 308 07 38
Switzerland Mattle Industrieprodukte AG +41 44 938 13 33
Turkey S-Mikron Elektronik Elektrik Sanayi
Taah. Ltd. Şti +90224 443 52 33
United Kingdom Jokab Safety (UK) Ltd +44 (0) 1908 261595
USA/Mexico Jokab Safety North America +1 734 595 6087
For other countries see www.jokabsafety.com
www.jokabsafety.com
Innovations in safety
Download
Related flashcards
Create Flashcards